| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080201458 | Method and apparatus for flexible access to storage facilities - A method and apparatus for providing flexible access to storage resources in a storage area network is provided. One aspect of the invention relates to managing hosts and storage resources on a storage area network. At least one logical relationship among the storage resources is associated with each of a plurality of virtual identifiers. At least one of the plurality of virtual identifiers is then associated to an interface of each of the hosts. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201459 | Method and system for managing computing resources using an electronic leasing agent - A method for managing computing resources involves obtaining, by an electronic leasing agent, a request to lease access to one or more computing resources, and leasing, by the electronic leasing agent, access to the computing resource(s) based on the request. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201460 | Distribution of Content - A content distribution system is described in which indicia defining a level of copyright control are encapsulated together with content to which it relates in a datagram for a delivery over a network. Depending on the level of copyright control defined by the indicia, a terminal receiving the content is restricted in the operations it can carry out on the content including saving, reading and forwarding the content. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201461 | CONTENTS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND CONTENTS MANAGEMENT METHOD - A system includes a contents management server that manages the locations of contents, a contents server that manages contents, a client terminal that receives or stores contents, and a network. The client terminal sends a contents sending request message to the contents management server. The contents management server, which has received the request from the client terminal, detects the network to which the client terminal belongs, instructs the contents server, which manages the network, to stream the contents. After that, the contents management server checks if there is a client terminal related to the client terminal that has sent the contents sending request. If there is a related client terminal, the contents management server instructs the contents server, which manages a network to which the related terminal belongs, to store the contents. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201462 | Distributed Network Management System and Method - A system and method for method of managing a network. Each of a plurality of servers includes an element management system (EMS) function for managing network elements within the network and a network management system (NMS) function for managing ones of the plurality of servers running the EMS function. An NMS function is activated on one of the servers when the plurality of servers shares a one network domain. When the network domain is divided into multiple domains, e.g. by a network failure, an NMS function is activated on at least one other one of the plurality of servers whereby each of the multiple network domains has at least one associated active NMS function. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201463 | Estimating Network Management Bandwidth - Network management bandwidth is estimated. Customer requirements are mapped to device type categories. Bandwidth requirements for each device type category are calculated using unit fault requirements and unit performance requirements that are derived from fault attributes and performance attributes, respectively. Overhead bandwidth, polling equipment bandwidth, and web portal bandwidth are also calculated using the customer requirements. A network management bandwidth requirement is calculated using the device type bandwidth requirements, the overhead bandwidth requirement, the polling equipment bandwidth, and the web portal bandwidth requirement. The network management bandwidth requirement is used to select a suitable communications link to monitor and manage a customer's network. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080209020 | DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT - A dynamic power management technique to optimize the performance to a pre-defined power or temperature limit. A computing system may comprise a performance management unit that may reconfigure the performance parameters, dynamically, based on the pre-defined power or temperature limit. Such an approach may provide performance enhancements as the power consumed by various components of the computing system may be reduced. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209021 | Synchronous delivery of media content in a collaborative environment - An apparatus and method for facilitating a synchronous display of a time-based media object (e.g., a video or audio file) with a remote device is provided. In one example, the apparatus comprises control logic for controlling the display of a media object in response to a user entered command with a first device, and communication logic for causing communication of the user entered command (e.g., play, pause, skip, etc.) and a metric (e.g., time or frame reference) associated with the media object to a second device for synchronizing the display of the media object with the first and second devices. The first and second devices may communicate via peer-to-peer communications, for example, in a collaborative or social application such as an IM application. Further, the apparatus may include various devices such as a personal computer, mobile phone device and/or mobile personal entertainment device, DVR, or the like. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209022 | Systems and methods for managing computer systems - A method of managing a plurality of computer systems is disclosed. The method includes using one or more scripts to provide a list of n computer system identifiers corresponding to n computer systems, wherein n is an integer greater than 1. The method further includes establishing concurrent management sessions between a base computer system and a plurality of the n computer systems, and determining whether the total number of established management sessions between the base computer system and the plurality of computer systems is greater than a threshold amount. If the total number of determined management sessions is greater than the threshold amount, the method additionally includes waiting for a predetermined period of time before attempting to establish any additional management sessions. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209023 | Method and apparatus for processing system management messages - Method and apparatus for processing system management messages are described herein. In one embodiment, a throttling policy associated with a network node is determined for throttling system management messages to be sent to a system management server over a network. The system management messages are then sent to the system management server according to the throttling policy, where the system management server is configured to manage multiple network nodes over the network. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209024 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING VISITORS TO A WEB SERVER - Different web pages on a web server are associated with different qualification profiles, each of which is assigned a value by the web-site proprietor. Traffic data hits at the web-site are analyzed to determine which web pages the visitor viewed on the web server. Each qualifying visitor is thereafter associated with a qualification profile and a corresponding value. In another aspect of the invention, visitors arriving as a result of an advertisement on a remote web-site are tracked. The web-site proprietor is consequently able to determine a return on advertising investment based on the value of visitors brought to the site by the tracked advertisement. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209025 | STORAGE SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND CONNECTION METHOD - The storage system in the present invention includes: plural control units for controlling data sending/reception independently for each network; a management unit provided between a management computer and the control units, for managing the control units based on a command sent from the management computer; a virtual communication channel creation unit for creating a virtual communication channel between the management unit and the control units; a virtual communication channel connection unit for separately connecting the management unit and each control unit to the virtual communication channel created by the virtual communication channel creation unit; and a sending unit for sending, to each control unit, a command sent from the management computer via the virtual communication channel connected by the virtual communication channel connection unit. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209026 | METHOD FOR ADAPTIVELY MODIFYING THE OBSERVED COLLECTIVE BEHAVIOR OF INDIVIDUAL SENSOR NODES BASED ON BROADCASTING OF PARAMETERS - A method for continually controlling the collective behavior of a set of computing devices in a distributed data processing system. A gateway node disseminates a specification request comprising a set of parameters to a set of computing devices. The gateway node may be unaware of the number and identity of individual computing devices. Each computing node receiving the request determines whether its attributes satisfy the predicates expressed in the specification request. If so, the node processes the parameters in the specification request and modifies its own behavior based on the values in the parameters of the specification request. Subsequently, the gateway node may also observe the quality of information (QoI) values communicated from the set of computing devices. The gateway node iteratively modifies the parameters disseminated in subsequent specification requests based on a divergence between a computed quality of information value and a desired quality of information value. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209027 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECORDING BEHAVIOR HISTORY FOR ABNORMALITY DETECTION - Disclosed is an autonomic abnormality detection device having a plurality of agents, a server with a one or more processors, a data storage device and a corrective actions engine. The device is adapted to detect and diagnose abnormalities in system components. Particularly, the device uses agents to track performance/workload measurements of system components and dynamically compiles a history of those performance/workload measurements for each component. In order to detect abnormalities a processor compares current performance/workload measurements for a component to the compiled histories for that component and for other components. The processor can further be adapted to determine possible causes of a detected abnormality and to report the abnormality, including the possible causes, to a corrective actions engine. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080215716 | DOMAIN NAME HIJACK PROTECTION - A domain name registering entity (such as a domain registry, registrar, or reseller) or an independent proxy registration service may offer a domain name hijack protection to their actual or potential customers. When a domain name transfer request or notice is received in a proxy email address listed in the domain name's WHOIS records, the domain name registering entity or the proxy registration service may ignore or decline it. Customers may be given an ability to turn the domain name hijack protection service on and off, as well as an ability to adjust a variety of settings associated with the service. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080215717 | Web Based Unified Communication System and Method, and Web Communication Manager - The present invention provides a Web based unified communication system and method, and Web based communication manger. In the present invention, generating a SMIL document, based on a communication request from a terminal, for starting and controlling a communication session between the terminal and corresponding terminals, and controlling the terminals and communication channels involved in the communication session to work collectively so as to perform the communication session by interpreting and executing the SMIL document. In the invention, instead of being a kind of supplementation, the Web technique should become the core technique of such systems. Further, in the invention, terminal may be a set of user devices, the set of user devices includes one or more devices, each of said devices provides media interaction capabilities for one or more communication channels, and each of said devices is mapped to one or more media objects in said SMIL document. Therefore, various devices may work collectively to perform a communication session. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080215718 | Policy-based content delivery network selection - In a framework wherein resources of a content provider may be delivered to clients from different domains, a method distributes the requests based on content-provider policies. In some cases, the domains include at least two distinct content delivery network (CDN) domains. The domains may include a content provider domain. Responsive to a request, either the content provider domain or one of the two CDN domains is selected, the selection being based at least in part on one or more policies set by the content provider. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080215719 | Data Communication and Coherence in a Distributed Item Tracking System - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for communicating between nodes of a distributed system that tracks items. Each node receives tag-read-data corresponding to an item and communicates the tag-read-data to the designated responsible node for the item. Each node can also receive additional item information from the designated responsible node and use the received additional item information to update disposition information for the item. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080222277 | Method and Apparatus for Configuring and Managing a Robust Overlay Multicast Tree - Provided is a method and apparatus for configuring and managing an overlay multicast data delivery tree in a transmission network having a SM (session manager) and at least one MA (multicast agent). The method includes the steps of at the MA intending to joining a session, obtaining an active neighbor MA list from the SM; detecting information on QoS information of each neighbor MA in the active neighbor MA list, selecting a MA having the most optimized QoS as a parent MA based on the QoS information of each Neighbor MA in the active neighbor MA list, joining an overlay multicast data communication session through the selected parent MA, periodically receiving HB (heart beat) information having information on a path from a root to the MA and determining whether to perform a parent-switching based on me HB information and parent-switching from the current parent MA to a MA having a better QoS when it is determined to perform the parent-switching | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080222278 | System and method of global electronic job market in the Internet - A system and a method of global electronic job market in the Internet are provided. The method of operating a global electronic job market for jobseekers and employers via the Internet includes registering the jobseekers and the employers; providing information regarding offers of the jobseekers and the employers to the registered employers and jobseekers accordingly; selecting partners in the job market based on the provided information; holding competitions for job vacancies; conducting job contracts between jobseekers and employers; providing additional services of the system of global electronic job market. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080222279 | System for creating collective intelligence through multi-linear discussion over an electronic network - A system that assembles diverse individual thoughts into collective intelligence, making possible a structured conversation by a networked community. Participants contribute ideas to a robust conversational framework in modular form. This framework ensures that the conversation remains structured and continues on track. Each idea module competes with its peers through an interactive rating process controlled by the community. The resulting conversation represents collective intelligence arranged into at least two opposing viewpoints. The invention then enables these discussions to translate into real-world action by empowering the community with collaborative tools. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080222280 | PSEUDO-AGENT - A pseudo-agent is disclosed herein that bridges this divide. For purposes of the discussion herein, a pseudo-agent is a machine that is installed on a fully capable host machine, such as a Windows or UNIX machine, and that gathers and evaluates content from a management server, takes actions if so instructed, and reports the results of its evaluation upstream. However, unlike an agent in a traditional management system, which inspects and acts on the local machine, the pseudo-agent actually inspects and acts on a remote device, or many remote devices. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080222281 | Method and system for tiered distribution in a content delivery network - A tiered distribution service is provided in a content delivery network (CDN) having a set of surrogate origin (namely, “edge”) servers organized into regions and that provide content delivery on behalf of participating content providers, wherein a given content provider operates an origin server. According to the invention, a cache hierarchy is established in the CDN comprising a given edge server region and either (a) a single parent region, or (b) a subset of the edge server regions. In response to a determination that a given object request cannot be serviced in the given edge region, instead of contacting the origin server, the request is provided to either the single parent region or to a given one of the subset of edge server regions for handling, preferably as a function of metadata associated with the given object request. The given object request is then serviced, if possible, by a given CDN server in either the single parent region or the given subset region. The original request is only forwarded on to the origin server if the request cannot be serviced by an intermediate node. | 09-11-2008 |
| 20080228904 | Home Gateway Architecture and State Based Distributed System and Method - A state based control system ( | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228905 | Travelers/Commuters Portable Staging Device - One embodiment of a staging device comprises a power source capable of supplying power to a plurality of different portable devices, at least two portable devices having different power requirements. The power source comprises a fuel cell, a gel cell, a battery and/or a nuclear battery. Another embodiment of a staging device comprises a storage device capable of storing at least one of a message and data intended to be received by at least one of a plurality of portable devices, at least two portable devices having a different communication format. A controller coupled to the storage device is capable of converting the message and/or the data stored in the storage device to a communication format that is appropriate for an intended portable device. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228906 | MANAGING LIST TAILORING FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - A network device, system, and method are directed towards enabling list content to be displayed at mobile devices having different memory page size constraints. When a mobile device requests list content, a type of mobile device is determined. This may then be used to determine a page size weight classification for the mobile device. The requested list content may then be compared against the page size weight classification, and if it exceeds the page size weight classification, the list content may be tailored. In one embodiment, the list content may be tailored by segmenting the list content into multiple segments, each segment may be coupled with and/or links. Different list content types may employ different list splitting sizes for display. For example, display of movie lists may display a different number of items within the list content than, for example, an email list of messages, or the like. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228907 | Change detecting method for an it resource configuration - To collect configuration information of an application server, there is provided a change detecting method of detecting a change in configuration information of an application server installed in a computer system, the computer system including: one or more of the application servers; a management server for controlling the application servers; and a configuration management server for managing configuration information of the application servers, the change detecting method including: obtaining a packet transmitted from the management server to at least one of the application servers; specifying at least one of the application servers which receives the obtained packet and at least one of resources on the application servers, with reference to the configuration information held by the configuration management server by using the obtained packet; and determining whether configuration information of the resources on the application servers is likely to be changed by an operation of the specified resource. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228908 | Management techniques for non-traditional network and information system topologies - Systems, software, and methods for managing traditional (i.e., TCP/IP-based), non-traditional, and traditional—non-traditional hybrid networks of connected electronic devices are described. In one example, network management policy and network management applications are downloaded automatically upon detection and identification of a new device, application or service on a network. In another example, information related to at least one aspect of the network is obtained by a network management device through connection to a non-TCP/IP network, or by way of a gateway device or application, at least one applicable management policy is identified, and the identified policy is used to manage at least one aspect of the network's operation. In another example, devices, applications or services presenting various behaviors under various scenarios are evaluated and placed under management. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228909 | SYSTEM AND PROGRAM FOR MANAGING DEVICES IN A NETWORK - Provided are a system, and program for managing devices in a network. A command of a first type to perform device management operations with respect to at least one device in the network is received, wherein the received command is capable of being directed to at least one of a plurality of devices in the network. A determination is made from a first mapping of a network address of the device to which the received command is directed. A determination is made from a second mapping of at least one command of a second type associated with the received command of the first type, wherein the mapping indicates a mapping of at least one parameter included in the received command of the first type to at least one parameter in the associated command of the second type. The determined command of the second type is generated to include as parameters the at least one parameter from the command of the first type indicated in the second mapping and the generated command of the second type is transmitted to the determined network address. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080235360 | System and Method for Scheduling Downloading in a Cached Network Environment - A system and method schedules downloading of content files from a content server to a client through a cache server. A user can request a content file for future delivery at a certain service time at a certain location such as a hotspot. A cache server receives these requests and sorts them in an order which depends on the relative service times, and eliminates redundancies by only downloading content files not already stored in the cache server. A scheduling algorithm minimizes the instances of tardiness under the constraint of cache storage capacity. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080235361 | MANAGEMENT LAYER METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC ASSIGNMENT OF USERS TO COMPUTER RESOURCES - A management layer method and apparatus for dynamically assigning computer users to remote computer resources according to predetermined rules and irrespective of remote viewer protocol utilized by the user. The method and apparatus is capable of managing hundreds of thousands of users across multiple physical sites and is operable with a wide variety of network, Internet, and application solutions. The method and apparatus is useful for an increasing mobile contemporary workforce in a world where the need for around the clock coverage coexists with the ever present possibility of catastrophic network failure. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080235362 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFERENCE MANAGEMENT - A method in a mobile communication device for communication over a wireless network for managing conference equipment, including: establishing a connection with a video conferencing management server via the wireless network; receiving information from the video conferencing management server, the information including one or more lists of entries from one or more phone books or personal information of a user of the mobile device; generating a user interface to allow the user to select one or more of the entries from the one or more phone books or personal information; and creating a control message, based on at least a selected one or more of the entries from the one or more phone books or personal information, that instructs the video conferencing management server to initiate or schedule a videoconference. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080235363 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PLATFORM LEVEL DATA MODEL FOR INDICATIONS BASED EVENT CONTROL AND DATA TRANSFER - For a platform level data model for indications based event control and data transfer, a management controller may enable performing indications based management operations that may be based on a management service utilizing CIM Indications model. The management controller may enable communication of indications based messaging and/or data. The indications may be triggered based on events generated and/or triggered in a plurality of managed entities. The events generation may be performed dynamically within the plurality of managed entities, or may be initiated via the management controller. The management controller may enable processing of partially generated indications, via the plurality of managed entities, and/or as pass-through router for full indications processed via the plurality of managed entities. The indications based management operations may also comprise subscription related operations wherein the management controller may enable performing processing of subscription requests, modifications, and/or deletions to facilitate external access via the device. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080244049 | Method and System for Device Management - The device management is performed by managing objects in devices of a device management system in a mobile network infrastructure. The system has a first server with a first device management application using a first protocol, a second server with a second device management application using a second protocol, an interface between them and a device with objects to be managed. The first management application initiates a device management session with the interface in order to manage the objects in the device. The interface translates the objects to be managed into a form understood by the second management application and invokes management operations to be made by the second management application. The first management application then performs the management operations to the device. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244050 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING RESOURCES AND INTERFACES AMONGST CONNECTED COMPUTING DEVICES - A computing device is provided that includes a plurality of user-interactive mechanisms. The computing device may also include a universal communication port that is capable of receiving a connection from a device that belongs to any one of a plurality of device classes or types. The device may be equipped or configured with logic. The logic may configure or otherwise enable an operative state of user-interface mechanisms on the device. Additionally, the logic may (i) detect a connected device that connects to the universal communication port, and (ii) determine a set of functionality that the connected device is capable of performing when connected to the universal communication port. The logic may perform, or cause performance, of operations that are for use with or by the connected device. The logic may also perform at least one of (i) selectively route data to the connected device over the universal communication port, or (ii) selectively disable one or more of the plurality of user-interactive mechanisms while performing the operations. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244051 | Method And System For Managing Dynamic Associations Between Folksonomic Data And Resources - Methods and systems are described for managing dynamic associations between folksonomic data and resources. One method includes receiving from a subscriber a subscription request to establish at least one of a first subscription to tag/resource association data associated with a resource and a second subscription to tag/resource association data associated with a folksonomic tag, wherein the folksonomic tag is unstructured metadata that includes a user-defined character string and establishing at least one of the first subscription and the second subscription. The method further includes determining a change to the tag/resource association data associated with at least one of the folksonomic tag and the resource identified in the subscription request, generating a notification message including at least one of an identifier of the folksonomic tag and an identifier of the resource in response to determining the change to the tag/resource association data associated with at least one of the folksonomic tag and the resource, and sending the notification message to the subscriber pursuant to at least one of the first subscription and the second subscription. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244052 | ADAPTER BLADE WITH INTERPOSER FOR EXPANDED CAPABILITY OF A BLADE SERVER CHASSIS SYSTEM - A system chassis includes multiple chassis bays configured for receiving either of a single, conventional server blade or an adapter blade. The adapter blade can selectively secure a plurality of compact blades, such as a blade PC. The adapter blade includes an interposer disposed for electronically communicating each compact blade with a server interface as a separate node upon securing a compact blade within any of the adapter bays. Each compact blade may be configured as a server, a “client blade” or “blade PC”, or a companion blade providing application-specific features. Therefore, the use of an adapter blade increases the flexibility of and capability of the processor system. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244053 | GEOGRAPHIC READER DISPLAY DATA - A client device, system, and method are directed towards determining data on network site visits, and providing the data based on a geographical relationship of visitors to the network sites. A tracker tracks visits to, and outbound link click activity on a network site. If the click is associated with a URI, information is collected related to the click, including a network address associated with a source of the click. A geographic region may be determined based on the network address of the click source. Statistics may then be collected over time, including, what network sites, are visited for a given geographic region. Such statistics may be displayable in a variety of formats, and geographic regions, including by country, state, province, city, town, district, county, or the like. The tracker may be on the network site or on a client device of the visitor. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244054 | Abstract representation of subnet utilization in an address block - In one embodiment, a method to display a visual representation of subblock utilization in an address block is provided. A plurality of subblock sizes in the address block are determined. A subblock may be referred to as a subnet or subblock but is a portion of the addresses in the address block. The size for the subblocks is determined for each of the subblocks based on which address spaces have been assigned to each of the subblocks. Also, a positioning within the address block is determined based on which address space has been assigned to each of the subblocks. A utilization for the plurality of subblocks is then determined. The utilization may be a determination based on how many addresses have been leased in the subblock. A visual representation is then generated that shows the size of the subblocks relative to each other and also showing a utilization measurement for the subblocks. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244055 | Computer that manages devices - A computer is provided with: a device related value acquisition unit that acquires a device related value (for example a LUN), which is a value relating to a device; a calculation formula including a first variable in which the device related value is substituted; a device identification value calculation unit that calculates a device identification value of a device corresponding to the acquired device related value by substituting this device related value in the first variable; and a correspondence registration unit that registers the calculated device identification value and the acquired device related value in an electronic information resource. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244056 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SITUATION - An action acquiring unit acquires action information corresponding to operation information from a first storage unit for a first user, and stores acquired action information in a third storage unit. A receiving unit receives, via a network, action information of a second user from an external device. A situation acquiring unit acquires, from a second storage, a communication situation corresponding to received action information. A writing unit writes the action information of the first user indicated by the communication situation to the third storage unit, additionally. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244057 | PROGRAM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD - A management server | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244058 | PROGRAM - Provided is a program for causing a computer to execute the steps of: sending a request including execution environment identification information for identifying its program execution environment to a predetermined server through a network; receiving a list including installation candidates which can be installed under the program execution environment identified by the execution environment identification information from the predetermined server through the network; selecting an installation candidate from the list according to a predetermined condition; and installing the selected installation candidate. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080244059 | MANAGING APPLICATION INTERACTIONS USING DISTRIBUTED MODALITY COMPONENTS - A method for managing multimodal interactions can include the step of registering a multitude of modality components with a modality component server, wherein each modality component handles an interface modality for an application. The modality component can be connected to a device. A user interaction can be conveyed from the device to the modality component for processing. Results from the user interaction can be placed on a shared memory are of the modality component server. | 10-02-2008 |
| 20080250128 | AUTOMATED TIME ZONE BASED GROUPING - Time zone data is obtained from clients, such as web browsers, which interact with a server, and used to classify metrics of the clients such as response times. This classification technique does not require that a mapping of IP addresses to geographic location is available. Metrics from the clients are communicated from the server to a manager, which aggregates the metrics for each time zone. The manager can automatically associate geographic descriptors, such as names of cities, with the metrics in a report such as in a user interface display. If a partial mapping of IP address to location is available, the report can aggregate metrics which are grouped by IP address separately from metrics which are not grouped by IP address. The user interface display can be automatically populated with selectable nodes which allow a user to selectively view the metrics. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250129 | System and Method for Binding a Subscription-Based Computing System to an Internet Service Provider - A system for binding a subscription-based computer to an internet service provider (ISP) may include a binding module and a security module residing on the computer. The binding module may identify and authenticate configuration data from peripheral devices that attempt to connect to the computer, encrypt any requests for data from the computer to the ISP, and decrypt responses from the ISP. If the binding module is able to authenticate the configuration data and the response to the request for data from the ISP, then the security module may allow the communication between the computer and the ISP. However, if either the configuration cycle or the response cannot be properly verified, then the security module may degrade operation of the computer. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250130 | System, Method and Engine for Playing Smil Based Multimedia Contents - A system for playing SMIL based multimedia contents, comprising: a plurality of SMIL engines for analyzing and interpreting SMIL documents, as well as communicating with and controlling SMIL sub engines, remote media proxies, or local media playing devices; a plurality of remote media proxies for receiving instructions from the upper level SMIL engines, starting or stopping providing media objects to the remote media playing devices, sending back events, and providing basic user interaction capabilities, wherein said a plurality of SMIL engines, a plurality of remote media proxies, and local and remote media playing devices construct a tree-link structure, of which the root node is a SMIL engine, the branch nodes are SMIL engines and remote media proxies, and the leaf nodes are local and remote media playing devices. The corresponding SMIL engines and methods are also provided. The present invention enables the playing of SMIL based multimedia contents on a set of PvC devices, which can be dynamically configured as a new multimedia terminal on demand. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250131 | SERVER AND RELATED METHOD FOR INSERTING DATA INTO STREAMING DATA FOR A NETWORK SYSTEM - A server of a network system for inserting data into a streaming data displayed by a user comprises a first store unit, a statistic unit, a selecting unit, a displaying control unit and an output unit. The first store unit is sued for storing a plurality of data contents. The statistic unit is coupled to the first store unit and used for collecting and analyzing information of the plurality of data contents and information of the user to generate a statistic result. The selecting unit is used for selecting at least one data content from the plurality of data contents according to the statistic result. The displaying control unit is used for generating a control information for controlling the timing of displaying the selected data contents over the user. The output unit is used for transmitting the control information and the selected data contents to the user. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250132 | SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING AND MANAGING NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a network device control and managing system and method. The network device control and managing system receives network device information and subscriber information from a database server of the network device control and managing system according to the manager's client information request and realizes hierarchical combined information. The system requests state information from the network device based on the state information request of the network device and receives the state information. The system requests a control from the network device based on the network device control request, receives a corresponding response message, and changes combined information. Therefore, the device states can be easily searched in the hierarchical manner (L3-L2-AP), and the problems of network devices can be quickly sensed. Also, software for the network devices is remotely updated, and the subscriber's after sales service request is remotely processed. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250133 | PROBING NETWORK NODES FOR OPTIMIZATION - A method is disclosed for optimizing a network that is formed from a plurality of nodes. The NC node of the network compiles an order that the plurality of nodes perform a probing operation. The order is typically round robin. The NC node receives a request from a client that identifies a next node to perform the probing operation. Based on the request, the NC node changes the order so that the next node performs the probing operation after the current node that is performing the probing operation has completed the operation. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080250134 | Architecture for a Centralized Management System - An example of a solution provided here comprises: providing a logical design, including at least one hub containing central management tools, and a plurality of lower tiers containing local management tools; placing components according to the design; and providing, from the hub, one or more management functions. The lower tiers include one or more elements chosen from RIM's, spokes, and POD's. | 10-09-2008 |
| 20080256223 | SCALE ACROSS IN A GRID COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A method, grid computing environment, and computer readable medium for managing available resources in a grid computing environment are disclosed. The method includes determining, when a new job is submitted, if a first of the computing clusters has sufficient available resources to run the new job. If the first computing cluster does not have sufficient available resources to run the new job, the method further includes determining if a second of the computing clusters has sufficient available resources to run a first job that is currently running on the first computing cluster. If the second computing cluster has sufficient available resources to run the first job, the first job is migrated to the second computing cluster. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256224 | Data communication system and session management server - A data communication system is provided that is capable of increasing or decreasing the number of session management servers flexibly, and is further capable of implementing data communication while distributing the message processing load in the session management server. The data communication system includes multiple communication devices which perform data communications mutually, multiple session management servers which manage sessions of data communication between the communication devices, and a load balancer which assigns the session management servers for processing a message received from the communication device according to a predetermined criterion, wherein, the session management server is provided with a unit for managing a currently logged-in communication device and a state of the communication performed by the communication device, and a unit for acquiring information necessary for performing communication with the communication device. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256225 | Osgi-Based Dynamic Service Management Method for Context-Aware Systems - An OSGi-based dynamic service management method for context-aware system is provided. By adding a service bundle for service implementation to an OSGi framework, a service lifecycle is separately managed. For this purpose, the service bundle has several service implementations, and a service factory object is generated as many as the service implementations. The lifecycle of the service is managed. The service factory object installs and uninstalls the service. Accordingly, even when various sensors and devices are newly added to the context-aware system, a corresponding service can be installed and uninstalled at any time, thereby providing a dynamic management. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256226 | SEMICONDUCTOR MANUFACTURING APPARATUS DATA ACQUISITION APPARATUS AND SEMICONDUCTOR MANUFACTURING SYSTEM - According to the present invention, there is proved a semiconductor manufacturing apparatus data acquisition apparatus, having: a production management system interface unit which may communicate with the production management system; an apparatus interface unit which communicates with the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus; and a production management system substitution unit which may communicate with the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus via the apparatus interface unit, wherein when the production management system can communicate with the production management system interface unit, the production management system and the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus communicate with each other via the production management system interface unit and the apparatus interface unit to receive process data output from the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus, and when the production management system cannot communicate with the production management system interface unit, the production management system substitution unit and the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus communicate with each other via the apparatus interface unit to receive the process data output from the semiconductor manufacturing apparatus. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256227 | METHOD AND PRODUCT FOR CONTROLLING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT - Method, apparatus and product for controlling an automated storage system for laboratory objects. The storage system includes a plurality of storage locations for receiving the laboratory objects. The method includes defining users having access to the storage system and storing the users in a database, defining partitions, with each partition comprising at least part of the storage locations, and storing the partitions in the database, and storing properties for each of the partitions in the database. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256228 | MINIMIZING COMPLEX DECISIONS TO ALLOCATE ADDITIONAL RESOURCES TO A JOB SUBMITTED TO A GRID ENVIRONMENT - A method, system, and program for minimizing complex decisions to allocate additional resources to a job submitted to a grid environment are provided. First, at least one decision to allocate additional resources to at least one previously submitted job is stored in a decision cache, wherein said the least one decision is stored according to at least one characteristic of the at least one previously submitted job. When another job is submitted to the grid environment needs additional resources, the characteristic of the currently submitted job is compared with the characteristics of previous submitted jobs. If there is a match, then the previously made decision associated with the matching characteristic controls allocation of additional resources for the currently submitted job, such that complex decision making for allocation of additional resources is minimized by reusing previously stored decisions to allocate additional resources. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080263187 | Interoperability of Network Applications in a Communications Environment - An interoperability system abstracts the protocols used by multiple network applications into an interoperability framework, thereby allowing the network applications to interoperate with each other and/or with modules for providing enhanced functionalities. The interoperability framework includes a number of adapters that modularize the components needed for interoperation and abstracts content from the underlying protocols and procedures used by the network applications. The interoperability framework includes a resource control that enables the network applications to access shared resources, such as data and content used by the network applications, thus allowing the applications to interoperate and for functionality enhancements to be added. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263188 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MONITORING AND ANALYZING OF ROUTING IN IP NETWORKS - Exemplary embodiments include methods and systems for monitoring, analyzing, and troubleshooting of control plane dynamics of a network including collect data associated with the one or more probe modules associated with a network, store the data associated with the one or more probe modules, analyze the data associated with the one or more probes modules, and output a result of the analysis of the data associated with the one or more probe modules to one or more user devices. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263189 | Secure identification of intranet network - A method is provided for network identification based on high entropy data on a network which are not easily guessed or obtained outside the network, which can prevent an attacker from “spoofing” the network. A component in a client computer connected to a network may obtain over the network a network data block including device identification information of a device controlling the network. Upon parsing the network data block, such high entropy data as unique device identifiers may be obtained from the device identification information. Depending on availability of the unique device identifiers and authentication history of the client computer, different combinations of the unique device identifiers and/or other identification information may be used to generate a unique network identifier such as a network signature. The component may provide the network signature to applications within the client computer. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263190 | STORAGE SYSTEM - A host I/F unit has a management table for managing an MPPK which is in-charge of the control of input/output processing for a storage area of an LDEV, and if a host computer transmits an input/output request for the LDEV, the host I/F unit transfers the input/output request to the MPPK which is in-charge of the input/output processing for the LDEV based on the management table, an MP of the MPPK performs the input/output processing based on the input/output request, and the MP of the MPPK also judges whether the MPPK that is in-charge of the input/output processing for the LDEV is to be changed, and sets the management table so that an MPPK which is different from the MPPK that is in-charge is to be in-charge of the input/output processing for the LDEV. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263191 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING PACKET FILTERING INFORMATION - A portion of management traffic, carried via network traffic, and received and/or transmitted via a network controller, may be processed externally to the network controller, wherein management messaging may be carried via network packets, and one or more headers may added to enable transmission and/or reception via the network controller. Packet filters may be setup, in the network controller, via the management controller, to enable determining network packets that may carry the management traffic. The management controller may utilize commands to setup packet filers in the network controller, wherein matching criteria, in received network packets, and/or corresponding actions that may be performed in matching packets, may be specified. The matching criteria may comprise specifying one or more header types that may be utilized in the received network packets. The network controller may generate filter identifiers, which may be utilized, subsequently, via the management controller to delete the packet filters. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263192 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING A COMPUTER SYSTEM - In various embodiments of the invention, a server monitors a network for a startup message from a client computer as appropriate. The server may include a computer application that generates configuration instructions in response to commands from an administrator and/or information obtained from a client computer. The instructions may be in the form of scripts, data, objects, or the like. The instructions may be passed to the client computer, which may execute various administrative functions as directed. In exemplary embodiments, the instructions may command direct placement, verification and/or replacement of files, directory entries, BIOS attributes or other characteristics of the client computer. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080270584 | Method for Realizing Terminal Management in the Network Device - A method for realizing terminal management in a network device includes: receiving a message addressed to a terminal from a network management station; determining identification information of the message in accordance with information contained in the message; if receiving a Response message from the terminal, determining a destination network management station for receiving the Response message in accordance with identification information of the Response message, and forwarding the Response message to the determined network management station. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270585 | META-CONTAINER FOR MODEL-BASED DISTRIBUTED APPLICATIONS - Abstracting communication with a plurality of containers. Each container encapsulates or hosts a module (e.g., a web service, a database, etc.) associated with a distributed application. A meta-container communicates with drivers that interface with each of the containers. The meta-container represents an abstraction and a virtualization of the containers in the hierarchy. Each container may also be a meta-container for other containers. The recursion and layered hierarchy provide flexible, extensible, and efficient management of the distributed application. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270586 | ASSOCIATION TO COMMUNITIES - A system and method are directed towards managing affiliation to community sites and making such affiliations visible to visitors to the community sites, and/or a member's affiliation site. A visitor may register centrally to a plurality of community sites, and receive a member affiliation webpage. The member affiliation webpage may display community sites that the registered visitor may author, and/or community sites for which the registered visitor is affiliated. A visitor may also visit an affiliation webpage(s) for a community site that may display each visitor that is currently affiliated with that community site. By displaying members of the community site, other visitors might be able to quickly identify more interesting community sites, community sites popular to one of their friends, neighbors, family members, or the like. When a registered visitor visits a community site they may select to become affiliated or may become automatically affiliated based on a criteria. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270587 | Managing application resources - Methods of managing application resources in a computer system. The methods may comprise the steps of determining a configuration of the computer system and receiving a request to access an application resource. The methods may also comprise the step of directing the request to a data file. The data file may include a plurality of streams, and each of the plurality of streams may comprise a configuration-specific version of the application resource. In various embodiments, the methods may also comprise the step of directing the request to a first stream of the plurality of streams. The first stream may comprise version of the application resource specific to the configuration. Various system embodiments are also provided. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270588 | Verifying Management Virtual Local Area Network Identifier Provisioning Consistency - A communications network, comprising a plurality of nodes supporting connection-oriented traffic and connectionless traffic, wherein management traffic between the nodes is propagated as connectionless traffic having a unique management traffic Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) identifier (VID), and wherein at least one node is configured to perform a Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) exchange operation to enable detection of inconsistent provisioning of the Management VID in at least one node. Also disclosed is a communications network component, comprising logic that enables connection-oriented traffic and VLAN-based connectionless traffic, wherein the logic propagates management messages as VLAN-based connectionless traffic having a management VID, and wherein the logic enables detection of inconsistent management VIDs in a network. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270589 | Multi-Source, Multi-Use Web Processing Through Dynamic Proxy Based Grid Computing Mechanisms - Various implementations are disclosed for service independent, scalable, multi-source, multi-user (MSMU) Web processing and transactions through dynamic proxy based grid computing mechanisms. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270590 | DYNAMIC CONFIGURATION AND SELF-TUNING OF INTER-NODAL COMMUNICATION RESOURCES IN A DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A database management system in which a plurality of nodes form a database instance, each node including a communication manager for dynamically configuring inter-nodal communication resources. The communication manager receives communication resource allocation requests from clients or a self-tuning algorithm. A resource self-tuning mechanism allocates or de-allocates memory blocks used for communication resource elements dynamically in real time without cycling the instance. Memory blocks are de-allocated asynchronously by placing associated communication resource elements in quarantine until all communication resource elements associated with the memory block are quarantined. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270591 | Event Notification - A method, apparatus, computer program product, and computer system for ensuring consistency between data displayed by multiple independent client programs that can simultaneously display server-provided data. The data are accessible only from a server that is not persistently connected to the client computer systems) displaying the data, so the client programs cannot retrieve the data independently without sending a request to the server. Client programs do not poll the server by sending a request to learn that data capable of being displayed by the multiple client programs have been updated. Instead, client programs are notified by the server program receiving the request to change the data at the time the request is received. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270592 | Managing Introspectable Objects in an Enterprise - Managing object relationships in an enterprise is presented. A request manager receives a view request from a user. The request manager retrieves a management definition object (MDO) and a perspective that corresponds to the view request, which the request manager uses to generate a view that includes nodes corresponding to an enterprise's objects. The user analyzes the generated view, and sends a command request to the request manager that corresponds to a plurality of the nodes. The request manager uses the retrieved perspective, the MDO, and also may access a backend in order to identify objects that correspond to the command request. Once the objects are identified, the command manager sends a command to the identified objects to the backend through plug-ins. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080275972 | System and Method for Providing Improved Packet Traceability - A method and apparatus is described which enables location information associated with a client to easily be obtained by a service provider in a packet-based network. The location information may be the location of the client itself, or may be location information associated with devices in a communication facility established by the client. Location information associated with the client may be provided to services such as emergency services to facilitate fast dispatch of resources to assist the client. Location information associated with facilities of the client may be used to facilitate lawful interception of client communications. In one embodiment, the location information is obtained using information included in one of a Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB) or Provider Backbone Transport (PBT) packet. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275973 | DYNAMIC CLI MAPPING FOR CLUSTERED SOFTWARE ENTITIES - Techniques for mapping availability management (AM) functions to software installation locations are described. An availability management function (AMF) can look-up a component type and determine software associated with that component. For a selected AMF node, the AMF software entity can then determine a pathname prefix associated with that software. The pathname prefix can then be used for various AM functions, e.g., instantiation of a new component or service unit. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275974 | System, method, and display for managing media content for use at multiple locations - In a system and method for managing user profiles and for managing, recording, and experiencing media content, a server may store a profile, content, and an association of the content with a profile, each of multiple devices may log into the profile by accessing the profile stored at the server, and, for the profile into which the device is logged, transmit to the server a content request, for example, periodically, and the server may, responsive to the content request, determine which content stored at the server is associated with the profile and transmit to the device a copy of the content that has been determined to be associated with the profile. The content may be stored at the server in association with the profile before the device is associated with the profile. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275975 | Blade Server System with at Least One Rack-Switch Having Multiple Switches Interconnected and Configured for Management and Operation as a Single Virtual Switch - Described is a rack-switch including a rack and a plurality of blade server chassis within the rack. Each blade server chassis has a plurality of server blades in communication with at least one switch. Each switch includes a plurality of external ports. At least two of the external ports of each switch are inter-switch link (ISL) ports. The rack-switch also includes a plurality of inter-switch links. Each inter-switch link electrically connects one ISL port of one of the switches to one ISL port of another of the switches. The plurality of inter-switch links interconnects the switches such that the switches are daisy chained in a loop. The inter-switch links convey Ethernet packets representing server-to-server communications between server blades of different blade server chassis. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275976 | INFORMATION GATHERING TOOL FOR SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATION - A method and program product for gathering information about a system. A user logs on to the system, and in response, computer programming automatically identifies application instances executing in the system, determines whether the system is configured for high availability, determines whether each of the identified application instances is configured for high availability, determines if the system is a node of a cluster of systems, and compiles and displays a unified report of the resulting information. The foregoing type of information is automatically compiled and displayed for other systems as well, in different respective sessions. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275977 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING INFORMATION FEED DELIVERY TO A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A method and system for managing information feed delivery to communications devices is provided. In one aspect, the method involves initializing a user account in response to receiving a first communication identifying a communications device. In another aspect, the method involves associating a content object of an information publisher with an information feed for delivery to a communications device; receiving from the information publisher an updated content object for association with the information feed; and producing in response to the updated content object an updated information feed to replace the information feed. The method may involve delivering to the communications device an information feed in response to receiving an information feed identifier. The method may involve combining translated content objects. The system includes an initialization component; an updating component; and a database for storing an identifier identifying the communications device in association with one or more information feeds. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275978 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR LOCATING GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATIONS OF ONLINE USERS - A location tracking system for building a geographic location database of network nodes in a computer network includes a trace engine module configured to send trace Id commands to a plurality of user terminals. The user terminals are actively coupled to a server node so that the trace engine module is able to obtain IP address of each of the user terminals and its corresponding geographic location. A first database is configured to store IP addresses obtained by the trace engine module and their corresponding geographical locations. A second database is configured to store a set of physical connections between IP addresses obtained by the trace engine module. The system can then determine the geographical location of end user terminals who employ the database as previously populated. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275979 | System and method for clustering of group-centric networks - Exemplary systems and methods for managing a plurality of group-centric networks are provided. In exemplary embodiments, a plurality of group-centric networks is established within a network cluster. Each group-centric network comprises one or more groups having a common interest. Once established, the group-centric network defines customized administrative components for the group-centric network. In exemplary embodiments, the administrative component comprises roles and relationship definitions which define what data and functionality may be provided to a user accessing a group within the group-centric network. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080281950 | Method and Device for Peer to Peer File Sharing - A system and method for managing peer to peer traffic. The method includes: identifying a peer to peer request and in response providing at least one address of a peer to peer server within a cluster that is adapted to service peer to peer requests. The system includes a cluster of peer to peer servers; and a first device adapted to identify a peer to peer request and to provide at least one address of a peer to peer server within the cluster. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281951 | METHODS, DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR MANAGING AND DELIVERING MEDIA CONTENT - Methods, devices, systems, and computer program products for managing and delivering media content are provided. A device includes a media recording structure for capturing the media content, an input component, and a transmitter. The device further includes a processor in communication with the media recording structure, the input component, and the transmitter. The device further includes a media management application executing on the processor. The media management application performs a method. The method includes receiving a destination address for a media file including the media content captured by the media recording structure, the destination address entered via the input component. The method also includes transmitting the media file to a receiving device associated with the destination address via the transmitter. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281952 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONNECTIONS FOR NETWORKS USED BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a system and method for managing a profile list for connections to networks for a communication device is provided. The method comprises: upon detection of a connection for the device to a network, determining whether the connection is known to the device; if the connection is not known to the device, creating a temporary profile for the connection; adding temporary profile is added into a profile list of accessible connections for the device; evaluating the values of set of profile activation conditions to determine the profile should remain active; and if the values indicate that the temporary profile is to be terminated, then removing the temporary profile from the profile list. As part of defining the profile, the profile contains a set of profile activation conditions and related values for the temporary profile. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281953 | Managing network components using USB keys - Devices and methods for managing a communications network include using USB keys to provision and management components in the network by having the network component establish a connection to a network administrator device, such as a laptop, PDA, or desktop workstation. A first USB key is used to provision a network component so that it has the necessary security information to interact with a second USB key, used to enable actual management of the component. Once the component has the security information, the second USB key is inserted and certain callback data are made available to the component. It uses this data to make a “call” or connection to an administrator's device. The callback data may be an IP address of the device, an e-mail address, VoIP data, instant messaging data, dial-up data, and so on. Once the connection, initiated and established by the network component, is made the administrator can begin managing the component. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281954 | Capability requirements for group membership - A method and apparatus for adding a node to a group of nodes is provided. Group capability data is stored in volatile memory of a group manager for a group. The group capability data identifies capability requirements for members of the group. The group manager provides notification services for members of the group. A request to add a particular node to a group is received. In response to receiving the request, a determination is made as to whether the particular node satisfies the capability requirements identified by the group capability data. Upon determining that the particular node does satisfy the capability requirements identified by the group capability data, the particular node is added to the group. The capability requirements for members of a group may initially be based on the capabilities of the first node that is added to a group. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281955 | Method and System for Operating Redundant Network Elements in a Communication Network - An operation of redundant network elements in a communication network having a back-up-network element associated with each active-network element is provided. A back-up control unit is associated with each back-up-network element, and data sent to the active-network element is sent to the back-up network element. Data is processed separately by the active-network element and by the back-up-network element. Data traffic emitted by the back-up-network element is blocked by the back-up-control unit and the back-up-network element simulates the reaction of the other network elements. The back-up-control unit monitors the active-network element and switches to the back-up-network element in the event of a failure of the active-network element. The databases are created in the active-network element and in the back-up-network element in a parallel and faultless manner due to the introduction of the back-up-control unit. In the event of error, an automatic switchover may be carried out without a long delay time. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281956 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A system for managing one or more wireless devices in a wireless network, the system comprising: a single generic device manager for implementing device management operations; and an interface layer for translating administration client-specific requests to the generic device manager. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080288618 | Networked Device Control Architecture - A networked device control system including a plurality of networked device controllers operative to implement a protocol of automatic device discovery and control, at least one non-protocol-compliant device connected to any of the controllers and not configured for use with the protocol prior to being connected to the controller, and a management unit operative to generate any of an interface and a control element associated with any of the devices, establish a proxy configured for use with the protocol and operative to control the non-protocol-compliant device, and configure any of the controllers with the interface and control element generated for the device connected to the controller. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288619 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A NETWORK - A method and apparatus for managing a network is disclosed. A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network device having a controller element to modify a communication parameter of the network device based on a policy of the communication system, wherein the policy is generated based at least in part on a client request to modify the communication system and a policy template retrieved according to a policy identification communicated over the Internet by an operations support system. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288620 | Physical Network Interface Selection to Minimize Contention with Operating System Critical Storage Operations - An apparatus, program product and method dynamically select a physical network interface for use by an application running on a networked computer in a manner that attempts to minimize bandwidth contention between application-related operations and any operating system critical storage operations that may be initiated by an operating system resident on the same networked computer. The dynamic selection prioritizes at least one physical network interface that does not handle operating system critical storage operations over at least one physical network interface that does handle operating system critical storage operations, thus minimizing the likelihood of the application causing poor performance and/or failure of the operating system due to contention over limited network resources. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288621 | AGENT WORKFLOW SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method is provided for defining, executing, and managing network workflow. One or more agents execute on one or more devices in the network. A set of instructions is capable of being evaluated and executed on one or more agents. A workflow manager is for selecting which agents evaluate and execute subsets of the instructions. A workflow management document is for storing instructions created using the workflow manager, wherein at least part of the document defines the selection of the agents. One or more servers store the workflow management document and communicates with, and sends instructions to, each of the one or more agents. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288622 | Managing Server Farms - Manual management of server farms is expensive. Low-level tools and the sheer complexity of the task make it prone to human error. By providing a typed interface using service combinators for managing server farms it is possible to improve automated server farm management. Metadata about a server farm is obtained, for example, from disk images, and this is used to generate a typed environment interface for accessing server farm resources. Scripts are received, from a human operator or automated process, which use the environment interface and optionally also pre-specified service combinators. The scripts are executed to assemble and link together services in the server farm to form and manage a running server farm application. By using typechecking server farm construction errors can be caught before implementation. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288623 | System and Method for Deployment of a Wireless Infrastructure - A method is used for deployment of a wireless infrastructure. The method comprises deploying a plurality of access ports in a facility based on a layout that depends on a type of the facility. The method comprises receiving at least one parameter from at least one of the plurality of access points. The method comprises dynamically determining settings of the plurality of access points based on the at least one parameter. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288624 | METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR THE COMPOSITION OF SERVICES - Method for multiphase service composition in a distributed computing environment comprising at least one client and at least one server, and involving at least one service, which defines a specific format for composition messages associated with multiphase remote procedure calls. This format is different from the one of regular server messages. Once such a composition message is received by the client, it recognizes this specific format and can automatically invoke at least one service on any server by sending a new request message including the arguments passed in this composition message. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288625 | RFID DEVICE GROUPS - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates configuring at least one radio frequency identification (RFID) device. An RFID network can include at least one device associated with a device group, wherein the device group corresponds to a characteristic. An organizational manager can uniformly configure the at least one device based at least in part upon membership of the device group. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288626 | STRUCTURE FOR RESETTING A HYPERTRANSPORT LINK IN A BLADE SERVER - A design structure embodied in a machine readable storage medium for designing, manufacturing, and/or testing a design is described for resetting a HyperTransport link in a blade server, including reassigning, by a blade management module, a gate signal from enabling a transceiver to signaling a HyperTransport link reset; sending, by the blade management module to a reset sync module on an out-of-band bus, the gate signal; and in response to the gate signal, sending, by the reset sync module to the blade processor, HyperTransport reset signals. The HyperTransport link includes a bidirectional, serial/parallel, high-bandwidth, low-latency, point to point data communications link. The blade server includes the blade processor, the reset sync module, and the baseboard management controller. The blade server is installed in the blade center. The blade center includes the blade management module. The blade management module is coupled to the baseboard management controller by the blade communication bus. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288627 | STORAGE NETWORK AND METHOD FOR STORAGE NETWORK DEVICE MAPPING - Structure, Structure, system, apparatus, method, and computer program for managing and configuring a computer storage system by mapping the topology and connectivity of all servers, storage devices, and storage device controllers within the storage subsystem, based on unique identifiers especially World Wide Number (WWN) identifiers. The method includes querying a server to identify host bus adapters coupled to the server, querying each host bus adapter to identify attached device controllers, issuing a read connection information command to the device controller and returning the connection results including identifying devices coupled to the device controller, and storing the returned connection results in a data structure. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080294760 | HOT WITH MY READERS - Embodiments of the invention are directed to identifying topics that are of interest to users belonging to a selected online community, across multiple online communities visited by the users. Online communities include blogs, websites, wikis, etc. For each online community, click activity or other client behaviors are tracked and analyzed to determine statistical metrics about community activity, such as which articles, links, services, or other network resources are popular in the online community. At least some of the analysis can be performed by clients that access the online communities, by a server of each online community, and/or by a central tracking system. The results for each community may be further analyzed relative to each other. The results are filtered for the selected community and provided for the selected community. For example, a list of the most popular links for all users belonging to the authored community may be provided. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294761 | ACTIVATION OF THE CONTENT OF WELCOME SCREENS WITHOUT LOSING AVAILABILITY - The present invention is directed to the activation of the content of anonymous welcome screens without losing availability. A method in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention includes: providing a wrapper application on a first set of application servers, configured for high performance and availability, with the goal of quickly providing and serving a dynamic welcome screen corresponding to the application using a second set of application servers, independent from the first set of application servers and configured for high functionality and security, wherein the content of the welcome screen is obtained by reading national language sensitive (NLS) content from corresponding updatable text storage areas; wherein the welcome screen remains available to a user regardless of an operational status of the application on the first application server. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294762 | Distributed means of organizing an arbitrarily large number of computers - A technique for organizing a plurality of computers such that message broadcast, content searching, and computer identification of the entire collection or a subset of the entire collection may be performed quickly without the use of a controlling computer. The technique describes the creation, operation, and maintenance of a connection scheme by which each computer in the collection appears to be the top level of a hierarchical array. The maintenance of this hierarchical connection scheme allows one to many communications throughout the collection of computers to scale geometrically rather than linearly. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294763 | DISPLAY OUTPUT SETTING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing device which executes steps of transmitting a request of specification information of a display device connected to a terminal via a network, receiving the specification information of a display device connected to the terminal, determining display output set values suitable for the specifications of the display device from the terminal on the basis of the specification information of the display device and display output set values for the specifications of the display device stored in a display output set value management table, setting the determined display output set values in a display output set value file, receiving input information of the terminal via the network, generating display information on the basis of the input information and the display output set values stored in the display output set value file, and transmitting the generated display information to the terminal via the network. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294764 | STORAGE MEDIUM BEARING HBA INFORMATION PROVISION PROGRAM, HBA INFORMATION PROVISION METHOD AND HBA INFORMATION PROVISION APPARATUS - A storage medium bears a program which controls a plurality of HBA drivers for controlling operations of a plurality of HBAs connected to a few storage devices through a SAN, a plurality of specific libraries in an SNIA HBA API, each having a function of acquiring information on the corresponding HBA, from the corresponding HBA driver as HBA information, and a common library in the SNIA HBA API, having a function of acquiring HBA information from the respective specific libraries, thereby to acquire the HBA information items and to provide them to a SAN management manager. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294765 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD - The present invention teaches and claims a communication device including a communication section that performs communication with respect to a peripheral device for exchanging information; a delay time measuring section that measures a delay time elapsed from when the peripheral device is inquired for information acquisition until the peripheral device returns a response; and a delay time determining section that controls the number of communication sessions based on the delay time. The present invention further claims and teaches a device management method to maximizing communications sessions and minimizes response time. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294766 | WIRELESS MESH POINT PORTABLE DATA TERMINAL - A portable data terminal (PDT) adapted to participate in a wireless mesh network including a plurality of peer PDTs can comprise: a PDT module including an encoded information reading (EIR) device, and a mesh point (MP) module communicatively coupled to the PDT module. The MP module can include a microcontroller and at least one wireless communication interface and can be configured to perform IEEE 802.11-conformant wireless station services including authentication, de-authentication, privacy, and MAC service data unit delivery, and IEEE 802.11-conformant wireless distribution system services including association, disassociation, distribution, integration, and re-association. The MP module can be further configured, responsive to receiving a MAC frame addressed to a recipient inside the wireless mesh network, to deliver the MAC frame using the distribution service. The MP module can be further configured, responsive to receiving a MAC frame addressed to a recipient outside of the wireless mesh network, to deliver the MAC frame using the integration service. The MP module can be further configured to route an incoming MAC frame according to its destination address and the frame control field. The MP module can be further configured to cause the PDT module to exit said sleeping state responsive to receiving a mobile management software (MMS) wake-up command. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080301275 | MANAGED RACKING SYSTEM - An optimized racking system is disclosed for computer installation to communicate with a computer network. This system comprises a plurality of server modules, a plurality of switching modules and a central patching facility. Each of the server modules is adapted to receive at least one server computer, and each of the switching modules is adapted to receive at least one communications switch. The central patching facility is adapted to connect at least one switch for communication with at least one remote computer. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301276 | System and method for controlling and managing electronic communications over a network - A system and method to control and manage electronic communications transmitted over a network are described. An electronic communication is generated at a point of origin coupled to a sender user. Status of the electronic communication is further managed at the point of origin based on a predetermined number of selectable parameters associated with the electronic communication. Specifically, a set of communication parameters are retrieved from at least one field of an electronic communication generated by a sender user. Selection of at least one identification parameter related to the electronic communication is further facilitated. An identifier code associated with the electronic communication is further generated based on the one or more identification parameters and the set of communication parameters. A duplicate copy of the electronic communication is finally generated and the duplicate copy and the associated identifier code are further stored in a data storage device designed to facilitate ready production of the stored electronic communication through various search protocols. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301277 | Web system, communication control device, and storage medium - A disclosed Web system includes an image forming apparatus; a communication control device connected to the image forming apparatus and including a print server function; and an information processing apparatus connected via a network and the communication control device to the image forming apparatus and configured to obtain information on the image forming apparatus in the form of Web information from the communication control device. The information processing apparatus includes a Web information request unit configured to send an information request to the communication control device to obtain the Web information, the information request including a language identifier. The communication control device includes a Web information storing unit configured to store the Web information, and a Web information returning unit configured to retrieve the Web information corresponding to the language identifier from the Web information storing unit and to send the retrieved Web information to the information processing apparatus. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301278 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZING DATA BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A NETWORKED ENVIRONMENT - A source communication device comprises a cluster manager to group destination device connections into a plurality of performance clusters. The cluster manager then causes a synchronization mechanism to be generated for each performance cluster. Each synchronization cluster can then allow data to be optimally shared between the source device and destination devices within a given cluster. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080307079 | Apparatus and Method For Managing Addresses of Network Elements - The present invention relates apparatus and method for managing addresses of network elements connected to a network. An IGD (Internet Gateway Device) of the present invention comprises a WAN device conducting gateway function of a home network or other network, and a LAN device that communicates with the WAN device and has address management information used for management of a 16-byte-long IPv6 addresses to be assigned to the element. The address management information is set or read by a command received from a remote element on the network in which a control application is running. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307080 | Network Management Method, a System and a Device - A device manages a management database in the form of objects to be managed that are referenced according to a reference specification. Equipment exchanges management data in the form of data structures indicated by patterns each corresponding to a respective referenced object and being assigned a respective identifier. In order to manage a given object, the device and the equipment store synchronization information associating the reference of the given object and the corresponding pattern identifier. In order to manage a given object, the equipment sends the corresponding pattern assigned the respective identifier and a data ticket which has a structure indicated by said pattern and is assigned said identifier. The device translates the pattern into the respective referenced object as a function of the identifier of said pattern and the synchronization information, and then stores the data from the received ticket in the management database. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307081 | System and method for controlling non-compliant applications in an IP multimedia subsystem - A system and method that enables session-based and non-session-based application services to be controlled and managed within the IMS/NGN architecture. The IMS/NGN architecture includes a service layer and a transport layer. IMS service control functions are implemented within the service layer, and RACF and transport functions are implemented within the transport layer. The transport functions include access and core network functions, which have corresponding QoS resources. The access or core network function includes an application service control function (ASCF), which includes a PD-FE and a functional element for inspecting packet data flows, and identifying and classifying application services associated with the flows. The ASCF is employed to signal the IMS service control functions on behalf of non-session-based application services, and to reserve and allocate the QoS resources needed to support packet data flows associated with the non-session-based services. As a result, service providers can provide users or subscribers of such non-session-based services with guaranteed or differentiated QoS and/or differentiated service plans, thereby allowing charges to be calculated for the non-session-based services and service plans that are commensurate with the value of the respective service or plan. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307082 | Dynamically discovering a system topology - In one embodiment, the present invention includes a method for dynamically discovering a topology of a system having a plurality of point-to-point (PTP) links via a routine that communicates a link exchanged parameter with at least one component coupled to a system bootstrap processor (SBSP), sets a minimal set of routing infrastructure information based on the communication, and determines presence of a neighboring component to a target component based on a communication from the SBSP to the target component using the minimal set of routing infrastructure information. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307083 | GATEWAY MANAGED BY SPECIFIC DOMAIN NAME AND METHOD THEREOF - A method of managing a gateway by a specific domain name is provided. The method includes firstly setting a DNS to connect to the internet. Next, a specific domain name for the gateway is defined. Then, the specific domain name is stored in the DNS for connecting the gateway according to the specific domain name. The present method maps the specific domain name to an IP address of the gateway, such that a user can manage the gateway by using the specific domain name instead of memorizing the IP address of the gateway, which is more convenient. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307084 | STORAGE UNIT INFORMATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR USER TERMINAL - The invention enables the control of the information in a storage unit in a user terminal, prevents data from leaking to unauthorized users and protects information in the user terminal. A management OS manages the input/output to/from a user work OS in the user terminal, identifies a control-triggering condition set by a management server, controls the information in the storage unit storing the user work OS-related information so that information leakage can be prevented, and it also backs up the user work OS-related information to the storage apparatus using the user work OS input/output information. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307085 | ENHANCED DOMAIN NAME GENERATION AND REGISTRATION - Methods of the present inventions allow for generating and providing an enhanced domain name. An exemplary method may comprise providing an enhanced domain to a second party. The enhanced domain may comprise a domain name, a web space automatically enabled and associated with the domain name, and at least one application automatically enabled and associated with the domain name. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307086 | Workflow Anywhere: Invocation of Workflows from a Remote Device - A method and program for providing the ability for systems personnel to use a personal wireless device, such as a mobile phone, palm device, or blackberry device, to receive a system alert regarding a developing situation requiring action and to be notified of pre-selected workflows that can resolve the situation prompting the alert. The systems personnel are then able to select a workflow, provide needed parameters, and provide the human approval to execute the workflow. The application packages the information provided by the user into a form usable by the orchestration/provisioning server. The server will perform the requested workflow as if entered on a local console and will respond to the device with a workflow status. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080313316 | Internet control system communication protocol, method and computer program - A controller, method and computer medium are provided for controlling communications between a control area network and a data network. The method includes receiving user input at a controller coupled to the control area network from a node coupled to the data network, receiving user input at the controller from a node coupled to the control area network, and instructing an internet appliance coupled to the control area network to perform a command based on at least one of the received user inputs. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080313317 | Network Management Using Peer-to-Peer Protocol - A method operates a network management system comprising nodes which are used as manager and/or agent nodes. At least one node communicates with at least one other node using a peer-to-peer protocol. A network management system and a node in a management network system are used to carry out said method. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080313318 | PROVIDING ENHANCED DATA RETRIEVAL FROM REMOTE LOCATIONS - Techniques are described for providing client computing nodes with enhanced access to data from remote locations, such as by providing and using local capabilities specific to the remote locations. In at least some situations, the access of a client computing node to data from a remote location may be enhanced by automatically performing activities local to the client computing node that improve the efficiency of communications sent between the client computing node and the remote location. As one example, access to data from a remote service may be enhanced by locally performing activities specific to the remote service, such as by using information about the remote service's internal mechanisms to cause the desired data to be provided from internal storage devices of the remote service without passing through front-end or other intermediate devices of the remote service while traveling to the client computing node. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080313319 | System and method for providing multi-protocol access to remote computers - A remote administration system's ability to communicate with remote computers using in-band communications is contingent on many factors (e.g., the operability of the network over which the in-band communications is carried and, to some extent, the correct operation of the software on the remote computer). Accordingly, there may come a time (e.g., during a network outage) where the remote administration system can no longer communicate with the remote computer over the preferred communications protocol (e.g., using in-band communications). In such a case, a status detector of the remote administration system may detect that an error has occurred (e.g., by “pinging” the remote computer and getting no response or by losing an open network connection) and then switch to a less preferred communications protocol (e.g., using out-of-band communications). | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080313320 | Method and system for generating a space signature - A method and system implementing a process for generating a signature for a network space using existing resources in the space. The process for generating a signature for a space involves discovering the resources in the space and generating a signature for the space using the identification of the devices. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080313321 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING PRESENCE INFORMATION - An improved system and method for communicating Presence Information. According to various embodiments, the sequence of actions undertaken in established Presence procedures are changed, and enhancements are also provided for Watcher information notifications. Upon the initiation of a Presence Service, the Presence Source starts publishing Presence Information about a Presentity using a soft-state approach. Instead of having publication occur first, the Presence Source makes a subscription for the Watcher information first or simply waits until the Presence Server contacts the Presence Source. As a result, publication occurs only when there is a demand therefor. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080320120 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VISUALIZATION OF WEB SERVICES DISTRIBUTED MANAGEMENT (WSDM) RESOURCES - An apparatus and method provides visualization of IT resources that are exposed as WSDM resources. A management system with a console provides visibility and functionality for WSDM resources by employing a visualization mechanism that processes standardized visualization metadata that is sent from a WSDM resource. The visualization mechanism uses standardized information to enable the management system console to display a robust presentation of the resource without needing to update the management system and console code when new types of resources are added. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090006589 | CONTROL OF SENSOR NETWORKS - A method and apparatus is provided for generating an index and creating a network of devices based on the index. Information and data may be provided via the network. In one example, a request may be received from a user at a service. The service may maintain an index containing characteristics of devices. Any number or type of devices may be selected to participate in the network. Also, the network may be subsequently modified by the addition or removal of any device from the network. Information or data received from the network devices may be returned to the user requesting the information via the service. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006590 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling a Management System to Interface with Managed Devices - The invention includes a method and apparatus for interfacing with a managed device. A method according to one embodiment includes receiving a message including an identifier indicative of a location at which interface information associated with the managed device is stored, obtaining the interface information, and initiating a request to perform a function on the managed device using the interface information. The interface information includes information adapted for use by a management system to interface with the managed device. The interface information includes one or more interface routines and one or more interface routine descriptions. The interface routine(s) is specified using an interpreted language, such as Java, Visual Basic, and the like. The interface routine description is specified using a descriptive language, such as XML, XHTML, and the like. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006591 | DASHBOARD INTERFACE GROUP IDENTIFIER - A device receives multiple identifiers associated with a customer of a network, receives multiple products associated with the customer and provided by the network, groups the multiple identifiers into a single customer identifier, and associates the single customer identifier with the multiple products. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006592 | NETWORK EVALUATION GRID TECHNIQUES - Network evaluation grid techniques are presented. Local specifications for traffic patterns are evaluated for local traffic on local grids of a grid computing environment and reported out. The local traffic reported out is then evaluated in response to global traffic pattern specifications and a global traffic policy in order to identify one or more remedial actions to take or to recommend in response to that evaluation. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006593 | REPLICA/CACHE LOCATOR, AN OVERLAY NETWORK AND A METHOD TO LOCATE REPLICATION TABLES AND CACHES THEREIN - A replica/cache locator, a method to locate replication tables and caches in an overlay network having multiple nodes and an overlay network. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) determining a network distance between a first node of the multiple nodes in the overlay network and each of the remaining multiple nodes, (2) calculating m clusters of the multiple nodes based on the network distances and (3) designating at least a single node from the m clusters to include a replication table of the first node. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006594 | Method and system for remote manageability of networked computers - A method and system may allow a management server in a first network to communicate via a mediator server with a management module of a computing system in a second network. The mediator server may establish a communication connection to the management module and the data transferred from the management server to the management module may be associated with the communication connection. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006595 | Edge traversal service dormancy - A system maintains a dormant state in the host, in which no beacons (or “bubbles”) are transmitted from the host when no application or service (collectively, “processes”) of the host is accepting unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service. When at least one application or service begins to accept unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host enters a qualified state and begins transmitting the beacons. As each additional application or service begins to accept such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is maintained. As applications and services terminate acceptance of such traffic, the number of accepting applications and services is decremented. When the last application or service terminates acceptance of unsolicited traffic via the edge traversal service, the host re-enters the dormant state and ceases transmission of its beacons. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006596 | Dynamic address redemption and routing in ZigBee networks - Dynamic address redemption and reallocation is performed in a ZigBee network. When a router node attempts to join a parent with no available address space, the parent requests available address space from child router nodes and possibly from the entire network. If available address space can be found, it is redeemed and reallocated to the router node wishing to join the network. A lookup table may be maintained at all nodes to track changes in address allocation. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006597 | Trust Evaluation - A solution for evaluating trust in a computer infrastructure is provided. In particular, a plurality of computing devices in the computer infrastructure evaluate one or more other computing devices in the computer infrastructure based on a set of device measurements for the other computing device(s) and a set of reference measurements. To this extent, each of the plurality of computing devices also provides a set of device measurements for processing by the other computing device(s) in the computer infrastructure. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006598 | System and Method for Efficient Storage of Long-Lived Session State in a SIP Server - A SIP server can be deployed in a two-tier architecture, including an engine tier for processing of SIP communications and a state tier for maintaining the state associated with these communications. The state tier can include RAM-based replicas that provide data to the engines. Some of the SIP session state can be moved to the database in order to reduce the memory requirements of the state tier. Upon determining that a transaction boundary has been reached where the session state is steady, the state replica can save the data to the database. A hint can be received from the engine tier by the state replica indicating that the state data is ready to be saved. Subsequently, the data can be removed from the state tier by nulling out the bytes of actual data, while preserving the primary key, locking and timer information so as not to impact latency. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006599 | OFF-PEAK BACKGROUND DELIVERY - Methods, systems, and machine readable media are disclosed for managing bandwidth utilization including off-peak, background delivery of content. According to one embodiment, a method of managing bandwidth used for delivering content to a plurality of users can comprise determining one or more destinations for the content and determining available bandwidth for delivering the content to the one or more destinations. A set of criteria can be applied to the content, the one or more destinations for the content, and the available bandwidth. A schedule for delivery of the content can be generated based on applying the set of criteria. The content can be delivered to the one or more destinations based on the schedule. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006600 | NETWORK IDENTIFICATION AND CONFIGURATION USING NETWORK SIGNATURE - Methods, computer program products, systems and data structures for generating a signature for a network are described. A network signature may include, for example, network information associated with a network (e.g., IP address, MAC address, domain name, DNS name, routing information, phone number, etc.). A signature of a network that has previously been created can be stored to enable identification of the network in the future and to record parameters, settings, properties and attributes previously used for that network. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006601 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT METHOD IN STORAGE SYSTEM - An object of the present invention is to recognize the presence of a business-use computer that can be a management target of a management computer, and to register the recognized business-use computer as a management target host. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006602 | MULTI-HOST MANAGEMENT SERVER IN STORAGE SYSTEM, PROGRAM FOR THE SAME AND PATH INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - Provided is a multi-host management server that includes: a reception section that receives failure information about paths from hosts and stores the received failure information in a failure information reception queue; an extraction section that extracts from the failure information reception queue plural pieces of failure information about a plurality of paths received from a common host; a retrieval section that retrieves failure information about one path from the extracted plural pieces of failure information about the plurality of paths; a registration section that registers information indicating a host in a host refresh queue for updating path information; a deletion section that deletes, after the registration, the plural pieces of failure information about the plurality of paths received from the common host from the failure information reception queue; and an execution section that executes update of path information for the relevant host. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006603 | Methods for Operating Virtual Networks, Data Network System, Computer Program and Computer Program Product - The invention relates to a method for operating virtual networks. The method comprises providing a first virtual network ( | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006604 | Communication across multiple game applications - Systems for communication across multiple game applications are provided. In various embodiments, systems of the present invention may include a first application server hosting a first game application, a second application server hosting a second game application that is different from the first game application, a first client device for interaction with the first game application, a second client device for interaction with the second game application, and a universe management server for maintaining information about the first client device and the second client device. The information maintained in the universe management server may include game application interaction information, which allows the universe management server to facilitate real-time communication between a user of the first client device and a user of the second client device. The universe management system may further receive communications from both client devices via the first and second application server. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090013063 | METHOD FOR ENABLING INTERNET ACCESS TO INFORMATION HOSTED ON CSD - The disclosure describes a method for enabling internet access to information hosted on a computer or a storage device (CSD), even without having a web server software on the CSD. The CSD is registered with a server and assigned an ID by the server. Information about all CSDs is stored in a database on the server. A unique resource locator (URL) is created for each file intended to be shared. The URLs of all hosted files are stored in a file called the registry file residing on the CSD. An intending recipient may enter the URL of the desired file in a web browser. The URL is sent from the web browser to the server. The server forwards the URL to the CSD The file is retrieved from the CSD and sent to the server. The server forwards the file to the recipient computer, where the web browser displays it. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090013064 | MANAGING DISTRIBUTED DEVICES WITH LIMITED CONNECTIVITY - A method of managing devices may include downloading information to a courier device from an enterprise. The information may be information for performing a device management operation. The method also includes communicating the information from the courier device to a monitored agent coupled to at least one of a disconnected device and an intermittently connected device. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090013065 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING COMPUTER PROGRAM - When an information processing apparatus has moved from one sub-area to another sub-area, anycast is performed to a plurality of management servers using an IP address for anycast in accordance with network management information. Network management information is acquired from a management server which has responded to the anycast. The acquired network management information and installed device driver information are analyzed. If there is a device driver for a device belonging to the sub-area managed by the management server which has responded, one of the devices belonging to the other sub-area is selected as a default device. This arrangement enables the selection of an appropriate default printer when a client has moved from a network environment managed by one management server to another network environment managed by another management server. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090013066 | Network management system and method - A network management method includes receiving network requirements of a network application/service of an entity. Thereafter, network resource capability is determined over a plurality of network providers to meet the received network requirements. Finally, network resources of at least one of the plurality of network providers are dynamically assigned to the network application/service, upon determining network capability over the plurality of network providers, to meet the received network requirements. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090013067 | Data transfer system, data transfer method and data transfer apparatus - A transmitter-side access point measures a transmission delay between the transmitter-side access point and a receiver-side access point, and calculates a threshold based on the transmission delay. Unless the amount of data from a source user terminal exceeds the threshold, the transmitter-side access point transmits data over a network in response to a request from the receiver-side access point. When the amount of data from the source user terminal exceeds the threshold, the data is transported as being stored in a physical medium to the receiver-side access point through transportation service. The receiver-side access point obtains the data from the transported physical medium, and transfers the data to a destination user terminal. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090019140 | Method for backup switching spatially separated switching systems - A 1:1 redundancy is provided. An identical clone being assigned to each switching system that is to be protected as a redundant partner comprising identical hardware, software, and database. The transfer is done in a fast, secure, and automatic manner by a superimposed, real-time capable monitor which establishes communication to the switching systems that are arranged in pairs. The transfer to the redundant switching system is done with the aid of the network management and the central controllers of the two switching systems. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019141 | Network management - A tool for managing a computer network includes a gateway service module that identifies a gateway for a network and a network information service module. The network information service module identifies devices in the network, determines at least one property for each of the identified devices, and creates a network information data structure for storing device properties. A communication agent service module transmits at least one determined device property to other agent service modules associated with the network, receives at least one device property from another agent service module associated with the network, and provides the received at least one property device to the network information service module. A method of monitoring a computer network is also provided. The method includes identifying devices in a network, determining at least one property for each of the identified devices, receiving at least one determined device property from another device the network, and creating a network information data structure for storing the determined device properties. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019142 | Fibre channel intelligent target management system - In one embodiment, a network device receives a port login directed to a target from a first host. The network device determines whether at least one other host is currently logged in to the target. The network device may then send a port login to the target corresponding to whether at least one other host is currently logged in to the target. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019143 | Redirection techniques in a communication network - Systems and methods are provided for redirecting a client device to a network service in a communication network is described. In one implementation, the communication network includes at least a first and a second service provisioning environment each capable of providing the network service. The service provisioning environments are addressable under a common first domain name that is resolvable into a dedicated first network address of each service provisioning environment. In accordance with an exemplary method, the following steps are carried out in the first service provisioning environment: receiving a first client request at a first network address of the first service provisioning environment, responding to the first client request with a redirection to a dedicated second domain name of the first service provisioning environment, the second domain name being resolvable into a second network address of the first service provisioning environment, receiving a second client request at the second network address, and initiating the establishment of a session with the requesting client device over the second network address to provide the network service. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019144 | Method and Apparatus for Scaling a User Interface Adaptively to an Object Discovery/Display System with Policy Driven Filtering - The present invention provides a method, apparatus and computer instructions for scaling a user interface adaptively to an object discovery or display system with policy driven filtering. A number of filters are defined by the user in an initial setup. The filter includes a target number of discovered objects and a metric for filtering discovered objects. Once the initial setup is complete, the present invention automatically triggers or deactivates the filters and dynamically applies one or more filters based on the number of discovered objects and rules defined by the user. Resulting discovered objects are displayed in the user interface to the user. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090024724 | Computing System And System Management Architecture For Assigning IP Addresses To Multiple Management Modules In Different IP Configuration - A system is provided to assign IP (Internet Protocol) addresses to plural management modules under different IP modes. The system management modules are configured in a computing system that is integrated in a single chassis. All the system management modules are connected through a first management network to be assigned with a static IP address or a DHCP. Besides, a secondary system management network is used for each of the management modules to facilitate the assignment of pre-assigned private IP addresses based on the board IDs of the management modules. When DHCP mode is selected, IP configuration will be performed automatically. Namely in DHCP mode, even if the system is disconnected from the external network, the system management can be done through the system management network with the pre-assigned private IP address. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024725 | Method and apparatus to integrate and manage an optical network terminal and a broadband home router - Common techniques for processing software updates have Optical Network Terminal (ONT) and Broadband Home Router (BHR) managers to manage the ONTs and BHRs respectively from separate remote locations in a network. In contrast, a system employing ‘an example’ embodiment of the invention may receive network traffic for an ONT and BHR (“components”) via a single management channel. The system parses signals (e.g., software updates) and processes the management signals with a processor in a first component (e.g., ONT). The system converts a remaining software update to a format compatible with a management channel between the components to forward to the second component (e.g., BHR) for processing. In this way, the system may update multiple components using a single management channel. Thus, software updates or other management procedures can be performed using a single management channel with improved efficiency. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024726 | DEVICE FOR NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PROFILE - The present invention relates to a device for a network system and a method of transmitting a profile in a network system. The method provides a user with convenience in remote control and monitoring operation of appliances. By this method, a user, for example, who is locating at home or out-of-home, can control the operation or monitor the operational state of various appliances such as refrigerator or laundry machine through a living network installed at home, such as RS-485 network, a low power RF network, or a power line network. The method according to the present invention further provides a user with effective network service by continuously managing and updating information on all devices constituting the network using a network profile. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024727 | NETWORK SYSTEM MANAGEMENT METHOD - A network system management method is provided. According to the method, a user inside or outside home can control or monitor the operations of appliances such as refrigerator or laundry machine through a living network such as an RS-485 network, a small output RF network, and a power line network provided inside home so that the user can perform remote control and monitor. Also, when a new device to which no address is assigned is connected in a state where a plurality of network managers are connected to the living network, only an arbitrary network manager sets and registers the address of the corresponding device and updates and manages the homenet profile suitable therefor through interface with the other network manager or a primary network manager sets and registers the address of the corresponding device and updates and manages the homenet profile suitable therefor through interface with a secondary network manager so that it is possible to effectively manage and control the devices connected to the network without redundancy error on the network to which the plurality of network managers are connected. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024728 | Advanced multi-network client device for wideband multimedia access to private and public wireless networks - A wireless device (e.g., a wireless smart phone) uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data, or other position-indicating data, to accurately determine its location in relation to multi-layered wireless networks that the device may see concurrently. If location information is available, the device employs a user-defined priority table to select the order of user-contracted networks available at that location in which the device will register. If location information is unavailable, the device employs a technology priority table to select Common Air Interface (CAI) options for the invention device radio parameters (e.g., GSM, cdma2000, IS-136, IEEE 802.11x, etc.) to search for an available network to access. Information is gathered and stored in databases within the invention device allowing it to be registered in multiple wireless networks. The inventive device provides unique access codes to each wireless network with which a user has contracted, without the intervention of any “anchor” (home) network. The invention facilitates equivalent “home”, or personalized, service in any network by using these features for automatic technology adaptation. This allows the invention device to receive service as if it is in a “home” network no matter what network it is traveling through. The invention provides a ubiquitous experience allowing the user to traverse multiple wireless networks with seamless access to multiple systems and services provided by those networks. It also provides a platform to facilitate the customization of wireless services for business customers. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024729 | Method and central processing unit for managing peer-to-peer connections - The present invention relates to a method for managing a peer-to-peer connection via a communication network ( | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024730 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING MEDIA REQUEST IN MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION PROCESS - A method for processing a media request in a multimedia communication process is provided, including: adjusting, by a multimedia application server, a media request queue according to information contained in a media request message or a media request cancellation message received from a first client; determining all the media requests of which positions in the media request queue are changed due to the adjustment; and sending, to one or more clients corresponding to the media requests of which positions in the media request queue are changed, media request queue position status messages to notify the clients corresponding to the media requests of which positions in the media request queue are changed of updated position status of the media requests. A device for processing a media request in a multimedia communication process is also provided. The demands of various multimedia communication services such as the PoC service can be satisfied well. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024731 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING TASK IN NETWORK AND RECORDING MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE METHOD - A method and apparatus for generating a task having at least one action and/or at least one action based on previously agreed service standards to control a task-based device in a home network using universal plug and play (UPnP), and a recording medium storing a program for executing the method are provided. The method includes fetching a task generator using a device having a user interface (UI) function from among devices connected to the network; displaying a control menu including service items based on the fetched task generator using the UI function; and if a service item based on the task generator is selected from the service items included in the control menu, generating at the device the task based on the task generator. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024732 | APPARATUS FOR PREFIX CONTROL AND APPARATUS FOR PREFIX CHOICE - Disclosed is a technique which enables a communication node connected to a router made to advertise a plurality of prefixes to use an address including an appropriate prefix. According to this technique, an MR (Mobile Router) ( | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090031015 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ARRANGING AND OUTPUTTING DATA ELEMENTS AT A NETWORK SITE - A system and method for arranging and providing a plurality of display elements are provided. A plurality of users are prompted to enter element information related to a plurality of corresponding display elements. Element data for each display element is received from each of the corresponding plurality of users. A plurality of display elements are generated based on the corresponding element data. Element information related to each of the display elements is stored. A request from a user for a plurality of display elements is received. Responsive to the request, a plurality of display elements is selected for output to the user based on the stored element information. An output arrangement for the plurality of selected display elements is determined based on a predetermined arrangement algorithm. The plurality of selected display elements are outputted at a network site so that they are displayed to the user in the output arrangement. The output arrangement comprises a geometrically-defined mosaic of concatenated display elements. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090031016 | INTERFACE APPARATUS, MAIN APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD FOR USE IN THE INTERFACE APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an interface apparatus includes a register which registers each connection ID of the plurality of communication terminals registered in a registration table of the main apparatus in a registration server on the SIP network at a predetermined registration cycle, a connector which connects among the plurality of communication terminals and the SIP network, to make communication among the plurality of communication terminals registered by the resister and the SIP network, a detector which detects a failure regarding the communication in a state where communication is made with the registration server, and a controller which makes communication with the registration server at a recovery cycle that is shorter than the registration cycle, to recover connection to the registration server, when the failure is detected. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090031017 | System, Method, and Computer Program Product for Centralized Management of an Infiniband Distributed System Area Network - A method, system, and product in a data processing system are disclosed for providing centralized management of an INFINIBAND distributed system-area network that includes multiple end nodes. A manager application is established in one of the end nodes. An agent application is established in one or more end nodes. Each agent application is independent from the manager application. The manager application maintains a current list of active agent applications and uses the list to manage the agent applications in the end nodes. | 01-29-2009 |
| 20090037566 | Computer Network - In a network of computers, e.g. the internet, each computer records the information sources it accesses, and these records are used to identify computers whose users share common interests, as indicated by the sources they access. A virtual network is created linking computers whose users have been identified as sharing similar interests data on what sources have been accessed by each user are shared with neighbouring computers, a defined by the virtual network. Computers can also pass on information on sources accessed received from one neighbour to other neighbours. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090037567 | LINK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A technology is disclosed for efficiently managing the peer relationship, and in particular for allowing to discover which of one or more communication links of the network entity is connected to another network entity having the same identifier. According to this technology, for example, the ID Controller ( | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090037568 | GROUP COMMUNICATIONS - According to one aspect of the present invention, there is provided apparatus for use with a group communication network having an addressing database, the apparatus being addressable by a user terminal connected to the network, the apparatus comprising: a receiver module for receiving an invitation from a user terminal connected to the network, the receiving means being arranged to accept the invitation to cause the user terminal and the apparatus to establish a communication, a data retrieval module for obtaining details of one or more users to be added to the communication, the details of being obtained from other than the addressing database, and a communication module for adding at least one user to the communication using the obtained details. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090043873 | Methods and Apparatus for Restoring a Node State - In one aspect of the invention, a method is provided. The method may include: (1) storing a snapshot of a system state of a node; (2) executing a job on the node; and (3) restoring the node to the system state using the stored snapshot of the system state. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043874 | Method and System for Replacing Hyperlinks in a Webpage - There is provided a web service system for providing a web page, which includes at least one hyperlink, to a client. Said web service system may comprise: a client history server configured to store client history information; a content repository server configured to store one or more candidate hyperlinks; and a web server configured to provide a web page to a client. Said client history information may include at least one client identifier (ID) and at least one content ID corresponding thereto. Said web server may receive from said client a request for a web page, which may comprise a client ID of said client, and obtain from said content repository server at least one content ID corresponding to the client ID of said client. Further, said web server may access said content repository server to select at least one hyperlink to be included in the web page among the candidate hyperlinks stored in said content repository server based on the at least one obtained content ID. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043875 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND NETWORK CONNECTION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus performing communication via a network by using a communication section has the following units. In other words, the communication apparatus includes: a port closing unit performing port closing in which every port except a port necessary for obtaining an address of an external apparatus to be a counterpart of the communication via the network is closed; an address obtaining unit obtaining the address of the external apparatus by using the port necessary for obtaining the address of the external apparatus; a judging unit judging properness/improperness of the network by using the address obtained by the address obtaining unit, after the port closing unit performs the port closing; and a network connection managing unit controlling to open the port used for connection to the network judged to be proper by the judging unit and to cut off connection to the network judge to be improper by the judging unit. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043876 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DEVICES AND A MANAGEMENT ENTITY IN A USER NETWORK - The present invention relates to the communication field and discloses a method for managing devices in a user network and a user network management entity which handles combining and splitting operations in the user network more efficiently. In the technical solution provided by the present invention, the management entity of the user network obtains the information about the location of the managed PANs and/or stand-alone devices, and, based on the location information, checks existence of any PAN and/or stand-alone device that can be combined or split. If any such device exists, the management entity performs the combining or splitting operation according to the combining or splitting mode preset or selected by the user. In the process of combining or splitting a PAN or stand-alone device, the user can reserve the network registration information of some relevant devices as required, update the network registration information of other devices directly, and switch the service access points to ensure continuity of network services. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043877 | SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING STANDBY RESOURCE ENTITLEMENT - An apparatus and program product for transferring entitlement to standby resources between respective computers. Standby resources are made available at a destination computer by rendering unavailable corresponding resources at a source computer. As such, the aggregate number of available standby resources may remain unchanged, but the distribution of the availability may be reapportioned according to operational requirements. Where desired, this transfer of entitlement may be accomplished automatically, dynamically and/or in a secure manner. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043878 | VIRTUAL NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM, NETWORK STORAGE DEVICE AND VIRTUAL METHOD - A virtual network storage system includes at least two network storage devices which connect to same SAN. At least one network storage device includes a device management unit for maintaining the mapping relationship between the global volume and the local volume of each network storage device, and for redirecting the access from the global volume to the network storage device which the global volume management unit of the global volume is located. At least one network storage device includes a global volume management unit for executing the access operation to the global volume according to the mapping relationship. A network storage device and virtual method are applied to the virtual network storage system. With the increasing of the network device, the ability of processing the access to the global volume is increased, and then the performance bottleneck caused by virtually operating to the network storage system. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043879 | Clear Channel Reporting and Assisting Orphaned Nodes in a Wireless Network - In a wireless network, a device regularly communicates with at least one other node or device: generally this is its parent. If a problem with communication is detected, the device is preferably able to autonomously carry out a procedure to reacquire the network. In one embodiment, if a device is unable to communicate, it enters a temporary failsafe mode until that problem can be rectified. The device is suitably able to carry out a survey of local conditions in order to assist both it and the network to find a suitable alternative channel and, if a device is unable to immediately reconnect it broadcasts the result of its survey, the Network Environment Status (NES) message, in the hope that another device on the network will hear it. This Status message may then be used by the network to select an alternative channel. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090049162 | BUFFER MANIPULATION - A method and system for increasing throughput of incoming data and outgoing data through buffer manipulation is described. A channel connection is provided for determining which buffers are used for reading incoming data. Buffer manipulation includes enabling the reading of a subset of the incoming data directly into an application buffer associated with an application when a first set of criteria is met and enabling the reading of existing data from an intermediate buffer and storing the subset of the incoming data in the intermediate buffer when a second set of criteria is met. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090049163 | DYNAMICALLY TYPED EXTENSIBLE MIB FOR SNMP AGENTS - The exemplary embodiments provide a computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for storing data associated with a Simple Network Management Protocol managed information base. A storage area identifier that defines a storage area is reserved. The storage area does not have an associated pre-defined set of identifiers that a user can perform Simple Network Management Protocol operations on. An input is received from a requester, wherein the input comprises an input identifier. A determination is made as to whether storage area identifier is a prefix of the input identifier. Responsive to a determination that storage area identifier is a prefix of the input identifier, the input is processed without referring to a definition file for the managed information base. A response indicating a result is sent to the requester. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090049164 | PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM ENABLING CALL AND ARRIVAL - A virtual device driver is installed in a client terminal and a server as software, and also a virtual hub is installed in a server as software. For example, by giving an L2-VPN function to the SIP terminal node itself, and installing the above-mentioned software in the existing server node, it is not necessary to install a special server node, and even when between the clients terminals which communicate use what kind of network environment and a protocol, peer-to-peer communication is enabled general-purpose. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090049165 | Method and system for generating instruction signals for performing interventions in a communication network, and corresponding computer-program product - A system for generating instruction signals arranged in workflow for performing interventions on network equipment included in a communication network, wherein the equipment is associated with resource proxy agents, each responsible for managing a single equipment in the network. The system includes a distributed architecture of intervention management proxy agents to generate the instruction signals. The intervention management proxy agents are interactively coupled with the resource proxy agents, whereby the instruction signals are a function of the status of the equipment in the network on which the interventions are performed. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090049166 | Defining and Implementing Policies on Managed Object-Enabled Mobile Devices - Embodiments of a system configured to manage policies, including decision policies and active policies, on an Open Mobile Alliance Device Management (OMA DM) enabled mobile client devices is described. The system is configured to manage policies, including decision policies and active policies, on mobile devices is described that includes a device policy repository, a policy decision point, a decision policy enforcer, and an active policy enforcer. The system includes a server-side process configured to allow creation, modification and transmission of defined policies to the mobile client device, and a client-side process executed on the mobile client device and configured store the defined policies in an OMA DM management tree in the mobile client device as management objects, wherein each policy of the defined policies is represented as a subnode of the management tree. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090055518 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING LIGHTWEIGHT DIRECTORY ACCESS PROTOCOL INFORMATION - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for managing a lightweight directory access protocol environment. A replication hierarchy is identified for a plurality of lightweight directory access protocol servers within the lightweight directory access protocol environment by querying the plurality of lightweight directory access protocol servers for replication information. Environment information is collected for the plurality of lightweight directory access protocol servers using the replication hierarchy, wherein the environment information for the plurality of lightweight directory access protocol servers is used to manage the lightweight directory access protocol environment. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055519 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEDIA ADAPTION - A method includes receiving a media request for a target device. The signaling information may be received from the target device and a media server. At least one attribute of the target device and the media server may be identified using the signaling information. At least one attribute of the target device and the media server may be evaluated against a service level objective to select a media format. The service level objective may include consideration of the target device and available bandwidth over a provider network. The media may be provided in the selected media format over the provider network to the target device. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055520 | METHOD FOR SCHEDULING OF STORAGE DEVICES - MAID (Massive Array of Idle Disks) technology can not stop an array group in a time zone in which if any access is made to the array group desired to be stopped. For realization of power saving, the power may be stopped in a time zone when there is no access, but frequent power-on or power-off has a possibility of shortening the life of a physical disk. In addition, if plural physical disks are collectively activated in a particular period, the power consumption of a storage system as a whole in that period is increased sharply, so that there is a possibility that the stable operation of the storage system is adversely affected. For realizing power saving, plural tasks using the storage system is by scheduled and the task execution and the power-on and power-off of a power controlled unit is controlled based on the schedule selected by a user. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055521 | METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK CONNECTION AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - In a network system where a plurality of nodes are connected to each other based on a connection table stored in each of the nodes, provided are a method of managing network connections and an information processing apparatus where connection paths between the nodes can be maintained and thereby preventing an accident such as the network being split even in the situation of a sudden disconnection of a node, and there is no need for holding the connection paths more than needed. By transmitting and receiving connection information between the nodes at a prescribed timing, and by updating the stored connection tables based on the received connection information, connection paths, between each pair of nodes, that do not pass through the same node can be maintained to be a prescribed number or more. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090063668 | TRANSFER OF OWNERSHIP OF A STORAGE OBJECT IN RESPONSE TO AN ORIGINAL OWNER NODE BECOMING AVAILABLE AFTER A PERIOD OF UNAVAILABILITY - Provided are a method, system, and article of manufacture, wherein a plurality of nodes coupled over a network are maintained, wherein a first node of the plurality of nodes initially owns a plurality of storage objects accessible via the network. A second node preemptively takes ownership of a selected storage object of the plurality of storage objects, in response to the first node becoming unavailable, wherein other nodes of the plurality of nodes can request ownership of the selected storage object while the first node is unavailable. A determination is made that the first node that originally owned the selected storage object has become available after a period of unavailability. A determination is made of the current owner node of the selected storage object, wherein the current owner node is one of the second node and the other nodes. The selected storage object is updated at the first node by the current owner node of the selected storage object, prior to allowing the first node to act on or assume ownership of the selected storage object. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090063669 | COMPUTER NETWORK AND METHOD OF OPERATING SAME TO PRELOAD CONTENT OF SELECTED WEB PAGES - A method for operating a computer network for example a school to preload the content of web addresses on the local memory, i.e. the web cache memory for use in for example a subsequent lesson. The network comprises at least one device, a web cache memory, and internet access apparatus to connect a device on the network to internet using a web browser, relevant devices on the network being accessible to a network administrator and defined network users (teachers and pupils), a method whereby one of said defined network users (teachers) uses a modified web browser to define a set of web addresses (web pages) to be accessed, said set of web addresses being stored in the network, and operates the network to cause the content of the set of web addresses to be stored on said web cache memory, whereby the content may be accessed by the pupils during said lesson via the network without further access to internet. Limits or quotas may be set up for the amount of memory space usable by each user so as to prevent overload of the memory and users may be limited to access web pages defined by one or more preload tasks on the memory at a particular time. Software to allow the method of the invention may be loaded on the web cache. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090063670 | Method and apparatus for a network hub to diagnose network operation and broadcast information to a remote host or monitoring device - A network hub in a communication network that acts as a server to network clients to push, or transmit, information regarding the state of local and remote devices and networks. The information can be one, or more, status information, which information can be one or more predefined fields in a frame, which represents a packet of data. In one embodiment, it is desirable that the frame be a “legitimate” Ethernet-type frame. The status field can be a “push”-Type status field. The push operation can be a unicast, a multicast, or a broadcast, or a hybrid transmission. The hub can be a switch, repeater, a bridge, a router, a gateway, or a hybrid thereof. Also, the hub according to the present invention can be an OSI Layer 2 device, an OSI Layer 3 device, or a hybrid thereof. It is desirable that the hub be devoid of a microprocessor. As described herein, the hub may have plural ports, for example, four, eight, or more ports. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090070446 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SECURING OF DOCUMENT PROCESSING DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH USE PATTERNS - The subject application is directed to a system and method for securing of document processing devices in accordance with use patterns. Operational data is first received associated with the historic operation of an associated document processing device is first received. Next, feature data corresponding to the available capabilities of the associated document processing device is received. Utilization data is then generated according to the received operational data and the feature data, which includes data representing underutilized capabilities of the associated document processing device. An electronic document is then output inclusive of the generated utilization data. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070447 | ENERGY MONITORING SYSTEM USING NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS - A system and method are disclosed for integrating an intelligent electronic device (IED) in a network management system. The IED may be configured to communicate using the network management protocol of the network management system. IED variables may be mapped to associated network management protocol variables to allow the network management system to access the IED variables using the network management protocol. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070448 | Techniques to allocate virtual network addresses - Techniques to allocate virtual network addresses are described. An apparatus may include a virtual network address management module. The virtual network address management module may be capable of determining an approximate age for a virtual network address, referred to herein as a virtual network address age value. The virtual network address management module may include a virtual network address assignment module, a virtual network address age generator and a message filter module. The virtual network address assignment module may be arranged to assign a virtual network address to a device at a virtual network address assignment time. The virtual network address age generator may be arranged to receive a message arrival time for a message with the virtual network address, and determine a virtual network address age value for the virtual network address with the virtual network address assignment time and the message arrival time. The message filter module may be arranged to determine whether to send the message to the device based on the virtual network address age value. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070449 | MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT METHOD AND PROGRAM FOR THE SAME - There is described a management system which makes it possible to appropriately manage the managed apparatus, while securely maintaining the productivity of the managed apparatus. The system includes the management apparatus, the managed apparatus and the HTTP server. The managed apparatus is provided with a connection controlling section that periodically connects the managed apparatus itself to the HTTP server at a regular connecting timing, so as to read information sent from the management apparatus and to write apparatus information into the HTTP server. The connection controlling section determines whether or not the managed apparatus is coupled to the HTTP server at the regular connecting timing, based on its loading status and/or a presence or absence of the current job and connects it to the HTTP server asynchronously with the regular connecting timing, when determining that the managed apparatus is not coupled to the HTTP server at the regular connecting timing. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070450 | MAIN ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATING WITHIN A NETWORK AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A MAIN ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATING WITHIN THE NETWORK - The present invention relates to a main electronic device ( | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070451 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, DESTINATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE, ADDRESS BOOK ACQUISITION METHOD AND PROGRAM - When a destination management device requests an address book of each user, a data transmission device transmits the address book to the destination management device. The destination management device stores the address book received from the data transmission device. If location information of destination information is included in the address book, the destination management device transmits the location information to the data transmission device. The data transmission device transmits the location information to an LDAP server to request the destination information. Upon receipt of the destination information, the data transmission device transmits the destination information to the destination management device. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070452 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - Functional information about a plurality of workflow executing apparatuses capable of executing a processing flow including a plurality of processing steps is managed by obtaining a first set value information for executing the processing flow in a first workflow executing apparatus, and when a second workflow executing apparatus executes the processing flow, generating a second set value information for the second workflow executing apparatus based on functional information about the second workflow executing apparatus and the first set value information. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070453 | Method and Apparatus for Limiting Reuse of Domain Name System Response Information - A method of limiting reuse of domain name information includes the steps of requesting the information by a local domain name server from an authoritative domain name server, and providing this information to a requestor, such as a client or server. The domain name information includes an allowable usage limit that represents a maximum number of times that the information can be provided to the requestor before revalidating the information. A system for limiting reuse of domain name information includes an authoritative domain name server, a local domain name server, and a requestor. The authoritative server provides the information, which includes the allowable usage limit, in response to a request by the local server. The request from the local server may include the number of times that the local server provided the information to one or more requestors as an observed usage. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090077210 | System and method for analyzing and coordinating Service-Level-Agreements (SLA) for Application-Service-Providers (ASP) - The present invention describes a system for automatically monitoring and managing Service Level Agreements on behalf of Service providers (such as Application Service providers). The system is based on a specialized SLA language that can translate complex or simple Service Level Agreements into measurable and controllable criterion. The system enables Application Service providers to set up customized Service Level Agreements with customers, and monitor, modify and control all aspects of these agreements, including billing, sales, Customer Relation Management, customer support and Quality of Service. The technology on which the present invention is based is a formula driven language that translates Service Level Agreement details into commands. As such these details can be tracked and processed to produce detailed reports and summaries. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077211 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ACCELERATED EVENT DESKTOP CLIENT - This invention relates to a network management system accelerated event desktop client. This invention also relates to a method and computer program product for controlling an accelerated event desktop client in a network management system. The network management system comprises: a probe for intercepting a system event from a monitored system and creating an event item or modifying an event item associated with the system event; a collection database server collecting, in database of event items, a new event item or modification to an existing event item; a first client and a second client; a notifying means for notifying the first client of the new event item or event item modification; and first client notifying means for notifying the second client of the new event or event item modification. Additionally the second client can retrieve event item data, corresponding to the event notification received from the first client, from the database where the event item is collected. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077212 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ACCELERATED EVENT CHANNEL - This invention relates to a network management system accelerated event channel. This invention also relates to a method and computer program product for controlling an accelerated event channel in a network management system. The network management system comprising: a probe for intercepting a system event from a monitored system and creating an event item or modifying an event item associated with the system event; a collection database server collecting, in database of event items, a new event item or modification to an existing event item; a client; a notifying means for notifying a client of the new event item or event item modification; a channel table for storing an association between a channel and a client id; and wherein the probe associates the event item with a channel and the notifying means uses the channel table to find the client association. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077213 | System and Method for Advising Network Solutions - A system and method advises network solutions. The method comprises receiving a request for a service to be implemented on a network, determining at least one solution to implement the service utilizing existing network components of the network, and presenting the at least one solution to a user. The system comprises a database storing network data for a plurality of network components in a network, an input module receiving an input indicating a requested new service for the network, a solution module searching the network data and determining at least one solution to implement the new service on the network, and an output module presenting the at least one solution to a user. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077214 | SYSTEM FOR FUSING INFORMATION FROM ASSETS, NETWORKS, AND AUTOMATED BEHAVIORS - A system for fusing information from disparate data sources is disclosed. The system comprises a database module operative to maintain an information database identifying one or more items-of-interest, and a situation display module in operative communication with the database module. An asset data plugin is in operative communication with the database module, and an asset communications plugin is operatively coupled to the asset data plugin. The asset communications plugin is configured to communicate with one or more assets. A messages plugin is in operative communication with the database module, and a network communications plugin is operatively coupled to the messages plugin. The network communications plugin is configured to communicate with one or more networks. An automated behaviors plugin is in operative communication with the database module, the asset communications plugin, and the network communications plugin. The situation display module, the asset data plugin, the messages plugin, and the automated behaviors plugin are all configured to transmit one or more items-of-interest to the database module or listen for one or more items-of-interest in the database module. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077215 | Using a managing device to configure and locally manage multiple managed devices - A management network that supports local management of managed devices by a managing device while also supporting remote management by a remote device management (DM) server. The managing device comprises a DM client that exposes a management tree for facilitating remote management by the remote DM server. The DM client comprises nodes in its management tree that correspond to the managed devices. In one embodiment, the remote DM server installs nodes needed to manage the managed devices into the management tree maintained/provided by the DM client of the managing device. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077216 | Workflow-Enabled Client - A workflow-enabled client comprises a client and a workflow manager interface unit. The workflow manager interface unit couples the client to a workflow manager to provide the automatic discovering, distributed processing and dynamic user interface generating functionality of the present invention. A communication manager of the workflow-enabled client has a registration unit that registers, and unregisters, the client with the workflow manager such as by providing a name, a data and other commands. A polling module uses a received location from the workflow manager to retrieve data. The process control module performs a plurality of processing functions such a processing polled data, storing it or providing it to other clients. The process control module can also initiate other clients. The present invention also includes a number of novel methods including a method for registering a client, a method for polling data, and a method for initiating other clients. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077217 | Workflow-Enabled Provider - A workflow-enabled provider includes a service provider and a workflow manager interface unit. The workflow manager interface unit couples the service provider to a workflow manager to provide the automatic discovering, distributed processing and dynamic user interface generating functionality. An advertisement monitor listens for broadcasts from the workflow manager regarding new clients. A request module and a response module handle the transfer of data and control signals between the workflow manager and the service provider. A process control module performs a plurality of processing functions including aggregating requests from clients, selecting requests it can service, presenting user interfaces, processing input via the service provider and controlling the service provider. The user interface module is coupled to the process control module and dynamically generates user interfaces for display by the service provider. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077218 | Software Method And System For Controlling And Observing Computer Networking Devices - Mechanisms for managing the keyboard, video or mouse commands at a target device, which may be a computer or non-computer. During a boot up cycle, the present subject matter uses the intelligent platform management interface and a BIOS management application to receive keyboard or video signals from the BIOS, convert the signals to internet protocol format, and transmit those signals to a managing computer. Controls signals may be transmitted from the managing computer to the target device. After the boot up cycle, the target device may be configured to cause the management of the computer to be transferred from the BIOS management application to an operating system management application. During normal operation, the operating system management application provides for the ability to receive at the target computer keyboard, video or mouse signals and to transmit to the managing computer keyboard, video or mouse signals generated at the target device. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077219 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONTENT ON A NETWORK INTERFACE - The disclosed invention is a system and method (collectively the “system”) for the automated management of content on a network interface. The network interface can be a web site on the World Wide Web, an Internet location, an intranet location, an extranet location, or some other form of network interface (collectively “web site”). The system can automatically create applications and links to those applications without human intervention. Examples of automated applications include newsroom applications, calendar of events, employment opportunities, project portfolio, biographies, frequently asked questions, document library, category management, product catalogs, e-mail broadcasts, surveys, and newsletters. Fully normalized hierarchies of business rules and user profiles can be supported by the system to facilitate automation and configurability. Multiple content providers can manage a single web site in a simultaneous or substantially simultaneous manner. In ASP embodiments, multiple organizations can use the system to manage multiple web sites in a substantially simultaneous manner. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090083407 | CRISSCROSS CANCELLATION PROTOCOL - Technologies, systems, and methods for ordered message delivery that avoid message races or crisscrosses between communicating nodes. For example, if Node A sends message 3 towards Node B and, shortly thereafter, Node B sends message X to Node A, Node A would like to know whether or not message X reflects Node B's state after receiving message 3. If Node B received message 3 prior to sending message X, then proper state may be maintained between the nodes. But if messages 3 and X crisscrossed, or if message 3 was never properly received by Node B, then the state between the nodes may be corrupt. Technologies, systems, and methods are provided to avoid such corruption. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090083408 | INTEGRATED DATA-MODEL AND FLOW BASED POLICY SYSTEM - Disclosed is a system for managing policies related to services offered to customers of network and service providers. The system enables operators and service providers to efficiently manage and define generic policies on top of their services via a code-free centralized interface. The infrastructure solution enables the operators, subscribers and application providers to define and enforce their service policies for each application, such as access control, charging schemes, privacy, campaign promotions, cross-selling and up-selling and mobile advertising, from one central point on top of all services and resources. Once integrated, no additional programming is required to create new policies or modify existing policies. The disclosed system enables operators to easily view and manage the data related to their business entities, such as services, handsets, subscribers and the like, and define the associated policies. The system allows defining policies on any type of service, traffic type or policy domain. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090083409 | REMOTE MONITORING OF LOCAL BEHAVIOR OF NETWORK APPLICATIONS - Computer-executable instructions comprising some or all of a program can be delivered to a client for execution on a real-time basis such that the client receives anew the computer-executable instructions for each new execution of the program. Such an environment enables instrumentation instructions to be inserted into the computer-executable instructions after a request and prior to the delivery of the computer-executable instructions. The inserted instrumentation instructions can be spread across multiple deliveries of the same computer-executable instructions, and they can be modified to account for information received from previously inserted instrumentation instructions. The instrumentation instructions can be inserted as part of the server process, the client process, or as part of a proxy server that can be used at the discretion of the program developer. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090083410 | INFORMATION NOTIFICATION SYSTEM, UPDATE INFORMATION NOTIFICATION METHOD, AND TERMINAL UNIT - An information notification system of the present invention includes a server unit | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090089409 | NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER-ASSISTED AUTHENTICATION - A data store includes previously collected client data records, each previously collected client data record associated with a respective first network address. A verification module is communicatively coupled to the data store, the module configured to determine that it is a competent verification module and to receive a verification request including user data and a second network address and further configured to respond with an indication of whether the user data corresponds to the previously collected client data record identified by the first network address corresponding to the second network address. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089410 | ENTROPY-BASED (SELF-ORGANIZING) STABILITY MANAGEMENT - In some embodiments, the invention involves calculating entropy-based stability values to be used in a framework to build a new class of network control (policy) and (state) management services. The framework may be used to build a number of self-management services to support decentralized (mesh) networks. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089411 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING MEDIA CONTENT - A computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer usable program code for distributing media content. A plurality of media files are identified for distribution. A determination is made whether any of the plurality of media files is unavailable remotely. In response to a determination that a portion of the plurality of media files is unavailable remotely, a portion of the plurality of media files is placed in an archive. A playlist identifying the plurality of media files is placed in the archive. A set of links to each of the plurality of media files that are available remotely are placed in the archive, wherein the archive is used to distribute the media content. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089412 | COMPUTER SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND MANAGEMENT METHOD - The computer system includes: a first storage system having devices that are various components for storing data transmitted from a host computer; a second storage system having devices that are various components for storing data transmitted from the first storage system; and a management apparatus that manages the first and second storage systems. The management apparatus includes a storage unit that stores configuration information, performance information and threshold values used for performance management regarding the devices in the first and second storage systems connected to the management apparatus; and a setting section that adopts and sets, when internal management information and data are copied from the first storage system to the second storage system, threshold values assigned to the devices in the first storage system to the devices in the second storage systems. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089413 | INTERMEDIATE NAS APPARATUS HAVING ACL INHERITANCE FUNCITON FOR NAMESPACE INTEGRATION - According to this invention, a computer system which provides a client node with a file system mounted into a virtual namespace, comprising: at least one file server which provides the file system; a root node which mounts the file system provided by the file server into the virtual namespace; and a network which couples the file server and the root node. The root node has an interface coupled to the network, a processor coupled to the interface, and a memory coupled to the processor. The root node is configured to: obtain access information set to a directory above a point in the virtual namespace at which the file system is to be mounted when mounting the file system into the virtual namespace; judge whether the obtained access information is to be inherited; and set, to the file system to be mounted, the obtained access information that is to be inherited. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090094355 | INTEGRATED CAPACITY AND ARCHITECTURE DESIGN TOOL - A method implemented in a computer infrastructure having computer executable code, including consolidating collected capacity architecture information, which includes data for installed resources, allocated resources and reserved resources and determining available resources based on the collected capacity architecture information. Additionally, the method includes displaying an indication the available resources and performing capacity planning based on the collected capacity architecture information and the available resources. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090094356 | Associating Physical Layer Pipes and Services Through a Program Map Table - Embodiments are directed to mapping Physical Layer Pipes (PLPs) with the service_id and with components of a service through the Program Map Table (PMT). A descriptor may be defined for this purpose. In accordance with one or more embodiments, a PLP_identifier_descriptor may contain an identifier for a physical layer pipe (PLP_id). In addition, several other PLP related parameters may be carried within the PLP_identifier_descriptor, instead of carrying the parameters in OSI Layer 1. The PLP_identifier_descriptor may be carried in several different tables, including, but not limited to, a Program Map Table (PMT). The PLP_identifier_descriptor may include a physical layer pipe identifier and, optionally, parameters for modulation, code rate, and FEC block type. A receiver, in accordance with embodiments, may be able to access the actual service content based on a combination of the L1 signalling information, legacy PSI/SI information, and the signalling information set forth in the PLP_identifier_descriptor. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090100160 | DATA SERVER ADMINISTRATION USING A CHATBOT - Provided are techniques for data server administration. Under control of a chatbot in real time, a command is received from a user for administering a data server in a natural language format. It is determined whether the data server is to be contacted to process the command. In response to determining that the data server is to be contacted, session information is retrieved to identify the data server to be contacted, the command in the natural language format is converted into one or more data server administration Application Programming Interface (API) calls, the one or more data server administration API calls to the data server are issued, and information about processing of the command is provided to the user. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100161 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS - A method and computer program product for managing interruptions including defining a communication management policy for a plurality of communication channels. Communications on the plurality of communication channels are delivered based upon, at least in part, the communications management policy. Similarly, communications on the plurality of communication channels are rejected based upon, at least in part, the communications management policy. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100162 | Sharing Policy and Workload among Network Access Devices - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to sharing policy and workload among network access devices. In aspects, a network access device receives a communication between a first and a second node. The network access device may be one of a set of network access devices responsible for processing traffic to and from a set of nodes. A network access device determines a policy to apply to the communication and at least one network device to apply the policy. The determination of the at least one network device to apply the policy may include determining which network access devices are capable of applying the policy as well as the workload on the network access devices. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100163 | Method and apparatus forWeb based storage on demand - The distributed virtual SAN infrastructure provides a plurality of host systems with a scalable dynamically expandable distributed virtual storage pool, which includes a virtual storage automatic construct protocol. The distributed virtual SAN infrastructure includes one or more IP SAN units, the management console, the distributing control management station and the network infrastructure, wherein the network infrastructure provides the communication links between all systems in this distributed virtual SAN. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100164 | Apparatus and method for providing content - An apparatus and method for providing content is provided, which performs a web service initialization through a provided local offline web server and manages a plurality of content provided through a multithreaded web service. The apparatus for providing content includes a communication unit receiving one or more sets of content; a thread creation unit creating one or more threads that are given to the content to process a work; and a page creation unit having a frame per thread and creating an image page for playing the content on a web browser. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100165 | DYNAMICALLY INTEGRATING DISPARATE COMPUTER-AIDED DISPATCH SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for dynamically integrating disparate computer-aided dispatch (CAD) systems are disclosed. The systems and methods provide bi-directional interoperability between disparate CAD systems and maintain stateful ongoing interactions between interconnected CAD systems. Information objects in one CAD system are associated and bound to related objects in other CAD systems through a centralized information hub that transforms data items intelligently to facilitate communication and interaction between the CAD systems connected to the hub. The described systems and methods maintain complete and current perspectives of all relevant information for each CAD system connected to the information hub, thereby eliminating the need for point-to-point intelligence maintained by the CAD systems about the other interconnected CAD systems. As information updates are passed from CAD systems to the information hub and back out to other CAD systems, the information hub transforms and evaluates the information updates ensuring that only necessary information updates are forwarded. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100166 | SYSTEM FOR DEVELOPMENT, MANAGEMENT AND OPERATION OF DISTRIBUTED CLIENTS AND SERVERS - A lightweight application server for use on portable or embedded devices includes an application manager and services containers. Each of these is managed by an admin server allowing for remote and rapid deployment and maintenance of applications, objects and features associated with the server-enabled portable or embedded devices. This permits portable devices like PDAs to provide server functionality to each other, in a fully portable network if desired. A system including such server-enabled portable or embedded devices may include, among other things, a decision flow server for facilitating distributed decision flow processing. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090100167 | Messaging - A device for transmitting a message for reception by another device, comprising: a processor for adding location information to the message, before transmission, wherein the location information identifies an area within which the message is to be hosted for reception by the other device; and a transmitter for transmitting the message, with the location information. | 04-16-2009 |
| 20090106406 | METHOD OF INITIATING DTMF DIAGNOSTICS AND OTHER FEATURES VIA A CALL IN DIAGNOSTICS INTERFACE - A method to initiate a remote diagnostic mode in a network terminal includes determining whether a received signal corresponds to a command to initiate a remote diagnostic mode, and setting the network terminal in a remote diagnostic mode in accordance with the result of the determining. An authentication procedure may be performed prior to setting the network terminal in the remote diagnostic mode, for increased security. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106407 | CONTENT TRANSFER SYSTEM, CONTENT TRANSFER METHOD AND HOME SERVER - Provided are a content transfer system, a content transfer method, and a home server capable of backing up all backup target contents without having to transfer all backup target contents. This content transfer system includes a home storage and an online storage. The home storage transfers identifying information of a backup target content to the online storage and requests the online storage to determine the existence of a content that is identical to the backup target content upon requesting the online storage to back up the backup target content, transfers metadata to the online storage when an identical content exists in the online storage, and transfers the backup target content to the online storage in all other cases. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106408 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SERVER AND COMPUTER SYSTEM - Provided is a computer system, comprising a management server and a presence server. The user terminals include a first user terminal for originating a question and a second user terminal for responding to the question originated from the first user terminal. The management server comprising: an interface coupled to the network; a processor coupled to the interface; and a memory coupled to the processor. The management server calculates an unresponsive time taken until the second user terminal becomes ready to receive a notification of the question transmitted from the first user terminal by referring the presence information acquired from the presence server upon detection of an origination of the question from the first user terminal, estimates an expected response time of the second user terminal based on the calculated unresponsive time, and notifies the first user terminal of the estimated expected response time. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106409 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR MIGRATING A VIRTUAL MACHINE - In one embodiment, a method for migrating a virtual machine (VM) under operation from one server to another server among a plurality of servers is provided. The method includes providing a schema defined beforehand by an operator, an application-dependent policy using the schema, and an total optimization policy to optimize the system totally, receiving periodically a status information for the application on the VM and a static or dynamic information for the server and the VM from each server, judging whether there is any VM to migrate to another server by referring to the application-dependent policy and the total optimization policy, based on the status information of the application and the static or dynamic information of the VM, and determining a migration destination of the VM matched with the migration condition. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106410 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK DEVICE - In the case of displaying a screen for designating a distribution destination of resource data, a resource manager determines an attribute of resource data to be distributed. Based on the determined attribute of the resource data, the resource manager switches a user interface to be used for designating a distribution destination. Then, a distribution data generator generates distribution data to be distributed to the designated distribution destination. Then, a communication function unit distributes the generated distribution data to the designated distribution destination. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106411 | SCALABLE, HIGH PERFORMANCE AND HIGHLY AVAILABLE DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM FOR INTERNET CONTENT - A method for content storage on behalf of participating content providers begins by having a given content provider identify content for storage. The content provider then uploads the content to a given storage site selected from a set of storage sites. Following upload, the content is replicated from the given storage site to at least one other storage site in the set. Upon request from a given entity, a given storage site from which the given entity may retrieve the content is then identified. The content is then downloaded from the identified given storage site to the given entity. In an illustrative embodiment, the given entity is an edge server of a content delivery network (CDN). | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106412 | NETWORK SYSTEM, NETWORK MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - Operation history information related to operations performed at a plurality of devices and communication history information related to communications performed between the devices are managed. When an operation accompanied with a communication has been performed at the device, a predetermined action corresponding to the operation accompanied with the communication is executed based on the operation history information and the communication history information which are managed. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090113031 | Method, Apparatus And Computer Program Product Implementing Multi-Tenancy For Network Monitoring Tools Using Virtualization Technology - Method, apparatus and computer program product manage a plurality of networks with a single tenant network management tool using virtualization and implement control plane virtualization of the single tenant management tool; data storage virtualization of a data storage apparatus and network address virtualization of an available address range. A virtual machine may be implemented for each network of the plurality of networks to contain an instance of the single tenant management tool. In one implementation, a proxy is used to implement data storage virtualization. In another implementation, separate data storage is maintained for each network and data storage virtualization is achieved by managing the network protocol stack virtualization. The network address virtualization may be implemented using machine-level virtualization or operating-system-level virtualization. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090113032 | FEATURE SET BASED CONTENT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS AND METHODS - In an exemplary system, a plurality of access devices comprising at least a first access device and a second access device is selectively and communicatively coupled to a profile management subsystem. The profile management subsystem is configured to maintain profile data representing a feature set of at least one of the plurality of access devices, receive a profile request signal representing a request for profile data corresponding to the second access device from the first access device, and transmit the requested profile data to the first access device in response to the profile request signal. The first access device is configured to transmit content to the second access device in accordance with a feature set represented by the profile data corresponding to the second access device. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090113033 | Method and System for Managing Operations on Resources of a Distributed Network, in Particular of a Communication Network, and Corresponding Computer-Program Product - A system for generating instruction signals arranged in workflows or rules for performing interventions on equipment, such as equipment of a communication network, wherein the equipment may be associated with resource proxy agents, each responsible for managing a single equipment. The system includes a distributed architecture of intervention management proxy agents provided with respective workflow-based or rule-based engines to generate the instruction signals, each agent being associated with a terminal device. The intervention management proxy agents may be interactively coupled with the resource proxy agents or with a manager resource associated with the equipment, whereby the instruction signals are a function of the status of the equipment on which the interventions are performed. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090113034 | Method And System For Clustering - A system and a method for automatic cluster formation by automatically selecting nodes based on a selection criteria configured by the user is disclosed. During a cluster re-formation process, a failed node may automatically get replaced by one of the healthy nodes in its network, which is not part of any cluster avoiding cluster failures. In case of a cluster getting reduced to a single node due to node failures and failed nodes could not be replaced due to non-availability of free nodes, the single node cluster may be merged with a existing healthy clusters in the network providing a constant level of high availability. The proposed method may also provide an affective load balancing by maintaining a constant number of member nodes in a cluster by automatically replacing the dead nodes with a healthy node. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090113035 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD - A method for a network management apparatus configured to communicate with a peripheral device using a version of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) that requires key information during communication includes acquiring device-specific information from the peripheral device, generating a plurality of key information candidates using the device-specific information before performing a communication based on SNMP, acquiring an SNMP engine identification (ID) for the peripheral device, determining whether the SNMP engine ID corresponds to the device-specific information, and, if it is determined that the SNMP engine ID corresponds to the device-specific information, storing the SNMP engine ID and performing a communication based on SNMP using key information corresponding to the device-specific information and selected from among the plurality of key information candidates. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090119392 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DECISIONS, METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING A DECISION TREE, CENTRAL MANAGER, INTERMEDIATE MANAGER, TERMINAL AND CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS - A method is provided for managing decisions between a central manager and at least one terminal in an architecture of networks distributed and prioritized according to N levels, with N≧2. The central manager is included in a level of rank N. The terminal is included in a level of rank 1. The method includes a step of distributing a decision tree constructed by the central manager and supported by the architecture. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119393 | SYSTEM AND ARCHITECTURE FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY AND MULTIPATH PACKET DELIVERY IN IP NETWORK STACKS - A communication system is provided. The system has at least two nodes communicating with each other with each nodes associated with an operating system, wherein the operating system comprising a costack adapted to generate a unique or a low probability of overlap CID and intercept packets going down or up the main stack at one or more point of interception; and a subspace of a plurality of connections each connection within the subspace having a unique CID in relation to other connections. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119394 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION OF A NETWORK BLOCK - Described herein are a method and a system to assign geographic locations to network blocks. A particular embodiment of the system includes a set of intermediate assignment generators, each intermediate assignment generator being associated with at least one of a plurality of network data sources, each intermediate assignment generator being configured to generate an intermediate assignment for at least one of the plurality of network data sources, a set of classifiers each coupled to at least one of the intermediate assignment generators, each classifier being associated with at least one of the plurality of network data sources, each classifier being configured to generate at least one classification based on at least one of the intermediate assignments and corresponding training data, and an intermediate assignment selector to select a best intermediate assignment based on the classifications generated by the set of classifiers, the best intermediate assignment corresponding to a geographic location of a network block. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119395 | Information processing system and data management method - The server device includes: an allocation unit for allocating a unique identifier to each of first data and second data; a management unit for managing a correspondence between the identifier and a method for accessing the first data or second data identified by the identifier; a presentation unit for presenting the identifier managed by the management unit to the client device; a conversion unit for converting an identifier-specifying request for access to the first data or second data from the client device into a method for accessing the first data or second data corresponding to the identifier using an access method associated by the management unit with the identifier; and a data access unit for requesting access to the first data or second data using the access method converted to by the conversion unit, and sending an access result to the client device. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119396 | WORKLOAD MANAGEMENT WITH NETWORK DYNAMICS - A workload management system identifies a first source device and first destination device which can be used to perform a job function. The system further communicates information about the first source device and destination device to one or more switches, and receives a set of network parameters along a data path from the first source device to the first destination device. The system then determines resources available on the first source device and/or first destination device. In addition, the system determines whether the first source device and first destination device, if used for the job function, can satisfy a set of SLAs for that job function based on the network parameters along a data path from the first source device to the first destination device and the determined resources available on the first source device and/or first destination device. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119397 | Using virtual domain name service (DNS) zones for enterprise content delivery - A domain to be published to an enterprise ECDN is associated (either by static configuration or dynamically) with a set of one or more enterprise zones configurable in a hierarchy. When a DNS query arrives for a hostname known to be associated with given content within the control of the ECDN, a DNS server preferably responds in one of three (3) ways: (a) handing back an IP address, e.g., for an ECDN intelligent node that knows how to obtain the requested content from a surrogate or origin server; (b) executing a zone referral to a next (lower) level name server in a zone hierarchy, or (c) CNAMing to another hostname, thereby essentially restarting the lookup procedure. In the latter case, this new CNAME causes the resolution process to start back at the root and resolve a new path, probably along a different path in the hierarchy. At any particular level in the zone hierarchy, preferably there is an associated zone server. That server preferably executes logic that applies the requested hostname against a map, which, using known techniques, may be generated from given (static, dynamic, internally-generated or third party-sourced) performance metrics. Thus, a given name query to ECDN-managed content may be serviced in coordination with various sources of distributed network intelligence. As a result, the invention provides for a distributed, dynamic globally load balanced name service. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119398 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY MANAGING A NETNWORK PORT BASED ON A CALENDAR FUNCTION - Embodiments of the invention provide a system and method for automatically managing a network port based on a calendar function. In one embodiment, a discovery protocol is provided for automatically discovering at least one port of at least one switch in a network. Furthermore, a management protocol is provided. The management protocol is configured to automatically manage the at least one port of the at least one switch in the network based on a programmable calendar function. In addition, a reconfiguration protocol is also provided. The reconfiguration protocol is configured to reconfigure the calendar function of the automatic management of the at least one port of the at least one switch in the network. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090125617 | LOCAL AUTO-CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK DEVICES CONNECTED TO MULTIPOINT VIRTUAL CONNECTIONS - Various systems and methods for automatically configuring network devices coupled to a network that provides (or is capable of providing) multipoint virtual connections are disclosed. One such method involves receiving information identifying a plurality of virtual connections (VCs) available within a network. The method identifies a set of one or more nodes that are configured with one of several Internet Protocol (IP) subnets and that have access to one of the VCs, and then assigns each of the IP subnets to a unique one of the VCs. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090125618 | OPEN PLATFORM FOR MANAGING AN AGENT NETWORK - Some embodiments of the present invention provide a system for managing software agents. This system enables a user to configure agents and to specify wiring relationships between the agents and other system components. This system also includes a hub component, which is configured to route communications to and from the agents in accordance with user-specified wiring relationships. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090125619 | AUTONOMIC DEFINITION AND MANAGEMENT OF DISTRIBUTED APPICATION INFORMATION - A method, information processing system, and computer program storage product for associating jobs with resource subsets in a job scheduler. At least one job class that defines characteristics associated with a type of job is received. A list of resource identifiers for a set of resources associated with the job class is received. A set of resources available on at least one information processing system is received. The resource identifiers are compared with each resource in the set of resources available on the information processing system. A job associated with the job class with is scheduled with a set of resources determined to be usable by the job based on the comparing. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090125620 | Assigning telecommunications nodes to community of interest clusters - The present invention provides techniques for assigning network nodes to community of interest clusters. A seed point representing a cluster is selected. One or more nodes are added to the cluster based on each node's geographic proximity to the selected seed point. Nodes that are adjacent to the cluster are identified and a clustering metric is computed that is representative of the affinity that each identified adjacent node has for the cluster. One or more of the identified nodes are added to the cluster when the clustering metric for the one or more identified nodes exceeds a predetermined value. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090125621 | DYNAMIC HTTP LOAD BALANCING - The invention is a method and apparatus for facilitating facilitates load balancing in a server farm. In accordance with various aspects of the invention, all of the information about each server necessary for a load balancing program to define and execute a load balancing algorithm is stored at a predetermined URL for each server. The load balancer can query the predefined URL, which returns the necessary information. The load balancer then dynamically configures the load balancing algorithm in accordance with the returned information. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090132688 | Method For the Dynamic Service Configuration of a Technical System - A method is disclosed for the dynamic service configuration of a technical system. According to at least one embodiment of the method: a) a functional task description is inputted and/or generated in a functional description language for an interaction task between at least one new initial service and at least one end service already existing in the technical system; b) combinations of initial services and end services for solving the interaction task are determined on the basis of the functional task description; c) a search for compatible services is carried out for at least part of the initial services, during which the initial service searches for services compatible therewith and the compatible services, in turn, search for services which are compatible with themselves, thus generating paths from successive compatible services, a path being defined as a solution path for the interaction task when the initial service of the path and the compatible end service correspond to a combination of initial services and end services discovered in step b); and d) one of the solution paths is selected and the interaction task is carried out along the selected solution path. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132689 | TRUST BASED MODERATION - A network device, system, and method are directed towards detecting trusted reporters and/or abusive users in an online community using reputation event inputs, such as abuse reports. When an abuse report is received for a content item, the combined trust (reputation) of previous reporters on the reported content item and the trust (reputation) of the content author are compared to determine whether to trust the content item. If the content item is un-trusted, the content item may be hidden from public view. In one embodiment, the content item might still be visible to the content author, and/or members in the author's contact list, or the like, while being hidden from another user in the community. In one embodiment, the author may appeal the determined trust, and results of the appeal may be used to modify a trust of at least one reporter. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132690 | On-Demand Download Network - A device retrieves only the application software that is missing on the device and is currently required to perform a certain function. An object-request module sends a request that identifies only the needed application. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132691 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE COMMUNICATIONS - A method to manage communications between a communication network using radiofrequency waves and a network such as the Internet, linked by a gateway, with control members producing; parameters related to established communications, including a user identifier and a communication identifier, or parameters related to failed connections, including a connection identifier and a user identifier, Internet access by the general public being notably allowed from the radiofrequency network in particular by a step (Etp | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132692 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR STARTING SERVER SERVICES - In one embodiment, services are not loaded if they are not needed by the user and if no services needed by the user are dependent upon them. In one embodiment, server services are represented as nodes in a graph data structure. Connections between the nodes indicate dependencies between the server services. The graph is sorted to create an ordered list of services which can be used to startup the services. In another embodiment a server services manager reads license files and user inputs and marks the ordered list of services to indicate which services are to startup. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132693 | APPLICATION AND METHOD FOR GENERATING AUTOMATED OFFERS OF SERVICE AND SERVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INCORPORATING THE SAME - A service management application and method. In one embodiment, the service management system includes: (1) a service description repository configured to contain service descriptions that define services in terms of a set of end points that assume roles based on at least one of capabilities and attributes thereof, the end points being selected from the group consisting of devices and systems and (2) an application associable with the service description repository and configured to compare capabilities of at least one of the end points with required capabilities expressed in at least one role of at least one of the service descriptions and present a service offering to a subscriber based thereon. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090138581 | THREE-DIMENSIONAL NETWORKING DESIGN STRUCTURE - A design structure embodied in a machine readable medium used in a design process includes a multi-layer silicon stack architecture having one or more processing layers comprised of one or more computing elements; one or more networking layers disposed between the processing layers, the network layer comprised of one or more networking elements, wherein each computing element comprises a plurality of network connections to adjacently disposed networking elements and each networking element may provide network access to a plurality of other computing elements through a single hop of the network. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138582 | Multi-Level Load Balancer - The multi-level load balancing system receives requests for resources provided by any of a plurality of resource nodes. The multi-level load balancing system receives a first result from a first load balancing module that orders each of the plurality of nodes that are available to service the request based on a first algorithm. The multi-level load balancing system then receives a second result from a second load balancing module that orders each of the plurality of nodes that are available to service the request based on a second algorithm. The multi-level load balancing system combines the first result and the second result to form a third result that is uses to select one of the plurality of resources nodes to service the request. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138583 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING STATISTICS ON INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SERVICE MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS AMONG ASSETS - The illustrative embodiments described herein provide a computer implemented method, apparatus, and computer program product for generating a set of statistics on information technology service management problems among assets within a network. A data processing system monitors the network for a systems management system message containing information associated with a reported problem of an asset within the network. The systems management system message is generated by the asset associated with the reported problem. Responsive to detecting the systems management system message, the data processing system stores the information associated with the reported problem of the asset contained in the systems management system message to a set of stored data. The data processing system generates the set of statistics on information technology service management problems among the assets within the network using the set of stored data. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138584 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING ROLE BASED ON CAPABILITY OF TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for setting a role based on capability of a terminal are provided. The apparatus includes a calculation unit calculating a capability value of the terminal to check whether the role set in a pertinent terminal is suitable, a determination unit determining whether the role set on the pertinent terminal is suitable based on the calculated capability value, and a setting unit changing and managing information for setting the role set in the pertinent terminal. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138585 | Method and System for Generating Messages - The present invention discloses a method and system for generating Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) message, wherein, at least one first information sets are pre-stored and each of the first information sets contains at least one piece of information. The method comprises: generating a first SOAP message which contains a second information set that contains at least one piece of information; retrieving a first information set that corresponds to the second information set; and generating a second SOAP message using the retrieved first information set and the first SOAP message. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138586 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A SERVER LOAD - Method for managing the load of at least one server able to process the requests sent via a telecommunication network by a plurality of terminals. The method includes the steps of receiving by the server a request originating from a terminal, obtaining an estimation of the load of the server, dispatching to the terminal data intended to bring about the automatic resending by the terminal of the request at a later date, dependent on a forecast relating to the load of the server, the dispatching step being executed when the estimation value is above a threshold value. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138587 | DYNAMIC BROWSER-BASED INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION INTERFACE SYSTEM AND METHOD - An automation device interactive user interface and method of using the interface is provided herein. The interface is network based in that it employs a browser enhanced by an interactive program embedded therein and an execution engine to execute the program. The interface can be proximate to an associated automated device(s) or remotely connected thereto using a local area network (LAN) and/or a wide area network (WAN) such as the Internet. To facilitate ease of use, the embedded interactive program presents information in an appealing multimedia fashion such that interface appears live and changing. Furthermore, data associated with automation devices can be monitored, extracted, transmitted or otherwise manipulated in real time. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090144403 | MANAGEMENT OF TOPOLOGY CHANGES IN LAYER TWO NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a method for managing topology changes in a Layer 2 network is provided. The method may comprise receiving a change notification at a provider edge bridging device and associating the change notification with a customer service. The method may further comprise identifying at least one destination provider edge bridging device associated with the customer service, encapsulating the change notification in a data frame and tunnelling the data frame over a tunnel comprising at least one core device to the at least one destination provider edge bridging device associated with the customer service, the at least one core bridging device tunnelling the data frame based on information relating to the destination provider edge bridging device. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144404 | LOAD MANAGEMENT IN A DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM - A technique for load management in a distributed system that includes multiple physical nodes is disclosed. The load management technique includes mutably assigning a number of virtual nodes to each physical node of the multiple physical nodes. A total number of virtual nodes assigned to the multiple physical nodes is maintained substantially unaltered in spite of any alterations made in the number of virtual nodes assigned to each physical node of the multiple physical nodes. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144405 | Apparatus And Method For Presence Service On Inter-Domain - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for presence service on inter-domain. The apparatus comprises an enhanced inter-domain presence (EIP) module and an enhanced inter-domain presence authorization document (EIPAD) module. When at least a watcher requests a presence subscription to a foreign domain, the EIP module dynamically aggregates the foreign domain presentities for all local watchers having the subscription request, and produces a foreign domain document (FDD). The EIP module also acts as a presence client having the subscription for foreign-domain, and dispatches presence status information. The enhanced inter-domain presence authorization document module resolves the FDD contents, identifies the subscribed foreign-domain presentities, then accesses a corresponding presence authorization document and notifies it to the presence server on the watcher domain. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144406 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication control apparatus includes a registration request signal receiver, a registration section, a transmitter, a group communication control signal receiver, and a group communication controller. The request signal receiver receives, from at least one terminal differing from a plurality of group communication terminals that is performing or is to perform group communication through a communication network, a control terminal registration request signal requesting the registration of the terminal as a control terminal for controlling the group communication. The registration section registers the terminal which sent the control terminal registration request signal as a control terminal. The transmitter sends, to that terminal, information indicating that the terminal has been registered as a control terminal. The control signal receiver receives from the terminal a group communication control signal for controlling the group communication. The group communication controller starts or changes the group communication in accordance with the group communication control signal. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144407 | DOMAIN MANAGING METHOD, DOMAIN EXTENDING METHOD AND REFERENCE POINT CONTROLLER ELECTING METHOD - A method of managing a domain, a method of extending a domain, and a method of selecting a reference point controller are provided. The method of operating the domain includes: receiving a request for authenticating a reference point controller from a reference point controller candidate; invalidating a membership of the stored reference point controller; generating a unique reference point controller membership for verifying that the reference point controller candidate is a new reference point controller; and transmitting the generated reference point controller membership to the reference point controller candidate. Accordingly, even when an error occurs in the reference point controller, the function of the reference point controller can be rapidly replaced by using the reference point controller candidate. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090150532 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CLIENT COMPUTER MANAGING MULTIPLE SERVERS - A method for a client computer managing a plurality of servers via a network is provided. The method comprises the following steps. A selection list of the servers supporting a keyboard-video-mouse (KVM) over IP (iKVM) function is displayed in the client computer in which the selection list provides information corresponding to each server. At least one server is selected from the selection list in the client computer. Then, the client computer is connected to the selected server by logging into the selected server automatically such that the client computer is capable of controlling the selected server. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090150533 | DETECTING NEED TO ACCESS METADATA DURING DIRECTORY OPERATIONS - In at least some disclosed embodiments, a method includes receiving a request to list information about data in a first directory, and searching for a unique symbol in the first directory based on the request. The unique symbol is associated with a stub file in the first directory. The method further includes providing information about data in a second directory in response to the request if the unique symbol is found. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090150534 | Load balancing technique implemented in a data network device utilizing a data cache - Techniques for implementing a load balanced server system are described which may be used for effecting electronic commerce over a data network. The system comprises a load balancing system and a plurality of servers in communication with the load balancing system. Each of the plurality of servers may include a respective data cache for storing state information relating to client session transactions conducted between the server and a particular client. The load balancing system can be configured to select, using a load balancing protocol, an available first server from the plurality of servers to process an initial packet received from a source device such as, for example, a client machine of a customer. The load balancing system can also configured to route subsequent packets received from the source device to the first server. Before generating its response, the first server may verify that the state information relating to a specific client session stored in the data cache is up-to-date. If the first server determines that the state information stored in the data cache is not up-to-date, then the first server may be configured to retrieve the desired up-to-date state information from a database which is configured to store all state information relating to client sessions which have been initiated with the server system. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090150535 | GENERATING AND SUPPLYING USER CONTEXT DATA - Techniques are described for providing information about a context that is modeled with multiple context attributes. In some situations, at least some of the context attributes have values used by modules for generating values of other context attributes, and the providing includes determining that a first module is generating a first value of a first of the context attributes of the modeled context and determining that a circular reference exists when it is determined that a module is to generate another value of the first context attribute such that the generating of the another value is caused by the generating of the first value of the first context attribute. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090157857 | Data Management Method and Data Management System Using an External Recording Medium Writing Device - A data management system enables data on a network such as an internal LAN to be managed and is able to reliably prevent the data from leakage. The data management system has a network to which a management server for data management, a plurality of client PCs having a data processing function, and an optical disk publisher that issues a CD or a DVD into which the data is recorded are connected. The optical disk publisher issues the CD to only an authorized user. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157858 | Managing Virtual Addresses Of Blade Servers In A Data Center - Methods, apparatus, and products for managing virtual addresses of blade servers in a data center are disclosed that include storing, by a blade server management module (‘BSMM’) in non-volatile memory of a blade server, a parameter block, the parameter block including one or more virtual addresses for communications adapters of the blade server and one or more action identifiers; detecting, by a BIOS module of the blade server upon powering on the blade server, the parameter block; disabling, by the BIOS module, in dependence upon the one or more action identifiers of the parameter block, an original address of at least one communications adapter of the blade server; and setting, by the BIOS module, an address of the communications adapter to a virtual address included in the parameter block. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157859 | Methods And Systems For Accessing A Resource Based On URN Scheme Modifiers - Methods, systems and computer program products are described for accessing a resource identified in a URN based on URN scheme modifiers. In one aspect, a URI is received having a format that includes a URN scheme identifier for identifying a URN scheme, a scheme-dependent part for identifying a resource, and a URN scheme modifier. The URN scheme modifier includes information for determining a URL for accessing the identified resource. The URN scheme modifier is detected in the received URI, and based on the detected URN scheme modifier, the URL for accessing the resource is determined. Methods, systems and computer program products are described for providing a resource including a URI configured for accessing another resource. A generated first resource includes a determined URI formatted to include a URN scheme modifier including a resolving URL for determining a URL for accessing a second resource. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157860 | DISAGGREGATED NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for disaggregated management of a network fabric are presented. Network elements composing the network fabric can operate as a fabric manager with respect to one or more management functions while also continuing to operate as a communication conduit among hosts using the fabric. The roles or responsibilities of a fabric manager can migrate from one network element to another to preserve management coherency as well as to secure management of the network. Additionally, fabric managers communicate with the network fabric through one or more management channels. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157861 | INFORMATION COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INFORMATION COMMUNICATION METHOD - An information communication method includes: accepting first presence information transmitted from a first terminal device which is connected so as to be communicable through a network; specifying a second terminal device as a notification destination to which the first presence information is destined; mapping the notification destination to a transmission source of the first presence information; deciding whether or not an alteration of the notification destination is required according to a state of the notification destination as indicated by second presence information accepted from the second terminal device; selecting, if alteration is required, a third terminal device to succeed the second terminal device; and notifying the first presence information to the third terminal device corresponding to the altered notification destination. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157862 | Storage System - In a storage system that manages update prohibition (WORM) information, when time management is not performed with precision, there arises a possibility that an update prohibition (WORM) attribute may be erased before a preservation period expires. This invention provides a storage system coupled to at least one of time servers through a network, including: a first time information holding unit that holds first time information to be used to manage an update prohibition attribute of data; a second time information holding unit that holds second time information to be used to establish time synchronization with a device coupled to the network; and a time update unit that manages the first time information and the second time information, in which the time update unit receives third time information from the at least one of the time servers and judges whether the third time information satisfies a predetermined condition, and updates the first time information based on the third time information when the third time information satisfies the predetermined condition. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157863 | System and Method of Enforcing Hierarchical Management Policy - A system and method for using hierarchical policy levels for distribution of software in a computer network. In one embodiment, computers of the network are arranged into a hierarchy. A management policy server with access to the network queries the hierarchy to identify computers at or below its own level within the hierarchy. Once a set of computers is identified, software programs, updates or policies are distributed, bypassing human intervention. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090164613 | Method and system for improving client-servlet communication - A method comprises providing a one way communication path that initiates a request by a client for retrieving information from a Servlet, and sending a response by the Servlet containing at least one return code specifying success or failure of the request, and including the result of the request if available. If the Servlet identifies missing information not included in the initial request, the method includes providing a complete response to automatically open an other communication path from the Servlet via the client's web-browser to the Servlet and providing the missing information to a Servlet by making use of the response functionality of the initial request. The other communication path is supported by a further Servlet functionality component. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164614 | DNS WILDCARD BEACONING TO DETERMINE CLIENT LOCATION AND RESOLVER LOAD FOR GLOBAL TRAFFIC LOAD BALANCING - Techniques are described to determine clients residing behind LDNS resolvers. Web beacons instruct clients to retrieve zero-content images at unique hostnames. A request to the hostname is made by a client to an LDNS resolver. The LDNS sends the request to an authoritative server/beacon resolver for the hostname. The beacon resolver records the hostname with the LDNS resolver's IP address and responds with an IP address of a beacon collection server that is forwarded to the client by the LDNS. The client sends a request containing the unique hostname to the beacon collection server. The beacon collection server records the IP address of the client and the hostname. An aggregation server collects data from the beacon resolver and the beacon collection server. Using the hostnames as keys, IP addresses of clients are mapped to IP addresses of LDNS resolvers. Mapped data is exported to load balancing servers to determine routing. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164615 | CONTINUOUS SCHEDULING FOR PEER-TO-PEER STREAMING - Apparatuses and methods for distributing and/or receiving buffer content advertisements continuously to and/or from a plurality of neighboring peer apparatuses joined in a network are described. The buffer content advertisements identify the stored packets of data in a packet buffer. The continuously distributed and/or received buffer content advertisements may include incremental updates of content of the packet buffer piggybacked to every outgoing and/or incoming packet of data. The apparatus may determine packets of data advertised by a plurality of neighboring peers that the apparatus does not have in its packet buffer, and may request packets of data, of the advertised packets, from at least one of the plurality of neighboring peers. The apparatus may include a communication module to communicate buffer content advertisements continuously to the plurality of neighboring peers. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164616 | Token-based web browsing with visual feedback of disclosure - A data communications network may be browsed using one or more tokens by receiving an input keyword string from a user, determining whether there is a match between the input keyword string and a database of keyword strings, determining a category of the keyword string, rendering to the user at least one service identifier associated with the category, receiving a user-selected service identifier in response to the rendering, substituting at least one variable in a resource locator template associated with the service with a string based at least in part on the keyword string entered by the user and launching the resource locator. According to one aspect, a special rendering of a hyperlink corresponding to the resource locator is used to indicate private data will be disclosed upon launching the resource locator. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164617 | NETWORK APPARATUS HAVING A DATABASE, MANAGEMENT METHOD AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM FOR MANAGING INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTION RULES OF THE DATABASE - A network apparatus having a database, a management method and a tangible machine-readable medium for managing internet protocol (IP) connection rules of the database are provided. The database stores at least one first IP connection rule. The management method comprises the following steps: writing a second IP connection rule through one of a plurality of management programs; determining there is a conflict between the at least one first IP connection rule and the second IP connection rule, and eliminating the conflict according to a weight value of the at least one first IP connection rule and a weight value of the second IP connection rule. The at least one first IP connection rule and the second IP connection rule are used in one network connection. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164618 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ADMINISTRATING NETWORKS - To provide a network administrating device assists in selection of an optimum system structure for performance necessary for actual operations and a method of administrating networks. A server ( | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164619 | MANAGEMENT OF VIRTUAL AND PHYSICAL NETWORK INVENTORIES - A method for managing a network element inventory for a video and data network is provided. The method includes self-discovering a physical network inventory of the video and data network. Additionally, a logical network inventory of the video and data network is self-discovered. Further, a planned network inventory of the video and data network is provided. Once the planned, logical, and physical network inventories are collected, the physical network inventory, logical network inventory, and planned network inventory are loaded into the network element inventory. After loading, synchronization of the physical network inventory, logical network inventory, and planned network inventory in the network element inventory is performed. A view is then provided using the synchronized physical network inventory, logical network inventory, and planned network inventory when a request for the view of the network element inventory is received. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164620 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STREAMING IMAGES TO WIRELESS DEVICES - A method for interactively viewing raster images using scalable vector graphics (SVG), including receiving an SVG document, the SVG document including a reference to a raster image within the SVG document, the reference indicating a rectangular portion, a display width and height, and an IP address for a server computer, passing the SVG document to an SVG viewer, rendering the SVG document, including requesting from the server computer a first portion of raster image data corresponding to the rectangular portion, display width and display height, the first portion of raster image data being derived from the raster image, receiving the first portion of raster image data from the server computer, displaying the first portion of raster image data, transmitting a user request for a different portion of the raster image data, receiving a modified SVG document, modified according to the different portion requested by the user, passing the modified SVG document to the SVG viewer for re-rendering. A system and a computer readable storage medium are also described and claimed. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090172138 | USING DOMAIN NAME SERVICE FOR IDENTIFYING A HOME DOMAIN OF A ROMAING DEVICE - A method, information processing system, and wireless communication network determine a domain name associated with at least one device for providing services to the at least one device in a network. A service request ( | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172139 | BALANCED CONSISTENT HASHING FOR DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - A method, system, computer-readable storage medium and apparatus for balanced and consistent placement of resource management responsibilities within a multi-computer environment, such as a cluster, that are both scalable and make efficient use of cluster resources are provided. Embodiments reduce the time that a cluster is unavailable due to redistribution of resource management responsibilities by reducing the amount of redistribution of those responsibilities among the surviving cluster members. Embodiments further provide redistribution of resource management responsibilities based upon relative capabilities of the remaining cluster nodes. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172140 | NETWORK DEVICE - A Network Attached Storage Device (NAS) that is configured to receive at least one webfeed and display information derived from the webfeed on a display. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172141 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND DATA MANAGEMENT METHOD IN STORAGE SYSTEM - Provided is a storage center including a storage subsystem for storing content data to be used by the user's home server, and a center server for controlling the storage subsystem. The center server aggregates the content recording reservation requests sent from several home servers, obtains content data from a content server and stores the content data in the storage subsystem at a designated recording start time, and notifies the user's home server that the recording reservation is complete. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172142 | System and method for adding a standby computer into clustered computer system - There is provided a method of adding a new computer as a standby computer to a computer system that includes an active computer for performing service processing and a standby computer for storing replica of data stored in the active computer. The replica of the data stored in the standby computer is updated when the data stored in the active computer is updated. The method comprising the steps of: selecting the standby computer from the computer system; transferring the replica of the data stored in the selected standby computer to the new computer; and transferring update information on data updated in the active computer after the transferring the replica of the data is started, to the new computer. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172143 | Information-Processing Apparatus and Program Thereof - An information-processing apparatus which is capable of transmitting device identifiers of devices connected with LANs to terminals without using a broadcast command is provided. A server is connected with a World Area Network. A managing terminal and printers are connected with a LAN. The server receives a device identifier of the printer connected with any one of the LANs. The server receives an inquiry for a device identifier from a terminal connected with any one of the LANs. The server stores appended information, which is appended to the device identifier while the device identifier is transferred to the server, in a manner that the appended information is associated with the device identifier. The server transmits to the terminal the device identifier whose appended information as stored in a storage coincides with the appended information that is appended to the inquiry while the inquiry is transferred to the server. The managing terminal can obtain the device identifier of the printer connected with the same LAN as the managing terminal itself by transmitting the inquiry to the server. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172144 | ID COLLECTION AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, METHOD AND PROGRAM OF COMPUTER - An ID collection and management apparatus which manages identifiers of computers in a computer system including said computers and a storage system which provides said computers with a storage volume, including: a first ID acquisition unit which acquires first IDs which are IDs of a data port for said computers to transmit/receive data with said storage volume; a second ID acquisition unit which acquires second IDs to be recognized as the IDs of said computers by said storage system; and an ID management unit which manages said first IDs and said second IDs in a corresponding manner for each of said computers; wherein a first communication protocol for communication with said computers is different from a second communication protocol for communication with said storage system, wherein the first IDs are based on requirements of the first communication protocol, and the second IDs are based on requirements of the second communication protocol, such that the first IDs and second IDs differ from each other. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172145 | INTEGRATED POINT OF PRESENCE SERVER NETWORK - A network of point of presence servers allows a customer to organize their web site by functions where functions are mapped into domain names. The functions have requirements that define what is needed by a server to satisfy the function. The domain names are mapped into resources or servers that can be addressed by the domain name and that satisfy requests for the function that domain name has been defined to support. This method of organization allows individual elements of a web page to be retrieved from different resources and gives the name server the control to direct users to an available and optimal server for a given resource. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090177765 | Systems and Methods of Packet Object Database Management - The present disclosure generally provides systems and methods of packet object database management. The database management system includes a database server designed specifically to process binary network packet data. The database server is associated with a parser, query engine, retrieval engine, virtual machine, data manger, and file processor. The database management system uses a proprietary query language to support all accesses to the database. The parser identifies whether the query is a data management query or if it is a data retrieval instruction. If the query is a data management query, the data manager manages the query request and attempts to satisfy the query request. Otherwise, query engine could further analyze or parse the query into a particular query structure or sub-structures to attempt to satisfy the query request. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090187648 | Security Adapter Discovery for Extensible Management Console - An extensible management console may use a discovery mechanism to detect and identify security services across a network. After identification, the console may download and install an adapter so that the security service may be monitored and controlled using the extensible management console. A catalog of security services may be obtained from a catalog server and used to scan various devices, registries, file systems, and active services to detect and identify security services that may be added to the extensible management console. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090187649 | Server and Method for Managing DNSSEC Requests - A domain server that comprises: means ( | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090193104 | FORWARDING OF DEVICE ABSENCE INFORMATION IN SYSTEM WITH A DYNAMICALLY CHANGING SET OF DEVICES - A suspension member for connecting a vehicle body and a suspension device that comprises a pair of side members that extend in the longitudinal direction of the vehicle body and are located symmetrically relative to the center in the transverse direction of the vehicle body, and cross members interconnecting the pair of side members and extending in the transverse direction of the vehicle body. The suspension member is formed by press molding only after flat plate-like side members and cross members are welded in butt joints. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193105 | Local placement of large flows to assist load-balancing - In one embodiment, an apparatus generally comprises one or more input interfaces for receiving a plurality of flows, a plurality of output interfaces, and a processor operable to identify large flows and select one of the output interfaces for each of the large flows to load-balance the large flows over the output interfaces. The apparatus further includes memory for storing a list of the large flows, a pinning mechanism for pinning the large flows to the selected interfaces, and a load-balance mechanism for selecting one of the output interfaces for each of the remaining flows. A method for local placement of large flows to assist in load-balancing is also disclosed. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193106 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MESSAGE TRANSPORT IN A VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT - A system and method for communicating through a network wherein a user may write a message that is released into a virtual environment. The message must be selected by a second user to be read, but the second user does not know the content of the message until the message is selected to be read. The travel of the message through the virtual environment may be based on travel of a message in a bottle through waterways such as rivers, lakes or oceans. After the message is selected and read, the second user may elect to contact the sender to engage in further communications. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193107 | Synchronizing for Directory Changes Performed While Offline - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to synchronizing for directory actions performed while offline. In aspects, file system objects that reside on a remote data store are made available for offline use. While offline, a client receives an indication that a directory is to be deleted or renamed. In response, the client modifies its local copy of the directory and its descendants if any and stores one or more tombstones that include information that the client can use when synchronizing the changes made to the directory when the client is reconnected to the remote data store. When the client reconnects to the remote data store, the client synchronizes changes made while offline with the remote data store. Resolution conflict mechanisms may be used during this synchronization. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193108 | Critical Resource Management - In one embodiment, a method of managing critical resource usage in a storage network comprises receiving, in a storage controller, an input/output operation from a host, wherein the input/output operation identifies a storage unit, placing the input/output operation in a waiting queue, determining a maximum queue depth for at least one critical resource in the storage network required to execute the input/output command against the storage unit, and blocking one or more subsequent input/output commands from the host for the storage unit when the wait queue for the critical resource exceeds the maximum queue depth. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193109 | POWER-SAVING NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A power-saving network apparatus includes a MAC and a PHY. The PHY includes a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter executes the operations of: transmitting a data signal to a remote network apparatus according to output packets of the MAC when the transmitter enters a normal state; transmitting an idle signal to the remote network apparatus when the transmitter enters an idle state; transmitting an indication signal to the remote network apparatus to notify it to enter a low power state, wherein the indication signal is different from the idle signal; entering the idle state or the normal state from the low power state in response to at least one of a predetermined period and a transmitting enable signal. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193110 | Autonomic Storage Provisioning to Enhance Storage Virtualization Infrastructure Availability - The invention is an improvement to a storage virtualization system that enables the system to determine a class of service for potential storage devices and allows a user, administrator, or application to select a minimum class of service for any given type of data. The class of service is based upon factors that reflect a potential storage device's reliability, such as the device type and historical uptime data. In a P2P environment, the class of service also includes additional factors, such as the type of attached processing unit and the type of operating system running the attached processing unit. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090198807 | Apparatus and Method for Detecting System Reconfiguration and Maintaining Persistent I/O Configuration Data in a Clustered Computer System - In a clustered computer system with multiple power domains, a bus number manager within each power domain manages multiple nodes independently of other power domains. A node within a specified power domain includes a non-volatile memory that includes bus numbering information for its own buses as well as bus numbering information for two of its logically-interconnected neighbors. This creates a distributed database of the interconnection topology for each power domain. Because a node contains bus numbering information about its logical neighbor node(s), the bus numbers for the buses in the nodes are made persistent across numerous different system reconfigurations. The clustered computer system also includes a bus number manager that reads the non-volatile memories in the nodes during initial program load (i.e., boot) that reconstructs the interconnection topology from the information read from the non-volatile memories, and that assigns bus numbers to the buses according to the derived interconnection topology. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198808 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VIRTUAL WI-FI ACCESS - A method of providing virtual Wi-Fi service via a virtual Wi-Fi access network is provided. The method comprises: receiving data from an owner of an individual Wi-Fi access point; updating the owner of the Wi-Fi access point with access IDs, passwords, and security keys for a plurality of virtual Wi-Fi access subscribers; receiving subscriber data from a virtual Wi-Fi access subscriber; providing the subscriber with virtual Wi-Fi access log-in information; connecting the subscriber to the virtual Wi-Fi access network, wherein the virtual Wi-Fi access network comprises a plurality of individual Wi-Fi access points in communication with at least one virtual Wi-Fi access server; and billing the subscriber for virtual Wi-Fi access. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198809 | Communication device, method, and computer program product - A communication device includes a receiving unit that receives, from a computer running a virtual machine that can be switched between an active state and a stopped state, screen information provided by the virtual machine; a display unit that displays the screen information; a judging unit that, from the screen information displayed by the display unit, based on a number of operation procedures required for a process to be performed, judges whether the virtual machine performing the process by the operation procedures is to be stopped; and a transmitting unit that transmits a signal to the computer running the virtual machine judged to be stopped for stopping the virtual machine. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198810 | Method and Apparatus for Connection Exploration in a Network - An improved method for connection exploration in a network is disclosed, wherein said network includes a plurality of network elements each including at least one port, wherein a globally unique identifier is assigned to each individual port of said network elements, and wherein connected ports of two network elements transfer their globally unique identifiers over a corresponding connection using heartbeat-ordered sequences. The method comprises capturing said transferred globally unique identifiers at receiving ports, storing each of said captured globally unique identifiers at a corresponding receiving port, reading out said transferred globally unique identifiers stored at each port of said network elements using an in-band access, matching said read out globally unique identifiers to a hardware configuration data set to identify connected network elements and connections between said connected network elements, and recording information about existing connections between said network elements. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198811 | Image Forming System, Image Forming Apparatus, User Interface Device, Extended User Interface Compatibility Confirming Method, Document Scanning Method and Setting Value Managing Method - An extended user interface compatibility confirming method has the steps of:
| 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198812 | Systems and methods for managing a network - A system for managing and documenting a local area communications network is provided which deploys power sourcing equipment and powered devices by the use of active electronic modules, having an Ethernet controller and Power over Ethernet forwarding capabilities, as integral, managed components within the cable plant, to enhance management, documentation, security and emergency 911 aspects of the network as well as extending the physical reach of the network. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090204694 | GRID COMPUTING SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT SERVER, PROCESSING SERVER, CONTROL METHOD, CONTROL PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A method and system for performing a requested job. The system includes multiple processing servers and a management server. Each processing server executes an assigned program for performing the requested job. An execution direction, which identifies each of the multiple programs and an execution order for their execution (including identification of a first program to be executed), is generated. The management server sends to a first processing server the execution direction and input data. The first processing server: executes the first program using the input data, resulting in updating the input data; sends to the management server an inquiry for identification information that identifies a second processing server to execute a second program included in the execution direction; receives the identification information from the management server; and sends to the second processing server the execution direction and the updated input data for subsequent execution of the second program. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204695 | Automation network comprising network components that produce status messages - The invention relates to an automation network and to automation equipment, network components and field devices for an automation network of this type. The network components transmit messages concerning their status to the automation equipment by means of a communication mechanism that functions according to field communication automation technology. Said automation equipment receives the status messages, evaluates them, monitors the operation of the network and controls said operation using the status messages. As the automation equipment thus contains the complete picture of the process and the network, it can react directly and rapidly to problems of the network. This eliminates the need, for example, for an additional SNMP/OPC server or a network management station. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204696 | SERVICE DEPENDENCY DISCOVERY IN ENTERPRISE NETWORKS - The claimed subject matter provides systems and/or techniques that identify service dependencies in enterprise networks. The system can include devices that, based on received network data packets, identify packets with common five tuples, aggregate the identified packets to form transactions associated with individual hosts, and determine delay distributions between one or more services solicited from or in response to the individual hosts. Based on the delay distributions, the system differentiates between dependent service pairs and independent service pairs and thereafter assembles and outputs dependency graphs that include dependency relationships between services from the perspective of a client-side and a server-side. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204697 | Methods and apparatus for extended error reporting in network management - Standard SNMP error reporting between a network element and a management system utilizes a set of standard error codes that provide limited information about a fault condition. Example embodiments of the invention provide reporting of an extended error code that provides information for locating the source of a fault condition and for debugging the fault condition. In response to a first request, the extended error code can be reported to a management system. In response to a request following the extended error code, meanings associated with the extended error code are reported to a management system, thereby informing a network administrator of the fault condition. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204698 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR RESERVING BEARER RESOURCES - A method for reserving bearer resources disclosed herein includes: an address resource for receiving bearer request messages is allocated on the root termination of the MG; the MG receives the bearer request message sent to the foregoing address resource, and reports the corresponding bearer request event to the MGC; the MGC decides the resource policy according to the received bearer request event; and, if the bearer request is authorized, instructs the MG to allocate the corresponding bearer resources. The present embodiments also disclose a system for reserving bearer resources and an MG. The technical solution under the present embodiments enable the MG and MGC to receive bearer messages correctly before the resources required for the incoming session are created, thus making decision and responding in time. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204699 | System and Method for Synchronizing the Configuration of Distributed Network Management Applications - A change management system to synchronize the configuration of network management applications. Traditional network management systems are maintained by hand-entering device lists into individual network management applications with no common-ties between the different applications. Whenever a network management application is changed or upgraded, it frequently becomes necessary to insure that the upgrade is populated throughout the network in order for devices to talk to one another in an error free way. The present invention is a system and method that automates the change management process in a real-time using a two-way communications model that permits a central database to affect changes on all or some network management applications/systems in the field, while also allowing those same field systems to affect the central database thereby reducing the time required for updating and monitoring a system when device changes take place. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090210523 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM - A network management method and system. The method includes identifying and accessing a network device. A set of software loopback interfaces configured for the network device is retrieved. A first set of Internet protocol (IP) addresses associated the set of software loopback interfaces is retrieved. A second set of IP addresses associated with the first set of IP addresses is retrieved. A set of next-hop interfaces is retrieved. A network management topology model based on the network device, the set of software loopback interfaces, the first set of IP addresses, the second set of IP addresses, and the set of next-hop interfaces is generated. The network management topology model indicates that each IP address of the second set of IP addresses that is adjacent to an IP address of the first set of IP addresses is reachable via an associated next-hop interface of the set of next-hop interfaces. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090210524 | ROUTING OF WEB-BASED CONTACTS - A method of providing access to a network of contact centres comprises providing contact links on one or more web pages which when activated initiate contacts to the contact centres. The network addresses associated with the links and to which the contacts are automatically directed are dynamically specified in the web pages and are obtained from a database. The database is dynamically updated in response to statistical updates received periodically or continually from the individual contact centres. In this way the contacts can be directed in advance to the most appropriate destination without having to evaluate each contact as it enters the contact centre network, thereby reducing processing time and delays. Alternatively one or more remote session initiation protocol (SIP) proxy servers can be updated periodically with network addresses from the database, whereby SIP requests are directed by the proxy server to the contact centre or agent most suitable to handle the contact, as determined in advance of the request from the statistical information. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090216868 | ANTI-SPAM TOOL FOR BROWSER - An anti-spam tool works with a web browser to detect spam webpages locally on a client machine. The anti-spam tool can be implemented either as a plug-in module or an integral part of the browser, and manifested as a toolbar. The tool can perform an anti-spam action whenever a webpage is accessed through the browser, and does not require direct involvement of a search engine. A spam detection module installed on the computing device determines whether a webpage being accessed or whether a link contained in the webpage being accessed is spam, by comparing the URL of the webpage or the link with a spam list. The spam list can be downloaded from a remote search engine server, stored locally and updated from time to time. A two-level indexing technique is also introduced to improve the efficiency of the anti-spam tool's use of the spam list. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090216869 | MANAGING SHELL CONFIGURATIONS TO DYNAMICALLY CONTROL USER COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - A method for managing a user's computing environment on their computer or workstation. The method includes storing a set of files in a memory device accessible via a communications network. Each file includes data such as environment variable values defining a particular computing environment. The method includes providing an environment management engine in a user's home directory of a computer. A shell runs in the computer device to invoke and run a computing environment management engine within the shell. The engine generates a computing environment in the computer based on the computing environment definition in one of the files that is chosen based on a user-provided or otherwise determined job state (e.g., the user is working on a project or a portion of a project that is associated with a job state). The computing environment includes versions of software applications, path variables, and alias definitions. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090216870 | SIGNALING SERVER, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SIGNALING PROCESSING PROXY METHOD AND PROGRAM - To provide a data communication system which lightens processing related to changes in the status in signaling processing performed between terminals. A signaling server communicating mutually with a plurality of terminals includes: a transmitting/receiving part for transmitting/receiving a message; a status management part for updating a registered terminal list and status management information; and a signaling processing part for judging a destination and a type of the message received at the transmitting/receiving part. The signaling processing part gives an instruction to the status management part to update the status management information in accordance with contents of the message without transferring the message to a first terminal, when the first terminal requires the signaling processing support and the message is not directly related to starting or stopping of communication with the first terminal. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090216871 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND ITS CONTROL METHOD - In a managing device in a communication system including both a first terminal that carries out a control procedure with the managing device and starts data communication, and a second terminal that starts data communication without carrying out the control procedure, the start of data communication by the second terminal is recognized. Then, after recognizing the start of the data communication by the second terminal, when the start of a control procedure is requested from the first terminal, the control procedure is changed. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090222544 | FRAMEWORK FOR JOINT ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF SERVER PROVISIONING AND LOAD DISPATCHING FOR CONNECTION-INTENSIVE SERVER - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates managing a number of active servers in a cluster. A forecast component can predict at least one of login rate or number of connections in the cluster at a future time. A dynamic load analysis component can evaluate dynamic behaviors in login rate and number of connections in the cluster as a result of load dispatching. Moreover, a provisioning component can determine a number of servers in the cluster needed based at least in part on the prediction and dynamic behavior analysis. In addition, the provisioning component can include an additional margin in the number of servers needed in accordance with multiplicative factors. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090222545 | DEVICE CONTROL APPARATUS, DEVICE INFORMATION ACQUIRING METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A device control apparatus configured to control a device based on device information acquired from the device, the device control apparatus including a search part configured to search for an information processing apparatus connected to a network; a remote control availability determining part configured to determine whether the information processing apparatus searched by the search part can be controlled by remote control; and a device information acquiring part configured to control the information processing apparatus by the remote control. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090222546 | NETWORK DEVICE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD - When a management operation for changing an IP address of a device is applied to a plurality of devices, and the devices as operation targets include a network device management apparatus, the self apparatus is put to the end of operations, and the IP address change operation is applied to other devices ( | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090222547 | Generating Displays of Networking Addresses - Technologies for generating displays of user-defined blocks of networking addresses on a map of an associated address space are provided. Each block of networking addresses is described in a user-defined table with a start address and a map size. The display for each block of network addresses may be rendered on the map at a location based on the relative position of the start address within the associated address space and of a size based on the mask size in relation to the associated address space. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090222548 | Method and Apparatus for Restricting Address Resolution Protocol Table Updates - Techniques for restricting Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table updates to updates originating from authorized subsystems is disclosed. According to an embodiment, an instruction to update an ARP table is received. It is determined whether a command interface from which the instruction originated is authorized. If the command interface is authorized, then the ARP table is updated based on the instruction. According to an embodiment, a DHCP Server may be configured to send an instruction to update an ARP table upon receiving a DHCP message indicating a network layer address that is not bound with a data link layer address. The DHCP Server may send the instruction over an authorized command interface, or be in other ways authorized to update the ARP table. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090240793 | Memory Buffer Management Method and System Having Multiple Receive Ring Buffers - The present invention is directed to a method and system of memory management that features dual buffer rings, each of which includes descriptors identifying addresses of a memory space, referred to as buffers, in which portions of data packets are stored. Typically, the header segment of each data packet is stored at a first set of a plurality of buffers, and the portion of the payload segment that does not fit among the buffers of the first set is stored in the buffers of a second set. In this manner, the size of the individual buffers associated with the first buffer rings may be kept to the smallest size of useable storage space, and the buffers corresponding to the second buffer ring may be arbitrary in size. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240794 | TECHNIQUES UTILIZING A LAYER-2 PROXY FOR ENERGY-EFFICIENT SERVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTIVITY IN NETWORKS - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of server energy conservation in networks, comprising integrating a layer-2 service discovery proxy with an access point (AP) in the network, wherein the AP advertises the services on behalf of servers in the network to enable the servers to go to a low power state and conserve energy. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240795 | ADDRESS REDIRECTION FOR NODES WITH MULTIPLE INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESSES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate obtaining an Internet Protocol (IP) address of a node with multiple IP addresses using address redirection in a wireless communication environment. A wireless communication component can retrieve a previously registered IP address corresponding to the node from an Authentication, Accounting, and Authorization/Home Subscriber Server (AAA/HSS). Further, a reverse query of a Domain Name Server (DNS) and a forward query of the DNS can be performed. The reverse query can be constructed based upon the previously registered IP address of the node and can resolve a name (e.g., string, . . . ). Further, the forward query can be formed based upon the name and can return a differing IP address of the node. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240796 | MANAGEMENT SERVER, CLIENT TERMINAL, TERMINAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, TERMINAL MANAGEMENT METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A management server which is connected to a plurality of client terminals via a network, includes a storage unit adapted to store a management policy including usage-permitted time periods of the plurality of client terminals, and an application unit adapted to read out from the storage unit the management policy including the usage-permitted time period of the client terminal to be managed, output the readout management policy to the client terminal, and apply the usage-permitted time period to the client terminal, and extends the usage-permitted time period of the client terminal in accordance with a state of the client terminal. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090248844 | Hybrid Profile Management for Electronic Social Networks - In the context of electronic social networking platforms, ‘hybrid profile’ management allows a user u to create and locally manage ‘pseudo-profiles’ reflecting the profile information of real-world contacts who are not actual members of the networking platform. The first-degree electronic social network of a given user u thus includes both the profiles of other regular network users who have agreed to be direct contacts to u as well as these pseudo-profiles. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090248845 | NETWORK BANDWIDTH CONTROL FOR NETWORK STORAGE - Network bandwidth is allocated to storage access requests as a function of a client system activities. Client system activities that produce network access requests and remote storage access requests are monitored. The network bandwidth allocation between network access requests and storage access requests is modified as a function of the monitored client system activities. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090248846 | CONFIGURING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN COMPUTING NODES - Techniques are described for configuring communications between multiple computing nodes, such as computing nodes that are separated by one or more physical networks. In some situations, the techniques may be used to provide a virtual network between multiple computing nodes that are separated by one or more intermediate physical networks, such as from the edge of the one or more intermediate physical networks by modifying communications that enter and/or leave the intermediate physical networks so as to provide an overlay network without encapsulation of the communications. In some situations, the computing nodes may include virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems, such as by or on behalf of one or more users (e.g., users of a program execution service). | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090248847 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND VOLUME MANAGING METHOD FOR STORAGE SYSTEM - A time and an amount of data for setting information which is necessary to execute an exclusion process which is necessary when data is stored in a cluster system are reduced. A storage system included in the cluster system includes a plurality of volumes, and a plurality of virtual servers utilizing at least one or more volumes of the plurality of volumes for a data processing, each of the plurality of virtual servers can access all the plurality of volumes, and the volume utilized by the plurality of virtual servers to process data corresponds to the virtual servers. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090248848 | DRM INTEROPERABLE SYSTEM - A DRM interoperable system is provided. The DRM interoperable system includes: a domain manager which manages a domain; first and second devices which are authenticated by the domain manager and registered in the domain; and a control unit which gathers information on entities that are to participate in transmission of data when the first device requests the second device to transmit the data, controls at least two entities so that a chain including the at least two entities is constructed by using the gathered information on the entities, and controls the at least two entities so that a plurality of data is transmitted to the second device through the chain. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a DRM interoperable environment in which data can be effectively transmitted. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090248849 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, DEVICE, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A device management system, a device, and a management apparatus are provided. The device management system includes a plurality of devices that are coupled to a network; and a management apparatus that is coupled to the network. The devices include a first device and a second device. The first device stores icon image data indicating the device and including specified information embedded therein as digital watermark information. The second device stores icon image data indicating the device but not including specified information. The management apparatus includes a response information receiving unit; a response detecting unit that detects whether the specified information is embedded as the digital watermark information in the icon image data; and a device specifying unit that specifies a device as a first device or a second device. | 10-01-2009 |
| 20090254643 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING GALLERIES OF MEDIA OBJECTS ON A NETWORK - Collections of media objects may be aggregated from network resources available over a network. An embodiment provides that a network resource is accessed at each of a plurality of network locations. The network resource is analyzed at each network location to determine whether the network resource includes, or provides access to, any or all media objects in a set of multiple media objects that collectively satisfy one or more editorial criteria for being deemed a gallery, as presented at the network location or network locations where the multiple media objects are provided. The information about the set of media objects may be stored. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254644 | System of Managing Connection to Web Services and Method Thereof - The present invention relates to a system and method for managing connection between web services. The system includes an external web service connection setup server for determining an external web service to which connection is to be made, and establishing and verifying connection rules, and an external web service connection management server for conducting tests on connection to the external web service and storing the results of the tests. The system may further include a component for searching a connection target DB in which connection results are stored, and transmitting connection results to a main web service server, a component for removing a hyperlink to a failure page, and a component for sensing a sudden increase in a connection failure ratio. Accordingly, external web services belonging to all fields desired by a network manager can be easily, rapidly and efficiently connected. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254645 | SERVER-MANAGED POWER SAVING METHOD FOR AUTOMATED TAPE LIBRARIES AND DRIVES - A system of controlling tape drives within a tape drive library where a backup server utilizes client backup schedules and pending client restore requests to efficiently control the powering on and off of tape drives within a tape drive library. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254646 | MILARRS SYSTEMS AND METHODS - An add-on module provides extrinsic management functionality to legacy and other devices. Contemplated modules include: (a) a state agent that provides at least one of the MILARRS function, and (b) a product agent that communicates with the device using at least one serial interface. Implementations are contemplated for both legacy devices that natively provide less than complete MILARRS functionality, and newly developed devices for which the developer desires a ready-made implementation of MILARRS functionality. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254647 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK INTERFACING - Systems and methods for network interfacing may include a communication data center with a first tier, a second tier and a third tier. The first tier may include a first server with a first single integrated convergent network controller chip. The second server may include a second server with a second single integrated convergent network controller chip. The third tier may include a third server with a third single integrated convergent network controller chip. The second server may be coupled to the first server via a single fabric with a single connector. The third server may be coupled to the second server via the single fabric with the single connector. The respective first, second and third server, each processes a plurality of different traffic types concurrently via the respective first, second and third single integrated convergent network chip over the single fabric that is coupled to the single connector. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254648 | Method and System for Using Presence in a System Management Environment - Method, system and computer program product for communicating information regarding a managed resource in a network data processing system. A method, in a network data processing system, for communicating information regarding a managed resource includes receiving management information regarding at least one managed resource. The received management information is converted into a specified format, and the converted management information is then sent to at least one management application in conjunction with the sending of presence information to the at least one management application. The converted management information may then be extracted from the presence information for use in any desired manner. The invention provides a convenient mechanism for communicating status information and other appropriate information regarding a managed resource to interested parties connected to the network data processing system. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090259739 | System and method for remote management of a computer - There is provided a system and method for remote management of a computer. The method includes establishing a connection between a remote console and a managed server. Additionally, the method includes detecting a change in the status of the connection and issuing commands to lock the managed server if a change in status of the connection is detected. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090259740 | MANAGING OVERLAPPING ADDRESS SPACES - A network management method and system. The method includes identifying by a computing system, overlapping address spaces between networks. The computing system generates virtual servers associated with the overlapping address spaces. The computing system determines and configures a routing technique for routing the virtual servers to the overlapping address spaces. The computing system installs a copy of management software on each of the virtual servers. The computing system performs a network management installation process. The network management process prepares the virtual servers for managing the overlapping address spaces. The computing system generates and stores a log report associated with the network management installation process. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090259741 | Grid Computing Implementation - A method, apparatus, and program product that facilitates the implementation of grid or distributed network computing by automatically organizing a group of computers into a hierarchical, or tree networked system. The computer servers are selected into subgroups with each subgroup selecting a server to act as its leader. The leader is responsible for reporting performance characteristics of the servers in the subgroup to a master catalog server housed in a centralized management facility. The hierarchical system contemplated by embodiments of the invention reduces the number of messages that must be sent between the servers in the system necessary to monitor and manage the system. This reduction in the number of messages that must be sent between the servers in the system reduces the amount of server resources dedicated to overhead monitoring and managing, freeing these resources to be dedicated to performing the common processing task that grid or distributed network system was established to perform. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090259742 | CONCURRENT IGRS-UPnP - The claimed invention disclosed is used in consumer electronics device interoperability. Systems, apparatuses and methods for processing a concurrent IGRS-UPnP architecture | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090265453 | NETWORK MANAGING METHOD AND NETWORK MANAGING APPARATUS - In order to verify if upper-level router information, or ULRI (information on the upper-level router with respect to a predetermined node) is valid, MN (Mobile Node) 220 associated to ULMR (Upper-Level Mobile Router) 210 acquires ULRI such as the address of ULMR (310), inserts ULRI into a BU (Binding Update) message, and sends it to HA (Home Agent) 235 (320). On receiving the BU message with ULRI, HA sends a BA (Binding Acknowledgement) message set to pass through the router that is specified in ULRI (330). If ULRI is valid, ULMR forwards the BA message to MN (340). If ULRI is not valid, ULMR discards the BA message. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090265454 | Absence Assistance System for Multimedia-Enabled Communication Systems - The absence assistance system for at least one multimedia-enabled communication system comprising a plurality of packet-oriented client communication systems, in which the packet-oriented client communication systems support at least in part different multimedia services and at least one multimedia service of a packet-oriented client communication system is in each case assigned to at least one communication subscriber, has in each case at least one absence assistance unit per packet-oriented client communication system, the packet-oriented client communication systems being connected to one another via a peer-to-peer transmission protocol. The absence assistance units manage, in the absence of a communication subscriber, the communication connections directed to the absent communication subscriber via the at least one assigned multimedia service. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090265455 | METHOD OF RESOLVING DUPLICATE MAC ADDRESSES, NETWORK DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, SERVER, AND INFORMATION DEVICE - MAC addresses of information devices on a network are collected using a broadcast frame or multicast frame of Ethernet®. If duplicate MAC addresses are detected, an Ethernet® frame, including a device identifier of information device and a MAC address to be set, is sent by broadcast transmission or multicast transmission. The information devices receiving this Ethernet® frame compare the above device identifier with their own device identifiers. If they match, the MAC address is changed to that designated. Duplicate MAC addresses are thus resolved, enabling correct Ethernet® communications. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090271506 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND MANAGEMENT METHOD - Proposed are a management apparatus and a management method capable of facilitating resource management With the provided management apparatus and management method for managing a resource allocated to a virtual node that provides a file sharing service to a client in units of a resource management group configured from a plurality of mutually associated resources, an association between the resources is extracted based on history information of access from the client, and the associated resource management groups are integrated based on the extracted association between the resources. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of resource management groups to be managed, and resource management is thereby facilitated. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090276512 | BIOS SELECTION FOR PLURALITY OF SERVERS - A method for selecting a basic input output system (BIOS) and an operating system (OS) for a server managed by a controller in communication with a plurality of servers is provided. The server is detected. A map describing a relationship between the server and the plurality of servers is consulted. The map at least partially defines a policy for the server. Vital product data (VPD) of the server is used in conjunction with the map and the policy to select at least one of the BIOS and the OS for the server prior to an application of power to the server. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090276513 | POLICY CONTROL ARCHITECTURE FOR SERVERS - A system for implementing and controlling a plurality of server-specific policies for a plurality of servers using a management module in communication with the plurality of servers is provided. A policy controller module is operational on the management module. The policy controller module is adapted for defining a first policy of a plurality of policies for each of the plurality of servers, managing a plurality of rules relevant to an execution of the first policy, and coordinating the execution of the first policy with an execution of a second policy of the plurality of policies. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090276514 | DISCARDING SENSITIVE DATA FROM PERSISTENT POINT-IN-TIME IMAGE - A network storage server implements a method to discard sensitive data from a Persistent Point-In-Time Image (PPI). The server first efficiently identifies a dataset containing the sensitive data from a plurality of datasets managed by the PPI. Each of the plurality of datasets is read-only and encrypted with a first encryption key. The server then decrypts each of the plurality of datasets, except the dataset containing the sensitive data, with the first encryption key. The decrypted datasets are re-encrypted with a second encryption key, and copied to a storage structure. Afterward, the first encryption key is shredded. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090276515 | MULTI-MODALITY NETWORK FOR IMPROVED WORKFLOW - Described herein are systems and methods for multi-modality networks that provide access to different medical devices though a common operator interface. In an example embodiment, a multi-modality network comprises a host computer and a plurality of medical devices. The medical devices may support different diagnostic and/or therapeutic modalities. The host computer communicates with the medical devices through a communications network. In one embodiment, the host computer includes a display and a control console that allow the physician or operator to control the different medical devices and view images and measurements from the different medical devices through a common interface. Further, the host computer may provide computing resources, e.g., a general purpose image processor, that can be shared among the different modalities. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090282137 | DISTRIBUTING USER ENDPOINT REGISTRATIONS AMONG BORDER ELEMENTS IN A NEXT GENERATION NETWORK - Disclosed methods of achieving load balancing among a plurality of border elements in a next generation networks (NGN) communication network include a method for processing and user endpoint originated messages (UEOM), such as a register or invite message, generated by a user endpoint. A work load information data structure indicative of a first border element's work load and a second border element's work load is maintained when the border elements exchange work load information. Based on the work load information, a first border element responds to a UEOM by either (1) accepting the UEOM for first border element processing, (2) determining whether to accept the UEOM for first border element processing or redirect the UEOM to a second border element for second border element processing, or (3) rejecting the UEOM. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282138 | System, method, and apparatus for electronic communication initiation contingent on busyness - An apparatus, system, and method for electronic communication initiation contingent on busyness. The method includes receiving a request from a requester to contact a user. The requested contact includes a request to engage in electronic communication. The method also includes determining a busyness of the user. The busyness is determined by accessing a quantity of active contact related tasks for the user. The method also includes comparing the busyness of the user to a condition. The condition is a complex condition having threshold levels for a plurality of contact related tasks. The method also includes contacting the user in response to satisfaction of the condition. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282139 | Emulating A Computer Run Time Environment - Emulating a computer run time environment including: storing translated code in blocks of a translated code cache, each block of the translated code cache designated for storage of translated code for a separate one of the target executable processes, including identifying each block in dependence upon an identifier of the process for which the block is designated as storage; executing by the emulation environment a particular one of the target executable processes, using for target code translation the translated code in the block of the translated code cache designated as storage for the particular process; and upon encountering a context switch by the target operating system to execution of a new target executable process, changing from the block designated for the particular process to using for target code translation the translated code in the block of the translated code cache designated as storage for the new target executable process. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282140 | Method and system for server location tracking - There is provided a method of locating a first server coupled to a network of servers in a data center having a plurality of servers including the first server, the network including a data center management computer. The method comprises obtaining, by a first server, an identification data from a locator coupled to the server, wherein the identification data can be utilized to determine a location of the locator in the data center; storing the identification data in a memory of the first server; and providing, by the first server, an information based on the identification data to the data center management computer. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282141 | Server managing apparatus and server managing method - A controlling unit obtains server information from a server group in a chassis to store the obtained server information in a server information DB, an editing unit reads the server information from the server information DB, and generates, based on the read server information, as screen display information, physical server information, and logical server information including information on use application and attribute information for a logical server, which are related to a physical location of each physical server, and a displaying unit displays screen display information on a screen simulating the physical location of the physical server. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282142 | BOOT CONTROLLING METHOD OF MANAGED COMPUTER - A managed server (srv- | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090287804 | TOPIC BASED LOOP DETECTION IN A PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE NETWORK - When a new broker is connected to a network, a loop detection message is sent over the new connection created by the new broker. The loop detection message includes topics. At each receiving broker, topics that cannot be propagated to a neighbor broker are removed. If the loop detect message contains no topics, the loop detect message is not propagated further. If the loop detection message returns to the new broker, a loop is detected. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287805 | SYSTEM & METHOD FOR NON-HTTP SESSION BASED PUBLISH/SUBSCRIBE SUPPORT USING PRE-EMPTIVE SUBSCRIPTIONS - The invention includes a publish/subscribe system for publish/subscribe messaging utilizing pre-emptive subscriptions in a cluster of HTTP servers that includes load balancing. The system includes at least one HTTP client in a role of HTTP subscriber, and a set HTTP servers arranged as an HTTP server cluster in communication with each other and the at least one HTTP client in a network infrastructure, where each HTTP server is subscribed to a special topic: admin/subscriptions, maintains a subscription to requested topics for a client and a message history of messages published on that topic. Each server can serve messages to different HTTP clients at different times based on the HTTP client's “cursor” in the HTTP server's message history list, and wherein any HTTP client request for a “next” message on a given requested topic will follow their cursor progress through the message history list. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287806 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PRODUCT FOR COMPARATIVE EFFICIENCY DECISIONS IN PRINT OPERATIONS - Methods, devices, services and program products are provided for selecting a printer from a plurality of printers as a function of a printer resource consumption attribute where there is a network environment comprising a plurality of printers, each of the plurality of printers having a resource consumption attribute value. A user invokes a print operation through the network environment and a processing means compares weighted resource consumption attribute values for each of the plurality of printers. Processing means automatically select at least one destination printer from the plurality of printers having a lower resource usage requirement for performing a print operation relative to at least one unselected printer of the plurality of printers. Processing means also automatically choose a destination printer as a function of an availability of each of the destination printers. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287807 | MANAGING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - There is provided a managing apparatus including a management-side communication unit that communicates with an information processing apparatus, which includes a first communication unit that communicates in a non-contact manner with an information processing terminal storing first information and second information and a second communication unit that communicates with an external device; a process target determining unit that determines whether the first communication unit is a management target based on identification information; a management information deriving unit that derives management information based on a determination result, the identification information, and service specification information, and transmits the derived management information to the information processing apparatus; a process authority determining unit that determines a process authority based on a process result transmitted from the information processing apparatus; and a processing unit that selectively executes a process related to the information processing apparatus based on a determination result. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287808 | AUTOMATED DISPLAY OF AN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM CONFIGURATION - An Information Technology (IT) system display method and computer program product. A description is provided of a configuration of devices, network segments, and vertical connectors relating to an IT structure. The devices are initially distributed to form a distribution of the devices in a matrix representing a display screen. A defined goal value of the configuration is a function of a length and weight of each network segment, a length and weight of each vertical connector, and a penalty for each crossing of a device by a network segment. An overlay pattern of the network segments and the vertical connectors overlayed on the matrix is displayed in accordance with the description and the final distribution of the devices in the matrix. The goal value for the final distribution is lower than for the initial distribution. The final distribution is displayed on the display screen together with the overlay pattern. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287809 | SERVICE BANDWIDTH CONFIGURING METHOD AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A service bandwidth configuring method of is provided by this invention, which includes the following steps: defining various kinds of service classes according to the characteristics of various services provided by a network system; defining various kinds of bandwidth specifications of the network system; establishing the mapping relationships between the various kinds of service classes and various kinds of bandwidth specifications; and configuring the service bandwidth of the network system with the mapping relationships. Besides, this invention also provides a network management system. This invention is intended to be applied to the interfaces between NMS and EMS, or interfaces between EMS and NE, and it facilitates the intercommunication between the network management systems of different manufacturers, and the unified management on network management system or devices from different manufacturers by the upper layer network management system. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287810 | VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK MANAGEMENT - The invention provides a centralized VPN management of a plurality of VPN sites by means of a VPN Information Provider (VIP). Management of a VPN device is distributed so that at least part of the VPN configuration is centrally managed without giving away control of the firewall rulebase or other critical local configuration used in the VPN device. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090292797 | Dynamic Runtime Service Oriented Architecture - According to one embodiment, a dynamic access method for a service oriented architecture includes receiving a number of proxy endpoints from a business application, selecting one proxy endpoint from among the multiple proxy endpoints, and transmitting a request to an enterprise service bus (ESB). The request includes the one proxy endpoint for accessing the particular web service that it references. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090292798 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING CONTROL MESSAGES BETWEEN A FIRST DEVICE AND A SECOND DEVICE - An apparatus and system are provided for communicating control messages between a first device and a second device. The apparatus and system include a communication module that directs control messages between a first device and a second device through an intermediate device. The intermediate device is coupled to the first device by a control path and to the second device by a data path. The apparatus and system also include a translation module and a transmission module that cooperate to translate control messages received over the control path at the intermediate device to transport data messages and transport data messages received over the data path at the second device to control messages. Transport data messages are sent over the data path to the second device and control messages from the second device are sent over the control path to the first device. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090292799 | REMOTE ADMINISTRATION OF MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICES - Apparatus and methods to manage operational features of a mobile wireless device using parameters for the mobile wireless device set in another mobile wireless device provide a mechanism to enhance the communication capabilities of wireless users. Additional apparatus, systems, and methods are disclosed. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090292800 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING ASSOCIATED PORTLETS OF A WEB PORTLET TO COLLABORATE FOR SYNCHRONIZED CONTENT DISPLAY - The invention provides method and apparatus for collaboration between a plurality of associated portlets in a portal server including: associating each portlet with a portlet descriptor describing context names; forming collaboration groups of portlets having corresponding context names for synchronized contents. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090292801 | Registering a Common Information Model Provider to a Common Information Model Object Manager - A mechanism is provided for registering a Common Information Model (CIM) provider to at least one Common Information Model Object Manager (CIMOM). The CIMOM pre-stores at least one class definition. The CIMOM sends information to the Common Information Model (CIM) provider in order for the CIM provider to determine the at least one CIMOM existing in a network. The CIMOM sends thee at least one class definition stored in the CIMOM in order for the CIM provider to determine if the CIMOM comprises a class definition suitable for the CIM provider to operate. Responsive to the CIM provider determining that the CIMOM comprises a suitable class definition, the CMOM registers the CIM provider by recording an identifier of the CIM provider under the name of the class definition suitable to the CIM provider in the at least one CIMOM. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090292802 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT APPLICATION AND NETWORK AWARENESS OF COLLABORATIVE APPLICATIONS USING MULTI-ATTRIBUTE CLUSTERING - A method of clustering communication nodes based on network attributes such as network delays and forwarding capacity; on communication interest attributes; and on application attributes such as quality of service preferences/constraints in providing communications between users and application servers. A multi-attribute communication feature vector is formed. That vector is comprised of network attributes, communication interests attributes, and quality of service requirements and is used to form efficient group communication mechanisms for distributed collaborative applications. Then the multi-attribute communication feature vectors are clustered. The clustering methods for multi-type attribute feature vectors are: iterative clustering using a generalized distance space with normalized attribute subspace metrics; fusion clustering, and nested clustering. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090300152 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USER IDENTITY MANAGEMENT IN CLOUD-BASED NETWORKS - An identity management system can reside within the cloud computing environment. The identity management system can be linked to systems, such as virtual machines, applications, and/or appliances, both inside and outside the cloud computing environment to provide identity management to those systems. In order to provide identity management, the identity management system can be configured to link to the systems in order to receive, store, maintain, and provide identity information. The information can identify items (users, devices, products, services) associated with the systems. The identity management system can be configured to store and maintain the information in records. The identity management system can also be configured to charge owners and operators of the systems for the identity management. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300153 | Method, System and Apparatus for Identifying User Datagram Protocol Packets Using Deep Packet Inspection - An embodiment of a method, system and apparatus for prioritizing network datagram traffic includes receiving a datagram packet from a sender device. The datagram packet is addressed to a receiver device and includes a real-time data payload. The method further includes identifying the datagram packet in a network layer using deep packet inspection to determine at least one of an application or protocol associated with the datagram packet. The method still further includes generating traffic priority information associated with the datagram packet based upon identifying the datagram packet. The traffic priority information indicates traffic prioritization between the sender device and the receiver device. Various embodiments further include controlling the sending of the datagram packet to the receiver device based upon the traffic priority information. Some embodiments further include prioritizing traffic between the sender device and the receiver device in accordance with the traffic priority information. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300154 | Managing performance of a job performed in a distributed computing system - Methods, systems, and products are disclosed for managing performance of a job performed in a distributed computing system, the distributed computing system comprising a plurality of compute nodes operatively coupled through a data communications network, the job carried out by a plurality of distributed pluggable processing components executing on the plurality of compute nodes, that include: identifying a current configuration of the pluggable processing components carrying out the job, the current configuration specifying a current distribution of the pluggable processing components among the compute nodes; identifying a network topology of the plurality of compute nodes in the data communications network; receiving a plurality of performance indicators produced during execution of the job; and redistributing, to a different compute node, at least one of the pluggable processing components in dependence upon the current configuration, the network topology, and the performance indicators. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300155 | Mechanism for collocation in a Java virtual machine of JSLEE, SIP servlets, and Java EE - In one embodiment, a mechanism for collocation in a JAVA Virtual Machine of JSLEE, SIP Servlets, and JAVA EE is disclosed. In one embodiment, a system includes an integrated application server including Java™ APIs for Intelligent Networks Service Logic Execution Environment (JSLEE), one or more Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Servlets, and Java™ Enterprise Edition (J2EE). In addition, the system includes one or more resource adapters communicably coupled to the integrated application server and one or more management interfaces communicably coupled to the integrated application server. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300156 | Methods And Systems For Managing Security In A Network - Methods, systems and computer readable mediums storing computer executable programs for managing security in a network are disclosed. A plurality of security policies associated with a plurality of network data anomalies are provided at a network management system. Each one of the plurality of security policies defines a network data anomaly specific mitigation response for each one of the plurality of network data anomalies. A first network data anomaly is detected at the network management system. A determination is made at the network management system regarding whether a first one of the plurality of security policies defines a first network data anomaly specific mitigation response to the first network data anomaly. A first mitigation command is issued from the network management system to at least one network system to implement the first network data anomaly specific mitigation response for a pre-defined period of time in accordance with the first security policy based on the determination. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300157 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING AT LEAST ONE GROUP OF USERS, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method is provided for managing at least one group of users who have equipment able to intercommunicate via at least one communication network. This method includes a phase of inserting a new user into the groups, the phase itself including the following steps performed by an intermediate device: receiving, from a member of the group, a first request to insert the new user into the group; and inserting the new user into the group, after receiving the first and second insertion requests. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300158 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING THE COMMUNICATION OF PRESENCE INFORMATION AMONG COMPUTING DEVICES OF A NETWORK - A method and system for aggregating presence information generated by multiple devices associated with a single user is presented. A server acting as a presence agent on behalf of a first user and the first user's computing device receives and responds to a subscription request generated by a computing device operated by a second user that wishes to be permitted as a watcher of the first user. If the server is not capable of acting as a presence agent, then the first user's computing device assumes the role of a presence agent. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300159 | MANAGING INTERWORKING COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS - Systems and methods for managing interworking protocols are provided. According to one embodiment, a policy-based provisioning methodology is used by a service management system (SMS) to provision subscriber interfaces of service processing switches based upon parameters of a predefined policy. The subscriber interfaces communicate data in accordance with a first protocol. The parameters include a window size, a window timeout, a number of allowed bad events, an event window size and/or a keep-alive interval. Transport network interfaces, which communicate in accordance with a second protocol, are provisioned to provide a transport between the subscriber interfaces. A first-protocol-over-second-protocol (FPoSP) Virtual Private Network (VPN) is created through which the subscriber sites securely exchange data by establishing a virtual router (VR) corresponding to each subscriber interface. The VRs encapsulate packets received from the subscriber sites within packets of the second protocol and transmit the encapsulated packets through the transport network interfaces. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300160 | SERVICE DISTRIBUTION METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A service distribution method includes the steps of: firstly generating, by a management system, a corresponding configuration file from service information of a user, and sending the configuration file to an Optical Network Termination (ONT) of the user through an Optical Line Terminal (OLT); and then performing, by the ONT, corresponding configuration in accordance with the configuration file. A service distribution system and a management system are provided. The invention is applied to enable service distribution with good extendibility. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090307341 | METHOD FOR MANAGING STORAGE SYSTEM - A host server of a storage system transmits path information and a simultaneous command issue number to a storage managing server, while the path information corresponds to such paths that when the host server executes an application program, the host server accesses to a logical volume, the simultaneous command issue number corresponds to a total number of commands issued to the respective paths. A storage monitoring agent server transmits to the storage managing server, an upper limit number of command multiplex numbers. When accepting path information, a simultaneous command issue number, and the command multiplex number upper limit value, the storage managing server proportionally distributes the command multiplex number upper limit value of the port to the respective paths so as to calculate a command multiplex upper limit value, and calculated result. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090307342 | JOB EXECUTION SYSTEM, JOB EXECUTION APPARATUS, COUNTER DATA ADMINISTRATION METHOD THEREOF AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A job execution system comprises a job execution apparatus and a server apparatus interconnected via a network. The server apparatus stores in itself, counter data defining the range of using the job execution apparatus, which is allowed for a user who logs in the job execution apparatus by authentication. The job execution apparatus obtains entirely or partially the counter data of the login user from the server apparatus; returns the counter data that is reduced by job execution to the server apparatus when the user logs out thereof; judges according to conditions set on the job execution apparatus itself, whether or not the counter data returning operation should be suspended; and suspends the counter data returning operation if judges that it should be suspended. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090307343 | SERVER APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SERVER APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - The present invention provides a server apparatus that can communicate with a plurality of client apparatuses via a network, including a receiving unit configured to receive device information relating to a peripheral device capable of being connected to a client apparatus along with an acquisition scheme of the device information from the client apparatus, a storing unit configured to store the device information in association with the acquisition scheme, a judging unit configured to judge whether or not the device information received by the receiving unit has already been stored in the storing unit, and a determining unit configured to determine whether or not the device information is valid based on the acquisition scheme when it is judged by the judging unit that the received device information has already been stored in the storing unit. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090313362 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BUILDING NETWORK MODEL IN NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATION - A system and associated method for building a network model of a network for a network management application. The network management application discovering a router discovers peering routers using network reachability information in a routing protocol. Undiscoverable peering routers are created within the network model by the network management application from network reachability information. Also a local subnet for the router, a remote subnet for a peer, a remote interface between the router and the peer also may be created to model the network in a network management application from information from the routing protocol. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313363 | HOSTING A REMOTE COMPUTER IN A HOSTING DATA CENTER - Methods and systems of the present invention allow for hosting a remote computer or server in a hosting provider's data center. An exemplary method may comprise the steps of resolving a registrant's domain name to access a remote computer or server via client software on a client. The remote computer or server may be storage area networked with additional computers and may access additional software via cloud computing. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313364 | DIRECT DOMAIN SOFTWARE AND FILE ACCESS COMPUTER SYSTEM - Systems and methods of the present invention allow for a portal website further comprising an online community, storage areas, additional software, email access, etc. accessible via a direct access domain or links which manipulate a domain name to allow a registrant to access a remote computer or server in a hosting provider's data center. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313365 | DATA PROCESSING - A central management system exchanges data with a store at a remote site, where a display imparts visible and/or audible information to store customers. Monitoring means at the store monitors behavior of store customers. Predetermined content data is transmitted from the central management system to the remote store site for display. Monitored customer behaviour data is transmitted from the remote store site to the central management system, to enable evaluation of the customer behaviour in response to the content data. Data transmission between the central management system and the remote store site is effected without using the in-store IT system. Stock may be monitored at a Point of Purchase (POP) display. Barcode readers may be monitored passively. Brand means may impart visible or audible information to store customers or operatives. Compliance means may monitor whether a poster is displayed at a POP. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313366 | QOS-FOR-EACH-LINE CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - When receiving a session control signal from a terminal ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313367 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PREDICTIVE CHANGE MANAGEMENT FOR ACCESS PATHS IN NETWORKS - Methods and systems for predictive change management in a network are provided. A configuration change can be specified and pre-validated according to the access path policy, before the actual changes are implemented. The conformance of the implemented configuration change with the access path policy is validated after implementation, because of possible consequential effects of the configuration change. If a change in one or more access paths is specified, then associated component events can be simulated before implementation, so that root causes for resulting access path violations can be detected and remedied before the changes are made. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090313368 | CROSS-ENTERPRISE WALLPLUG FOR CONNECTING INTERNAL HOSPITAL/CLINIC IMAGING SYSTEMS TO EXTERNAL STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS - A WallPlug (interface) connects DICOM devices located at a hospital to external storage and retrieval systems. The external storage and retrieval systems can be part of the National Digital Mammography Archive. The WallPlug allows secure communications within the hospital setting, and allows only selected data to be transferred between the hospital devices and the archive. The WallPlug enables cross-enterprise distribution of medical content with proper authentication and logging of transfers. The WallPlug includes two portals connected together by a private secure network. The use of two separate devices greatly enhances the security, redundancy, and manageability of the combined device. | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090319650 | System and Method for the Process Management of a Data Center - An architecture for a data center is disclosed that manages the computational, power, and cooling elements of the data center according to a feedback process control function in which the operation of the data center is continuously monitored and adjusted according to monitoring data collected from the data center and a set of business rules concerning the operation of the data center. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090319651 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HOSTING ONE OR MORE VERSIONS OF A SERVICE USING A SERVICE PROXY - A method for hosting one or more versions of a service using a service proxy includes specifying an interface definition of a service which defines and uniquely identifies an interface version for the service, and an implementation definition of the service which uniquely identifies an implementation version for the service; generating one or more service proxies each representing an interface version of a service; providing a proxy configuration that contains entries for a plurality of service implementation versions, wherein each proxy utilizes the proxy configuration to access a certain one or more of the implementation versions which share the same or a compatible interface version of a service, and wherein the proxy configuration contains attributes that include information about each of the implementation versions; and wherein the proxy dynamically selects one of the implementation versions in the proxy configuration to route one or more client service requests to based on the attributes. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090319652 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SERIAL ATTACHED SCSI (SAS) DOMAIN MANAGEMENT - Embodiments of the invention include a method, apparatus and system for providing a Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) domain management application using a domain overlay architecture. The method includes comparing user constructs or data sets defining an existing domain overlay with device data that identifies various network devices in at least one SAS domain, and binding the existing domain overlay to an SAS domain if the existing domain overlay and the SAS domain are uniquely associated with one another. The method also includes creating a new domain overlay that is uniquely associated with an SAS domain for any SAS domain that is not bound to an existing domain overlay. A domain overlay and an SAS domain are not uniquely associated with one another unless the domain overlay references only network devices within the SAS domain and the network devices within the SAS domain are referenced only by the domain overlay. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090327464 | Load Balanced Data Processing Performed On An Application Message Transmitted Between Compute Nodes - Methods, apparatus, and products are disclosed for load balanced data processing performed on an application message transmitted between compute nodes of a parallel computer that include: identifying, by an origin compute node, an application message for transmission to a target compute node, the message to be processed by a data processing operation; determining, by the origin compute node, origin sub-operations used to carry out a portion of the data processing operation on the origin compute node; determining, by the origin compute node, target sub-operations used to carry out a remaining portion of the data processing operation on the target compute node; processing, by the origin compute node, the message using the origin sub-operations; and transmitting, by the origin compute node, the processed message to the target compute node for processing using the target sub-operations. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327465 | Distributed Configuration Orchestration for Network Client Management - Described is a network configuration management technology in which an orchestration point coordinates client machines and/or other machines to each run an activity with respect to the client machines to perform management tasks. The orchestration point controls the start of the activity. A management point and server may report progress. The orchestration point coordinates running the activities, e.g., serially or in parallel among the clients, and/or based on percentage of total machines allowed to simultaneously run an activity and/or current workload. Activities may include a task sequencing activity, a desired configuration management activity, a command set-related activity and/or a custom activity generated from a script, e.g., a PowerShell™ script. Also described is a replicator activity, which may be limited (e.g., based on a percentage of the total machines) and/or throttled (e.g., based on current load). | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327466 | INTERNAL UNIFORM RESOURCE LOCATOR FORMULATION AND TESTING - A mechanism for computer-assisted generation of matching rules for a proposed internal Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to a corresponding possible public URL. After accessing the proposed internal URL from the user, one or more options for a public URL corresponding to the internal URL are generated. Also, a mechanism for testing whether a candidate public Uniform Resource Locator (URL) has a corresponding match to an internal URL. Upon accessing a candidate public URL, matching rules are used to determine whether or not the candidate public URL matches a valid internal URL using any of the matching rules. If it is determined that there is not a match, matching rules that may be used to more closely match the candidate public URL to the valid internal URL are then displayed. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327467 | DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing device discovery in a wireless communication system is described. In one embodiment, a device discovery process is used in a wireless communication system having an apparatus for communicating with WirelessHD devices in a wireless network, where the apparatus comprises a host processor; a transceiver; a physical interface coupling the host processor and the transceiver; and a memory accessible by the host processor and the transceiver to exchange information between the host processor and the transceiver, and the device discovery process comprises: discovering a remote wireless device in the wireless network; notifying, by the transceiver, the host processor of the remote wireless device; requesting, under control of the transceiver, capability information from the remote wireless device prior to receiving a request from the host processor for the capability information; buffering, under control of the transceiver, the capability information before the capability information is requested by the host processor; receiving a capability request from the host processor; and providing the host processor access to the capability information. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327468 | Interactive Remote Command Execution Over a Stateless Client/Server Network Protocol - A mechanism for executing a remote command in a stateless client/server environment that provides progress information and allows user input that can influence command execution. A server receives a command request thread and processes the thread asynchronously by launching an asynchronous thread of execution and creating a conversation identifier for identifying the thread. In executing the command thread, if a conflict in execution of the thread exists, the server halts execution of the thread, creates a user input request to provide a resolution to the conflict and a user input request identifier, and sends the user input request, user input request identifier, and conversation identifier to the client. Responsive to receiving a response from the client, the server processes the user input and resumes execution of the command thread based on the user input. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327469 | Method for Controlling Host Throughput to a Computer Storage Subsystem - A method for controlling the throughput in a communications channel between a host and its storage subsystem is disclosed. A determination is made whether or not a total throughput value is greater than a predetermined maximum throughput value. If the total throughput value is greater than the predetermined maximum throughput value, a delay is applied to the communications channel. If the total throughput value is not greater than the predetermined maximum throughput value, another determination is made whether or not one time period has completed. If one time period has completed, a total throughput value and an exponential moving average (EMA) throughput value of the communications channel is retrieved, a new EMA throughput value is generated based on the total throughput value and the EMA throughput value, and adjusting the total throughput value based on whether or not the new throughput value is greater than a predetermined maximum throughput value. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327470 | SCALING SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT USING A STATELESS PROXY - A system for managing system devices including a first managed system, which includes hardware, an operating system executing on the hardware, and an agent management object (AMO) executing on the operating system and configured to obtain first management information about the operating system and the hardware. The system also includes a second managed system, including a first proxy management object (PMO) configured to receive the first management information from the AMO, request second management information about the hardware from the first managed system, receive the second management information from the first managed system, normalize the first management information and the second management information to obtain first normalized management information, and populate a first proxy data model associated with the PMO using the first normalized management information, where the first normalized management information is used to manage the first managed system. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327471 | MULTITENANT HOSTED VIRTUAL MACHINE INFRASTRUCTURE - A multi-tenant virtual machine infrastructure (MTVMI) allows multiple tenants to independently access and use a plurality of virtual computing resources via the Internet. Within the MTVMI, different tenants may define unique configurations of virtual computing resources and unique rules to govern the use of the virtual computing resources. The MTVMI may be configured to provide valuable services for tenants and users associated with the tenants. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327472 | DRM TIME SETTING METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for setting a Digital Rights Management (DRM) time for a DRM-enabled portable terminal for securing a reliable DRM time are provided. The method includes detecting a DRM time setting event, acquiring a reference time and a local time upon detection of the DRM time setting event, determining a reference value using the reference time and the local time, and setting the DRM time or the portable terminal based on the reference value. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327473 | Methods, Systems and Computer-Readable Media for Dynamically Recognizing and Processing Service Order Types in a Network Management System - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for dynamically recognizing and processing service order types in a network management system. Service type data for a new service order type is registered in a database table while the network management system is operating. Then, a service order is received in the network management system and the service order is parsed to determine if the received service order corresponds with the new service order type based on the service type data registered in the database table. If the service order corresponds with the new service order type, then the service order is processed by the network management system. If the service order does not correspond with the new service order type, then updated service type data may be registered in the database table. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327474 | Electronic Device and Connected Device Searching Method - According to one embodiment, a method of making it possible to identify the connection of an external device reliably, the method comprises transmitting a command to check the connection of an external device to a logical address to which no physical address has been caused to correspond in an address list, if there has been a response to the command to check the connection, transmitting to the logical address a command to obtain a physical address allocated to an external device to which the logical address has been allocated, and registering a physical address included in a response to the command to obtain the physical address so as to correspond to the logical address to which the command to check the connection has been transmitted in the address list stored in a storage unit. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100005161 | MANAGING OF NETWORK EQUIPMENT - An exemplary embodiment of a management apparatus can be provided. For example, the exemplary managing may include a profile device/arrangement and a process device/arrangement. The profile device/arrangement can include at least one process profile. Furthermore, the process device/arrangement can generate, by using the at least one process profile, a process description. For example, the generated process description may be a description of a physical process. Further, the generated process description may be executed in order to control the physical process in accordance with the generated process description. In addition, method, program arrangement and computer-accessible medium can be provided to perform certain procedures to generate the above-described process description. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005162 | BYPASS CONTROL MODULE AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPARATUS THEREOF AND CONTROL METHOD OF THE NETWORK SYSTEM - A bypass control module includes a logic circuit and a condition circuit. The logic circuit produces a logic output signal according to a state of a system power received from a network system and a state of at least one first control signal. The condition circuit is coupled to the logic circuit for producing a condition signal and determining a condition signal state according to the logic output state. The said network system selects one of the data transmission paths according to the logic circuit state for data transmission. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005163 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Controlling Devices - A method of controlling an apparatus comprising a plurality of features and adapted to receive messages via a first network interface, wherein said method is implemented in a filter superposed on the top of an existing architecture of the apparatus. The method comprises the following steps: receiving network management message via said first network interface; interrogating said message in order to identify a feature said network management message relates to and filtering the received management message such that said management message is rejected if the identified feature is classified as disabled and said management message is allowed top go through if said feature is classified as enabled. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005164 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A CONTROL CHANNEL IN A DATA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for providing a control channel in a data network. A method is provided that operates to provide a control channel in a data network. The method includes receiving one or more server digests, and generating a control channel digest from the one or more server digests. The method also includes communicating with a device, and transmitting the control channel digest to the device. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005165 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN MONITORING OR CONTROLLING INTERNET ACCESS - An apparatus method and system are described for categorizing Uniform Resource Locators (URLs) when accessing the Internet | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100011096 | Distributed Computing With Multiple Coordinated Component Collections - A system having components that collectively perform functions and services of the system. The components are managed as belonging to at least a first component collection and a second component collection. The components of the first component collection operate at a time scale that is substantially temporally independent of the components of the second component collection. The components of the first component collection have a first set of temporal requirements and the components of the second component collection have a second substantially different set of temporal requirements. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100011097 | Methods of Using Control Communications to Identify Devices that are Connected Through a Communications Patching System and Related Communications Patching Systems - Methods of identifying a first networked computing device that is connected to a connector port of a communication patching system are provided in which a control communication that is transmitted by the first networked computing device is passed through the connector port. An identifier associated with the first networked computing device is extracted from this control communication. The identifier may then be logged in a connectivity database that associates the identifier with the connector port. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100011098 | Systems and methods for managing networks - A system for managing an adaptive network having a plurality of nodes, each node comprising a processor coupled to a memory containing computer readable instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the node to fulfil one or more roles for operating the adaptive network. preferably, at least one of the nodes has an active administrative role. this administrative node is configured to determine network conditions and selectively activate roles on the plurality of nodes based on the network conditions. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100023610 | MIXED INTEGER PROGRAMMING MODEL FOR MINIMIZING LEASED ACCESS NETWORK COSTS - A device receives network configuration information from a network, determines a logical network based on the network configuration information, and constructs a mixed integer programming (MIP) model based on the logical network. The device also calculates an optimal solution, which minimizes network costs, using the mixed integer programming (MIP) model, performs a post-optimization mapping procedure on the optimal solution to produce an optimal network configuration mapping, and outputs the optimal network configuration mapping for implementation. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100023611 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR STORING DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM RECORDS, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PARSING DOMAIN NAME - A method, device, and terminal for storing domain name system (DNS) records are provided. The method includes: locally storing received DNS records needed to be stored; and if the size of all the stored DNS records does not satisfy a preset storing threshold, deleting a part of the stored DNS records to make the size of the remaining DNS records after deletion satisfy the storing threshold. A domain name parsing method, device, and server are provided. The method includes: receiving a DNS query request, where the DNS query request carries a domain name needed to be parsed and at least one of a service identity (ID) and user information; selecting a network address corresponding to the domain name according to the service ID and/or the user information; and if the corresponding network address is selected, returning the selected network address as a query result of the DNS query request. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100023612 | Network system, information management server, and information management method - To reduce the load on a management server in a load distributed system, a server list manager | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100030880 | FAILOVER IN PROXY SERVER NETWORKS - A system for servicing a request from a client includes at least two proxy servers, each having a corresponding proxy server configured as a buddy proxy server, and being adapted to act as a primary proxy server for servicing the request and to forward the request to a backend server. The system includes a load balancer adapted to: forward the request to a primary proxy server; forward the request to a failover proxy server in the event of failure of the primary proxy server; and forward a response from the primary proxy server or the failover proxy server to the client. The system includes a backend server adapted to receive a request from a proxy server and to send a response to the proxy server. The failover proxy server is adapted to process the request depending on a status of a matching previously stored request. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030881 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEDIATING ENTERPRISE SERVICE ACCESS FOR SMART DEVICES - Techniques are described for mediating enterprise service access for smart devices. A first message may be received at an enterprise service proxy device from a smart device via a first protocol associated with the smart device. It may be determined that the first message includes a smart device request for processing via an enterprise service located at a backend device. An enterprise service request and an associated enterprise request protocol may be determined based on the smart device request and a service adaptation description associated with the enterprise service and the first protocol. The enterprise service request may be sent to the backend device via the associated enterprise request protocol. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030882 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - It has been difficult for a management apparatus to make a communication apparatus change a communication channel in consideration of a remaining communication band of a network so as to set an appropriate communication channel. Further, setting the appropriate communication channel has been an enormous load placed on a communication apparatus provided with not many processing resources including a small CPU capacity, a small memory, and so forth. Therefore, the present invention allows for setting an appropriate communication channel ready for the remaining communication band of the network. Further, the present invention allows for reducing the load placed on the communication apparatus for setting the appropriate communication channel. Therefore, a management apparatus managing the network determines a communication channel satisfying a requested communication band and notifies at least a transmission apparatus and/or a reception apparatus of a change to the communication channel. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030883 | METHOD FOR OVERCOMING ADDRESS CONFLICTS AMONG DISPARATE NETWORKS IS A NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Converged network management application and system is provided that delivers a management platform as a service that can view and/or manage all managed networks in the aggregate, or any one of them individually (including individual devices within the managed networks), in a secure and efficient manner, providing continuously available intelligence in real time on the managed networks and systems, and overcoming integration issues including conflicting address schemas, the need to avoid unnecessary infrastructure, and the need acquire all necessary information in real time within applicable memory and bandwidth constraints. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030884 | PUBLISH AND SUBSCRIBE METHOD FOR REAL-TIME EVENT MONITORING IN A SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF DISPARATE NETWORKS - Converged network management application and system is provided that delivers a management platform as a service that can view and/or manage all managed networks in the aggregate, or any one of them individually (including individual devices within the managed networks), in a secure and efficient manner, providing continuously available intelligence in real time on the managed networks and systems, and overcoming integration issues including conflicting address schemas, the need to avoid unnecessary infrastructure, and the need acquire all necessary information in real time within applicable memory and bandwidth constraints. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030885 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONNECTION MANAGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to connection management in a telecommunication network and particularly relates to a method ( | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030886 | CONTENTS MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - A contents management method and system, the contents management method including: generating contents; and transmitting the generated contents to a Web server, wherein the Web server receives the contents, stores the contents, manages the contents, and maintains a list of the contents so that the contents are easily accessible by a terminal. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100036936 | MODIFICATION OF SOCIAL NETWORKS VIA DESIGN CODES - A method including receiving an update to at least one social network map encoded in a design code, modifying the social network map by inserting or deleting social contact data, and regenerating the design code to include the modified social network map. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100036937 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK COMPRISED OF ENORMOUS NODES, AND NODE AND CONTROL PROGRAM TO PERFORM SAID METHOD - A present invention provides a method for controlling roles of nodes in a network comprised of enormous nodes dynamically and distributed autonomously in such a way that the entire network can operate distributed autonomously. A method for controlling a field value u | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100042711 | Intelligent Network Information Server (NIS) Server Search - An Intelligent Network Information Server Search (INSS) decreases search time required for a client to find a network information server. A cumulative history file stores a history of network information server availability, a number of communication attempts, and a communication success rate. INSS uses a ypservers file list, and orders the network information server search according to a cumulative server success rate. A system administrator may optionally define the search order with a user defined weight given to one or more of the servers. The server link and history may be stored in a random access memory to improve performance. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042712 | Method and Apparatus for a Distributed Control Plane - A method and apparatus for a distributed control plane. In one embodiment of the invention, a primary control card distributes control plane process instances among one or more secondary cards, including a secondary control card and/or one or more Advanced Service Engine (ASE) cards. The primary control card associates particular control messages with particular control plane process instances. Upon a line card receiving a control message that is associated with a particular control plane instance, the line card forwards the control message directly to that particular control plane instance. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042713 | Network Group Management System - As a result of performing a comparing and determining process of determining the relationship among the distribution data band of the data distributed in real time in a local group, the incoming data band to the local group, and the outgoing data band from the local group, the increase/decrease management and the connection management of each terminal device in the local group are performed. The comparing and determining process compares, for example, a sum of the total sum of the terminal possessed transfer bands and the incoming data band from other groups to the local group with a sum of the value obtained by multiplying the distribution data band in the local group by the number of terminal devices in the local group, the outgoing data band from the local group, and a predetermined determination margin. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042714 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING A DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 4 ADDRESS RELEASE - A method and system for releasing an Internet Protocol (IP) version 4 address using a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) release in a Proxy Mobile IP version 6 (PMIPv6) of a third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Evolved Packet Core (EPC). The method includes transmitting a DHCP release request from a Serving GateWay (SGW) to a Packet Data Network (PDN) GW, transmitting a binding revocation from the PDN GW to the SGW, acknowledging the binding revocation from the SGW to the PDN GW, and deleting the IP version 4 connection for an active PDN connection. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100049842 | Computing Environment Arranged to Support Predetermined URL Patterns - A computing environment for hosting web services and applications is disclosed. The computing resources of the computing environment can be managed, controlled or utilized to facilitate improved hosting of web services, such as hosting of websites. According to one aspect, Universal Resource Locators (URLs) can be programmatically defined and utilized to centralize URL descriptions which can be utilized by the computing resources. According to another aspect, customized load balancing can be provided for the computing environment. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100049843 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DELETING BEARER OF INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for deleting bearers of an IP connection in a communication system includes: deleting bearers of a first IP connection and the corresponding connection channels of the bearers; determining whether an IP address of a UE is associated with a bearer among bearers of a second IP connection; and preserving the IP address of the UE if the IP address of the UE is determined to be associated with the bearer among bearers of the second IP connection. Additionally, a system and a device for deleting bearers of an IP connection in the communication system are provided. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100049844 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THEREOF - In order to identify a wireless device that is not under management in a wireless communication network, a management apparatus includes an acquisition unit configured to acquire information from the wireless terminal; a storage unit configured to correlate and store the wireless base station detected by the wireless terminal and a wireless terminal wirelessly connected to this wireless base station; a deriving unit configured to derive a wireless base station which does not have a wireless connection with a wireless terminal; a requesting unit configured to request a wireless terminal for transmission of data that has passed through this wireless base station; and a determination unit which, if requested data that has passed through the wireless base station from the wireless terminal has not been received, is configured to determine that this wireless base station is a wireless base station that is not under management. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100057896 | VENDOR GATEWAY TECHNOLOGY - Apparatus and methods for communicating between a gateway server and a plurality of other servers. The apparatus and methods may involve receiving information requests from the plurality of other servers. Each of the plurality of other servers may provide a platform for a different development environment. The apparatus and methods may further involve using the gateway server to generate an identification tag for each information request received from each of the plurality of other servers. The approved methods may include receiving a response to such information requests. In addition, the apparatus and methods may include associating the response received to the information request to which the response is responsive. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NETWORKS - Provided is a method and apparatus for managing networks. The method includes defining a set of managed objects of each of the networks to be managed, sending a request for information about the set of managed objects to an agent of the networks to be managed, and recognizing manageable managed objects based on information representing the managed objects, which is transmitted from the agent in response to the request. A network manager requests, receives, and obtains information about managed objects of each of sensor networks, especially heterogeneous sensor networks, thereby managing the heterogeneous sensor networks in an integrated way. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057898 | LOAD BALANCER SETTING METHOD AND LOAD BALANCER SETTING APPARATUS - An administrative manager connected to servers each in which a host OS capable of loading therein a software load balancer and a guest OS executing a service program are operable as virtual OS, performs the following processes. Namely, the server in which the guest OS for executing the service program being the transmission source of a processing request to be load balanced operates is set as a setting objective server of the software load balancer. Further, the server in which the guest OS for executing the service program being the transmission target of the processing request operates is set as a load balancing objective server. Then, an instruction is transmitted to the setting objective server to load the software load balancer in the host OS thereof, and, an instruction is transmitted to the setting objective server to set information to be used for the load balancing of transmission data. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057899 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR AN AIRCRAFT - A network management system in an aircraft for managing and maintaining a network. An aircraft maintenance computer communicates with a first device to be managed via the SNMP protocol. The first device to be comprises a description file. Within a subnetwork one or more second devices to be managed are present which are linked with the first device to be managed. These second devices to be managed enter their data into the description file via these connections. The data are necessary for managing and maintaining the respective second device to be managed by the aircraft maintenance computer. Therefore the aircraft maintenance computer is enabled to manage and maintain the first and the second devices only by means of the central MIB | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057900 | Terminal Apparatus, Server Apparatus, and Method for Managing Installation Position of Communication Equipment - According to one embodiment, a terminal apparatus includes a first acquisition module configured to acquire its own position information by using a known positioning system, a second acquisition module configured to acquire its own position information through another system which is different from the positioning system, when an equipment ID specifying the communication equipment is input at an installation position of the communication equipment and when it is impossible for the first acquisition module to acquire the own position information, and a transmitter which transmits a setting registration request including the equipment ID and the position information to the maintenance center via the communication network, when the transmitter is connectable to the communication network. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057901 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND NODE DEVICE AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS THEREOF - According to one embodiment, a network management system comprises nodes and an apparatus manages a communication network. The node includes generator, buffers, notification module, transmitter, measurement module and controller. The generator generates messages of different levels depending on a type of alarms. The buffers each provided for each of the different levels and temporarily holding the message in a holding period appropriate to the level. The notification module notifies the apparatus of the held message. The transmitter transmits a test signal. The measurement module individually measures the load on the apparatus and the load on the communication network based on a reception time of a reply from the apparatus to the test signal. The controller varies the holding period in the buffers according to the level based on the measured load on the apparatus and the communication network. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100064037 | GROUP MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND GROUP MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A first management apparatus that is connected to a first equipment device group including a plurality of first equipment devices centrally manages the first equipment devices. A second management apparatus connected to a second equipment device group including a plurality of second equipment devices separate from the plurality of first equipment devices centrally manages the second equipment devices. A group management apparatus connected to the first and second management apparatus centrally manages the first and second equipment device groups. The first and second management apparatus include first and second management programs to centrally manage the first and second equipment devices. The group management apparatus includes a group management program for centrally managing the first and second equipment device groups. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100064038 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDLE MODE SIGNALING REDUCTION - A method and a system for idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) are provided. The method includes: obtaining ISR activation information of a source network, and setting an ISR status of an user equipment (UE) in a target network according to the obtained ISR activation information of the source network. Thus, the ISR status of the UE can be processed when the UE is handed over between networks. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100077067 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDIRECTING DATA TRAFFIC BASED ON EXTERNAL SWITCH PORT STATUS - Method for redirecting outbound VLAN traffic away from an inactive external port of a switch. A first switch monitors the active or inactive status of a designated external port. A host computer periodically queries the first switch requesting the status of the designated external port. The first switch replies to the query indicating the current status of the designated external port. If the external port is inactive, the host computer redirects data traffic away from the inactive designated external port to an alternate external port without deactivating the designated internal port. Preferably, the designated internal port continues to be used for secure internal LAN communications, such as between a host computer and a management entity. When the designated external port is again active, data traffic is returned to the designated external port. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077068 | Processing of Service-Oriented Tasks within a Grid Computing Environment - Embodiments of the present invention enable processing of tasks within a service-oriented architecture (SOA). In embodiments, an echo mediator is a mediator SOA component that acts as a service provider by processing a service request associated with a service requester and returning the result to the service requester. In embodiments, an echo mediator handles a received sequential service request by synchronously processing it. In embodiments, an echo mediator handles a received parallel service request by storing it in a persistent store, and an echo mediator with processing capacity retrieves the stored parallel service request and asynchronously processes it. In embodiments, a group of echo mediators may be distributed among the nodes of a grid, forming an echo mediator grid in which each of the echo mediators interfaces with a common data store deployed within the grid. In embodiments, the grid of echo mediators balances the processing of stored service requests. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077069 | COLLABORATION SYSTEM AND METHOD AMONG HETEROGENEOUS NOMADIC AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS USING GRID SERVICES - The present invention relates to a collaboration system and method among heterogeneous nomadic/mobile communication networks using a grid service. By using a system in which GSI (Grid Service Infrastructure) is overlaid on heterogeneous nomadic/mobile communication networks, access to resources that are accessible with different interfaces can be made with a single standard interface. Further, a vertical hand-off among heterogeneous networks and access to location information can be easily performed. In addition, mutual operationality among networks can be improved and an efficient collaboration environment can be constructed. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077070 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DIRECTLY MAPPING WEB SERVICES INTERFACES AND JAVA INTERFACES - A method and system for directly mapping web services interfaces and Java interfaces. In one embodiment, a web services mapping is generated from a common mapping descriptor associated with a web services interface; updated mapping information is received, and, based on the web services mapping and the updated mapping information, a customized interface comprising a common web services and web services client interface is generated. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100082787 | Global server load balancing - A global server load-balancing (GSLB) switch serves as a proxy to an authoritative DNS and communicates with numerous site switches that are coupled to host servers serving specific applications. The GSLB switch receives from site switches operational information regarding host servers within the site switches neighborhood. When a client program requests a resolution of a host name, the GSLB switch, acting as a proxy of an authoritative DNS, returns one or more ordered IP addresses for the host name. The IP addresses are ordered using metrics that include the information collected from the site switches. In one instance, the GSLB switch places the address that is deemed “best” at the top of the list. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082788 | PROVIDING IMPROVED MESSAGE HANDLING PERFORMANCE IN COMPUTER SYSTEMS UTILIZING SHARED NETWORK DEVICES - In a massively parallel computer system embodiment, when receiving a message at a compute node from an input/output node, the compute node performs the steps of: obtaining a lock on a collective network device; checking a shared storage location for a message pending for a thread; if such a message is pending, receiving the message's remaining packets directly to a user's buffer, unlocking, and returning; if no such message is pending, receiving one packet from the network device; if the packet indicates that the message is for the thread, receiving the message's remaining packets directly to the user's buffer, unlocking, and returning; and if the packet indicates that the message is for another thread, updating the shared storage location with a thread id of the other thread, unlocking, waiting for a time out, locking, and repeating from the checking step. Accordingly, data copying is eliminated with an attendant performance benefit. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082789 | IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING IP SERVICE IN A ZIGBEE NETWORK SYSTEM - A ZIGBEE® network system and a method for assigning an Internet Protocol (IP) address in a ZIGBEE® network system are provided. The ZIGBEE® network system includes a client device for joining a ZIGBEE® network and being assigned an IP address used for transmitting and receiving data; a server device for assigning the IP address to the client device; and a ZIGBEE® coordinator for forming the ZIGBEE® network, storing server profile information for each server device that has joined the formed ZIGBEE® network, receiving client profile information for the client device from the client device, and determining a server device that will assign an IP address to the client device, using the received client profile information. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082790 | SERVER SCANNING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A technique for quickly locating, diagnosing and fixing problems with one or more servers is presented. The technique improves upon prior art techniques by providing a centralized utility by which multiple servers may be viewed and modified. More particularly, the technique allows a user to view, in a consolidated format, features of multiple servers and to modify parameters of such servers from a remote location. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082791 | Data transmission over a network with channel bonding - A system that transmits data over multiple networks receives data packets at a client node and forms a plurality of data aggregates from the data packets. The system then sends a request for a duplicate transmission to a coordinator node on a first network. In response to the request, the system receives a first transmission slot on the first network and a second transmission slot on a second network for transmission of the data aggregates. The system then splits the data aggregates among the first transmission slot and the second transmission slot and transmits the data aggregates on the first transmission slot and the second transmission slot. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082792 | PLUG AND PLAY ENERGY EFFICIENCY SOLUTION AND AUTOMATIC DATA-PUSH METHOD FOR SAME - An energy efficiency solution for automatically pushing data measured by IEDs in a utility system to an Internet server. Before the utility system is commissioned, the manufacturer pre-configures each IED to automatically push measured data to the server at regular intervals and associates each IED with a unique identifier that is transmitted with the data and with a customer who has purchased the solution. After commissioning, the IEDs come online and begin to automatically push their measured data to the server. The customer logs into the website via a manufacturer-provided access code to access the measured data instantly. Requests to change the type of data pushed from IEDs and other configuration changes can be made via the website. Periodically, the IEDs ask whether any configuration updates exist, and if so, the server makes available to the IEDs the updated configuration. By having IEDs initiate communications for data transmission and configuration updates, intervening firewalls are bypassed. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082793 | Server-Embedded Distributed Storage System - A server-embedded distributed storage system and methods are disclosed. An exemplary method may include presenting at least one virtual disk to a client computing device. The at least one virtual disk includes storage cells from direct attached storage (DAS) devices of a plurality of separate servers for high availability access to data stored on the at least one virtual disk. The method may also include continuing to provide access to the data stored on the at least one virtual disk even in the event an internal storage controller for at least one of the plurality of servers is unavailable for managing its DAS device. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082794 | HOME NETWORK VISUALIZATION - Intuitive visualization of a home network is provided by providing on screen images of devices in the network around an image of the TV, and by establishing sizes, motion, and other visualization features of the images to reflect selections, bandwidths, different sub-networks, etc. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082795 | INFORMATION PROCESSOR, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - An information processor is connectable to a communication system containing a plurality of terminal devices. The information processor receives content holding terminal information for identifying a terminal device holding a content, calculates a content holding terminal number corresponding to the number of terminal devices holding the content on the basis of the received content holding terminal information, holds a determination reference serving as a reference for determining whether the content holding terminal number is below a predetermined threshold value, determines on the basis of the content holding terminal number calculated by the terminal number calculator and the determination reference whether the content holding terminal number concerned is below the predetermined threshold value, and transmits an extinction preventing instruction for making the terminal device holding the content concerned execute processing of preventing extinction of the content when determining that the content holding terminal number is below the predetermined threshold value. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082796 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - The signaling amount for acquisition of home addresses (HoA) and handover over the radio leg is reduced in a case where a mobile node (MN) requires multiple different communication IP addresses (Home address: HoA) for respective services. An AAA server holds service identifiers of all the services provided for the mobile node (MN) and home agent (HA) information, in addition to authentication information of the mobile node (MN). The AAA server also registers, for all the services provided for the mobile node (MN), an association of home addresses (HoA) used by the mobile node (MN) for the respective communication services with IP addresses (care-of address: CoA) having information of a network in which the mobile node (MN) resides, into the home agents (HA) associated with the corresponding service identifiers. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082797 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM USED THEREIN - A communication system includes an information processing apparatus and a communication apparatus. The information processing apparatus comprises a controller configured to acquire a file that indicates feed location information and a title of a feed to be acquired in accordance with the feed location information. The controller controls the display to display at least one of the feed location information described in the file and the title described in the file, and to display at least one of the feed location information registered in a device management unit and the title registered in the device management unit. Moreover the controller registers, into the device management unit, feed location information or feed location information corresponding to a title displayed on the first portion of the display, which is specified by the user. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100088400 | INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS MANAGEMENT FOR COMMUNICATING PACKETS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example implementation and the method includes identifying through a home bearer manager that an Internet Protocol (IP) address has been previously sent to an access terminal, the IP address being issued by a visited bearer manager as a result of the access terminal requesting registration in a visited network. The method further includes communicating the IP address to the access terminal in response to the access terminal registering in a home network. The registrations in the home and the visited network allow a plurality of packets to be communicated to the access terminal via the IP address. In more specific embodiments, the IP address serves as a care of address (CoA) address and a home IP address concurrently. The IP address can be exchanged via a mobile IP (MIP) exchange. The home and visited bearer managers are independent or interdependent. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100088401 | METHOD OF TRANSFERRING DATA BEING STORED IN A DATABASE - Anonymously transferring a selection of content provider data stored in a database, where a subscriber enters into a connection with a telecommunication supplier by sending an identifier of the content provider is disclosed. In one aspect, the telecommunication supplier transmits the identifier together with a reception time and/or a space stamp to a manager. The manager associates: (1) the identifier with an Internet delivery address of the content provider and (2) the time and/or space stamp with a code. The manager transmits delivery information to the telecommunication supplier who then transmits the delivery information to the subscriber. The data selection is transferred by: (1) selecting the Internet delivery address linked to the code or (2) accessing the delivery address with an Internet terminal and entering the code. Upon reception of the code corresponding to the time and/or space stamp, the content provider associates the code with a data selection to make the data selection available for the subscriber. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100088402 | MANAGER, AGENT, SYSTEM, AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - A manager controlling an agent via a network using SNMP, the manager including a load information generating unit generating manager load information indicating a load status of the manager based on a CPU usage rate indicative of a CPU load status of the manager, a receiving state of a state variation notifying command indicative of the number of receiving state variation notifying commands, transmitted by the agent to notify of a state variation inside a device of the agent, and a load event occurring time indicating a time period before a periodic process is periodically carried out by the manager; and a control command generating unit generating a command to be sent to the agent, whereby the command generating unit generates the control command, to which the manager load information is added, and the agent controls transmission of the state variation notifying command based on the manager load information. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100094984 | METHOD FOR OPTMIZING A PRESENCE ENABLED MANAGED SERVICE - Methods, systems, processes and devices are provided for optimizing throughput and quality of service of a presence enabled managed service. The method includes at least a first entity requesting from an aggregator of presence services presence information of a second entity. The method includes looking up a profile of the aggregator stored in a cache of a presence server hosted by the presence enabled managed service. The method includes determining from the profile an aggregator level of service the aggregator has subscribed to from the presence enabled managed service, wherein the aggregator level of service is one of high level service, medium level service, and low level service. The method includes storing presence information of the second entity on a presence document on the cache and returning the presence information to the first entity based upon the aggregator level of service. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100094985 | HTTP PUSH TO SIMULATE SERVER-INITIATED SESSIONS - A mobile device apparatus uses an HyperText Transfer protocol (HTTP) push operation to simulate server-initiated sessions. The illustrative mobile device apparatus comprises a push server logic operable in a push server that sends a message to a mobile device over a network. The push server logic is configured to receive a GET command from a mobile device. The GET command includes a mobile device identifier parameter and a timeout parameter designating a maximum time interval for the push server to reply with a message. The push server logic holds a GET command session until expiration of a timeout designated by the timeout parameter in a condition that no message is targeted to the mobile device. The push server logic terminates the GET command session by sending a message immediately in a condition that the message is targeted to the mobile device. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100094986 | Source-selection based Internet backbone traffic shaping - Source-selection based Internet backbone traffic shaping, including the steps of assessing a large number of network paths through which erasure-coded fragments usually flow when transmitted from a large number of relevant fractional-storage CDN servers to an assembling device; accessing preferences for fragment delivery via many of the paths; and selecting the servers whose assessed paths fit well the preferences for fragment delivery to the assembling device. Wherein the servers are accessed via the Internet, not all servers are connected to the Internet via the same networks, and the erasure-coded fragments are encoded with a redundancy factor greater than one from contents. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100100612 | PEER-TO-PEER MODULE CONFIGURATION REDUNDANCY AND RECOVERY MANAGEMENT - A method for peer-to-peer management module configuration redundancy and recovery can be provided. The method can include fragmenting configuration data for a specified management module configured to manage systems components in a blade environment. The method also can include identifying peer management modules communicatively connected to the specified management module. The method yet further can include transmitting different ones of the fragmented configuration data to different ones of the peer management modules. In response to a reset condition in the specified management module, the method can provide for the retrieval of the fragmented configuration data from the peer management modules. Thereafter, the method can provide for the re-assembly of the retrieved fragmented configuration data and the application of the re-assembled fragmented configuration data to the specified management module. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100613 | Devices, Methods, and Computer-Readable Media for Providing Quality of Service Optimization via Policy-Based Rearrangements - Devices, methods and computer-readable media for providing quality of service optimization via policy-based rearrangements. Customers are grouped for potential rearrangement. Multiple alternative options are generated for a particular group using policy rules. Policy rules for the particular group are used to evaluate each option using common metrics. Policy rules are used to select a best option for the particular group. The best option for the particular group is implemented. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100614 | Protecting Subscriber Database Data Integrity in Geographical Redundant Deployments - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for ensuring data integrity during data synchronization are provided. According to one method, a number of originating requests from a plurality of user endpoints are monitored across a network. A determination is made whether the number of originating requests is below a first threshold. Responsive to determining that the number of originating requests is below the first threshold, probe messages are transmitted to at least a portion of the plurality of user endpoints across the network. A number of the user endpoints that return probe replies in response to the probe messages are monitored. A determination is made whether the number of the user endpoints is below a second threshold. Responsive to determining that the number of the user endpoints is below the second threshold, a report is made to a database that the network is unavailable, thereby causing the database to stop updating time stamps. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100615 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING ADVERTISEMENT APPLICATION - A method and apparatus for managing an advertisement application in a mobile advertising system is provided. When an advertisement application for representing an advertisement is installed in an advertisement-receiving terminal, a registration request for the installed advertisement application is made. The advertisement-receiving terminal assigns an application Identifier (ID) to the advertisement application in response to the registration request, and stores a profile of the advertisement application in association with the assigned application ID. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100616 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRAFFIC BETWEEN DIFFERENT ENTITIES ON A NETWORK - A method for controlling traffic between different entities on a network in which packets of received data are inspected, and if encapsulated, are decapsulated layer by layer and, after each layer is decapsulated, the packet is inspected to determine if the packet is to be acted upon or discarded. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100106816 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT - A method for providing quality of service to a plurality of hosts accessing a common resource is described. The common resource may be a middle-tier or back-end server. A client IO request is received at one host of the plurality of hosts from one of a plurality clients executing as software entities on respective hosts. The host determines whether an issue queue is full. The IO request is issued to the common resource when the issue queue is not full. A current average latency observed at the host and an adjusted window size is calculated, based at least in part on the current average latency. The issue queue is resized to correspond with the adjusted window size. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100106817 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING PRIVATE NETWORK REMOTELY USING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - A method, apparatus, and system for remotely managing a private network by using a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) are provided. The method includes opening a port between the private network and a public network in a Network Address Translation (NAT) using a first SIP message, and managing a remote device located in the private network through the open port. Accordingly, a remote management server (or a manager) can collect and configure necessary information by actively accessing to a management target. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100115073 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SERIAL ATTACHED SCSI (SAS) ZONING MANAGEMENT OF A DOMAIN USING END DEVICE GROUPING - Embodiments of the invention include a method, apparatus and system for managing SAS zoning, using end device grouping. A SAS end device grouping management application is configured to group SAS end devices, such as SAS initiator devices and SAS target devices, into any number of zones or zone configurations. The end device grouping application uses these defined zones to create a minimal number of zone groups, e.g., by creating one zone group per defined zone and populating the zone group with the ZPSDS entry point phys of the end devices in the zone from which the zone group is based, and to configure the respective permissions of the created zone groups. The end device grouping application then compares all existing zone groups for common phys and removes them to a new zone group. The zone groups are compared and processed in this manner until no zone groups have common phys. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115074 | Method, Apparatus, and Computer Program for Disconnecting Network Devices - Disconnecting network devices involves receiving, at a service of an apparatus via a first network, a signal directed to an operational component of the apparatus. The operational component interacts via an ad-hoc, peer-to-peer home network, and the service operates independently of the operational component. The operational component is disconnected from the ad-hoc, peer-to-peer home network in response to receiving the signal | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115075 | DIRECTIONAL OPTIMIZATION FOR POLICY EVALUATION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, system and computer program product for directional optimization of policy statements for a Web service. In an embodiment of the invention, a method for directional optimization of policy statements in a policy document can be provided. The method can include loading a policy document referenced for a Web service, extracting a policy from the policy document, and determining whether the extracted policy is bidirectional or direction agnostic. A single run time presentation for the extracted policy can be created when the extracted policy is direction agnostic. Otherwise, separate run time presentations can be created for each direction of the extracted policy when the extracted policy is bi-directional. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115076 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MANAGING A DEVICE IN A WEB BASED ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENT - Methods and systems for managing a device in a Web Based Enterprise Management (“WBEM”) environment. At least a management software component and a device management adapter are reused through receiving a network command from the management software component, and forwarding the network command to the device management adapter for conversion to a device message. The WBEM environment is supported by packaging the device message in a WBEM envelope, and transmitting the device message in the WBEM envelope to a computer system. The computer system comprises the device. Subsequently, a native command based on the device message is issued to the device. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115077 | METHOD OF BUILDING SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT SERVER - Devices unnecessary for deployment are invalidated during the deployment. A method of building a system and a management server for establishing a system according to the present invention have the following configuration. The management server obtains server information from a server connected through a network, refers to the obtained server information to select devices unnecessary for deployment among devices connected to the server, and invalidates the selected devices. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115078 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM - Provided is a distributed storage system capable of improving reliability and continuous operability while minimizing increases in management workload. A distributed storage system ( | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115079 | INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND METHOD, TERMINAL APPARATUS, SERVER APPARATUS, DATA RECEPTION METHOD, AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - An information distribution system and method capable of averaging a traffic load over time and effectively utilizing communication facilities, wherein a terminal station 30 transmits to a contents server 10 a distribution request for desired information including information of time limit of distribution, and the contents server 10 receives the distribution request, estimates a time band where the traffic load is small in the communications system in the period until the time limit of distribution, pages the terminal station again at that period of time, and, if the terminal station is in a state able to receive the information content, transmits the requested information content to the terminal station 30 through a network node. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115080 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MACHINE USING PRIVATE ADDRESSES AND A COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONNECTED TO A GLOBAL NETWORK - According to one embodiment, when having received first communication data addressed to a machine migrated to a second network address port translation module, a first network address port translation module translates a destination network address in the first communication data into a global address of the second network address port translation module. The first network address port translation module transfers the translated first communication data as second communication data to the second network address port translation module. When having received the second communication data transferred by the first network address port translation module, the second network address port translation module transmits third communication data addressed to the machine corresponding to the second communication data to the machine. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115081 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DESIGNING MULTI-TIER SYSTEMS - A system and method for selecting a preferred design for a multi-tiered architecture of components based on a set of established criteria is provided. The system and method receive a model describing different design constructions and a set of performance and availability requirements and produces a design or set of designs that best meet these requirements. The system and method include a model for representing the infrastructure design space for multi-tier systems and their properties appropriate for judging performance and availability properties of services as well as associated cost. The method and system further include a method for searching the design space in an efficient manner. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100121945 | Hybrid Unicast/Anycast Content Distribution Network System - A method includes receiving a request for an edge cache address, and comparing a requester address to an anycast group. The method can further include providing an anycast edge cache address when the requestor address is in the anycast group. Alternatively, the method can further include determining an optimal cache server, and providing a unicast address of the optimal cache server when the requester address is not in the anycast group. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121946 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR IDENTIFYING AND SELECTING AN INTERFACE TO ACCESS A NETWORK - The present invention concerns a networking device comprising interfacing means for accessing a first network or a second network, and comprising identifying means for detecting an access to the first network, and selecting means for picking an access among a plurality of accesses to the first network for accessing a third network. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100125653 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING STORAGE RESOURCES - A network includes a management module with a first root complex, a first server with a first endpoint coupled to the first root complex, and a second server with a second root complex, a second endpoint coupled to the second root complex, a third endpoint coupled to the first root complex, and a bridge coupled to the second endpoint and to the third endpoint. A method includes discovering a PCIe host bridge adapter (PHBA) and a storage resource coupled to multiple storage extents in a PCIe domain, creating a first virtual function on the storage resource and sending a first identifier for the first virtual function to the PHBA. A network interface device includes a PCIe endpoint that is coupleable to a PCIe root complex, another PCIe endpoint that is coupleable to another PCIe root complex, and a bridge that couples the first PCIe endpoint with the second PCIe endpoint. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100125654 | Method and Apparatus for Utilizing User Identity - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus, comprising a processor configured to receive an input operation related to selecting at least a part of information related to a first user identity and at least a part of information related to a second user identity, utilize information related to the first user identity based at least in part on the input operation, and utilize information related to second user identity based at least in part on the input operation is disclosed. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100125655 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CENTRALIZED LOGIC FOR CENTRALLY MANAGED MACHINES - Aspects of a method and system for centralized logic for centrally managed machines are provided. In this regard, a plurality of networking and/or computation units (NCUs) and a central management unit (CMU) may reside in a multi-unit networking system, and information may be communicated between the plurality of NCUs and the CMU such that a console connected to the CMU may be enabled to interface with the plurality of NCUs. At least some hardware that performs management functions, human interface functions, and/or graphics functions may be implemented only once in the multi-unit system and may be implemented on the CMU. Each of the plurality of NCUs and the CMU may be, for example, a blade server or a rack-mount server. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100131632 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK COMMAND DELEGATION USING AUTO-DISCOVERED PATHWAYS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for network command delegation using auto-discovered pathways. A network management server can generate configuration or other commands to transmit to a set of supervisory hosts, which in turn relay the commands to an underlying set of hosts and/or targets. A network map can be maintained specifying pathway(s) to the supervisory hosts and/or underlying hosts and/or targets for delivery of the commands. The pathway(s) can be automatically generated using a discovery tool which probes connections to the supervisory host(s) and/or underlying hosts/targets, and records that information to a network map. The most efficient pathways on a total-hop, transit time or other basis can be identified. A systems administrator at the network management server can issue compact commands that are automatically disseminated to destination hosts/targets over large-scale and geographically diverse networks, without manually specifying pathways. Multiple layers of supervisory hosts can be used. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131633 | DEVICE GROUP CONTROL - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, apparatus and system for providing device group control including enabling each device of a set of devices to receive a broadcast command, determine if the command applies to the device, and take action if the command applies to the device. In one embodiment of the present invention a unique identifier is determined for each recipient device and the unique identifier for each recipient device for which the communication is intended is included with a broadcast or multicast message. Upon receiving the broadcast or multicast message, each recipient device examines the message for its unique identifier to determine if the communication is intended for the device. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131634 | Dispatching method, dispatching apparatus and dispatching system - A dispatching method, a dispatching apparatus and a dispatching system are disclosed according to embodiments of the present invention. The dispatching method includes receiving a request initiated by a user terminal, where the request carries address information of the user terminal; obtaining the address information carried in the request and obtaining key information of an access server associated with the address information; searching for a corresponding node based on the key information of the access server and treating the node as a redirected serving node. A dispatching apparatus and a dispatching system are also disclosed according to embodiments of the present invention. The technical solution of the embodiments of the present invention may well solve the dispatching issue and has a more flexible application. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100138526 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING HARDWARE UPDATES IN A SOFTWARE PROVISIONING ENVIRONMENT - A provisioning server can remotely determine target machines, requiring a hardware update, and remotely provide the hardware updates to the target machines. The provisioning server can identify hardware updates for target machines in a network it serves. The provisioning server can operate in conjunction with a network management server in order to identify the target machines, requiring the hardware update. The provisioning server can generate the hardware update for the target machines and provide the hardware update to the target machines. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138527 | TRAFFIC FENCING MECHANISM FOR CONTROL PLANE ENABLED NETWORKS - A device receives a traffic fencing (TF) function for a network, and provides a TF attribute, based on the received TF function, over a link of the network to enable activation of a TF rule of a link state routing (LSR) algorithm used by the network to implement the TF function for the network. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100146091 | Method of providing proximity-based quality for multimedia content - A system and method for providing proximity-based quality for multimedia content, including: transmitting multimedia content, and intentionally controlling a quality level of a presentation of the multimedia content based on proximity of a user to a particular location. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146092 | Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Streaming Overlay Construction and Optimization - This document describes a directed graph model using a peer-to-peer overlay structure and a gossip-based protocol to maintain the distributed membership. A protocol suite for peers to join the live streaming session, form the P2P streaming overlay, and exchange video packets with others has also been presented. The different capabilities of the heterogeneous peers are well depicted using an adaptive out-degree mechanism. The performance of the whole system is maintained by a contribution-aware mechanism, which ensures that the peers with large contribution will get more chance to be served than those with small or no contribution. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146093 | CENTRAL CONTROLLER FOR COORDINATING MULTICAST MESSAGE TRANSMISSIONS IN DISTRIBUTED VIRTUAL NETWORK SWITCH ENVIRONMENT - A centralized control processor provides a unified management mechanism for multiple multicast switches or servers running virtual switches that is also capable of sending query messages based upon a subset of ports. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146094 | Method And System For Compressing Files Based On Their Popularity In A Network - A method for file storage management. The method includes the steps of determining by a first computer, for a plurality of peer computers in a communication network of the first computer, information on the storage management of blocks of the file by the peer computers. In addition, the method includes selecting, by the first computer, blocks of the file to be made available to the first computer independently of the plurality of peer computers, responsive to the determined information and managing a storage unit of the first computer, such that the non-selected blocks of the file are not stored locally by the first computer. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146095 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MAPPING BETWEEN AND CONTROLLING DIFFERENT DEVICE ABSTRACTIONS - Illustrative embodiments of the invention provide methods and systems for managing a computer network. One illustrative embodiment forms a first representation of a network element as a physical entity in an information model, the first representation having a form independent of an implementation defined by a vendor; and maps a portion of the first representation from the information model to a second representation in a vendor-independent data model residing in a first repository, the second representation having a form suitable for use with the first repository. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146096 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system controls connection to the interface, such as an IP line to which a subscriber terminal connects, according to the information in the tables in which information is registered and updated, wherein the registered and updated information includes information as to which line type, ISDN line or analog line, is used and as to which high way (HW) of a time-division switch (TSW) of a media gateway (management device) is selected for providing TSs (timeslots) for use in the connection, as well as subscriber information on services for which a subscriber contracts. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146097 | Virtual Space Management System - A virtual space management system includes: a plurality of space management servers for respectively managing a plurality of partial spaces obtained by dividing a virtual space; and a communication control server for relaying communication between at least one of the plurality of space management servers and a user terminal. Each space management server executes a process relating to a transition in which a position in the virtual space associated with the user terminal transitions from inside a partial space managed by another space management server to inside a partial space managed by the local space management server. The communication control server maintains communication connection with the user terminal during execution of the process relating to the transition, and changes a transmission destination of data received from the user terminal to the local space management server managing the partial space to which the transition has been made according to the transition. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146098 | INTERGRATED SERVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present invention provides techniques for creation, operation, management, and access control of network-based storage services. Specific embodiments provide improved efficiency of the service management tasks used for designing, operating and accounting the robust and profitable network services, for example. In representative embodiments, techniques for constructing integrated network and storage services are provided. In a specific embodiment, the service comprises of three major service components: virtual private networks (VPN), application servers and storage area networks (SAN). Each of these service components has its own customer identification information, such as VPN identifier for VPN services, process identifier for application servers and logical unit number (LUN) for storage devices. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100153527 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATING NETWORK ENGINEERING - A method and system of an embodiment may include receiving network device information associated with a network device, parsing the network device information, identifying one or more network device attributes associated with the network device from the parsed network device information, displaying via a user interface, user information associated with the one or more identified network device attributes, receiving one or more user commands via the user interface, and translating, by a command interpreter module, the one or more user commands into one or more network device executable commands. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153528 | Devices, Systems and Methods for Controlling Network Services Via Address Book - Devices, systems and methods are disclosed which relate to analyzing an electronic address book for a change which impacts a service, and updating the service. An analysis engine monitors the electronic address book for changes, then evaluates whether each change impacts a service. If the change does impact a service, a reaction engine applies that change to the service. The change can be a new telephone number for an existing contact, a new group applied to a contact, a new permission for a contact, etc. These changes potentially impact a service such as caller restriction, find me/follow me, photo sharing, etc. The reaction engine applies the change to a network controller ultimately in control of the service. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153529 | ENHANCING NETWORK DETAILS USING NETWORK MONITORING SCRIPTS - The present disclosure is directed to a system and method for enhancing network details using network monitoring scripts. In some implementations, a method includes receiving a request to execute a plurality of transactions with an application of a server to evaluate one or more services using an executed LoadRunner script. In response to the service request, the plurality of transactions are automatically executed with the application using the LoadRunner script populated with values of variables transmitted between the application and a client during at least one transaction previously executed with the client. Values of the variables transmitted between the application and the executed LoadRunner script are determined during execution of the plurality of transactions. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153530 | NETWORK-BASED APPLICATION LATE BINDING - The claimed subject matter provides late network binding functionality to network or web-based applications or services. An application gateway component exposes generic interfaces for different types of network applications allowing client application developers to utilize generic functionality. Client applications can invoke the generic interfaces, at which point the application gateway component can determine contextual information related to the end user. Using the contextual information, the application gateway component can perform late network binding to a network or web-based application or service by generating and transmitting a request thereto based at least in part on the generic interface invocation and user context. The contextual information can include explicit binding information or data that can be utilized to determine or infer binding preferences. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153531 | DECOUPLED LOGICAL AND PHYSICAL DATA STORAGE WITHIN A DATBASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The subject matter herein relates to database management systems and, more particularly, to decoupled logical and physical data storage within a database management system. Various embodiments provide systems, methods, and software that separate physical storage of data from logical storage of data. These embodiments include a mapping of logical storage to physical storage to allow data to be moved within the physical storage to increase database responsiveness. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153532 | NETWORK SYSTEM, NETWORK MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND CONFIGURATION SCHEDULING METHOD - A reservation processing is executed according to the configuration request to VPN and network device to inform a user's terminal of scheduled period. In a network system including plural network devices for transmitting a packet and a management server, plural logical networks (VPNs) are formed on the plural network devices. The management server receives a configuration request including configuration data for VPN and configuration desired time from a user's terminal to generate the configuration data for the network device from the configuration data for the VPN. The management server refers to a configuration reservation table to confirm whether free time is available in the same period about all target network devices. If free time is available, the management server makes configuration reservation and configures the target network device in the reserved time. The management server notifies the user's terminal of the reserved time. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153533 | RSS CHANNEL INFORMATION PROVISION METHOD AND SYSTEM AND PORTABLE DEVICE USING THE SAME - An RSS provision method and system and portable device is provided for facilitating subscription to RSS channels and update of the subscribed RSS channels by providing RSS channels classified as being in the same category as that of a requested RSS channel. The Rich Site Summary (RSS) channel information provision method includes transmitting an RSS channel information request message from a mobile terminal, the RSS channel information request message indicating a target RSS channel; searching a database for addresses of other RSS channels classified as being in the same category as that of the target RSS channel; transmitting, when no address of other RSS channel is found, a second type RSS channel information request message to a web server; transmitting an RSS channel information response message from the web server to the gateway in response to the second type RSS channel information request message, the RSS channel information response message containing information regarding the target RSS channel and other RSS channels classified as being in the same category as that of the target RSS channel; and displaying, at the mobile terminal, the information on the target RSS channel and other RSS channels extracted from the RSS channel response message. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153534 | SYSTEMS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA OVER A COMPUTER NETWORK AND METHODS FOR ARRANGING NODES FOR DISTRIBUTION OF DATA OVER A COMPUTER NETWORK - Various embodiments of the present invention relate to a system for distributing data (e.g., content data) over a computer network and a method of arranging receiver nodes in a computer network such that the capacity of a server is effectively increased (e.g., the capacity of a server may be effectively multiplied many times over; the capacity of the server may be effectively increased exponentially). In one embodiment the present invention may take advantage of the excess capacity many receiver nodes possess, and may use such receiver nodes as repeaters. The distribution system may include node(s) having database(s) which indicate ancestor(s) and/or descendant(s) of the node so that reconfiguration of the distribution network may be accomplished without burdening the system's primary server. An embodiment of the present invention may include a process for configuring a computer information distribution network having a primary server node and user nodes docked in a cascaded relationship, and reconfiguring the network in the event that a user node departs from the network. In one example (which example is intended to be illustrative and not restrictive), the process may include the steps of providing a new user node (or connection requesting user node) with a connection address list of nodes within the network, having the new user node (or connection requesting user node) go to (or attempt to go to) the node at the top of the connection address list, determine whether that node is still part of the distribution network, and connect thereto if it is, and if it is not, to go to (or attempt to go to) the next node on the connection address list. In another example (which example is intended to be illustrative and not restrictive), when a user node departs from the distribution network, a propagation signal may be transmitted to the nodes below it in the network, causing them to move up in the network in a predetermined order. In another example (which example is intended to be illustrative and not restrictive), the present invention may provide a decentralized approach which provides, to each new user node (or connection requesting user node) a path back to the root server. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153535 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING A DOMAIN NAME REGISTRANT'S SOCIAL WEBSITES - Systems and methods of the present invention allow for managing multiple social websites. An exemplary method may comprise the steps of registering a domain name to a Registrant, generating a Social Domain (that corresponds to a social website) by concatenating at least one subdomain to the Registrant's domain name, mapping the Social Domain to a URL for the Registrant's social website webpage, entering the Social Domain in a browser, and displaying the Registrant's social website webpage. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100161779 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY-REFERENCED MULTIMEDIA - A system and method for providing quality-referenced multimedia including a receiver configured to receive multimedia from at least one multimedia source, and one or more processors configured to generate a quality reference based on the multimedia, format the quality reference into an elementary stream, and associate the elementary stream with the multimedia to form quality-referenced multimedia. The system and method may also include a transmitter configured to transmit the quality-referenced multimedia for output at one or more output devices and one or more storage systems for storing the quality-referenced multimedia. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161780 | HOT DATA MANAGEMENT METHOD BASED ON HIT COUNTER - Provided is a hot data management method based on hit counter, which prevents loads from being concentrated on a specific data server due to hot data by efficiently managing the hot data in the asymmetric storage system. Each of data servers of an asymmetric storage system checks hit counter for data stored in the corresponding data server to maintain hit counter information on the data in a latest state. The data server transmits the hit counter information to a metadata server at predetermined intervals. The data server makes or deletes a copy of the data according to the determination of the metadata server whether the data is hot data. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161781 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DIGITAL HOME DOMAIN MANAGEMENT - An apparatus for digital home domain management includes a home domain server which manages in one user domain all user terminals within a home group and provides each user terminal with a domain license in contents; and a DRM coupler which provides the contents and domain licenses converted to conform to a DRM type loaded in user terminals if contents sharing is requested among user terminals loaded with different DRMs within the home group. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161782 | FIXED FORM DATA MANAGEMENT SERVER APPARATUS AND FIXED FORM DOCUMENT CREATING SYSTEM - The present invention provides a fixed form data managing server apparatus that automatically checks whether the version of the fixed form data included in document data created on a PC is the latest version and that transmits the check result to the PC. Prior to printing of the created document data by an image forming apparatus, the PC transmits the version information of the fixed form data included in the document data through the printing server apparatus. The fixed form data managing server apparatus that has received the version information determines whether the version information is the latest version information and, when the apparatus determines that the version information is not the latest one, transmits control information to stop the printing of the document data to the PC. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100169469 | REQUEST AND RESPONSE DECOUPLING VIA PLUGGABLE TRANSPORTS IN A SERVICE ORIENTED PIPELINE ARCHITECTURE FOR A REQUEST RESPONSE MESSAGE EXCHANGE PATTERN - A computer-implemented system and method for decoupling processing of request and response messages supporting different pluggable respective transports in a service-oriented pipeline architecture for a request-response Message Exchange Pattern (MEP) is disclosed. The method in an example embodiment includes receiving a message having coded therein information identifying a desired pluggable transport mechanism respectively for a request and a response; processing the message through a message processing pipeline; dispatching the processed message to a dispatcher; determining if the desired pluggable transport mechanism is available; activating the desired pluggable transport mechanism, if the desired pluggable transport mechanism is available; and transporting the processed message via the desired pluggable transport mechanism. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100169470 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT OF COMPUTER SYSTEM - This invention provides a method for operational management in a management server of a computer system, the computer system comprising more than one server to be managed and an OS disk image adapted to operate on any one of the servers, the management server being used to manage association between the OS disk image and one of the servers to be managed. The operational management method includes acquiring I/O device recognition information that the OS disk image on a first server to be managed recognizes, then acquiring physical device configuration information that indicates an I/O device configuration of a second server to be managed, and determining, on the basis of the acquired I/O device recognition information and physical device configuration information, whether the OS disk image operates properly when loaded into the second server and executed. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100169471 | Verification of Configuration Information in BGP VPNs - Described are mechanisms for verifying configuration information in 2547 BGP VPNs. An originating PE generates a first knowledge digest encoding first configuration information associated with a current set of information advertised for a VRF. The originating PE also generates a second knowledge digest encoding second configuration information associated with cumulative information advertised for the VRF. The originating PE is capable of receiving a message from a user PE, the message including a third knowledge digest encoding third configuration information related to the user VRF. The originating PE is capable of comparing the first knowledge digest to the third knowledge digest and producing a first indication if the third configuration information encoded in the third knowledge digest is not a subset of the first configuration information encoded in the first knowledge digest. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100174811 | NETWORK ISOLATION AND IDENTITY MANAGEMENT OF CLONED VIRTUAL MACHINES - A virtual computing environment comprising virtual machines may be created to clone a computing environment for testing purposes. To provide an accurate testing environment, the network configuration of the cloned computing environment may be preserved in the virtual computing environment. However, deploying the virtual computing environment on a physical network that comprises the cloned computing environment may create addressing conflicts. Accordingly, a technique for preserving network configuration data without creating addressing conflicts is provided herein. A virtual computing environment comprising an internal virtual network and external virtual network is fenced off to isolate the virtual computing environment from a physical external network. The virtual computing systems are connected to the internal virtual network for communication, using the preserved network configuration, between virtual computing environments. The virtual computing systems are separately connected to the external virtual network for communication through the physical external network. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100180020 | IMPROVING SCALE BETWEEN CONSUMER SYSTEMS AND PRODUCER SYSTEMS OF RESOURCE MONITORING DATA - A consumer system receives capabilities metadata from a producer system that includes resource class metrics for a resource class included in the producer system. Next, the consumer system creates a rule that corresponds to one of the consumer system's managed entities. The rule includes one or more prescriptions that reference the resource class metrics and specify a periodicity, which informs the producer system as to a time interval for which to send prescription results that includes metric information pertaining to the resource class metrics. The consumer system sends the rule to the producer system and, in turn, the consumer system receives the prescription results from the producer system at the specified periodicity and applies the metric information to the managed entity. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100180021 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTE NODE DEBUGGING USING AN EMBEDDED NODE CONTROLLER - A method, system and computer program product for remotely debugging a malfunctioning node controller of a node in a distributed node network through a functioning node controller of the same node. The method comprises establishing a serial link between the malfunctioning node controller and a functioning node controller and configuring the functioning node controller as a virtual console by the remotely-located central data processing system (DPS). The method further includes receiving, via an internal Fru Support Interface (FSI) link, serial data from the malfunctioning node controller through the virtual console, and debugging, by the DPS, a failure condition of the malfunctioning node controller, in response to receipt of the serial data through the virtual console. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100180022 | REGISTRATION OF ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO SERVER - When a user management server apparatus transmits session information to a user terminal apparatus operated by a user, and receives the session information from an electronic device via a network, the user management server apparatus registers a correspondence relationship between the user who operates the user terminal apparatus and the electronic device. A temporary registration server apparatus receives the session information from the user terminal apparatus and transmits the session information and address information on the network of the user management server apparatus which should be a transmission destination of the session information to the electronic device. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100185757 | Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method is disclosed for use in a telecommunications network that makes use of the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The method comprises receiving node status information in a SIP Request whose Request Uniform Resource Identifier, or Request-URI, identifies the SIP Request as comprising node status information and also identifies the intended recipients of the node status information. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100185758 | REMOTE MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A remote management device for remotely managing plural controllers that respectively control plural devices includes a program storage unit, a group definition information registration, a first management information registration unit and a communication unit. The program storage unit is configured to store plural programs to be executed in the plural controllers. The group definition information registration unit is configured to receive registration of group definition information defining a group having an element that includes one or more programs of the plural programs. The first management information registration unit is configured to receive registration of first management information correlating at least one of the plural controllers with the group. The communication unit is configured to transmit the programs to be executed in the plural controllers to the plural controllers. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100185759 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LAYER 2 DISCOVERY IN A MANAGED SHARED NETWORK - According to various embodiments of the disclosed method and apparatus, a node on a network submits to a network controller a request for discovery of information regarding communication capabilities of other network nodes. The network controller sends a request for node communication capabilities to the other nodes in the network; receives responses from the other nodes that include information regarding communication capabilities of each respective node; and send the received information regarding communication capabilities of the nodes to a plurality of nodes in the network. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100191842 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MANAGING QUEUE ORDER, AND TERMINAL DEVICE - A system for managing a queue order may receive queue order registration requests from a plurality of user terminals, generate queue order information of the plurality of user terminals, and broadcast, when the queue order information changes, notification information about the change of the queue order information. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100191843 | Method and System for Selection of a Runtime Stack for Deployment of a Web Service - A method and system for selection of a runtime stack for deployment of a Web Service are provided. The method includes: generating policy assertions for a Web Service to be deployed; providing a scoring mechanism for each available runtime stack in which the ability of a stack to support each of a plurality of policy assertions is scored; applying the scoring mechanism for each available runtime stack to the policy assertions for the Web Service ( | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100198952 | Method for WALN network and device role activation - In response to receiving a capability advertisement message which comprises role capabilities, an activation message which requests at least one role capability of the capability is sent to a device on a bearer; and in response to the activation message, from the device on the bearer is received a notification message which indicates whether the role capability of the activation message was accepted. In another embodiment, a capability advertisement message which comprises role capabilities is sent; in response there is received on a bearer an activation message which requests at least one role capability of the advertisement message; and then in response to the activation message there is sent to the device on the bearer a notification message which indicates whether the role capability of the activation message is accepted. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198953 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MANAGING CONTENTION AMONG NODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method of managing contention in a wireless network is described. The wireless network may include an access router and a plurality of access terminals connectable to the base station. The method may include designating a data slot as a downlink slot or an uplink slot, and sending a signal from the access router to the access terminals to indicate the designation of the data slot. The access router may determine whether the data slot should be designated as a downlink slot or an uplink slot by assessing information such QoS (quality of service) requirements contained in a REQ message received from one or more of the access terminals, and information regarding buffer level received from one or more of the access terminals. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198954 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE PROVISION SEESION CONTROL IN AN LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for enabling a local area network (LAN) appliance, supporting a synchronous-invocation/broadcast-notification protocol, to control communication sessions in a wide area network (WAN), the wide area network supporting a session-control protocol, includes: a) receiving from the LAN appliance a synchronous-invocation/broadcast-notification-protocol message invoking an operation for controlling a predetermined communication session in the wide area network, the execution of the operation involving an exchange of at least two session-control-protocol messages with at least one WAN apparatus supporting the session-control-protocol; b) processing the synchronous-invocation/broadcast-notification-protocol message received in a) to generate a first of the at least two session-control-protocol messages, which is adapted to start the execution of the operation; c) sending the message generated in b) toward said wide area network to start the execution of the operation; d) suspending a response for the LAN appliance to the invoked operation waiting for a condition indicating an outcome of the operation; e) when the condition is available, generating the response for the LAN appliance, the response being indicative of the outcome of the operation; and f) sending the response generated in e) to the LAN appliance. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198955 | COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM STORING SOFTWARE UPDATE COMMAND PROGRAM, SOFTWARE UPDATE COMMAND METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - An information processing device is provided that provides service by executing a service provider program in a cluster system. The device includes a program information transmission unit that transmits to a monitoring node that monitors the cluster system, a node list information reception unit that receives node list information, an update target selection unit that determines which of the other information processing devices which are not yet updated with the service provider program by referring to the program information in the node list information, a command timing determination unit that determines a time after a lapse of the standby time found in the first update timing information as a command timing of the update command, an update timing information generation unit that generates second update timing information and an update command transmission unit that transmits the update command about the service provider program and the second update timing information. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198956 | TELEPHONE EXCHANGE APPARATUS AND HOST NAME INFORMATION ASSIGNING METHOD USED THEREFORE - According to one embodiment, a telephone exchange apparatus includes a generator configured to automatically generate the host name information in accordance with a predetermined condition, when a registration request about an arbitrary communication apparatus to the management table is issued, and a controller configured to register the host name information generated by the generator in the management table by associating the host name information with the corresponding-communication apparatus. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198957 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISION OF PROXIMITY NETWORKING ACTIVITY INFORMATION - Systems and methods applicable, for instance, in proximity networking activity. For example, nodes and/or other computers may record, receive, and/or provide information regarding proximity networking activity. As another example, nodes and/or other computers may act to inform their users of proximity networking activity instances. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100198958 | REAL-TIME FEEDBACK FOR POLICIES FOR COMPUTING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT - One aspect of the invention is a method for providing real-time feedback regarding the effect of applying a policy definition used for management in a computing system. An example of the method includes receiving the policy definition, and accessing stored information regarding at least one managed entity in the computing system. This example also includes applying the policy definition to the information regarding the at least one managed entity. This example further includes outputting information providing real-time feedback regarding the effect of applying the policy definition to the information regarding the at least one managed entity. Another aspect of the invention is a method for defining a policy used for management in a computing system. | 08-05-2010 |
| 20100205286 | SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING CUSTOMER-SELECTED SOLUTIONS FOR MULTIPLE DATACENTER WEBSITE HOSTING - Systems of the present inventions allow for providing customer-selected solutions for multiple datacenter website hosting. An exemplary system may comprise a first datacenter comprising at least one hosting server, a second datacenter comprising at least one hosting server, and a hosting services website hosted on at least one customer interaction server. The hosting services website may be configured to offer and implement hosting of at least one customer website in the first datacenter, second datacenter, or both the first datacenter and second datacenter. The system also may comprise a network communicatively coupling the first datacenter, second datacenter, and customer interaction server. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205287 | REMOTELY MANAGING ENTERPRISE RESOURCES - The present disclosure is directed to a system and method for remotely managing enterprise resources. In some implementations, a method includes remotely receiving information associated with heterogeneous assets in an enterprise network. Transactions for remotely managing the heterogeneous assets are generated in response to at least the information. The management transactions are stored remote from the enterprise network until a request for the management transactions is received from the enterprise network. The management transactions are transmitted to the enterprise network using a single interface. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205288 | DYNAMIC SERVICE ACTIVATION USING COPS-PR TO SUPPORT OUTSOURCING AND CONFIGURATION MODELS FOR POLICY CONTROL - A device may include a service activation engine (SAE) including: a policy information base (PIB) file that defines a plurality of attachments that correspond to a plurality of network policies; and a server. The server may receive a request, using common open policy service for policy provisioning (COPS-PR), for a network service related to an interface handle associated with a subscriber device; determine which ones of the network policies correspond to the network service; and send, using COPS-PR, a provisioning instance (PRI) including a first of the attachments to implement the ones of the network policies to the interface handle based on the attachments. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205289 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR PATH CONTROL, AND PATH CONTROL METHOD - Information for performing path control is added to a signaling message used in a network including a higher-level path which accommodates a lower-level path. When a state change occurs in the higher-level path, a communication device extracts using the information a lower-level path to be controlled for the same control item as the control item indicating the state change in the higher-level path. A path to be controlled is selected from among the lower-level paths accommodated in the higher-level path. By controlling the extracted path, a plurality of paths can be easily controlled when there are accommodation relationships among layers. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205290 | MEDIUM RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD, SERVICE PACKAGE INFORMATION OBTAINING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A medium resource reservation method, a service package information obtaining method, and a service package information obtaining apparatus are provided, which are capable of decreasing resource waste of medium resource reservation. The resource reservation method includes the following steps. A service message carrying Session Description Protocol (SDP) information is received, and the SDP information contains service package information. The service package information is parsed from the SDP information. The service package information is employed for resource reservation. The method can identify the service package, so that the service package processing efficiency is improved, and the resource waste of medium resource reservation is effectively decreased. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100211662 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPECIFYING PLANNED CHANGES TO A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of specifying changes to a communications network is disclosed. The method uses a network model representing a current configuration of the communications network. Scope information is received defining a subset of the network model to which changes are to be made. Model information relating to the defined subset of the network model is copied in accordance with the scope information, to create a partial model copy. The partial model copy is then modified to represent a planned configuration of the communications network. The partial model may be validated as consistent with the network model for the current configuration, and to reserve resources within it. Changes within the partial model may be passed to other models, including the current configuration. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211663 | MANAGEMENT OF POOL MEMBER CONFIGURATION - A system for providing virtual desktop images to users of pool members from a pool includes a server subsystem in data communication with a plurality of pool members, said server subsystem being configured to receive, from a user, a request to log into a first pool member from said pool; to retrieve a virtual desktop image for use by said first pool member; to inspect a user policy corresponding to said user; to modify said virtual desktop image consistently with said user policy; and to provide said virtual desktop to said first pool member. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211664 | AGGREGATION OF PHYSICAL LAYER INFORMATION RELATED TO A NETWORK - An exemplary system includes a plurality of connector assemblies. Each of the connector assemblies includes a plurality of ports. Each of the connector assemblies is configured to read information stored on or in physical communication media that is connected to the ports of the respective connector assembly. An aggregation point is communicatively coupled to the plurality of connector assemblies. The aggregation point is configured to automatically discover the connector assemblies and cause each of the connector assemblies to send to the aggregation point at least some of the information read from the physical communication media that is connected to its ports. The aggregation point is configured to store at least some of the information sent by the connector assemblies to the aggregation point. The aggregation point can also be configured to provide at least some of the information it stores to at least one other device via the network. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211665 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH PHYSICAL LAYER INFORMATION - One exemplary embodiment is directed to a network management system that uses physical layer information in performing a network management function. Another exemplary embodiment is directed to a method of tracking channel compliance using physical layer information. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211666 | Method And Apparatus For Improving The Efficiency Of Resource Utilisation In A Communications System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for requesting a transport policy for a bearer of a session in a communications system ( | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211667 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATED DIGITAL ASSET MANAGEMENT IN NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and system can be used to automatically manage a digital asset, from development to deployment, to control change within a network environment in a comprehensive and efficient manner. Digital assets can be tracked for progress and inaccuracies, mistakes, and incompatibilities can be addressed prior to deployment. Stages can be used to formalize and automate the flow of digital assets along the process. Further, metadata regarding the digital asset can be captured at any time to provide an audit trail for the digital asset from development all the way through deployment. The metadata can include not only the change records for the digital asset but may also include other information, such as results from staging and where the digital asset has been deployed. Any stage may have access to any or all metadata captured for the digital asset. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100217850 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EXTENDING SECURITY PLATFORMS TO CLOUD-BASED NETWORKS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for extending a network security platform to a cloud-based network. A set of managed machines, such as personal computers or servers, can be managed by a network security engine. The network security engine can govern access to and operation of the set of managed machines through a set of security policies. According to embodiments, the set of security policies can be sub-divided into a partitioned security class corresponding to a subset of the managed network which is intended to be deployed as a cloud-accessible subset of the overall managed network. The partitioned security class can specify access restrictions for the cloud-accessible subset to receive resources from or provide resources to the external cloud environment. A corporate campus network or other managed network can therefore permit access of the cloud to some or all of its machines, while still maintaining desired local security conditions. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217851 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE TYPES OF COMMUNICATION MODES, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes multiple communication terminals that are used by multiple users; and a management unit that holds management information expressing which type of communication mode corresponding to which communication address information is used by which user and by which communication terminal, and connection information including communication address information of one communication terminal that has communicated and communication address information of the other communication terminal that has communicated. The management unit holds connection information corresponding to an instance of communication even if that instance of communication has ended. Each communication terminal can communicate with other communication terminals in one or more types of communication modes, and includes a communication support unit. In the case where a first-type communication mode of a first communication terminal that includes the communication support unit is used by a first user, the communication support unit accesses the management unit to specify communication address information corresponding to the first-type communication mode in a second communication terminal used by a second user, and the first communication terminal communicates with the second communication terminal in the first-type communication mode using the specified communication address information. The first user is a user that used a second-type communication mode prior to using the first-type communication mode of the first communication terminal. The second user is a user that communicated with the first user using the second-type communication mode prior to using the first-type communication mode of the first communication terminal. The specified communication address information is communication address information specified based on an instance of communication address information within the connection information that has another instance of communication address information corresponding to the second-type communication mode used by the first user, and based on the management information. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217852 | Wireless Terminal Device and Server Therefor - There is provided a wireless terminal device for performing a wireless communication. The wireless terminal device is capable of equipping a device and of communicating with a server. The wireless terminal device includes an application storage for storing an application program, an actuation request receiver for receiving an application actuation request including information specifying an application program to be started up, and an application actuator for starting up the application program on the basis of the information specifying the application program. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217853 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR POLICY BASED MANAGEMENT FOR A HIGH SECURITY MANET - A system and method for policy based management for a high security MANET comprises policy managers, each performing policy decision-making and policy enforcement using multiple policies, containers, each related to an application and each container having one policy manager, nodes, each having an infrastructure and at least one container, and dynamic community building blocks associating the containers having a same application, the containers being in different nodes, the associated containers maintained by the dynamic community building blocks on a secure network. Each container can define a security boundary around the node. Each container can be a lightweight virtual machine. The system can also have a special container having a policy manager only evaluating policies for conflicts. In one embodiment, a node can consist of multiple network devices and each network device is a container of its own. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217854 | Method and Apparatus for Intelligent Management of a Network Element - A network element (NE) includes an intelligent interface (II) with its own operating environment rendering it active during the NE boot process, and with separate intelligence allowing it to take actions on the NE prior to, during, and after the boot process. The combination of independent operation and increased intelligence provides enhanced management opportunities to enable the NE to be controlled throughout the boot process and after completion of the boot process. For example, files may be uploaded to the NE before or during the boot process to restart the NE from a new software image. The II allows this downloading process to occur in parallel on multiple NEs from a centralized storage resource. Diagnostic checks may be run on the NE, and files, and MIB information, and other data may be transmitted from the II to enable a network manager to more effectively manage the NE. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217855 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR NOTIFYING AN APPLICATION FUNCTION OF RESOURCE RESTRICTIONS RELATING TO A COMMUNICATION SESSION - The invention relates to a method of notifying an Application Function (AF) in a communications network of resource restrictions relating to a communication session. The network includes a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) for authorising and controlling flows of data in the session. In the method the AF sends an authorisation request to the PCRF for establishing the communication session. The authorisation request includes an indication that the AF is to be notified of resource restrictions for the data flows in the session. The PCRF notifies the AF of the resource restrictions. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217856 | Shared DNS Domain Handling - Instead of rejecting an incoming request at a node of a SIP domain, e.g. an IMS domain, when a user database query has failed, it is determined whether the DNS domain name of the request is registered as a shared domain or not. If it is found that the DNS domain name is registered as a shared domain, the DNS domain name is resolved into a globally routable URI, and the request is routed towards the terminating entity. If, however, the DNS domain name is not shared, the request is rejected. Such a mechanism enables operators to allow for a DNS domain name to be utilized by more than one SIP domain. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217857 | CONSOLIDATING SESSION INFORMATION FOR A CLUSTER OF SESSIONS IN A COUPLED SESSION ENVIRONMENT - Provided are a method, system, and program for consolidating session information for a cluster of sessions in a coupled session environment. Information for each of a plurality of sessions comprising a cluster is stored in a memory of a processor session. Each session associates at least one primary system and at least one secondary system, wherein within each session, updates are copied from the at least one primary system to the at least one secondary system. The session information in the memory for the plurality of sessions is processed to generate consolidated session information for the cluster based on the session information for the sessions in the cluster. The consolidated session information for the cluster is written to a master data set maintaining information for sessions. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100223369 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DEPOPULATION OF USER DATA FROM NETWORK - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for depopulation of user data from a network. A network management platform can communicate with a set of managed machines in a network, and generally manage user accounts including user lDs, associated network processes, services, application files, data files, and/or other user data. In embodiments, a user may have a change in status, such as departing from the organization operating the network, changing their name or user name, or other updates. In such cases, a systems administrator may need to update or delete files, processes, services, and/or other user data associated with the user from the network. The network management platform can interrogate the network for files, processes, or other resources associated with the user ID of interest. The search can exhaustively interrogate every available node in the network, to update or purge all files associated with the subject user ID(s). | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100223370 | NETWORK SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND CONNECTION STATE DETERMINING METHOD - A network system according to an implementation of the present invention involves: determining whether or not a matching address is found by comparing (i) an apparatus address, of an apparatus connected to an HDMI network, which is obtained via the HDMI network with (ii) an apparatus address, of an apparatus connected to another network, which is obtained via the other network (S | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100223371 | METHOD FOR INTERACTING WITH USER AND TERMINAL THEREOF - The present specification related to a method for interacting with a user and terminal thereof. The present specification provides a terminal comprising a first module adapted to receive a scheduling context including scheduled device management from a server and to install the received scheduling context, and a second module adapted to provide one or more of notification to a user about the scheduled device management, and an option allowing the user to modify the scheduled device management before performing the scheduled device management. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100223372 | Methods and Systems for Performing Remote Diagnostics - Diagnostic methods and systems are described in which a client or consumer electronic device can be remotely controlled and operated for purposes which include performing diagnostics and/or implementing remedial measures designed to remedy identified problems associated with the consumer electronic device. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100223373 | Systems and Methods for Facilitating Storage Operations using Network Attached Storage Devices - A system and method for communicating, browsing, verifying and routing data in storage operation systems using network attached storage devices is provided. In some embodiments, the system may include a management module and a media management component connected to the management server, which interoperate with network attached storage devices to provide the communicating, browsing, verifying and routing functions. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100223374 | COMBINED HEADER PROCESSING FOR NETWORK PACKETS - A computer system to efficiently process packets received over a network operating in accordance with a layered protocol. The system includes logic that provides combined processing to determine whether a received packet complies with multiple requirements of the layered protocol. Combined processing determines compliance with requirements at more than one of the protocol layers of the layered protocol. If the combined processing does not verify compliance with all of the requirements of a protocol layer, those requirements may be verified in a layered fashion following the combined processing. In this way, greater efficiencies may be achieved through the combined processing of requirements from multiple protocol layers, but advantages of implementing a layered protocol in a modular fashion may still be retained. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100228843 | ELEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Disclosed are an element management system and a method thereof that efficiently manage network elements of a wireless communication network, such as an RAS and an ACR. According to the present invention, it is possible to efficiently manage an RAS and an ACR so as to provide a stable wireless communication service, by implementing an element management system for managing network elements of a wireless communication network. Further, it is possible to implement an EMS server, which has a modularized construction including modules, which correspond to functions of the EMS and are arranged in a physically separated manner, so as to facilitate future addition and change of functions of the EMS. Moreover, it is possible to reduce loads on an EMS server by efficiently implementing information transmission and control paths of an EMS server and an EMS client. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228844 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHANGING SUBSCRIPTION STATUS OF SERVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for changing a subscription status of a service in a mobile communication system, and a system thereof. A method is provided for changing a subscription status of a service by a terminal in a mobile communication system. The method includes transmitting a pause request message, in which a pause period of the subscription status is included, to a network entity; receiving, from the network entity, a pause response message including therein a possible pause period for the pause period included in the pause request message, and a trigger for changing validity for a Long-term Key stored in the terminal; and changing validity for the Long-term Key using the trigger for the possible pause period included in the pause response message. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228845 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING TRIGGERED SESSION IN TRIGGERED LOCATION SERVICE BASED ON SUPL - Disclosed is a triggered session performance in a SUPL-based triggered location service, in particular, a triggered location service capable of pausing an ongoing session and then resuming the paused session by using a dedicated or common message and other certain parameters indicating a session pause/resume. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228846 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING SUPL BASED LOCATION SERVICE - A method for performing an SUPL-based triggered location service, comprising: sending a pause message for a triggered session to a server, starting the triggered session for a triggered location service with the server; and sending a end message to the server if a condition added to the triggered session is satisfied during pause of the triggered session. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228847 | METHOD FOR TRIGGERED LOCATION SERVICE IN SUPL - Disclosed is an SUPL-based triggered location service which provides a triggered location service capable of pausing an ongoing session and then resuming the paused session by using a dedicated or common message and other certain parameters indicating a session pause/resume. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228848 | MERGING OF OVERLAY NETWORKS IN DISTRIBUTED DATA STRUCTURES - A method and system for merging together two overlay networks in a distributed data structure, each overlay network comprises, spaced around a ring, a multiplicity of nodes each of which has a unique identifier and a leaf set identifying its neighbouring nodes are provided. Subsequently an initiator node makes a data request to a destination node and data is transferred from the destination node to the initiator node in response thereto, and a token is passed from the initiator node to the destination node that includes the identifier and leaf set of the initiator node. These steps are then repeated for the remaining nodes until all the nodes have been merged together and the merge process is stopped by receipt of a token by the initiator node. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100235484 | Remotely Administering A Server - Remotely administering a server, the server including non-volatile memory upon which is disposed one or more digital images representing the server, the server also including one or more components each of which includes non-volatile memory in which is disposed one or more digital images representing the component, where the server is connected for data communications to a management module, and remotely administering the server includes: retrieving, by the management module from the server, the digital images representing the server and the digital images representing the installed components; generating, by the management module with the digital images representing the server and the digital images representing the installed components, a graphical representation of the server with the installed components; and presenting, by the management module to a user through a GUI, the graphical representation of the server with the installed components. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235485 | PARALLEL PROCESSING OF INPUT DATA TO LOCATE LANDMARKS FOR CHUNKS - Input data is divided into a plurality of segments, which are processed, in parallel, by respective first processing elements to locate landmarks in the segments. At least one other processing element is used to produce chunks from the input data based on positions of the landmarks provided by the first processing elements. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235486 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR CONFIGURING RECEIVER LATENCY - The present disclosure is related to transmitting and receiving media channels, such as audio and video channels. These channels may be transmitted as packets from one or more transmitting devices to one or more receiving devices for playout. Certain embodiments of the present disclosure include systems, methods, and computer-readable media for determining latency of a data network for synchronised playout of received signals. Additionally, certain embodiments of the present disclosure include systems, methods, and computer-readable media for synchronising playout among devices connected to a data network. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235487 | USE OF SNMP FOR MANAGEMENT OF SMALL FOOTPRINT DEVICES - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for managing and controlling small footprint devices with a lightweight control protocol, such as SNMP. Relatively small control messages are employed that have a compact command portion included in an object identifier portion, thereby circumventing the need for a separate command portion as well as a data body. Also, methods, devices, and systems for improving the security and privacy of processing SNMP messages on SNMP-managed devices by moving this processing together with the sensitive data that the process employ such a cryptographic keys inside the tamper-resistant and tamper-evident boundary of an integrated circuit card. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235488 | HIGH AVAILABILITY FOR INTELLIGENT APPLICATIONS IN STORAGE NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus provide formation and management of intelligent application clusters in a storage area network. Disk arbitration mechanisms ensure that a cluster is owned by a single member. In the event of a network partition, each cluster member involved arbitrates to gain ownership of a cluster. High availability mechanisms allow monitoring of system resources and effective failover capabilities. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100250721 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESERVING FUNCTION OF UPNP DEVICE - A service provided by a universal plug and play (UPnP) device. A control point (CP) discovers the device in a network, controls the device, and reserves the device to perform a specific command at a specific time. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250722 | CONNECTIVITY MANAGEMENT FOR TRANSPORT INDEPENDENT ARCHITECTURES - A system for facilitating the configuration of access to resources residing within an operating environment comprising multiple apparatuses. Apparatuses may establish a common operating environment based on interactions taking place via a shared memory space residing on one or more of the apparatuses. Apparatuses that desire to interact with other apparatuses also participating in the common operating environment, for example in order to access resources residing on the other apparatuses, may initially obtain communication configuration information that is usable for establishing links to the other apparatuses. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250723 | Contents distribution system, node device, leaving process delay method, and computer-readable recording medium in which leaving process delay control program is recorded - A node device in a contents distribution system receives instructions of leaving from a leaving node device which leaves the contents distribution system, and obtains transmission ability information concerning a transmission ability of the leaving node device. The node device determines a delay time in such a way that the higher the transmission ability is, the longer the delay time for use in delaying the leaving from the contents distribution system is, based on the obtained transmission ability information. The node device performs a leaving process from the contents distribution system after the determined delay time has elapsed after the receipt of the instructions of leaving | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250724 | DEVICE FOR EQUIPMENT APPARATUS, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, EQUIPEMENT APPARATUS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN EQUIPMENT APPARATUS AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A management apparatus is configured to manage plural equipment apparatuses through a network. A notification receiver section is configured to receive a notification from each of the equipment apparatuses. A storage section is configured to store plural sets of identification information of the equipment apparatuses and plural sets of registration information of the equipment apparatuses for indicating a registered/unregistered status of each of the equipment apparatuses. A registration determiner section is configured to determine the registered/unregistered status of the equipment apparatuses based on a corresponding set of the identification information and a corresponding set of the registration information when the notification receiver section receives the notification. A notification prevention command creator section is configured to create a notification prevention command when each of the equipment apparatuses is determined to have the unregistered status. A command transmitter is configured to transmit the notification prevention command to each of the equipment apparatuses. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250725 | INTEROPERABILITY USING A LOCAL PROXY SERVER - A home-networking gateway may automatically provide a function based on data identified on a device on a home network. The home-networking gateway may perform the function using another device that is capable of performing the function and is accessible to the home-networking gateway. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100262683 | Network Aware Forward Caching - An Internet service provider includes a cache server and a network aware server. The network aware server is operable to determine an optimization between a cost of retrieving content from a network and a cost of caching content from the network at the first cache server and then send a content identifier to the cache server. The cache server is operable to receive the content identifier, and determine the source of a content item. If the source is the same as the content identifier, then the cache server caches the content item. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100262684 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PACKET CLASSIFICATION - A method for classification data packets by means of an ordered access control list (L) of at least one classification rule (R | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100262685 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMAND TRACKING - Embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method of command tracking that eliminates, or at least substantially reduces, the shortcomings of prior art systems and methods for command tracking. More particularly, embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method in which a command is assigned a unique identification. State information for the command (e.g., has the command been completed, has all the data associated with the command been received and other state information) can be associated with the unique identification and recorded. According to one embodiment, the state information can be stored in various tables that correspond to particular data transport protocols and/or devices. Because the state information for the command is associated with the unique identification in the tables, state information for the same command can be identified, even if the command changes data transport protocols. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100262686 | ONLINE BUSINESS COMMUNITY WEBSITE - Systems and methods of the present invention allow for providing and managing an online business community. An exemplary system may comprise at least one Hosting Server maintained by a Hosting Entity; a Community Website accessible to a plurality of Clients and hosted on said at least one Hosting Server; a Resource Database storing a plurality of Content, wherein at least some of said Resources are generated by a Member; a Directory Database storing a plurality of Member Information; and a Network communicatively coupling said Hosting Server, said Community Website, said plurality of Clients, said Resource Database, and said Directory Database. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100268805 | Data Transfer Controlling Method, Content Transfer Controlling Method, Content Processing Information Acquisition Method And Content Transfer System - A method of controlling data transfer, a method of controlling content transfer, a method of obtaining content processing information, and a system for transferring content are provided. The method of controlling data transfer in a data interoperable environment includes: receiving a request for transmitting data from a client; gathering information on entities which are to participate in transmitting data; forming a chain including at least two entities by using the gathered information on the entities; transmitting a plurality of data through the chain; and receiving an event message for representing a transmission status of the data transmitted from at least one of the entities included in the chain. Accordingly, it is possible to control a transmission of the data so that the plurality of data can be transmitted through a single session and to receive the transmission status of the data as an event message. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268806 | Systems, apparatus, and methods for utilizing a reachability set to manage a network upgrade - A method of upgrading software components within a dispersed data storage network is disclosed. A list of identifiers corresponding to devices within the dispersed data storage network is assembled. Each member of the list is assigned to an upgrade set based on the devices that are reachable by the vaults associated with the device. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268807 | MULTI-CHASSIS COMPONENT CORRECTOR AND ASSOCIATOR ENGINE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a network management system (NMS) and a method performed on the NMS including one or more of the following: receiving a notification of a new endpoint discovered in the network, the new endpoint representing an endpoint in a multi-chassis pair; determining that an address of the new endpoint conflicts with an address of a first existing endpoint of an existing multi-chassis pair, wherein the first existing endpoint is currently paired with a second existing endpoint; determining whether the new endpoint or the first existing endpoint is a proper endpoint of the existing multi-chassis pair; and when the new endpoint is the proper endpoint of the existing multi-chassis pair, updating the data representing the topology in the storage module to replace the first existing endpoint with the new endpoint as paired with the second existing endpoint. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268808 | DISTRIBUTED AGGREGATION ON AN OVERLAY NETWORK - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for distributed aggregation on an overlay network. Embodiments of the invention utilize tiers of nodes that are cascaded in a layered system. Each tier reduces the size of data by orders of magnitude through pre-aggregation. Thus, high volume streams of messages can be reduced to lower volume streams at large scales, such as, for example, the Internet. No central coordination is used; thus there is no central point of failure or bottleneck. When a node fails, other nodes in the same tier as the failing node automatically take over the responsibilities of the failed node. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268809 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ASSESSING THE USABILITY AND ACCESSIBILITY OF WEB 2.0 FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES OF WEBSITES - A system and method for accessing the usability and accessibility of a website includes generating a checklist of accommodations corresponding to an accessibility metric of the website, selecting one or more profiles of the website, and selecting Web 2.0 features of the website. The method may further include investigating tradeoffs of accommodations of different sets of Web 2.0 features and determining one or more accommodations necessary for a particular group of users. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268810 | Information communication system, information processing apparatus, information communication program, and information communication method - An information communication system includes: a communication line which connects a first information processing apparatus and a second information processing apparatus to each other; a transmission unit which is included in the first information processing apparatus and transmits identity information of the first information processing apparatus without passing through the communication line; a reception unit which is included in the second information processing apparatus and receives the identity information of the first information processing apparatus transmitted from the transmission unit without passing through the communication line; and an information transmission unit which is included in the second information processing apparatus and transmits information to the first information processing apparatus via the communication line by using the identity information received by the reception unit. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268811 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISCOVERING MANAGED SYSTEMS IN A NETWORK - A method for discovering managed systems in a network including classifying a first managed system associated with a first active Internet Protocol (IP) address in the network using a plurality of network protocols, identifying a set of drivers using the classification, where the set of drivers are configured to obtain first management information about the managed system, obtaining a first set of drivers, populating a data model with the first management information obtain using at least one of the first set of drivers, and managing the first managed system using the data model. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100274879 | Dynamic Scheduling Interrupt Controller For Multiprocessors - Technologies are generally described herein for handling interrupts within a multiprocessor computing system. A priority level associated with a current task for each processor of the multiprocessor computing system can be maintained. Cache state information associated with each processor can also be maintained. Upon receiving an interrupt to the multiprocessor computing system, a cache locality score for each processor can be determined based on the maintained cache state information. A value can be computed that balances, for each processor, the priority level and the cache locality score. A processor for servicing the interrupt can be determined based on the computed value. The determined processor can be signaled to service the interrupt. Tracking state information related to processor cores can support rapid allocation of an arriving interrupt to a processor core without collecting processor core state information at interrupt time. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100274880 | Network Topology Management System, Management Apparatus, Management Method, Management Program, and Storage Media That Records Management Program - A network topology management system includes information processing units, storage units, connection units that control connection switching between the information processing units and the storage units, a management unit that manages a network topology consisting of the information processing units, the storage units and the connection units, and an emulator connected to the connection units and to the management unit the network. The emulator comprises a conversion section that converts first equipment identification information that identifies the information processing units or the storage units into second equipment identification information that is recognizable by the management unit to identify the information processing units or the storage units, and a transmitting section that sends the second equipment identification information to the management unit. The management device has a control section that manages the network topology based on the second equipment identification information. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100274881 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT USING PERIODIC STATUS MESSAGES - Methods of managing a network comprising a plurality of agents. The methods may comprise the step of storing a plurality of agent data files corresponding to the plurality of agents. The methods may also comprise the step of receiving periodic status messages from at least a portion of the plurality of agents. Upon receiving a status message from a first agent, the methods may comprise the step of updating an agent data file corresponding to the first agent. Also, the methods may comprise the steps of periodically identifying agent data files from the plurality of agent data files that have not been updated for a predetermined amount of time; and sending a request for response to a second agent corresponding to an agent data file that has not been updated for a predetermined amount of time. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100274882 | Method and System for Internet Protocol Provisioning of Customer Premises Equipment - Method and system for Internet Protocol (IP) provisioning over a cable network. The method and system including a plurality of embedded settop boxes (eSTBs) of at least two different vendors requesting IP provisioning according to a first protocol. The method and system further including a network provisioning unit (NPU) in communication with the eSTBs over the network for responding to the eSTB IP provisioning requests with IP provisioning data, wherein the eSTB IP provisioning data is outputted according to the first protocol such that provisioning of the eSTBs is standard for each vendor in so far as each eSTB utilizes the first protocol for provisioning. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100274883 | CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR COMPUTER SYSTEM INCLUDING STORAGE SYSTEMS - Responsive to a manipulation a storage administrator performs, the authority to manage the physical configuration of a storage system is either given or not given to the storage administrator. Specifically, a volume allocation program installed in a management computer gives the storage administrator the authority to manage the physical configuration of a storage system including a created volume, responsive to creation of a volume. A volume un-allocation program installed in the management computer verifies responsive to un-allocation of a volume whether the storage administrator is not given the authority to manage the physical configuration of the storage system including the un-allocated volume. Thus, by use of the two programs, the storage administrator can manage both a physical configuration and a logical configuration exclusive of other storage administrators. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100274884 | PARAMETER SETTING/STORING METHOD - Parameters necessary for browsing of content are stored in storage means while associating the parameters with location information of the content. When location information identical with location information of requested content has been stored in the storage means, parameters that have been stored in the storage means while being associated with the location information identical with the location information of the requested content are acquired from the storage means. When no location information identical with the location information of the requested content has been stored in the storage means, parameters that have been stored in the storage means while being associated with location information satisfying a prescribed rule are acquired from the storage means if such location information satisfying the prescribed rule has been stored in the storage means. The acquired parameters are applied to a process for the browsing of the requested content. | 10-28-2010 |
| 20100281149 | Buffer system for managing service measurement requests - The present invention relates to a buffer system for managing a plurality of service measurement (SM) requests. In one embodiment, the buffer system includes a count buffer configured to store the SM requests. Each SM request includes a key set and a name-value pair. The name-value pair includes a name field and a value field. The buffer system further includes a send buffer configured to consolidate indices of the count buffer according to a destination address of each of the SM requests and a transport buffer configured to create at least one outgoing message based on data contents of the count buffer than correspond to the indices that have been consolidated. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281150 | Method of Processing Event Notifications and Event Subscriptions - A method of processing event notifications and event subscriptions in a telecommunications or data network comprising a plurality of nodes, wherein an individual node performs the steps of maintaining a first repository for storing a set of event subscriptions encoded in a first summary and maintaining a second repository for storing the set of event subscriptions. The node encodes a received event notification into a second summary and then checks if the received event notification is a member of the set by comparing the first summary and the second summary. If the event notification is not a member of the set said notification is discarded. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281151 | PROVISIONING AVAILABLE NETWORK RESOURCES - Systems and methods are provided that allow network resources to be shared across geographical distances. This can be achieved by changing the resources available for establishing and handling call or data session processing in an area. A mobility management device can alone or in combination with a DNS server change the size or the resource pool available in some embodiments. The change in resources can be dynamic according to certain predefined conditions or can be setup beforehand to account for daily demand. This sharing of resources can allow more efficient usage of resources available across a geographic region, rather than needed to over-provision each region to account for peak demands. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281152 | Integrated Media Content Server System And Method for Customization Of Metadata That Is Associated Therewith - A system and method for the customization of media content metadata that is transmitted to any one of a plurality of end user devices of differing types. The system is adapted to modify individual records or even individual fields from the entire gamut of available metadata into a metadata feed which is optimally suited for display upon the type of end user device. Additionally, the system is also able to modify the records or individual fields from a list of all metadata instances according to pre-recorded user preferences. The result is a system that optimally utilizes the current connection path in order to reduce congestion thereon, or to alleviate any user potential frustration caused by sporadic performance of the overloaded interconnection path. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281153 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system for remotely controlling mobile communication devices includes a redirection system, a remote control system and a mobile data communication device. The redirection system detects a triggering event at a host system and in response to the triggering event continuously redirects data items from the host system to a wireless network. The mobile data communication device receives data items from the wireless network and executes a plurality of device operations. The remote control system receives control information from a user interface and transmits the control information through the redirection system to the wireless network. The control information is received and executed by the mobile data communication device to remotely control one or more of the device operations. Methods of controlling the operation of mobile data communication devices are also disclosed. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100287267 | METHOD AND SERVER FOR WIDGET COMMUNICATION - A widget communication method includes: receiving a widget event message from a client, the widget event message indicates happening of the widget event; obtaining association information of widget events between clients; and triggering widget events on other clients that are associated with the widget event happening on the client according to the association information. A widget server is also provided. With the present invention, when a server receives a widget event message from a client, the server obtains association information of widget events between clients. Because the association information of widget events between clients associates widget events of different clients, the server triggers the widget events on other clients that are associated with the widget event happening on the client according to the association information so that widget applications can collaborate across multiple clients. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287268 | METHODS, COMPUTER PROGRAMS, TRANSACTION SERVERS AND COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING TRANSACTIONS - The invention relates to a method, computer program and computer system for processing transactions. The method comprises providing a plurality of input connectors which interface towards a plurality of external data systems; providing a plurality of action connectors which interface towards a plurality of external data systems; receiving an input with one of the input connectors; determining, whether the input relates to a predetermined service of a customer; creating a transaction based on the input, when linking the received input to a predetermined service of a customer; processing the transaction to determine at least one output action; providing the at least one output action to at least one of the action connectors; and providing an output with the at least one action connector based on the at least one output action. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287269 | NETWORK SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREFOR - The network system includes: a command transmitting unit that transmits a command for requesting information required by the representative device for network management from the non-representative device, when the non-representative device has joined a network or when there is a change in a state of the non-representative device; a command receiving unit that receives a command including the information sent from the non-representative device that has received the command; a management unit that manages the information received by the command receiving unit as device management information; a representative device selecting unit that selects a next representative device using the device management information when functions of the representative device are to be disabled. The network system does not need a special management apparatus when there is a changeover between a representative device and a non-representative device and management authority as the representative device as well as accumulated information are inherited. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287270 | CONTROL PROXY APPARATUS AND CONTROL PROXY METHOD - A control proxy apparatus includes: a management-apparatus-information storage unit that stores identification information for uniquely identifying a management apparatus that manages various apparatuses and a communication format of the management apparatus; an apparatus-information storage unit that stores apparatus information for executing various types of control, in association with each control target apparatus; an authenticating unit that determines, when receiving a control request from the management apparatus, whether authentication information in the control request is stored in the management-apparatus-information storage unit; an apparatus-information acquiring unit that acquires, when the authenticating unit determines that the authentication information is stored in the management-apparatus-information storage unit, apparatus information corresponding to the control target apparatus, from the apparatus-information storage unit; and a control executing unit that converts control information in the control request based on the apparatus information acquired by the apparatus-information acquiring unit, and executes the converted control information on the control target apparatus. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287271 | System and Method for Restricting Data Transfers and Managing Software Components of Distributed Computers - A controller, referred to as the “BMonitor”, is situated on a computer. The BMonitor includes a plurality of filters that identify where data can be sent to and/or received from, such as another node in a co-location facility or a client computer coupled to the computer via the Internet. The BMonitor further receives and implements requests from external sources regarding the management of software components executing on the computer, allowing such external sources to initiate, terminate, debug, etc. software components on the computer. Additionally, the BMonitor operates as a trusted third party mediating interaction among multiple external sources managing the computer. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287272 | Method For Structuring a Self-Organized Content Distribution Overlay Network For a Peer-to-Peer Network - A method for structuring a content distribution overlay network for a peer-to-peer network is presented. The method includes receiving a request from a requesting node for content at a content node. The content node has processing capabilities to process the content for presentation to the requesting node. An overlay network, including the requesting node and the content node, is dynamically assembled after receiving the request for content, where the overlay network is self-organized from available nodes of the peer-to-peer network that are available at a time of the request and based on the content requested. Using the assembled overlay network, a head node of the overlay network determines if a child node in the overlay network has processing capabilities to process the content, where the child node is then assigned to process the content for presentation to the requesting node. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100293260 | USE OF AN IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IN A NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A method for the operation of network management systems, according to which values of attributes relating to an element are presented to a first manager and values of attributes relating to an element, which correspond to the values of the first manager, are presented to a second manager. The first and second manager determine the same identification information according to the same rule and using at least some of the values as well as store said identification information independently from a modification of the values of attributes relating to the respective element. The identification information is used during communication between the first manager and the second manager for identifying the element. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100293261 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR IMS RECOVERY UPON RESTART OF A S-CSCF - The present invention is aimed to provide means and methods for recovery of the IMS where an S-CSCF has suffered a restart after a failure, software upgrade or other reasons. To this end, the present invention provides for a first method to be applied in a HSS holding subscriber data for subscribers of the IMS and a second method to be applied in a S-CSCF selected for serving a given subscriber, upon restart of a S-CSCF assigned for serving a given subscriber. Both first and second methods cooperating to submit from the S-CSCF towards the HSS contact data required by the S-CSCF to contact the given subscriber, or to contact a proxy server where the subscriber is accessible through; storing the contact data at the HSS; and providing from the HSS towards an IMS entity, which may be the previously assigned S-CSCF or a new S-CSCF, contact information elements selectable from the contact data. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100293262 | AUTOMATED SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROCESS - A method and apparatus for an automated system management process are described. According to an embodiment of the invention, a method comprises receiving data regarding operation of a network; automatically generating network policies based at least in part on the data regarding operation of the network using automation intelligence; applying the network policies to modify operations of the network; and receiving data regarding the operation of the network after the modification of the operations of the network. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100293263 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A NETWORK OF DISTRIBUTED ENTITIES - System architecture for managing a network of distributed entities, including a central server and a plurality of mobile terminals connected with the server. Terminals can communicate and exchange information with the server, but also among each other. Each mobile terminal is adapted to intercept the proximity of network entities having potentially a limited processing capability: in a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the entities are RFID Smart Tags, but other kinds of proximity communication protocols could be used instead (e.g. ZIGBee, Bluetooth). A central repository is maintained by the server where all the information collected by the mobile terminals is stored and is made available to the plurality of mobile terminals. The network entities must be capable of transmitting information to the mobile terminals when they are within a predetermined range. Each entity (e.g. an RFID Tag) can be coupled to any physical object and provide information about such object or the category to which the object belongs. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention the entities are also adapted to transmit a workflow or a sequence of instructions to mobile terminals. The mobile terminals include a Task Engine for interpreting and executing such workflow received by the entities. In a preferred embodiment of the present invention the mobile terminals are provided with a positioning system to be able to communicate the location of the detected entities to the server. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100293264 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING DUAL-CONTROL FUNCTIONALITY IN A NETWORKED DIGITAL MEDIA DEVICE - Described herein are systems and methods for providing dual control functionality in a networked digital media device. In overview, a networked digital media device advertises a standard digital media device, which is discoverable and controllable by a standard control device in accordance with a standard media control protocol (also referred to as a Device Control Protocol, or DCP). The networked digital media device also advertises a non-standard digital media playback device, the non-standard device being discoverable and controllable by a non-standard control device in accordance with a non-standard media control protocol. These two devices are manifested in the same device hardware, essentially allowing the device to implement dual-control such that it is able to be controlled both as a standard device and a non-standard device. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100293265 | IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM REGISTRATION - A method of ensuring that a currently reachable contact address is registered for a user terminal within an IP Multimedia Subsystem, the method comprising registering a first contact address for said terminal with the IP Multimedia Subsystem, subsequently determining on a network side that said terminal is no longer reachable via said first contact address, and as a consequence of such a determination, registering on the network side a second reachable contact address on behalf of the user terminal, with the IP Multimedia Subsystem. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100299422 | CLIENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A client management system includes a client terminal capable of communicating with a server terminal. The client terminal includes a storage device and a security managing module. The storage device is capable of storing data checked out data from the server terminal. The security managing module is capable of deleting the checked-out data in the storage device when a checked-out period determined by the server terminal has expired. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299423 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA INTERCEPTION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for data interception in a network are provided. The network includes a mechanism and/or a functionality according to an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). The method includes a first network element provides session information to a third network element; a second network element provides identity information to the third network element; and the third network element processes and/or forwards at least a portion of the session information and/or identity information provided. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299424 | AN APPARATUS AND A METHOD FOR MODIFYING A COMMAND MESSAGE IN A DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA NETWORK - An apparatus for modifying a command message (CMD) received from a source apparatus to control a target device parameter of a target apparatus within a digital multimedia network, wherein a hierarchical parameter address (HPA) or a parameter value contained in said command message (CMD) is changed according to at least one change script to provide a modified command message (CMD'). | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299425 | LICENSE TRANSFER SYSTEM, LICENSE TRANSFER METHOD, AND LICENSE TRANSFER PROGRAM - The first image forming apparatus is the image forming apparatus for the license transfer source. The second image forming apparatus is the transfer destination image forming apparatus to which a license is transferred. The license management apparatus centrally manages the issue status and the like of a license for an application to be installed on each image forming apparatus. The registration of the license to the license management apparatus is performed by the application seller through the sales company system and the like. The device management apparatus has the function of collecting, accumulating, processing the information of the image forming apparatus to be managed and the information indicating the operating state thereof, and externally providing a warning and the like. The distribution/transfer management apparatus manages the license/application to be distributed/transferred, and the state of distribution/transfer processing for the license/application. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299426 | SERVICE-ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE - A Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA) Communication Model (CM) allows a service producer to seek out service consumer types and to send them information. The consumer, actively or passively, is also configured to “advertise.” The information that is advertised could come (passively) from information already in a system, such as an application architecture, comprising the roles and attributes in a consumer's security certificate(s). The information could come (actively) from a registry of users with a system-user ontology that is created especially for this purpose and otherwise is not already in the system. This approach will allow a producer to initiate sending information to a consumer. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299427 | CONFIGURABLE GEOGRAPHIC PREFIXES FOR GLOBAL SERVER LOAD BALANCING - In a load balancing system, user-configurable geographic prefixes are provided. IP address prefix allocations provided by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) and associated geographic locations are stored in a first, static database in a load balancing switch, along with other possible default geographic location settings. A second, non-static database stores user-configured geographic settings. In particular, the second database stores Internet Protocol (IP) address prefixes and user-specified geographic regions for those prefixes. The specified geographic region can be continent, country, state, city, or other user-defined region. The geographic settings in the second database can override the information in the first database. These geographic entries help determine the geographic location of a client and host IP addresses, and aid in directing the client to a host server that is geographically the closest to that client. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299428 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A management apparatus characterized by comprising: management means for managing a connection parameter associated with a second network which is newly formed by a communication apparatus connected to a first network and is different from the first network; and notification means for, upon receiving a request from another communication apparatus connected to the first network, notifying the request source communication apparatus of the connection parameter associated with the second network, which is managed by the management means. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100299429 | CONTROLLING ACCESS TO MANAGED OBJECTS IN NETWORKED DEVICES - Controlling access to managed objects associated with a networked device. A method comprises receiving a request from a principal for access to a managed object associated with the networked device. The managed objects are accessible based on membership in access groups that are compliant with a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). A first and a second of the access groups associated with the principal are determined. Access privileges for the principal are determined, based on the first and the second access groups. Access to the managed object is granted if permitted based on the access privileges for the principal. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100306357 | SERVER, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MONITORING COMPUTER SYSTEM - A server, a computer system and a method for monitoring the computer system are provided. The computer system includes the server and a remote computer. The server includes a basic input/output system (BIOS) and a base management controller (BMC). The remote computer includes a processing unit. The BIOS executes a detection procedure to generate a status code, and the BMC outputs a management message according to the status code. The processing unit executes monitor software such that the processing unit generates a monitor message according to the management message. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306358 | HANDLING OF MULTIPLE MAC UNICAST ADDRESSES WITH VIRTUAL MACHINES - A method for managing a guest OS executing on a host. The method includes receiving, from the guest OS associated with a first MAC address, a second MAC address, wherein the first MAC address is associated with a first guest VNIC, wherein the second MAC address is associated with a second guest VNIC; configuring an intermediate VNIC executing on the host OS to forward packets associated with the second MAC address to the guest OS, wherein packets associated with the first MAC address and received by the intermediate VNIC are forwarded to the guest OS; and forwarding the second MAC address from the intermediate VNIC to a device driver associated with a physical NIC, wherein the device driver configures a classifier on the physical NIC to forward packets associated with the second MAC address to a first HRR located on the physical NIC associated with the intermediate VNIC. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306359 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT OF MAINFRAME RESOURCES IN PRE-BOOT ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for the management of mainframe resources in a pre-boot environment. According to embodiments, a network management platform, for instance a platform equipped or compatible with pre-boot discovery and management tools such as the known pre-boot execution environment (PXE), can integrate a set of mainframe-based virtual machines using a pre-boot management engine. The pre-boot management engine can reside in or communicate with the mainframe operating system, and present a set of resources to the network management platform to allow the platform to include time-sliced or other virtual machines or resources, into the pre-boot protocol. According to embodiments, for instance, the set of virtual machines can be assigned temporary or pseudo media access control (MAC) or other hardware identifiers, so that the network management platform can view individual mainframe-based virtual machines as having a network connection and thereby receive similar boot commands to hardware-based client machines. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306360 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT DISCOVERY TOOL - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for discovering network paths between network devices in a distance-vector network are provided. The method may include providing a node model of network devices in a distance-vector network. The node model may include a network address corresponding to a network device. The network address may be used to query the network device for routing information. This routing information may be used to identify another network address corresponding to a second network device, and to identify a path from the first network device to the second network device. These devices and the path therebetween may be mapped in the node model. Finally, the second network device may be queried for subsequent routing information to identify and map subsequent devices and paths. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN XML DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT ARCHITECTURE - A method is provided for use in an XML Document Management Architecture. An Aggregation Proxy of Remote Network to use for accessing an XCAP document in the remote network is determined by performing a DNS lookup. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306362 | METHOD OF AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR MANAGING ONE OR MORE AGRICULTURAL DEVICES - A system and method for managing an agricultural device, including connecting the agricultural device to a network, collecting operational data relating to the agricultural device, | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100312868 | Logically Partitioned System Having Subpartitions with Flexible Network Connectivity Configuration - A method of configuring a data processing system for facilitating network communications involves creating a primary logical partition (LPAR) in the data processing system, the LPAR configured to host a specified operating system. The method further includes creating a first virtual network adapter within the LPAR, associating the first virtual network adapter with a first network address, and binding the first virtual network adapter to the LPAR. The method additionally involves creating a first logical subpartition (LSPAR) within the LPAR, the first LSPAR configured to employ said specified operating system and no other. The method also includes creating a second virtual network adapter within the LPAR, associating the second virtual network adapter with a second network address, wherein the second network address is not an alias network address of the first network address, and binding the second virtual network adapter to the first LSPAR. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100312871 | Executing Programs Based on User-Specified Constraints - Techniques are described for managing execution of programs on multiple computing systems, such as based at least in part of user-specified constraints. For example, constraints related to execution of a program may be based on a desired relative location of a host computing system to execute a copy of the program with respect to an indicated target (e.g., computing systems executing other copies of the program or copies of another indicated program), on particular geographic locations, and/or on factors not based on location (e.g., cost of use of a particular computing system, capabilities available from a particular computing system, etc.). Some or all of the multiple computing systems may be part of a program execution service for executing multiple programs on behalf of multiple users, and each may provide multiple virtual machines that are each capable of executing one or more programs for one or more users. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100318639 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMPUTER PROCESSES - Methods, systems and apparatuses for managing computer processes in a computing environment may be described. An exemplary method may include the defining of a plurality of computer processes; the defining of a sequence that dictates the starting and stopping of the plurality of computer processes; the Defining of any process dependencies for the plurality of computer processes; the defining of a first networked environment where the plurality of computer processes run; the determining of an action to take following a system event; and the executing of the action | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318640 | ADAPTIVE WRITE-BACK AND WRITE-THROUGH CACHING FOR OFF-LINE DATA - A method for facilitating communication between an application and a server is provided. An intermediary sits between an application and a server. The intermediary intercepts and responds to communications on behalf of the intended recipient of the communication. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318641 | SENSOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Disclosed are methods and apparatuses for managing reports. In certain aspects, an apparatus for managing reports including a processing system is disclosed. The processing system is configured to receive a plurality of reports from a plurality of other apparatuses, filter out one or more of the plurality of reports, and forward the remaining plurality of reports to another apparatus, wherein each of the plurality of reports comprises data based on a sensor measurement at the respective one of the plurality of other apparatuses. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318642 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AND MONITORING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS - A system and method for providing and enforcing policy management and access control through a cloud-based computing system to other cloud-based computing systems via application programming interfaces. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318643 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VIRTUALIZING FUNCTIONS AND DECENTRALIZING SERVICE DELIVERY IN A FLAT NETWORK OF INTERCONNECTED PERSONAL DEVICES - Systems and methods are described herein to virtualize functions and decentralize services in a flat-graph network of client devices. Other embodiments include apparatus and systems of devices comprising virtual node modules to perform a variety of service functions. Further embodiments include methods for overlaying service functions on a flat-graph network of client devices. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318644 | Verifying information stored on a managed network device - A method and mechanism for verifying information on a managed device is provided. A request is received at a managed device that contains one or more values that comprise proposals for a correct value of a managed object of the managed device. The managed object may be a SNMP MIB object. The managed object may store information for any attribute for the managed device. Next, a determination is made as to whether any of the one or more values in the request match the correct value of the managed object. Thereafter, a notification message is transmitted from the managed device to a management station that indicates whether any of the one or more values in the request match the correct value of the managed object. The notification message may identify which one of the one or more values in the request matches the correct value of the managed object. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318645 | MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN COMPUTING NODES - Techniques are described for managing communications between multiple intercommunicating computing nodes, such as multiple virtual machine nodes hosted on one or more physical computing machines or systems. In some situations, users may specify groups of computing nodes and optionally associated access policies for use in the managing of the communications for those groups, such as by specifying which source nodes are allowed to transmit data to particular destinations nodes. In addition, determinations of whether initiated data transmissions from source nodes to destination nodes are authorized may be dynamically negotiated for and recorded for later use in automatically authorizing future such data transmissions without negotiation. This abstract is provided to comply with rules requiring an abstract, and it is submitted with the intention that it will not be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318646 | METHOD OF CORRECTION OF NETWORK SYNCHRONISATION - The invention relates to a method of synchronising the clock of different clusters including a first cluster ( | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100325255 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD - There is provided a data transmission system capable of preferably transmitting data, the real-time property of which is regarded as being important and which is generated at a short period of time, over a network that causes delay and the missing of transmission data. An avatar location processing unit ( | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100325256 | IPMI SERVER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - An intelligent platform management interface (IPMI) server management system includes a managing side and a plurality of managed sides. The managed sides includes at least on active IPMI managed sides, wherein each of the active IPMI managed side actively provides its service information to the managing side so as to establish a first list, and then the managing side searches out the managed sides which are not on the first list one by one so as to establish a second list. Therefore, the IPMI server management system may effectively sort out the managed sides which are available for application. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100325257 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING LINK MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for providing link management in a multi-core system. In some embodiments, the present application describes solutions for managing address resolution in IPv4 networks in a multi-core system. In other embodiments, the present application describes solutions for managing neighbor discovery in IPv6 networks in a multi-core system. In still other embodiments, the present application describes solutions for managing network bridging in a multi-core system. In yet other embodiments, the present application describes solutions for managing link aggregation in a multi-core system. And in still other embodiments, the present application describes solutions for managing virtual routers in a multi-core system. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100332633 | GENERAL AND HIGHLY SCALABLE PEER-TO-PEER DISTRIBUTION MECHANISM FOR NODES ON A NETWORK - A method for peer-to peer distributed client updates. The method includes sending an update message to one of a plurality of network accessible devices from said server computer, and updating the one of the plurality of network accessible devices. A list is then assigned for a remaining plurality of plurality network accessible devices, and the update message is transmitted from the updated network accessible device to the remaining plurality of network accessible devices in accordance with the list. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332634 | SELF-DISTRIBUTION OF A PEER-TO-PEER DISTRIBUTION AGENT - A method for peer-to peer distributed client updates. The method includes first sending a peer-to-peer agent to one of a plurality of network accessible devices from said server computer, and installing the peer-to-peer agent at the one of the plurality of network accessible devices. An update message is then sent to the one of a plurality of network accessible devices for updating the software at the device. A list is then assigned for a remaining plurality of plurality network accessible devices, and the peer-to-peer agent and update message are transmitted from the updated network accessible device to the remaining plurality of network accessible devices in accordance with the list. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332635 | MIGRATING FUNCTIONALITY IN VIRTUALIZED MOBILE DEVICES - One embodiment of the present invention is a method of migrating functionality to a target virtualized mobile device including virtualization software that supports one or more virtual machines, the method including: (a) embodying the functionality in a virtual machine; and (b) migrating the virtual machine to the target virtualized mobile device. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332636 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS THAT REGISTERS INFORMATION ON IMAGE PROCESSING JOB IN DATA SERVER, METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus which enables reduction of the capacity of a data server. An intermediate server receives audit information concerning a job executed by an MFP or PC. The intermediate server registers at least one of attribute information and content information contained in the received audit information, in the data server. A registration processing determination section of the intermediate server determines a type of the job which the received audit information concerns. The section causes a job information and content information registration section to register the attribute information and the content information contained in the received audit information in the data server, or a content information registration section to register the content information in the data server without registering the attribute information therein. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332637 | VIRTUAL-MACHINE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING VIRTUAL MACHINES - A method for managing virtual machines, the method causing a management server having a database includes link relation information and connected to a plurality of physical servers, on which virtual machine hosts are installed, the method includes updating the link relation information in such a manner that a link between a virtual machine host and a first virtual machine guest is disconnected, when information regarding the first virtual machine guest cannot be acquired from the virtual machine host and updating the link relation information stored in such a manner that a link between a virtual machine host and a second virtual machine guest, when information regarding the second virtual machine guest is acquired from the virtual machine host. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332638 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPREHENSIVE NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - In a system for managing data, voice, application and video networks and associated systems and services that comprise multiple, interconnected network technologies, a management system suited for a particular networking technology manages each separate technology domain. Multiple management systems thus manage multiple domains with respect to fault, configuration, accounting, performance, and security management. The management systems that manage the individual networking technology domains are then themselves managed by a higher-level system, called an inter-domain management system, which performs cross-domain management. The individual management systems of the invention collect data from their respective technology domains and provide it to an intra-domain data collection function. This data is then utilized by an inter-domain data correlation function to determine what instructions should be sent from an intra-domain instruction function to each management system for implementation in its respective technology domains. The comprehensive management system thus collects data from each lower-level management system and, if required, sends operational instructions back to each lower level system. Event correlation and service level management are performed at both the intra-domain and inter-domain levels. Business process management is performed at the inter-domain level. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332639 | Providing Manageability To An Electronic Device That Supports Location Limited Manageability Functionality - A request for a first function is detected | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNIFIED VIEW - Visibility and control are provided for a variety of different assets as found in a particular networked environment, such as, for example an enterprise network environment. Visibility and control of properties of assets are achieved by way of native agents, pseudo-agents that provide visibility and control of properties of assets of external systems by inspecting and applying changes into such assets, and bridges that provide visibility of other external data sources that cannot be controlled. A technique is provided that brings such visibility and control into a unified view that can be displayed in front of a console operator, for example. The controllable assets may be managed directly from the unified view at the console. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110004678 | SCHEDULED DOWNLOADS: ENABLING BACKGROUND PROCESSES TO RECEIVE BROADCAST DATA - A digital broadcast network is disclosed that can provide scheduled updates for non-critical data in a different manner than critical data updates. Updates that included non-critical information can be scheduled to be broadcast, over a digital broadcast network, during an update window, which can he a specific period of time. Receiving devices can he notified of the update window and, utilizing background functionality, the non-critical updates can be accepted and applied at the receiving device. The non-critical updates might be accepted and applied during the update window if the receiving device is in an idle state or a period of low activity. The non-critical updates can be broadcast on a separate channel or stream. During periods other than during the update window, other data can be transmitted on the separate channel or stream. Critical updates can be applied in real-time. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110004679 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING AUTOMATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES - An automation management system is deployed and operates on a plurality of network devices in a network in a distributed manner. The plurality of network devices may comprise a plurality of routers, for example. Automation management services are deployed and operate on the network devices in accordance with a service-oriented architecture model. At least one of the services may comprise a first instance of the service deployed on a first network device and a second instance of the service deployed on a second network device. Methods for deploying and operating an automation management system on a plurality of network devices in a network are also provided. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110010438 | Method and Apparatus for Communicating During Automated Data Processing - A number of items of data from a data source ( | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010439 | Communications system - A communications system for a network of stations, is provided where stations identify themselves upon being informed of the desires of an inquisitor station. Additionally, techniques for “plug and play”, self-healing and homogenizing the heterogeneous parts of a network, are provided. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010440 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PERFORMING STORAGE OPERATIONS IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - Methods and systems are described for performing storage operations on electronic data in a network. In response to the initiation of a storage operation and according to a first set of selection logic, a media management component is selected to manage the storage operation. In response to the initiation of a storage operation and according to a second set of selection logic, a network storage device to associate with the storage operation. The selected media management component and the selected network storage device perform the storage operation on the electronic data. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010441 | EQUIPMENT IN A DATA NETWORK AND METHODS FOR MONITORING, CONFIGURING AND/OR MANAGING THE EQUIPMENT - A router having one or more downstream interfaces and situated in a data network system between sources that send multicast data packets to at least one multicast group address and multiple hosts that request data from the multicast group address and sources. In one implementation the router has a management system agent and an associated management system agent database and stores for each network interface, each multicast group address and each host information in the management system agent database derived from one or more data requests made by the hosts. In one implementation the router stores for a downstream network interface and multicast group address at least one INCLUDE source record containing information about include source lists derived by data requests made by the one or more hosts and at least one EXCLUDE source record containing information about exclude source lists derived by data requests made by the one or more hosts in the management system agent database, the router using a host-router multicast routing protocol based on the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) or the MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) protocol to communicate with the one or more hosts, the router using a different protocol to communicate with a management system control station information stored in the management system database. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010442 | CONTENT MANAGEMENT APPLICATION FOR AN INTERACTIVE ENVIRONMENT - The content management application is an intranet application which provides a process for implementing changes to an internet website of a company by providing the company the ability to define and enforce a common style of page layout. The application can be accessed via a desktop browser and multiple users may access the application for multiple reasons at the same time. The application also dynamically generates new page designs and new component design with various people assigned to groups or teams enabling the continuous creation and processing of content. Once the content is created and reviewed, it is then launched onto the company's internet site for viewing by the internet users accessing the company's web page. | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010443 | INFORMATION PROVISION SYSTEM, TERMINAL FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING INFORMATION, AND INFORMATION PROVISION METHOD - An information provision system ( | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110010444 | DATA COMMUNICATION - A management device ( | 01-13-2011 |
| 20110016203 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACHIEVING SCALABILITY IN DOMAIN COMPUTING - A connection management system can achieve scalability for domain computing among a plurality of domains. Each of the plurality of domains comprises a collection of machines and resources that are administrated as a unit. A connection concentrator can connect, and support communication between, a plurality of processes in a first domain and a plurality of processes in a second domain. The connection concentrator uses one connection to communicate with any one of the plurality of processes in the first domain, and can communicate with each one of the plurality of processes in the second domain. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110022696 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Managing Electronic Subscriptions - Methods, systems, and computer program products for managing electronic subscriptions are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method includes monitoring, at an electronic subscription client, receipt of one or more subscription messages associated with an electronic subscription. Interaction with the electronic subscription client by a client may be monitored to determine a viewing frequency of the one or more received subscription messages. Further, a prompt with a control configured for unsubscribing the user from receiving a future subscription message associated with the electronic subscription may be presented based on the determined viewing frequency. | 01-27-2011 |
| 20110029647 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUGGESTING AN OPTIMAL COMMUNICATION MODE - A method for communicating information includes ranking, by a central processing server, one or more available communication modes according to a context of a recipient of a communication and one or more rules. The ranked available communication modes may be communicated to a sender of the communication. The context of the recipient corresponds to the availability of the recipient and/or the location of the recipient. The available communication modes correspond to capabilities associated with devices that are in proximity with the recipient. Whether devices are in proximity with the recipient is accomplished by locating the devices via a device location server. The communication modes may be ranked according to a cost and/or appropriateness of the available communication modes. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029648 | COMPUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MANAGING SINGLE NAME SPACE - Proposed are a computer system and a method of configuring a single name space capable of simplifying the management of a GNS and alleviating the burden of an administrator. A management apparatus collects, from each node, management information and an access log of each of the files managed by the relevant node, extracts a user who satisfies a prescribed condition as a key person for each of the nodes based on the collected management information and access log of each of the files, specifies the key person who is common to the plurality of nodes among the extracted key persons, and requests a server to integrate, as a single name space, the plurality of nodes in which the number of common key persons exceeds a predetermined first threshold. The server integrates, as a single name space, the plurality of nodes in which the number of common key persons exceeds a predetermined first threshold in response to the request. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029649 | INTEGRATED VIDEO SERVICE PEER TO PEER NETWORK SYSTEM - An integrated video service peer to peer network system, includes: a media source system, configured to divide video service data into one or more segments and each of the one or more segments into a plurality of blocks, and to generate a media description file based on segment dividing information and media format information, wherein, each of the plurality of blocks is of a self-description type and comprises a block head and a block body, the block body including media data; a media distribution management system, configured to store media distribution information, wherein, the media distribution information represents the information of the storage status of divided video service data segments at a peer source node and the information of the serving capability status of the peer source node; and a plurality of the peer source nodes, configured to store the video service data, and to transmit the video service data to a service requesting node. With the present invention, the range of sharing can be effectively extended, the usage of the client resources can be optimized, while the provider system and the client system are significantly simplified, so the cost of the operation and maintenance are reduced. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029650 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HOST INDEPENDENT PLATFORM DIAGNOSTICS - A management controller in a network device may provide host-independent diagnostics servicing corresponding to a plurality of managed resources in the network devices. The management controller may be integrated into a network controller in the network device. The diagnostics servicing may be based on one or more management protocols, such as the Web Service Management (WS-Management) protocol. The management controller may log diagnostic data and/or alerts corresponding to the managed resources. The management controller may communicate with the managed resource to request and/or receive the diagnostic data and/or alerts, using Platform Level Data Model (PLDM) based interactions for example. The management controller may incorporate diagnostics based management interface for use during diagnostics management servicing, to exchange diagnostics related management messaging with management devices and/or entities. The diagnostics based management interface may be implemented using Common Information Model (CIM) objects. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029651 | DYNAMIC SERVER CONSOLIDATION AND RATIONALIZATION MODELING TOOL - A method and system for providing efficient and flexible techniques for modeling technical and economic benefits of consolidating information technology (IT) systems, hardware, software, network, and other infrastructure are described. The system includes a data processing system configured to receive data from a user. The system also includes an input collection system communicatively coupled to the data processing system, with the input collection system designed to organize, convert, and sort the data to generate baseline server information. In addition, the system includes an optimization system communicatively coupled to the data processing system, with the optimization system designed to generate one or more server consolidation models based on the baseline server information. Further, based on the generated one or more server consolidation models, a recommendation can be generated. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029652 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVATING A BLADE SERVER IN A BLADE SERVER SYSTEM - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for activating a blade server in a blade server system. The method comprises receiving a request for activating the blade server and obtaining a hardware feature of the blade server. The method further comprises determining a virtual machine management program corresponding to the hardware feature of the blade server in accordance with a correspondence relationship between the hardware feature of the blade server and the virtual machine management program and remotely activating the blade server via a management bus by using the determined virtual machine management program. In accordance with the method, a suitable built-in virtual machine management program may be determined according to user requirements, and system security and stability upon blade server activation may be ensured. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029653 | NETMANAGER AND NETMODULE GENERAL UPNP EXTENSIONS FOR OCAP HNEXT - A computer-implemented method for a home network registers an application with a NetManager, and provides a handler to the NetManager to control discovery of desired devices or services for the application. In one aspect of the present invention, the home network is an OpenCable Application Platform home network, and the desired devices or services are Universal Plug and Play devices or services. The method receives an event notification from the NetManager when the NetManager discovers a device or service that is one of the desired devices or services, creates an object instance of NetModule for the device or service, and accesses a standard interface for the device or service through the object instance of NetModule. The method accesses the standard interface by posting an XML document to the device or service using an interface of the object instance of NetModule. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029654 | Service Control Device, Service Control System, and Method - A communication entrepreneur has an application server | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029655 | Apparatus and Method for Controlling Communications to and from Utility Service Points - An apparatus and method control transmission of messages over a fixed bandwidth link from fixed position communication devices to a central controller in a load management system. The messages include information relating to electric power consumption by power consuming devices located at service points that include the communication devices. In one embodiment, the central controller determines an identifier associated with each communication device, a reporting period during which the messages are to be transmitted by the communication devices, and transmission increments within the reporting period. The controller allocates each transmission increment to a respective group of communication devices. The controller then determines a transmission time for a message from a particular communication device based on the identifier for the particular device, a duration of a transmission increment allocated to a group of communication devices that includes the particular device, and a quantity of communication devices in the particular device's group. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029656 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS ENABLING INTEROPERABILITY BETWEEN NETWORK-CENTRIC OPERATION (NCO) ENVIRONMENTS - A system is disclosed for enabling interoperability of different Network-Centric Operation (NCO) environments. A first computer executable module may enable plug-able import proxies and export proxies for respectively importing data from and exporting data to different NCO environments. A second computer executable module may enable plug-able software operable for configuring imported data. An infrastructure may be incorporated that integrates the first and second computer executable modules. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110035480 | Re-Synchronizing Data Between Network Elements And Network Management System Using Partial Node Discovery - An apparatus and method for improving network efficiency for data transfer utilizing partial node discovery a during system recovery are disclosed. Upon retrieving a saved last sequence number associated with a network element (“NE”) from a database in a network management system (“NMS”), a process of the partial node discovery obtains a current last sequence number associated with the NE from the NE. After identifying missing sequence numbers associated with the NE, sequence events associated with the NE in the database are updated in accordance with the missing sequence numbers. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110035481 | System and Method for Navigating and Accessing Resources on Private and/or Public Networks - The application discloses a system and method for navigating and accessing resources on private and public networks. The system allows users of a private network to register labels associated with network resources of any associated private or public network, on a database stored on one or more servers. The database allows for searching of network resources based on labels, thus allowing users to navigate resources not only on their private network, but on associated private or public networks. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110035482 | Method for Disconnecting Multiple Hosts from Network, and Network Management Device - A method for a multi-host system to exit from the network includes receiving a G-MS exit network instruction. The context information relating to the host connected to the G-MS is obtained. A host exit network instruction is sent to the host network management entity according to the ID of the host network management entity. The host is triggered to exit from the network. The obtained host context information includes the ID of the host connected to the G-MS and the ID of the host network management entity. The exit network instruction carries the host ID. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110035483 | IMS SYSTEM, AS APPARATUS AND MGW APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF NOTIFYING CONGESTION RESTRICTION IN IMS SYSTEM - The present invention provides a function of enabling common carriers to easily perform the customization of restriction information and restriction guidance, in which an AS apparatus, upon receipt of a connection start request from a terminal through an MGW apparatus, confirms whether or not a restriction state is in effect, and when no restriction is in effect, performs connection to the terminal, and when restriction is in-effect, acquires a restriction class Key to transmit a signal, to which the aforementioned acquired restriction class Key has been added, to the MGW apparatus; and the MGW apparatus, upon receipt of the signal, acquires a restriction class Key to edit and transmit to the aforementioned terminal, a restriction guidance signal which indicates the restriction content by using the data associated with the restriction class Key. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110035484 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING AND MANAGING A VARIABLE NUMBER OF VISIBLE INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) ADDRESSES - A method, system and device for creating and managing a variable number of visible cyber coordinates, including at least one of means for generating a random or deterministic number; means for generating variable visible cyber coordinates based on the generated number; and means for employing the variable visible cyber coordinates during communications. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110040860 | VALIDATION OF THE CONFIGURATION OF A DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK USING A VIRTUAL NETWORK OPERATIONS CENTER - A virtual network operating center (VNOC) automatically and in real time obtains and validates the configuration of a data communications network, such as a wavelength division multiplexed network. The VNOC acquires network configuration data using SNMP commands and server configuration information from the hardware management console. The VNOC collates this data and validates configuration requirements for working and backup fiber paths, client protocols, data rates, regeneration requirements, and other considerations. Both ends of a network can be automatically provisioned and commissioned from a single location wherein the ends may be separated by 100 kilometers or more. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040861 | Integrated Proximity Routing for Content Distribution - A domain name server includes a processor configured to receive a request from a requester for an edge cache address, identify a first edge cache serving content requests to an anycast address from the requester, and determine a load of first edge cache. The processor is further configured to provide unicast address of an alternate edge cache to requester in response to the request when the load exceeds a threshold or to provide anycast address to requester in response to request when the load is below the threshold. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040862 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND USER APPARATUS, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - To facilitate account information setting, in a communication system including a management apparatus which manages account information to be used to use a service provided by a server apparatus, and a user apparatus which uses the service, the management apparatus selects, based on device classification information acquired from the user apparatus, account information to be provided to the user apparatus from one or more pieces of account information stored in a storage unit, and provides the account information to the user apparatus. The user apparatus sends the device classification information of the user apparatus to the management apparatus, receives, from the management apparatus, the account information selected based on the device classification information, and uses the service provided by the server apparatus. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040863 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NOTIFICATIONS FOR SERVICE EVENTS - The communications method may include opening a communication channel, e.g. a HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) connection, between a service event source and an event management platform, and at the event management platform, generating a request to the service event source, the request including information associated with the communication channel and requested event information related to a plurality of services offered by the service event source for a mobile wireless device associated with a given service user; sending the request to the service event source. The communication channel is maintained open to receive notifications transmitted from the service event source including requested event information related to the plurality of services offered by the service event source and related to the single service user. The notifications are provided to the mobile wireless device associated with the given service user. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040864 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INFERRING SERVICES ON A NETWORK - A method and system are configured to infer one or more virtual private network (VPN) services within a physical network. Topologically relevant network information is received for the physical network with regard to nodes, interfaces, connections, and protocols, and the existence of each virtual private network service is inferred based on the stored network topology information. Network objects are also inferred, including routed paths, label switched paths, Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) tunnels, and Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) tunnels. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040865 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY MANAGING SUB-LAYER INTERFACES - A method of providing network management information about a multiple-layer network communications interface sub-stack to a network management client includes establishing a standardized network management representation by use of an interface manager and a real driver and a pseudo driver, receiving a request from the network management client for network management information about an expected sub-layer interface, and in response to the request obtaining, by the pseudo driver, data maintained by the real driver corresponding to the requested network management information, and returning the data obtained by the pseudo driver to the network management client in satisfaction of the request. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040866 | METHOD OF DATA MANAGEMENT FOR EFFICIENTLY STORING AND RETRIEVING DATA TO RESPOND TO USER ACCESS REQUESTS - A method of data management for efficiently storing and retrieving data in response to user access requests. The method includes receiving a request from at least one client for a title not resident in a storage server, where the title includes a play track having a plurality of chapters. The retrieval from a secondary storage device of play track portions proximate chapter delineation points is initiated, and bandwidth capacity and quality-of-service (QoS) parameters associated with the secondary storage device is determined. In the case of a client request to begin presentation of the title at one of the chapters, streaming of retrieved portions of the play track chapter to the client is initiated, masking latency associated with the secondary storage device is provided, and retrieval of at least unretrieved portions of the play track chapter and subsequent play track portions from the secondary storage device is initiated. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110047255 | MULTIMEDIA PROCESSING CONTROL APPARATUS AND MULTIMEDIA PROCESSING CONTROL METHOD - A multimedia processing control apparatus according to embodiments has a holding section which holds groups of information for management of a plurality of components generated in a first address space, and a plurality of groups of first address information, and also holds a plurality of groups of second address information in a second address space; a control section request issue section which converts, when a processing request is issued, each of the plurality of groups of second address information into the plurality of groups of first address information by referring to the holding section, and issues the processing request; a processing section request issue section which issues from the first address space the processing request; and a component processing section which controls the plurality of components on the basis of the plurality of groups of first address information the processing request. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047256 | PORT CHUNK ALLOCATION IN NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A system and method for providing network and port address translation is provided. A global IP address and a block (chunk) of ports are allocated for each mobile subscriber (MS) on first data connection. Subsequent data connections from the same MS are assigned the same IP address and a new port from this block. The mapping information is communicated, processed, and stored once for the complete block, instead of for every new data connection. This process reduces processing, communication, and storage requirements. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047257 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INSTALLING SMART CARD APPLET - Disclosed are a system and a method for installing a smart card applet. A response message for an OTA message received from an external remote server is transmitted to form a communication channel based on HTTP (hyper text transfer protocol) between a smart card and the remote server. The applet is installed based on applet installation information received through the communication channel. A large scale applet is installed in a card within a short period of time. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047258 | System and Method for Device Management - Embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method of device management. In one embodiment of the present invention, a management device can receive device management data from devices on a network in a variety of device management protocols and map the device management data to a protocol used by a device management client. Because the management device can provide device management data in a format usable by the device management client, regardless of which protocol was originally used to generate the device management data, the device management client can turn to the management device to gather all or a portion the device management data from heterogeneous devices on a network. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047259 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - When the alternate unit detects the failure of the area unit, the alternate unit obtains the program corresponding to the program type of the area unit having the failure. The alternate unit sets the IP address of the area unit, and obtains the setting information from the management unit belonging to the area same as the area including the area unit having the failure. Then, the alternate unit collects the data from the units which previously communicate with the area unit having a failure and previously communicating with the area unit. The alternate unit performs the initialization and starts the management of the unit. Consequently, it is possible to continuously manage the sub unit being previously managed by the main unit, now having a failure, without stopping the management of the sub unit, even if the main unit is failed. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047260 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR MANAGING A NETWORK - The present invention proposes a method of managing a network comprising a set of devices for transmitting a traffic stream using network resources. Each device of the set of devices is individually associated with an expiration time. The expiration time defines a maximum interval of sending a message by a given device among the set of devices for indicating that the given device is connected with the network. The method comprises a step of determining, based on the expiration times of said set of devices, a transmission lease time defining duration of using said network resources. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110055364 | AUTOMATIC NETWORK DISCOVERY FOR HOST CONFIGURATIONS - Techniques for automatic network discovery for host configurations are described herein. A management server may receive a first message from a first host entering a network, where the first message includes a network identifier (ID) identifying a logical network coupled to a network interface card (NIC) of the first host. In response to the first message, the management server may automatically configure the NIC of the first host using one or more network configuration parameters of a second host based on the first message, where the second host has been coupled to the logical network prior to the first host. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055365 | Methods and Apparatus for Adaptively Scheduling a Finger Stabilization Algorithm - Methods and apparatus for adaptively scheduling a finger stabilization algorithm. A method is provided that includes comparing first and second finger determinations associated with a node, increasing a time interval between executions of a finger stabilization algorithm if differences between the finger determinations satisfy a first criteria, and decreasing the time interval between executions of the finger stabilization algorithm if differences between the finger determinations satisfy a second criteria. An apparatus is provided that includes a processor configured to compare first and second finger determinations associated with a node, and a timer coupled to the processor and configured to increase a time interval between executions of a finger stabilization algorithm if differences between the finger determinations satisfy a first criteria, and decrease the time interval between executions of the finger stabilization algorithm if the differences between the finger determinations satisfy a second criteria. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055366 | Authentication system, multifunctional peripheral and authentication server - The multi-functional peripheral judges whether or not the last display screen at the time of logout is usable as the initial display screen at the time of next login. Then, when the last display screen at the time of logout is not usable as the initial display screen at the time of next login, not information to specify the last display screen at the time of logout but a predetermined screen information is set to be transmitted to an authentication server. The authentication server manages information to specify the last display screen given from a multi-functional peripheral, and notifies the multi-functional peripheral of the last display screen information of the user to display the screen on the multi-functional peripheral when a user logs in the multi-functional peripheral next time. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055367 | SERIAL PORT FORWARDING OVER SECURE SHELL FOR SECURE REMOTE MANAGEMENT OF NETWORKED DEVICES - A system and method for the management of one or more wide area or local area network connected devices by a collocated managing device. The managing device uses serial port forwarding over a secure connection, such as a secure shell connection, to allow a centrally located administrative user to control the managed device. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055368 | Connection Pool Use of Runtime Load Balancing Service Performance Advisories - Runtime connection load balancing of work across connections to a clustered computing system involves the routing of requests for a service, based on the current operational performance of each of the instances that offer the service. A connection is selected from an identified connection pool, to connect to an instance that provides the service for routing a work request. The operational performance of the instances may be represented by performance information that characterizes the response time and/or the throughput of the service that is provided by a particular instance on a respective node of the system, and is relative to other instances that offer the same service. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110060816 | PARAMETER MANAGEMENT IN A PERSONAL DISTRIBUTED NETWORK - A method for dynamically managing network configuration and wireless subscription within a personal distributed network is described. The method comprises one or more client devices providing a device manager with necessary parameters at registration, and updating them on a need basis; the device manager storing the received parameters in memory; and one or more client devices communicating to device manager and passing network configuration and wireless subscription information. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110060817 | APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY REBOOTING VoIP COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - An apparatus is provided for remotely rebooting Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication devices. In general, the apparatus remotely selects VoIP communication devices connected to a network, reboots the selected devices, and evaluates the status of each device. A processor allows a user to select VoIP communication devices connected to the network and receives inputs pertaining to the reboot operation, including a time input and search criteria. The processor communicates with the designated VoIP communication devices over a packet-switching network to instruct the devices to reboot and monitors each device. In this way, multiple VoIP communication devices may be rebooted from a remote location, and problems or issues that arise during the reboot process may be identified and addressed. An associated method and computer program product are also provided for remotely rebooting VoIP communication devices. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110060818 | Method and Apparatus for Packet Analysis in a Network - A method and system for monitoring traffic in a data communication network and for extracting useful statistics and information is disclosed. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110060819 | Domain Isolation Through Virtual Network Machines - A method and device for communicating information resources between subscriber end stations and nodes belonging to different network domains is described. The device instantiates different virtual network machines for different network domains using separate independently administrable network databases. Each of the administrable chores of the separate independently administrable network databases includes the assignment of access control and the configuration of the policies for those network databases. The policies include traffic filtering policies to indicate what kind of information payloads can be carried, traffic and route filtering policies to indicate what paths through the network will be used for each payload carried. Each of the network domains includes one of the different virtual network machines and each of the different network domains is virtually isolated from other network domains. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110060820 | Domain Isolation Through Virtual Network Machines - A method and device for communicating information resources between subscriber end stations and nodes belonging to different network domains is described. The device instantiates different virtual network machines for different network domains using separate independently administrable network databases. Each of the administrable chores of the separate independently administrable network databases includes the assignment of access control and the configuration of the policies for those network databases. The policies include traffic filtering policies to indicate what kind of information payloads can be carried, traffic and route filtering policies to indicate what paths through the network will be used for each payload carried. Each of the network domains includes one of the different virtual network machines and each of the different network domains is virtually isolated from other network domains. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110066711 | MANAGEMENT OF SHARED CLIENT DEVICE AND DEVICE MANAGER - A method of classifying a client device and a device manager to allow for end users to share devices is described. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066712 | USER-DEFINED SERVICES IN A PERSONAL DISTRIBUTED NETWORK - A method of creating and managing user-defined services in a personal distributed network is described. The method comprises selecting one or more specific device elements or device element types to perform specific actions in a pre-determined sequence based on one or more triggers causing execution of one or more specific actions. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066713 | TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A terminal device includes a first communication portion that performs tunneling communication with another terminal device via a server adapted to realize tunneling communication between the terminal device and the other terminal device by encapsulating and decapsulating packets, an identification portion that identifies, by communication with a management server, type information of at least one of a NAT device that controls an internal network to which the terminal device is connected and another NAT device that controls another internal network to which the other terminal device is connected, a selection portion that selects a start-up procedure to start peer to peer communication based on the type information, a switching portion that performs communication based on the start-up procedure, starts the P2P communication, and then switches from the tunneling communication to the P2P communication by terminating the tunneling communication, and a second communication portion that performs the P2P communication after switching. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066714 | Generating A Subgraph Of Key Entities In A Network And Categorizing The Subgraph Entities Into Different Types Using Social Network Analysis - A method, system and computer-program product for generating a subgraph of key entities in a network and organizing entities in the subgraph are disclosed. The technique uses social network analysis centrality metrics to identify key entities in a network. The technique also uses social network analysis centrality metrics to categorize key entities into different types. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066715 | Techniques for Feed-Based Automatic Transmission of Content to a Mobile Terminal - For improving feed-based automatic distribution of content to a mobile terminal via a mobile network, a network component ( | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066716 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DIRECTION OF COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC - An internet traffic redirection architecture is disclosed that allows for directing of various traffic to specified sites. The system and method allow a controller, such as an ISP, to benefit from unresolved IP Address requests and keyword and hotword queries by capturing this traffic and directing it to participating partners who provide content relevant and/or geographically relevant results. The system and method can decrease lost traffic, irrelevant keyword and hotword search results, and irrelevant redirection by web browsers resident on user's personal computers. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110072122 | Methods for improved server redundancy in dynamic networks - In one embodiment, a server is assigned a candidate secondary server role such that the dynamic network employs a “make-before-break” redundancy where redundant nodes proactively synchronize replicated data and state information with a standby secondary server prior to releasing the responsibilities of active primary and/or secondary server(s). The “make-before-break” redundancy ensures relatively high availability of dynamic networks and realized services. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110072123 | AUTO-METER SYSTEM WITH CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK BUS - An auto-meter system includes a CAN-Bus for transmitting a CAN-Bus signal, and a first CAN module coupled to the CAN-Bus. The first CAN module is for receiving the CAN-Bus signal transmitted from the CAN-Bus and for transforming the CAN-Bus signal to a message signal. The auto-meter system further includes a display and a processor coupled to the CAN module and the display. The processor is for receiving the message signal and for controlling the display to show information corresponding to the message signal. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110072124 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DIRECTION OF COMMUNICATION TRAFFIC - An Internet traffic redirection architecture is disclosed that allows for directing of trash traffic to specified sites. The system or method allows a controller, such as an ISP, to benefit from mistyped Internet addresses so that participating partners of the ISP are presented to the customer when the requests a web site that is not found or does not exist. The system decreases lost traffic by means of capturing unresolved “trash” traffic on the Internet and redirecting said traffic to a search engine partner and/or other partners. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110072125 | EMPLOYING MATCHING OF EVENT CHARACTERISTICS TO SUGGEST ANOTHER CHARACTERISTIC OF AN EVENT - A device, system, and method are directed towards determining a suggested characteristic for an event. At least two events are determined. In one embodiment, at least one characteristic is determined for one of the event. A plurality of other characteristics is determined for the other event. The characteristics of the two events may be determined implicitly from communications during the events or from user input. Based on a relationship between the determined characteristics, the suggested characteristic for the event is then determined. In one embodiment, the relationship is defined as a match of characteristics. The event may then be modified based on the suggested characteristic. For example, a suggested member may be invited to join the event, or the event's time, location, or name may be changed. If the other event is current or pending, the event and the other event may be combined. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110078296 | Systems and methods for improved multisite management and reporting of converged communication systems and computer systems - The present invention discloses improved systems and methods for multisite management of computer server systems and in particular converged communication systems based on a decentralized architecture. Certain and various aspects relating to atomic error handling, transaction-based authentication/security, intelligent bandwidth management, decoupled data/configuration messaging, improved scalability, auto-detection functions, business metrics, etc., also are disclosed. A console is disclosed that communicates with each of a plurality of converged communications systems, e.g., preferably through the use of sockets. The actual traffic load is decentralized among the computer server systems, as each one uses direct connections (e.g., via an enhanced file transfer protocol) to access update/configuration data as needed. In addition, an improved communication protocol is disclosed that is optimized for the multisite management architecture of the present invention. An improved set of graphical user interface (GUI) features are described that improve the efficiency of the management of multiple systems. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078297 | JOB PROCESSING SYSTEM, METHOD AND PROGRAM - A job processing system has first to third servers. The first server has a job generation program for generating jobs as requested. The second server has a storage device for storing attribute information on and a file for use in processing each job generated by the first server, a management table for managing job management information on each job by assigning a unique ID to each job, and a queue control program for registering job management information in the management table, referring to the management table, and registering the file for and attribute information on each job in the storage device. The third server has one or more job processing programs for processing jobs acquired from the second server, batch control program for acquiring jobs from the second server and issuing responses concerning the processed jobs, and a storage device for storing attribute information on and a file for each job acquired. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078298 | DATA COLLECTION APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF - A data collection apparatus includes an information storing unit which stores application information collected from a server providing a service by running an application and includes detail information indicating a detail of the application, an information collecting unit which collects the application information from the server, an information identifying unit which identifies application information in which an abnormality has occurred and application information, affected by the abnormality, a first comparing unit which compares, as to the application information identified by the information identifying unit, all application information including the detail information and all application information including the detail information collected in the previous point, and extracts application information different from the application information collected in a previous point, and an information sending unit which sends the application information, extracted by the first comparing unit, to a data management apparatus which manages the application information. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078299 | Systems and Methods for Reconfiguring a Network Adapter in Sleep Mode - A converged network adapter in sleep mode can allow a management entity to access and alter configuration of the network adapter over the network. Configuration data such as configuration parameters, firmware, and other data related to the network adapter can be stored in a memory, which can be coupled to a portion of the adapter that receives power during sleep mode. The management entity can send configuration messages to the adapter, which messages can include commands or instructions to read or write contents of the memory. The messages can include values of the configuration parameters to be altered, firmware code, etc. The management entity can also send configuration messages to a baseboard management controller (BMC) coupled to the adapter for message validation. The adapter and the BMC can send results of memory operations back to the management entity in response messages. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110082922 | UPnP CONTROL POINT AND UPnP DEVICE BASED ON THE UPnP NETWORK AND CONNECTING METHOD USING THE SAME - Disclosed herein are a UPnP control point and a UPnP device based on the UPnP network and a connecting method using the same, in which a service connection is performed. The service connection is restrictedly performed using a configuration file defined to allow or deny a connection with a specific device on the UPnP network, so that only devices specified by a user can be connected. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110082923 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS HAVING A PLURALITY OF NETWORK INTERFACES, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus having a plurality of network interfaces and capable of properly returning MIB information requested by an external apparatus, even when a network interface actually in communication with the external apparatus and a network interface designated by the external apparatus are different. If it is determined that a value of interface information contained in a MIB information retrieval request received by a communication unit from an external apparatus is a predetermined value and a first network interface has received the request, information corresponding to the first network interface is created from the MIB information and returned to the external apparatus. If it is determined that the value is the predetermined value and that a second network interface has received the request, information corresponding to the second network interface is created from the MIB information and returned to the external apparatus. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110082924 | MANAGING NETWORK TRAFFIC BY EDITING A MANIFEST FILE - A technique for controlling the streaming of content through a network is disclosed. In an embodiment, the technique involves editing the manifest file that is used to implement an HTTP adaptive bit rate streaming protocol. For example, a manifest file is received at an intermediate network device in response to a request from a client for a content element, the manifest file is then edited at the intermediate network device, and then the edited manifest file is sent to the client. In an embodiment, editing the manifest file involves deleting and/or inserting a URI within the manifest file. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110082925 | Bandwidth Reservation for Authenticated Applications - Methods, systems, devices, and software are disclosed for providing application levels of service over a network. Embodiments of the invention maintain a list of registered applications (or application providers) that have registered with a network resources provider. Customers of the network resources provider may authenticate some or all of the registered applications, indicating a desire to allow traffic relating to those applications over their access networks. Customers may further set application levels of service with respect to those authenticated applications. Certain embodiments may manage network traffic to accord with the application levels of service. | 04-07-2011 |
| 20110087763 | MAINTENANCE METHODS, DEVICES AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A maintenance method includes a maintenance module | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110087764 | ENGINE FOR GENERATING AND MANAGING COMMUNICATIONS CONCERNING ON-LINE COLLABORATION AMONG A PLURALITY OF USERS IN CONSIDERATION WITH A COMPUTERIZED APPLICATION - System for generating and managing communication accomplished by means of graphical layers is provided. The graphical layers may comprise graphical features, text pictures and computerized objects such as media player for displaying a selected film, The system enables a user to call one or more of her or his colleagues to on-line collaborate in consideration with a selected content. The system provides a user for generating a new graphical layer, adding or deleting user generated content (UGC) into, or off a graphical layer generated by another user. The system stores completed graphical layers in a database. The system successively combines graphical layers associated to the same selected content into a track, which is further stored in the database. The system provides a user for tracking a selected user who so permitted while selected user is wondering and searching the World Wide Web. The system is provides the tracking user with graphical layers generated by the wondering user while he is observing a URL. Thereby the system generates a “virtual blog”. Namely the tracking user may observe the UGC introduced by the wondering user overlaid across the content which triggered the wondering user to introduce this very UGC. The system automatically searches the database for content related to the selected content thereby providing the user who selected the content for receiving a picture of what the users other than her or his collaborating colleagues think about the content that he has selected. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110093575 | LOCAL EXTERNALLY ACCESSIBLE MANAGED VIRTUAL NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER - An information handling system (IHS) includes a processing system operating as a controller. A network interface controller is coupled to the processing system and receives communications from a remote administrator via a management network. An external virtual device link is coupled to the processing system. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093576 | System and Method for Storage Discovery in a Storage Area Network - A storage area network (SAN) includes a management server, a storage device, and a management station coupled to a fabric. The management server implements device domains on the SAN. The storage device instructs the management server to add new device domains on the SAN. The management station defines the new device domains to include the storage device and an initiator coupled to the fabric, and directs the storage device to instruct the management server to add the new device domains. A method includes coupling a management server to a SAN fabric, implementing device domains in the management server, defining a new device domain that includes a storage device and an initiator coupled to the SAN, and coupling a storage device to the SAN fabric, the storage device being operable to instruct the management server to add the new device domain. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093577 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING USER PREFERENCE PROFILES IN A NETWORK - A method includes creating a plurality of user preference profiles. Each user preference profile includes at least one of a profile format without active user preference profile indication, a profile format including an active user preference profile indication, and a profile format specific to each device of a user. The plurality of user preference profiles are stored in a shared server. One or more user preference profiles corresponding to a plurality of devices are activated. The one or more user preference profiles are provided to an application server. The application server implements preferences included in corresponding user preference profile. A system includes a plurality of devices of the user, a plurality of clients corresponding to the plurality of devices, an application server corresponding to the plurality of clients, and a shared server for storing a plurality of user preference profiles. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093578 | Data update for website users based on preset conditions - Updating user data on a website includes: authenticating a user who is accessing the website via a client; determining whether an operation behavior of the user satisfies a first preset condition; in the event that the first preset condition is satisfied, obtaining user identification information, including a user identifier (ID); determining whether a stored user property that corresponds to the user ID satisfies a second preset condition; and in the event that the second preset condition is satisfied, updating designated service related data of the user. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093579 | APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING NETWORK CONFIGURATION - When a failure occurs in a network or in a network apparatus, a connection state of the network is changed. There is provided a network configuration estimating apparatus for knowing logical route information quickly after a failure occurrence in accordance with information collected from network apparatuses, although it is conventionally difficult to know this information quickly. The network configuration estimating apparatus executes: a process of generating network configuration information such as physical and logical topologies from information collected in advance; a process of monitoring a network failure; a process of calculating a network configuration to be estimated after a network failure occurrence, from the network configuration information generated in advance and network failure information; a process of visually displaying the calculated network configuration; and a process of managing history of calculated network configurations. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093580 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, FUNCTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus includes a function management unit, a function-information acquisition unit, and a function-presenting unit. The function management unit manages an application having one or more functions and being capable of directly invoking any of the functions, where the management of the application is performed on a basis of the function. The function-information acquisition unit acquires information about functions relative to a running function of another application on a basis of the function being managed by the function management unit. The function-presenting unit that presents the information about functions acquired by the function-information acquisition unit. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093581 | Coordinated Computer Network - A method for securely obtaining data records over a coordinated computer network having a number of network members, each of which has an internal records database and a node, and a network process computer with an activity database. In a typical transaction, a target node requests an activity record of a subject. If the requested activity record resides on an internal records database belonging to another network member, an activity database is consulted. This is a central store of subject activity indicators that include the location of the activity records. An originator node is the one found to have access to the required activity record. A temporary, secure, transport link established between the target node and the originator node, managed by the network process computer, serves to transfer a copy of the subject's activity record to the target node. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093582 | TRANSPARENT RESOURCE ADMINISTRATION USING A READ-ONLY DOMAIN CONTROLLER - A domain controller hierarchy in accordance with implementations of the present invention involves one or more local domain controllers, such as one or more read-only local domain controllers in communication with one or more writable hub domain controllers. The local domain controllers include a resource manager, such as a Security Account Manager (“SAM”), that manages resources and/or other accounts information received from the writable hub domain controller. When a local user attempts to change the resource at the local domain controller, however, the resource manager chains the request, along with any appropriate identifiers for the request, to the writable hub domain controller, where the request is processed. If appropriate, the hub domain controller sends a response that the resource has been updated as requested and also sends a copy of the updated resource to be cached at the local domain controller, | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110099258 | Dynamic Control of Autonomic Management of a Data Center - A method, system, and article for autonomizing autonomic management of a data center, with the data center having at least one computer system and an associated component. Data is collected from the data center and used as input to identify a data center policy. A set of capabilities of elements of the data center are detected and cataloged based upon the collected data. At least one policy is dynamically selected from at least one set of master policies in a policy directory with the selected policy to support the cataloged capabilities of the data center, and to dynamically control selective application and to adapt parameters for quality of service. The selected policy is applied to manage the data center. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110099259 | Managing TCP anycast requests - Managing TCP anycast requests at content delivery network nodes is disclosed. In some embodiments, managing traffic includes receiving a request at a first node of a content delivery network, determining at the first node that the request should be serviced by a second node of the content delivery network, and redirecting the request to the second node, wherein the first node and the second node of the content delivery network comprise endpoints for serving content and wherein the content delivery network is at least in part an anycast network. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110099260 | Monitoring-target-apparatus management system, management server, and monitoring-target-apparatus management method - If both of LUN security information on storage apparatuses and configuration information on an iSNS server are acquirable, a management server makes reference to configuration situation of the LUN security acquired from a monitoring-target storage apparatus, thereby acquiring iSCSI initiator names which are permitted to access the storage apparatus. Moreover, the management server acquires, from the iSNS server, IP address of an iSCSI initiator name which does not exist on a monitoring-target host out of the iSCSI initiator names, then adding the IP address into monitoring-target nodes. Meanwhile, when an access from the management server to a monitoring-target node becomes impossible for a certain constant time-period due to a reason such that the monitoring-target node has been excluded from the network, the management server is capable of excluding the monitoring-target node from the monitoring targets on a GUI. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110099261 | HOST-LEVEL POLICIES FOR GLOBAL SERVER LOAD BALANCING - In a network, a user can configure host-level policies usable for load balancing traffic to servers of a domain. A global server load balancing (GSLB) switch provides load balancing to the servers, and is configured with the GSLB host-level policies. Users can define a host-level policy (alternatively or additionally to a globally applied GSLB policy) and apply the host-level policy to hosts in domains configured on the GSLB switch. Thus, the user can enable different policies for different hosts. This allows the user to have the flexibility to control metrics used for selection of a best address for querying clients, as well as the metric order and additional parameters used in the GSLB process, at the host level. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110099262 | DISTRIBUTED NETWORK CONSTRUCTION METHOD, SYSTEM AND TASK PROCESSING METHOD - A distributed network construction method includes: determining a domain that covers a requesting node according to an address of the requesting node which requests to join a distributed network, where the domain has a domain identifier (ID); generating a peer ID of the requesting node according to the number of peers of the domain; concatenating the domain ID with the peer ID to form the node ID of the requesting node; and sending the node ID to the requesting node, where the requesting node obtains information about a neighboring node according to the obtained node ID to join the distributed network. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110106926 | System and method for implementing a cloud workflow - System and method for implementing a workflow of a first domain, wherein the workflow is implemented as a series of steps to accomplish a workload and wherein at least one of the steps utilizes a process, are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises establishing a mutual trust relationship between the first domain and a second domain; wherein one of the steps is authored by the second domain, the method further comprising associating with the step authored by the second domain a digital attestation for enabling the first domain to verify authorship and non-modification thereof. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106927 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING CLOUD MITIGATION AND OPERATIONS CONTROLLERS - System and method for implementing cloud mitigation and operations controllers are described. One embodiment is a system for controlling operation of a cloud computing environment, wherein the system comprises a repository for storing data regarding characteristics of the cloud computing environment, wherein the stored data includes policy notations designating compliance or noncompliance of the data with policy; an analyst module for analyzing the stored data in combination with external report information regarding the cloud computing environment and for providing results of the analysis; and a controller for evaluating the analysis results and issuing instructions for controlling operation of the cloud computing environment based on the evaluating. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106928 | PROCESSING STATE MANAGEMENT DEVICE, PROCESSING STATE MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A processing state management apparatus holds state information indicating the state of transaction processing in a distribution server as in progress after the processing state management apparatus connected to the distribution server requests the transaction processing to the distribution server which executes the transaction processing to register or delete contents to be distributed until the processing state management apparatus receives the notification of completion of the transaction processing from the distribution server. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106929 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A VIRTUALIZATION SOLUTION AND MANAGEMENT SERVER AND METHOD FOR MANAGING THE SAME - Disclosed is a system for managing a virtualization solution capable of controlling various kinds of virtualization solutions provided in Xen, Citrix, Vmware, etc., and easily allocating and releasing user management devices and user peripheral devices using virtualization solutions to a user's virtual machine by providing a standardized virtualization solution management system and a management server and a method for managing the same. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106930 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING A NETWORK IN A WIRELESS TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for quickly searching for an accessible network in a wireless terminal. A wireless terminal registers information about a current location and information used to access a network in an access history table, when it succeeds in accessing the network. Thereafter, when accessing a network, the wireless terminal attempts to access a network that it previously accessed, using information about a current location and the access history table. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106931 | Wireless internet gateway limiting message distribution - A wireless Internet gateway bridges wireless devices to the Internet, e.g., via a short message service center (SMSC). The gateway provides a portal to SMPP, HTTP, TNPP, or other protocol messages using Java Remote Method Invocation (RMI) techniques. Application servers insert RMI objects containing messages in a message queue handler of the gateway. The RMI objects are queued and passed either directly to a destination delivery handler (e.g., SMPP, SMTP, HTTP or TNPP protocol handler), or passed through a generic destination interface. An SMTP handler provides direct communication of SMTP protocol messages (i.e., email) to the message queue. An SMPP link proxy module provides direct access between a local application server and the destination delivery handler. The messages are packaged into relevant messages of the particular destination protocol (e.g., SMPP), and transmitted to the relevant network element (e.g., to an SMSC). | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106932 | Network Management System - A telecommunications network for providing broadband access comprising a network management node arranged to manage a plurality of network nodes forming part of the network, the network management node adapted to send, receive and process management protocol messages, the network nodes including a head node that is connected to each of a plurality of peer nodes, the head node and the peer nodes each including a management module, the management modules being configured such that the peer nodes are grouped into a hierarchical group and wherein the management module of the head node is adapted to forward a management protocol message to a first peer node of the peer nodes and wherein the management modules of the peer nodes are adapted to forward the management protocol message to each peer node within the group. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106933 | POLICY CONTROL WITH PREDEFINED RULES - The present invention relates to a method for policy control in an infrastructure network. The network comprises a Policy Enforcement Function, PEF, an Access Function, AF, and a Policy Control Function, PCF, wherein the PEF comprises at least one pre-defined Policy and Charge Control, PCC, rule. The method comprises the steps of: —the PCF determines | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110106934 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING FLOW OF MANAGEMENT TASKS TO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DATABASES - A management task data storage capability is provided for facilitating storage of management task data within a database of a management system, such as a network management system that is managing network elements of a telecommunication network. In one embodiment, the management task data storage capability controls storage of management tasks within a database of a management system based on respective priority levels associated with groups of network devices from which the management tasks are received. In this manner, the management task data storage capability ensures that higher priority network devices are provided an appropriately larger amount of management system resources than lower priority network devices, thereby enabling an appropriately larger amount of management task data storage operations to be performed for higher priority network devices than for lower priority network devices and enabling the use of database resources, for handling management tasks of network devices, to be as effective as possible in view of the priorities of the network. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110113129 | METHOD, DEVICE, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND SYSTEM FOR REPRESENTING A PARTITION OF N W-BIT INTERVALS ASSOCIATED TO D-BIT DATA IN A DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for routing in a data communications network, said method comprising the steps of: providing in a memory ( | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110113130 | Address Sharing Network - Network time techniques. An ip address can be assigned that is only valid for a specified time, so that the same IP address can be used for multiple different units, but each IP address is valid only for certain time periods. Another technique describes using the network to continually provide a time indication. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110113131 | Method of Load Balance Based on BS Architecture - The invention provides a method of loading balance that is based on BS structure, it includes the following steps: using a 4-layers switch to distribute the application request for the proxy server; using the so-called proxy server to distribute application request for application server; and establishing the corresponding WEBLOGIC clusters in accordance with each application request. This invention provides method of loading balance that is based on BS structure that is rationally configure the connection between 4-layers switch and the proxy layer of proxy server; at the same time, maintains the loading balance of the application server and eliminates the single-spot fault by utilizing the advantages of the WEBLOGIC clusters server communication and the back-up synchronization of the users' calling back. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110113132 | Method and Arrangement in a Communication Network System - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement in a communication system in which a network management architecture comprises modules representing a virtual reality of network nodes ( | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110113133 | SHARING MEDIA OBJECTS IN A NETWORK - A method, computer readable medium, user component, and system for sharing media object in a network environment are disclosed. A network manager may determine a similarity metric between users of the environment, between media objects, and/or between a user and media objects. Based upon the similarity metric, the network manager may share media objects with another user if the similarity metric exceeds a pre-determined value or is more similar than other retrieved media objects. A user component may also provide a network map manager to display a network map, and may provide a tailored view manager to display a web log associated with at least one of the user icons displayed in the network map. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110119361 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING REDACTED ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS USING CALLBACK TRIGGERS - Systems and methods for managing redacted electronic documents using callback triggers are provided. In one embodiment, a user device obtains a redacted version of an electronic document, which is referred to herein as a redacted electronic document, and a callback trigger associated with a redacted portion of the redacted electronic document. While a user at the user device is consuming, or reading, the electronic document, a triggering event for the callback trigger is detected. In response to detecting the triggering event, a callback action defined by the callback trigger is performed in order for the user to gain access to the redacted portion of the redacted electronic document. Once the user of the user device has acquired rights to access the redacted portion of the redacted electronic document, the user is enabled to access the redacted portion of the redacted electronic document. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119362 | EVENT ACQUISITION CONTROL METHOD, ACQUISITION APPARATUS THAT ACQUIRES EVENT, AND PROCESSING APPARATUS THAT NOTIFIES EVENT - A method for controlling acquisition of an occurred event that occurs in a network system due to the network system executing processing as requested by a request apparatus configured to request execution of the processing via a network, wherein the network system notifies an acquisition apparatus via the network about the occurred event, and wherein the acquisition apparatus is configured to acquire the occurred event, includes determining whether the request apparatus is in process of inputting a request to execute the processing, and setting, if it is determined that the request apparatus is in process of inputting the request to execute the processing, a set interval for the acquisition apparatus to acquire the occurred event, wherein the set interval is shorter than an interval that is set if it is determined that the request apparatus is not in process of inputting the request to execute the processing. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119363 | METHOD FOR NOTIFYING AN APPLICATION SERVER OF CHANGES IN DATA STORED AT A HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER - In one aspect, a method for notifying an Application Server AS of changes in data stored at a Home Subscriber Server HSS is provided, said method comprising, in an embodiment, a step of:
| 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119364 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CLOUD COMPUTING SERVICES FOR USE WITH CLIENT DEVICES HAVING MEMORY CARDS - A system, method and computer program product for cloud computing, including a cloud server including a cloud link module or program and coupled to a communications network; a client device including a device link module or program and coupled to the cloud server via the communications network; and a memory card including a card link module or program and coupled to the client device. The cloud link, client link, and card link modules or programs are configured to allocate processing of content between the cloud server, client device and memory card, such that communications bandwidth usage between the cloud server and the client device are minimized during content delivery. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119365 | MANAGING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICING CONTENTS PROVIDED BY CONTENT PROVIDER - A managing method and an apparatus for servicing contents provided by contents provider wherein the managing apparatus according to the present invention comprises: a contents provider management module for generating an account of a contents provider based on information of the contents provider transmitted from the contents providing apparatus; a contents management module for managing a contents connection point for connecting to the contents provided from the contents providing apparatus and for managing information relative to the contents; and a menu management module for registering menus including a menu connected to the contents connection point and for managing a connection authority to a name of the menu and the menu, such that a collective management on the contents providers is possible and the contents providers can conveniently provide contents services to subscribers. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119366 | GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE AND METHOD FOR CUSTOMER CENTRIC NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A graphical user interface and method for customer centric network management. The graphical user interface includes a first view showing text input by a user indicative of customer identification data corresponding to a customer in a network. This data is received by a server connected to the user. The server retrieves stored information corresponding to the customer identification data from a database and provides the stored information and actual circuit path information corresponding to a customer service based on the stored information to the graphical user interface. A second view of the graphical user interface shows the stored information, and a third view shows a graphical representation of a customer path corresponding to the actual circuit path information. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119367 | Methods and Apparatus for Randomization of Periodic Behavior in Communication Network - A technique for use in a client, wherein the client supports a state-based signaling protocol (e.g., Session Initiation Protocol or SIP), includes initiating a given session state between the client and a server that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and refreshing the given session state in a randomized manner. Further, a technique for use in a server, wherein the server supports a state-based signaling protocol (again, e.g., SIP), includes randomly assigning an expiration time duration for a given session state between the server and a client that also supports the state-based signaling protocol, and reporting the randomly assigned expiration time for the given session state to the client. By randomizing various behaviors of the client, the server, or both, bursty traffic in the communication network is reduced or eliminated. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119368 | HOME GATEWAY POLICY CONTROLLING DEVICE, SYSTEM AND IMPLEMENTING METHOD THEREOF - An apparatus for implementing policy control for home gateway comprises a Co-located Policy Decision Function Entity (PD-FE) for receiving the QoS policy issued by the PD-FE at network side and sending the QoS policy to the home gateway or issuing the QoS policy configured thereon to the home gateway. A method for implementing the policy control for home gateway, the method comprises: the Co-located PD-FE receiving the QoS policy issued by the PD-FE at network side or being configured with the QoS policy; and the Co-located PD-FE issuing the QoS policy to home gateways. With the present invention, the Resource and Admission Control Function (RACF) avoids controlling the home gateway directly or sending the policy to the home gateways in the case that there are a lot of home gateways and all the home gateways are scattered at the edge of the network. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110125886 | System and method for object abstraction and logging - A system and method of communicating with a plurality of different types of devices. A device driver is defined for each type of device. The device driver creates and maintains a set of channels for each device; each channel represents a property of the device. Newly acquired data received from one of the devices is received at the device driver and published to the channel associated with the data. Publishing the newly acquired data to the channel associated with the data includes storing the newly acquired data in a channel database with a time stamp corresponding to the time the data was received. Control information for one of the devices is received at the device driver and associated with one of the channels. The control information is passed to the device being controlled. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125887 | MANAGING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NODES IN A VIRTUAL NETWORK - A method for managing communication between nodes in a virtual network is provided. A first computing system utilizes first information to forward first data to the second computing system in a physical network. If the first information is incorrect, the second computing system forwards an unlearning request to the first computing system, and the first computing system updates or deletes the first information. If the first information is not available, the first computing system forwards the first data to a group of computing systems in the physical network by way of a multicast service. Upon receiving the first data, the second computing system or a third computing system in the physical network forwards a learning request to the first computing system, and the first computing system utilizes the learning request to generate the first information. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125888 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO USE SERVICE CONTINUOUSLY BY USING HETEROGENEOUS TERMINALS - This invention provides a system and method to use continuously the same Internet services using different digital terminals even though user moves to another places. A system for providing Internet service using heterogeneous digital terminals includes a terminal registration/unregistration unit for registering and unregistering information on the digital terminals in and from an Internet service provider (ISP) server, a service management protocol unit for requesting the service from the ISP server, a terminal selection/change unit for selecting one of the registered digital terminals to use the service and reporting the selection to the ISP server, a content transmission/reception unit for receiving content service corresponding to the service request from the ISP server via the selected digital terminal, and a continuous-service preparation unit for preparing use of the service using a changed digital terminal. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125889 | Method and apparatus for web based storage on-demand - The distributed virtual SAN infrastructure provides a plurality of host systems with a scalable dynamically expandable distributed virtual storage pool, which includes a virtual storage automatic construct protocol. The distributed virtual SAN infrastructure includes one or more SAN units including IP SAN unit and Fiber Channel SAN unit, the management console, the distributing control management station and the network infrastructure, wherein the network infrastructure provides the communication links between all systems in this distributed virtual SAN. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125890 | VOLUME SELECTION METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - In a storage management system in which a storage apparatus is connected via a network to a volume allocation management server having a performance requirement analysis unit, a volume allocation unit, and a volume performance determining unit, the performance requirements of a business application using volume-allocating data and the performance characteristics of a volume serving as a data storage destination are determined, and on the basis of the resulting information, a volume which satisfies the performance requirements is selected as the data storage destination. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125891 | REMOTE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A remote management apparatus remotely manages at least one facility device. The remote management apparatus includes a provisional registration unit and a main registration unit. The provisional registration unit registers a device identifier, which is transmitted from and identifies the facility device. The main registration unit registers user information, which is transmitted from a registration terminal and is related to a user of the facility device, such that the user information is associated with the device identifier. A remote management system includes the facility device, the remote management apparatus and a registration terminal. The registration terminal is connected to the remote management apparatus when the facility device is being registered in the remote management apparatus. In the remote management system, the facility device includes a notification unit, which reports a device identifier that identifies the facility device to the remote management apparatus. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110131306 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVICE AGGREGATION USING GRADUATED SERVICE LEVELS IN A CLOUD NETWORK - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for service aggregation using graduated service levels in a cloud network. In embodiments, a service aggregation platform can encode a service delivery profile to manage the delivery of support services to both vendors, such as independent software vendors (ISVs), and their users in a cloud-based network or networks. Vendors may choose to host their technical support and related services in the service aggregation platform, and define a graduated set of levels of service to which their customers, subscribers, and/or other users may be registered or entitled Users of virtual machines hosted in the one or more cloud can receive technical support, help desk, updating, and/or other support directly from the service aggregation platform, or indirectly through the vendor. The aggregation platform can serve as a trusted portal for delivery of software certification, dependency testing, issue resolution, and/or other degrees or types of support. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131307 | METHOD AND NODE FOR APPLYING A POLICY TO A SESSION BASED ON A PREVIOUSLY PREDICTED SESSION STATE - A method and a policy enforcement point are provided for applying policies to a session. An eventual state of the session is predicted in a prediction engine of a policy enforcement point. The predicted state is sent to a policy controller, which returns a policy for the predicted state. If the predicted state, or a similar state, is detected, the policy enforcement point applies the policy for the predicted state to the session. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131308 | Method And Arrangement To Maintain A TCP Connection - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement to maintain a TCP connection ( | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131309 | DYNAMIC SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT FOR CLOUD COMPUTING SERVICES - A method for dynamically updating a service level agreement, performed by a cloud computing server, includes storing a preference for service selection, acquiring an actual usage level of a first service provided to a user during a predetermined time period in accordance with a first service level agreement, determining a second service level agreement different from the first service level agreement based on the actual usage level acquired during the predetermined time period, and selecting a second service that satisfies the second service level agreement. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131310 | MULTI-HOMED COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM THEREFOR - A communication apparatus able to maintain and improve the security at the time of retransmission of stored data to a network even in a network environment where multi-home connection can be made. When receiving a job through a network, the communication apparatus identifies the network through which the job is received, adds network information representing the identified network to the job, and stores the network information into a management table when the job is stored into an image forming apparatus. When acquisition of any of data stored in the image forming apparatus is requested by a terminal apparatus, whether a transmission condition is satisfied is determined based the network information for the requested data and transmission destination network information in the management table, and the requested data is transmitted, if the transmission condition is satisfied. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131311 | Optimizing Buddy Finder Telecommunication Service - A service is provided to users of communication devices present in a geographic service area. Each device is associated with a specific user. The service comprises conditionally alerting a user, via his/her communication device, to a presence of another device of another user. The alerting occurs if the other user is registered as a buddy of the user and if a geographical distance between the user's device and the buddy's device is smaller than a pre-determined threshold. A succession of polling cycles is run. In each polling cycle, the mobile devices are sequentially polled based on location and according to a ranking determined in a preceding polling cycle that minimizes a value of a sum of terms. Each respective term indicates a respective difference between rankings of the mobile device of the respective user and of the mobile device of the buddy of the respective user. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131312 | METHOD OF OPERATING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a method of operating a data network comprising a plurality of interconnected nodes ( | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131313 | METHOD FOR PROVISIONING AND INSTALLING EVENT TRIGGERS - The present invention provides a method for provisioning and installing event triggers, which is applied to an evolved packet system. The method comprises: a policy and charging rules function entity provisions event triggers to a bearer binding and event reporting function entity based on gateway control session level; after receiving the provisioned event triggers, the BBERF installs or updates the event triggers. An evolved packet system is further provided. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131314 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR IMPLEMENTING AT LEAST ONE POLICY FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION AMONG A PLURALITY OF ENTITIES - Methods and apparatus are described for facilitating communication among a plurality of entities via an interoperability network. Each entity has policy data corresponding thereto governing interaction with the entity via the interoperability network. A message is transmitted from a first one of the entities to a second one of the entities. The first entity has first policy data corresponding thereto and the second entity has second policy data corresponding thereto. The transmitted message was handled in the network according to combined policy data representing a combination of the first and second policy data. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110138027 | APPLICATION SERVER RUNLEVEL FRAMEWORK - According to one general aspect, a method for managing a plurality of different tenants on a shared computing infrastructure including at least one application server apparatus may include associating a tenant with a plurality of services, wherein each service provides a set of actions that the service is configured to perform. In some embodiments, the method may include associating at least one tenant runlevel for each associated service with the tenant. In various embodiments, the method may include, when the application server apparatus executes a service for the tenant, determining the tenant runlevel associated with the tenant, and managing the set of actions configured to be performed by the service based at least in part upon the tenant runlevel associated with the tenant and the service. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138028 | Managing Networking Events - Methods and systems for managing networking events are provided. An application for managing networking events may be provided to a mobile device. The application may or may not include information regarding a particular networking event. Such information may be imported, downloaded, or entered by a user. The user may prepare for the networking event by creating a customized agenda including the particular activities and tasks that are of interest to the user. While the user is at the networking event and participating in such activities or tasks, the user may add information to an entry regarding such activity or task. Such information may be saved and later used to generate a report, which may be published on a social media site. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138029 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND ARTICLES OF MANUFACTURE TO MANAGE ROUTING IN NETWORKS - Example methods, apparatus and articles to manage routing in networks are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes obtaining a first interior gateway routing protocol route selection metric associated with a first router and a second interior gateway routing protocol route selection metric associated with a second router communicatively coupled to the first router, detecting whether a mismatch exists between the first and second first interior gateway routing protocol route selection metrics, determining, using a Bellman-Ford algorithm, a target interior gateway routing protocol route selection metric when the mismatch is detected, and transmitting the target interior gateway routing protocol route selection metric to at least one of the first and second routers. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138030 | Method and System for Creating an Overlay Structure for Management Information Bases - A method, a system, and an apparatus are provided for organizing management information bases (MIB) in a network. A table, associated with an overlay MIB structure, is populated with entries. Each entry defines an object identifier (OID) of a mount point and an OID of a mount target. A selection is made between the existing OIDs and OIDs corresponding to a MIB overlay. When management communication refers to managed objects, they can be referred to in terms of OIDs defined by the MIB overlay, as an alternative to their existing OIDs. An agent infrastructure is defined to support the MIB overlay structure. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138031 | PORTABLE WIRELESS TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CONTENT REFERENCE SYSTEM - A portable wireless terminal includes a terminal display section, a terminal memory that stores upload information for specifying the content uploaded to an arbitrary external server, a terminal information display section that displays the information of the content specified by the upload information on the terminal display unit, a terminal deletion receiving section that receives one or more pieces of content to be deleted from the displayed information of the content, and a content deletion section that deletes the content to be deleted which is received by the terminal deletion receiving section, from an external server. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138032 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - For providing a significant reduction of resource consumption and network traffic within a network a method for managing a network is claimed, the network including: a plurality of network elements, each of which being able to run at least one network management function and to store management information being necessary for running the at least one management function, the method being characterized by randomly activating and deactivating the at least one management function on one or more of the network elements by a randomization process. Further, an according network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138033 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING EXCEPTIONAL CASE OF ESTABLISHING DEFAULT BEARER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - There are provided a method for processing an exceptional case of establishing a default bearer and a device therefor in order to solve a problem in that a user equipment cannot actually receive an IP service by accessing a packet network while failing in establishing the default bearer in a mobile communication system. A method for processing an exceptional case of establishing a default bearer in a mobility management entity includes: receiving a network attachment request from a user equipment; transmitting a network attachment acceptance including an activation request of the default bearer to the user equipment in response to the network attachment request; and cancelling a network attachment procedure when a completion response to the activation request of the default bearer is not received from the user equipment within a predetermined time. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110145380 | LIVE MULTI-HOP VM REMOTE-MIGRATION OVER LONG DISTANCE - Methods and systems of computing, involve identifying a target location for live migration of virtual machine services, delivering the virtual machine services to an operating system from a source location, migrating the virtual machine services a first time via a data network from the source location to an intermediate location, delivering the virtual machine services to the operating system from the intermediate location, and migrating the virtual machine services a second time from the intermediate location to the target location via the data network. Breaks in the virtual machine services to the operating system while migrating the virtual machine are minimal. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145381 | Distributed mesh network - A device, method, and system are disclosed. In one embodiment a computing device resides in a mesh network. The device includes a first storage device that operates when the computing device is awake. The first storage device stores a last known list of peer computing devices in the mesh network. The device also includes a a second storage device that operates regardless of whether any central processing unit in the computing device is awake or asleep. The second storage device includes a local block that stores a list of resources provided by the first computing device and a list of computing devices in the mesh network verified by the first computing device. The second storage device also includes a remote block that stores an unverified remote list of computing devices in the mesh network. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145382 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OSGi-BASED SERVICE DELIVERY FRAMEWORK - A system and a method for OBSi-based (open service gateway initiative) service delivery framework are provided. The system is adaptable to a first host executing an OSGi bundle. A mobile service module of the first host is inherited through the OSGi bundle. A second host is assigned when the OSGi bundle calls a mobilize function inherited from the mobile service module. A bytecode and an instance of the OSGi bundle are obtained through a first delivery context processing module of the first host. The bytecode and instance of the OSGi bundle are transmitted from the first host to the second host through the first delivery context processing module and a second delivery context processing module of the second host. The bytecode and instance of the OSGi bundle are installed and the OSGi bundle is executed through the second delivery context processing module. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145383 | ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A Managed Site ( | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145384 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Presence Data Updates - Embodiments herein include a method executed in a terminal of a multimedia system. The multimedia system is accessible to terminals using any of a plurality of access technologies and comprises a presence server for recording presence data of users of those terminals. The method comprises changing an update state of the terminal from a low update state to a high update state when a high priority event is detected, and changing the update state of the terminal from a high update state to a low update state when a low priority event is detected. When the terminal is in the high update state, the method includes presenting to a user of the terminal more presence data of other users than that presented when the terminal is in the low update state. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145385 | REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND THE METHOD THEREOF - A remote management system comprises a remote management device, a first management computer and a second management computer, a first management program and a second management program. The remote management device includes a network interface and a computer interface connected to at least one controlled computer, and converts an image signal output by the at lest one controlled computer into a network packet. The first and second management programs respectively cause the first and second computers to output their respective control signals and perform their respective management functions for establishing a network connection between them and the remote management device through a first network and the network interface, and transmitting their respective control signal to the remote management device via the first network for managing the at least one controlled computer. One of the first and second management computers is selected as a repeater for receiving the network packet from the remote management device and forwarding the network packet to the other one of the first and second management computers via a second network. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145386 | Policy-Based Content Delivery Network Selection - In a framework wherein resources of a content provider may be delivered to clients from different domains, a method distributes the requests based on content-provider policies. In some cases, the domains include at least two distinct content delivery network (CDN) domains. The domains may include a content provider domain. Responsive to a request, either the content provider domain or one of the two CDN domains is selected, the selection being based at least in part on one or more policies set by the content provider. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145387 | MULTICAST BROADCAST SERVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A multicast broadcast service (MBS) management method, device, and system are provided, so that a service/content provision server is enabled to manage an MBS operated by the service/content provision server itself. The method includes: a universal service interface (USI) receives a management operation request message from a service/content provision server; the management operation request message is sent to a multicast and broadcast service (MCBCS) server/controller to enable the MCBCS server/controller to perform corresponding operations according to the management operation request message. The device includes a first receiving module and a second receiving module. Another device includes a receiving module and a request processing module. The system includes an MCBCS server/controller and a USI connected to the MCBCS server/controller in a communication mode. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145388 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR REALIZING REGISTRATION MECHANISM OF IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The present invention provides a method, a device, and a system for realizing a registration mechanism of an IP multimedia subsystem. In the above method, a S-CSCF obtains a private user identity and a public user identity of CS UE and characteristic information of a MSC Server from a received request message, wherein the request message includes a registration request or a de-registration request; and then matches the obtained private user identity, public user identity, and characteristic information with existing registration binding relationships. If the match is successful, an operation indicated by said request message is performed on the successfully matched registration binding relationship. Based on the solution proposed in the present invention, the logic of the registration service can be ensured to be normal. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145389 | METHOD AND POLICY ENFORCEMENT FUNCTIONAL ENTITY FOR IMPLEMENTING QUALITY OF SERVICE REQUEST INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method and policy enforcement functional entity (PE-FE) for implementing quality of service (QoS) request information. The method comprises the following steps: a PE-FE sends a policy decision functional entity (PD-FE) a QoS request message including predetermined parameters which are used to represent the QoS request information of the transport layer. The technical solutions mentioned above enable the QoS request information of the transport layer to be accurately represented, and implement the resource request process in the pull mode. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110153796 | METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR TRACKING WEB PAGE ANALYTICS - A system and methods for a web-based analytics tracking system are provided. The system includes a data structure having a plurality of web page identifiers that are each associated with a respective web page, the web pages each located on a respective one of plurality of first servers connected together using a network, the data structure further including tag information specific to each of the plurality of respective web pages, the data structure is located on a second server different than the first servers. The system also includes a tracking script including a programmed to load a loader program located on the second server, the loader program is configured to query the data structure for tag information relating to the selected web page, build an image tag request using the tag information, and insert the image tag request into the selected web page. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153797 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING DISTRIBUTED TRANSACTIONS USING GLOBAL EPOCHS - A method for performing distributed transactions of a cluster. The method includes, in response to a lock request including a first epoch from a first node, setting a local epoch to a maximum of the first epoch and the local epoch, sending a first lock including the local epoch to the first node, and in response to a conflicting lock request including a second epoch from a second node, setting the local epoch to a maximum of the second epoch and the local epoch, where the conflicting lock request is delayed until after the first lock is released. The method further includes, in response to a reintegration request including a third epoch from the first node, setting the local epoch to a maximum of the third epoch and the local epoch and performing a reintegration based on the reintegration request, where the reintegration is logged using the local epoch. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153798 | Method and apparatus for providing a remotely managed expandable computer system - A remotely managed expandable multi-user computer system is provided. The computer system includes a removable compute cartridge and a removable storage cartridge allowing easy upgrade of the computer system. The computer system self-configures when powered on to allow remote management by another system over a network. Automatic failover support is provided without the need for a separate compute element. A self-configurable removable secure-to-wireless converter to couple to a client computer system allows secure communications between the multi-user system and the client computer system via a wireless network. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153799 | Image Display Apparatus and Control Method - A communication unit that communicates with the information terminal; an image display unit that forms and displays an image; a control unit that controls the image display unit; a storage unit that stores model data defining a model of web screen information for instructing the control of the image display unit; and a generation unit that generates the web screen information that can be displayed in the information terminal by selecting the model data stored in the storage unit, and configuring, in the model indicated by the model data, an instruction unit for instructing a control item that controls the display unit. The communication unit transmits the web screen information generated by the generation unit to the information terminal, and the control unit controls the control item of the image display unit based on an instruction signal transmitted as a result of specifying the instruction unit of the web screen information displayed in the information terminal. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153800 | IDENTITY SHARING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MOBILE COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - An identity protocol gate way according to the exemplary embodiments of the present invention includes an artifact generating and inquiring module generating an artifact by receiving a sharing request message from a mobile identity wallet according to a request made by an application program of a mobile device, inquiring corresponding identity information according to a request of the identity information including the artifact from a web server and transferring the inquired identity information to the web server; and a protocol converting module converting the sharing request message into a protocol message of a wired environment by receiving the sharing request message from the mobile identity wallet, transferring the protocol message to the identity web server, transferring sharing response information and the artifact to the application program of the mobile device by using a mobile protocol in response to the sharing response information from the identity web server. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110161477 | Method and System to Automatically Adapt Web Services from One Protocol/Idiom to Another Protocol/Idiom - A method and system to convert an existing web service from a first web services implantation type to a second web services implementation type. Example implementation types include SOAP and Representational State Transfer (REST). This conversion is achieved by recognizing and classifying available information from each of the distinct implementation types. After proper recognition and classification as disclosed herein, a deterministic process may be utilized to assist in converting or translating the exposed interface; thereby assisting in developing an interface, based on a different interface type than the one already exposed, may be provided. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161478 | SOCIAL WEB OF OBJECTS - According to exemplary embodiments, networked object management software, devices, systems and methods are described which use social mapping principles to streamline interactions between users and their networked objects, as well as between the networked objects themselves. Friendship relationships are established, by a network management system, between a plurality of the networked objects, each of the plurality of networked objects being associated with a use. When the network management system receives a task request, it can then assign the requested task to one of the plurality of networked objects which has a capability to perform the requested task and which also has an established friendship relationship with the user. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161479 | Systems and Methods for Presenting Content - Systems and methods for providing content. In one embodiment, a method for providing user access to online content can be provided. The method can include aggregating content from one or more third party webpages; storing at least a portion of the content in at least one data storage device; and when the user requests, via a browser program, a selection of content from the one or more third party webpages, providing the user with access to the stored portion of content. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161480 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION USING WI-FI - An apparatus, method, and system for providing information for a wireless network connection using Wi-Fi. Device information for at least one UPnP device is provided from a plurality of wireless devices including the at least one UPnP device, a device information announcement message including the device information for the at least one UPnP device is generated, and the generated device information announcement message is broadcasted. In this way, information on a UPnP device to which to connect a wireless device is provided in advance, and a user can easily perform a network connection. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161481 | Cluster Computing - A method for arranging a plurality of nodes in a cluster is disclosed. The invention proposes a scheme for creation of a cluster having optimum number of connections and with a diameter of two, meaning any two nodes are at most two edges away from each other. The present invention uses Singer Difference Set for deriving networks with a smaller number of connections per node for clusters of the same size. Further, the method envisaged by the present invention allows multiple computers to be placed at each node with the computers sharing the network in a non-conflicting manner, resulting in a powerful cluster at reduced cost. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161482 | REMOTE GRAPHICS CONSOLE AND VIRTUAL MEDIA ACCESS TO VIRTUAL MACHINE GUESTS - A data processing system supports remote graphics console and virtual media access to virtual machines. The data processing system is configured for usage with a virtualization platform that runs multiple operating systems simultaneously on at least one physical server. The data processing system comprises a virtual keyboard/video/mouse (KVM) element integrated into the virtualization platform and is configured to generate a remote management graphics console and map virtual media into the operating system plurality. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161483 | VIRTUAL SERVER SYSTEM AND PHYSICAL SERVER SELECTION METHOD - Physical servers in which a plurality of servers can operate are classified into groups in accordance with a predetermined index, such as loads and amounts of free resources of the physical servers. A predetermined number of representative servers are selected in each group, a physical server as a destination of a target virtual server is determined from among the representative servers of each group, and the target virtual server is moved to the determined physical server as the destination. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110167142 | HIERARCHICAL SERVICE MANAGEMENT - A service management system includes data storage storing a hierarchy of a network in a user premises. The hierarchy includes virtual network layers and devices in each layer. The storage device also stores service profiles for services associated with levels in the hierarchy, and the levels include one or more of the virtual network layers. The system receives information for creating a service for a device in a layer. The information includes service functions and attributes. The system also stores a service profile for the service in the storage device, and the service profile includes the received information. The system determines whether to trigger the service based on the received data and information in the service profile. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110167143 | Independent restarting of the nodes of a peer-to-peer network - Method for restarting a peer-to-peer network formed of a set of nodes It comprises a step of determining a first node to be restarted and a set of nodes known to it; wherein each node to be restarted implements, prior to restarting:
| 07-07-2011 |
| 20110167144 | NETWORK SYSTEM, DATA PROCESSING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A delivery server association button of a Web screen | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110167145 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A tool for managing a computer network includes a gateway service module that identifies a gateway for a network and a network information service module. The network information service module identifies devices in the network, determines at least one property for each of the identified devices, and creates a network information data structure for storing device properties. A communication agent service module transmits at least one determined device property to other agent service modules associated with the network, receives at least one device property from another agent service module associated with the network, and provides the received at least one property device to the network information service module. A method of monitoring a computer network is also provided. The method includes identifying devices in a network, determining at least one property for each of the identified devices, receiving at least one determined device property from another device the network, and creating a network information data structure for storing the determined device properties. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110167146 | Provision of Resource Allocation Information - A system is provided for disseminating resource allocation information from system resources to state-information observers comprising resource users and typically also at least one system resource manager. Each resource maintains state information about its identity and its allocation to one or more resource users. Each resource provides this information to a state-dissemination arrangement which disseminates it to each state-information observer. Each resource user uses the state information it receives from the state-dissemination arrangement to ascertain the resources allocated to it. Similarly, a system resource manager, when present, uses the state information it receives from the state-dissemination arrangement to ascertain the allocation of those resources that are of interest to the manager. A resource, resource user and resource manager for use in such a system are also provided. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110173309 | NETWORK DATABASE CONTROL DEVICE AND METHOD THEREOF - A network device control unit and method are provided in which, not all MIB objects under the control of the network management software are simultaneously acquired during startup of the network management software so the almost simultaneous flow of a large volume of SNMP packets in the LAN will not occur and along with a simultaneous reduction in the load on communications lines, the load on devices such as the printer and network board processing their SNMP packets will also become small. To accomplish this, windows allocated to individual network peripheral devices on a one to one basis and controlling the network device are utilized as device windows, and information to be displayed on the initial screen of the device window is acquired as the initial sheet and displayed. Device windows also acquire and display different sheet information on the device window when determined an entry has been made by the user requesting display of a different type of sheet information. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173310 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SWITCH AND INFORMATION HANDLING SYSTEM SAS PROTOCOL COMMUNICATION - An SAS domain map is automatically generated at an SAS concentrator switch by a virtual mapping device that presents itself as a target for discovery by SAS devices interfaced with the concentrator, such as information handling systems and storage devices. During the SAS protocol discovery process, the virtual mapping device generates the SAS domain map by acquiring the device name and the device port for each concentrator port that interfaces with a device. A management application running on the concentrator applies the SAS domain map to provide network functions, such as zoning or diagnostics. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173311 | Invitation to Bind to a Device - A server device sends a list of account holders together with an invitation to bind to the server. A client device can decide to present the invitation to a user for decision only if the client device finds a match between the list and the user. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173312 | DATA PROCESSING - A data processing apparatus is provided that includes a processing unit for processing data, including receiving data packets from a sender and sending acknowledgements to the sender, the processing unit having a first and second mode of operation for processing data, in which the second mode of operation requires more power than the first mode, and the processing unit switches between the first and second modes of operation based on a processing load; a metric module for determining a metric indicative of the processing load; an acknowledgement module for sending one acknowledgement in respect of n received data packets; and an acknowledgement configuration module for setting n to be a value m greater than a first predetermined value if the metric lies in a predetermined range that includes a value that the metric assumes when the processing unit switches between the first mode of operation and the second mode of operation, and to the first predetermined value otherwise. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173313 | Portable Management Device - Exemplary embodiments of the present invention disclosed herein relate to a method and system for providing remote management for a computer system with a portable management device. An exemplary method comprises connecting a portable management device to a computer system and a network. The exemplary method additionally comprises receiving remote management data over the network via the portable management device and executing instructions in response to the remote management data. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110179153 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDLING A NETWORK CONNECTION - The described embodiments provide a system that controls the operating state of a network interface. During operation, in response to receiving a request from an application to use the network interface for a route, the system creates a route structure for the route and increments a route reference counter in an interface data structure for the network interface. Upon subsequently determining that the application is no longer using the route, the system sets a route expiration timer in the route structure to a predetermined expiration time. When the route expiration timer expires, the system deletes the route structure and decrements the route reference counter in the interface data structure. When decrementing the route reference counter in the interface data structure causes the route reference counter to be equal to zero, the system sends a signal to a configuration application to inform the application that the network interface can be idled. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110179154 | WEB HOSTING SERVICE BASED ON A COMMON SERVICE ARCHITECTURE AND THIRD PARTY SERVICES - A website hosting service provides a plurality of services to each of a plurality of unrelated websites, each of the plurality of services being adapted to contribute to a distinct service package for at least a plurality of unrelated websites, at least one of the plurality of services serving a third party interface that allows access to a third party service in the distinct service package. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110179155 | UNAFFILIATED WEB DOMAIN HOSTING SERVICE BASED ON COMMON SERVICE POOLS ARCHITECTURE - A website hosting architecture provides a plurality of services, from a plurality of service pools, to each of a plurality of unaffiliated websites, each of the plurality of service pools being adapted to provide services that are adapted to be combined into different packages to be delivered to at least a plurality of the unaffiliated websites. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110179156 | MIGRATING A WEB HOSTING SERVICE FROM A SHARED ENVIRONMENT FOR MULTIPLE CLIENTS TO A SHARED ENVIRONMENT FOR MULTIPLE CLIENTS - An automated tool for migrating a website hosting service from a first website hosting architecture to a second website hosting architecture, each website hosting architecture comprising a server architecture that serves a plurality of common services from a plurality of machines to a plurality of unrelated websites. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110179157 | Event Management System For Creating A Second Event - An event management system is configured to host a first event that includes a first set of event endpoints that provides first and second sets of media streams to respective first and second sets of attendees during the first event. The event management system is configured to, while hosting the first event, create a second event that includes a second set of event endpoints that provide a third set of media streams to at least one of the first set of attendees and a fourth set of media streams during the second event. At least one of the second set of event endpoints is sufficiently separated from each of the first set of event endpoints so that the second event does not substantially interfere with the first event. | 07-21-2011 |
| 20110185050 | CONTROLLING EXECUTION OF SERVICES ACROSS SERVERS - Computer and internet applications are commonly hosted by a large number of servers, such as a data warehouse. One concern when hosting applications is execution reliability of the applications. Unfortunately, it may be the applications themselves that provide the point of failure (e.g., an executing service creates a memory leak that causes a server to fail). Because servers are often replicated, a failure of a single executing service may become a single point of failure for every server. Accordingly, one or more systems and techniques for balancing server loads are disclosed herein. A load balancer may be configured to delegate the execution of a service amongst a plurality of servers such that no server executes all services and no service executes on all servers. The distribution of service execution amongst the plurality of servers provides service execution diversity across servers that otherwise may be configured identically with services. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185051 | CLIENT DEVICE IDENTIFICATION THROUGH CACHE MANIPULATION - A method of identifying a networked client device of a host machine or server includes generating an encoded modified date during a first access attempt by the client device of a server-based object, storing the encoded modified date in a local cache of the device, and processing the encoded modified date during a second access attempt by the client device. A system includes the server and a memory device on which is recorded a server-based object. The server generates and stores the encoded modified date in the local cache, e.g., via HTTP, during the first access attempt of the object by the client device, and processes the encoded modified date during a second access attempt by the same client device to uniquely identify the client device. Restricted information may be provided to the client device upon successful identification. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185052 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING QoS ACCORDING TO APPLICATIONS AND NETWORK STATE - In a communication control apparatus controlling communications between terminals and network devices, the terminal communication optimizer includes a first acquiring section for acquiring first information indicating applications running on the terminal and their destinations, and a setting section for setting QoS for each application according to second information indicating an instruction. The communication optimizer includes a second acquiring section for acquiring third information indicating the QoS requisite for each application indicated by the first information and fourth information about the state of the network, a deciding section for deciding whether or not there are network resources requisite for the applications indicated by the first information, and a communication instructing section for performing communications, when the network resources are insufficient, with higher communication priority applications communicating at a first QoS and lower communication priority applications communicating within the limit not deteriorating the first QoS. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185053 | Agile Network Protocol For Secure Communications Using Secure Domain Names - A secure domain name service for a computer network is disclosed that includes a portal connected to a computer network, such as the Internet, and a domain name database connected to the computer network through the portal. The portal authenticates a query for a secure computer network address, and the domain name database stores secure computer network addresses for the computer network. Each secure computer network address is based on a non-standard top-. level domain name, such as .scom, .sorg, .snet, .snet, .sedu, .smil and .sint. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185054 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND CONNECTION SWITCHING MANAGEMENT METHOD - Provided is a terminal device which can perform connection switching to a more appropriate communication network while normally executing a service from a server. The terminal device includes: an input unit ( | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110191452 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING A SERVICE-AWARE MOBILE CORE NETWORK - In one embodiment, the present disclosure is a method and apparatus for enabling a service-aware mobile core network. In one embodiment, a method for managing integrated services in a communication network includes detecting a first internet protocol flow in the network, mapping the internet protocol flow to an integrated service, and managing the integrated service, including the first internet protocol flow, according to at least one policy defined for the integrated service. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191453 | APPLICABILITY DETECTION USING THIRD PARTY TARGET STATE - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate to detecting needed updates. In aspects, an update agent receives a request to scan for updates for a target. The target may include a virtual or non-virtual device. The request may include one or more rules that indicate resources to check to determine attributes of the device. The update agent utilizes a resource accessor to access the resources indicated by the rules. The resource accessor maps resource names indicated by the update agent to corresponding resource names of the target. The update agent may provide results of evaluating the rules to an update source in a multi-pass protocol designed to eliminate irrelevant updates. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191454 | DISCOVERING PHYSICAL SERVER LOCATION BY CORRELATING EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL SERVER INFORMATION - The present invention includes a computing system for discovering a physical location of a physical server device in a datacenter. The computing system obtains at least one physical property of the physical server device pertaining to the physical location of the physical server device. The computing system acquires at least one logical property of the physical server device pertaining to a logical server name of the physical server device. The computing system correlates the at least one physical property and the at least one logical property. Thereby, the computing system matches the logical server name to the physical location. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191455 | Using Aggregated DNS Information Originating from Multiple Sources to Detect Anomalous DNS Name Resolutions - A DNS security system collects and uses aggregated DNS information originating from a plurality of client computers to detect anomalous DNS name resolutions. A server DNS security component receives multiple transmissions of DNS information from a plurality of client computers, each transmission of DNS information concerning a specific instance of a resolution of a specific DNS name. The server component aggregates the DNS information from the multiple client computers. The server component compares DNS information received from a specific client computer concerning a specific DNS name to aggregated DNS information received from multiple client computers concerning the same DNS name to identify anomalous DNS name resolutions. Where an anomaly concerning received DNS information is identified, a warning can be transmitted to the specific client computer from which the anomalous DNS information was received. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191456 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COORDINATING DATA COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TWO DEVICES - The mediation device presented here facilitates data communication between a client device and a server device. The mediation device includes a processor, a memory element coupled to the processor, and a communication module coupled to the processor. The memory element is configured to store and maintain compatibility information related to data communication capabilities of a plurality of devices, including the server device. The communication module is configured to perform data communication with client devices, and is further configured to receive, from the client device, requests for compatibility information of the server device. Upon receipt of a request for compatibility information of the server device, the processor retrieves the compatibility information of the server device from the memory element, and the communication module sends the compatibility information of the server device to the client device. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191457 | FOOTPRINT REDUCTION FOR A MANUFACTURING FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A facility management system includes a combined server providing both event services and application server functionality. The combined server receives a communication request from a client and determines if the received request corresponds to an asynchronous or a synchronous communication. If the received request corresponds to an asynchronous communication, the combined server creates a task corresponding to the communication request. The combined server determines whether to execute the task locally on the combined server or on a remote combined server, and if the task is to be executed locally, executes the task. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191458 | Globalization Management System and Method Therefor - A globalization management system ( | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191459 | CONFIGURABLE GEOGRAPHIC PREFIXES FOR GLOBAL SERVER LOAD BALANCING - In a load balancing system, user-configurable geographic prefixes are provided. IP address prefix allocations provided by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) and associated geographic locations are stored in a first, static database in a load balancing switch, along with other possible default geographic location settings. A second, non-static database stores user-configured geographic settings. In particular, the second database stores Internet Protocol (IP) address prefixes and user-specified geographic regions for those prefixes. The specified geographic region can be continent, country, state, city, or other user-defined region. The geographic settings in the second database can override the information in the first database. These geographic entries help determine the geographic location of a client and host IP addresses, and aid in directing the client to a host server that is geographically the closest to that client. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110196949 | SYSTEM FOR REMOTE ACCESS AND MAINTENANCE TO A WIDE AREA NETWORK - Addition of a wireless out-of-band communications channel to a WAN enabling expeditious communication to a WAN data processor from a NOC. A wireless network device which may be one of a router or a switch comprises a communications port which may be for example a network device console port or a universal serial bus (USB) port may be communicably connected to a wireless console communications device (WIFIC). Management programming entered into a data processor at the NOC may be functional to direct communications directly to the wireless network device using a wireless communications link which avoids the usual in-band communications channel. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196950 | NETWORK CONTROLLER CIRCUITRY TO INITIATE, AT LEAST IN PART, ONE OR MORE CHECKPOINTS - An embodiment may include network controller circuitry to be included in a first host computer that includes a host processor to execute an operating system environment. The circuitry may initiate, at least in part, one or more checkpoints of, at least in part, one or more states associated with, at least in part, the operating system environment and network traffic between the first host computer and a second host computer. The circuitry also may coordinate, at least in part, respective execution, at least in part, of the one or more checkpoints with respective execution of one or more other respective checkpoints of the second host computer. Of course, many alternatives, variations, and modifications are possible without departing from this embodiment. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196951 | COMPUTER MANAGING METHOD - A computer managing method includes the following steps. Firstly, a blade server system with M blade server units, which includes a number of server blades and a modular management blade (MMB), is provided, wherein the M MMBs are connected with each other via network paths and M is a natural number greater than 1. Then a master MMB among the M MMBs are selected in response to first user operation event. Next, the network parameter data of the master MMB are set in response to second user operation event. Then network topology of the master MMB and the rest of M−1 MMBs are obtained via the master MMB. After that, the rest of M−1 MMBs are driven for utilizing a network protocol service so that the M−1 MMBs are able to receive network parameter data from the master MMB and carry out parameter setting accordingly. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196952 | Method for controlling a network system, network system, and computer program - The invention relates to a method for controlling a network system, the network system including a wireless network to which a client is wirelessly connected, and a backbone network which is connected to the wireless network, having the following steps: | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196953 | CONTACT MANAGER METHOD AND SYSTEM - Described therein is a centralized method and system to manage contact lists among multiple mobile telephonic devices. A contact manager system resides on at least one server which is connected to a global communication network. The at least one server may communicate with a plurality of global communication network connectable mobile telephonic devices. A file repository is located at the at least one server and is used to maintain contact lists on the mobile telephonic devices. Operations which may be initiated on the contact lists include but are not limited to creation, merging, transferring, encrypting, migrating, importing, modifying. When these operations are completed, the corresponding changes are disseminated to the appropriate mobile telephonic devices. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196954 | System and Method for Migrating Applications From a Legacy System - An information processing system comprises a legacy application, a web services consumption copybook, and a set of application program interfaces for enabling the legacy application to access a selected web service via a web services consumption server. The web services consumption copybook represents data structures of the selected web service. The system can either connect to or include a set of web service proxies that each correspond to a web service available via a network connection. A web services consumption server is optionally used to route service requests from the application to the appropriate web service proxy. The system can also optionally include a developer tool for adapting legacy systems or environments to be able to consume web services using modern protocols thus allowing the migration of legacy subsystems to a networked loosely-coupled environment. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196955 | Sensor Network System for Managing the Latest Data and History Data - In a sensor network system comprising a sensor terminal and a management server, the sensor terminal transmits observation data acquired using the sensor, the management server has a latest data storage manager which manages the latest observation data among observation data received from the sensor terminal, a history data storage manager which manages the history of the observation data from any time when data was received from the sensor terminal to the latest observation data, and a missing data manager which manages missing history data, and compensates the missing history data based on a predetermined rule, and when a request for such observation data is received, at least one of the latest observation data managed by the latest data storage manager, and history data wherein the missing data has been compensated and managed by the history data storage manager, is output according to the type of request. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196956 | MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS AND GROUPS IN MULTIPLE FORESTS - Methods, systems, and computer program products are provided for managing contact proxies and security proxies in networks that are organized as forests. For instance, contact proxies may be generated to represent user accounts and groups in forests other than the home forests of the user accounts and groups. Security proxy objects may be generated to represent group members (e.g., security principals and groups) in groups in forests other than the home forests of the group members. Furthermore, when both a contact object and a security proxy object exist for a member added to a group, one of the contact object or the security proxy object may be selected to represent the member in the group. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110202645 | Methods and Apparatus to Test Network Elements - Described are computer-based methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, for testing network elements in a communication network. A record file is received, comprising one or more record file elements, each record file element including data indicative of a request received by a network element in a network during normal operation. A virtual client is created for each of one or more identified sources. One or more regenerated requests are generated, each of the one or more regenerated requests being generated based on data in a corresponding record file element from the one or more record file elements. For each of the one or more regenerated requests, the virtual client associated with the regenerated request transmits the regenerated request to a subject network element to test the subject network element, wherein the one or more regenerated requests simulate requests received by the network element during normal operation. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202646 | POLICY CONTROLLED TRAFFIC OFFLOAD VIA CONTENT SMART-LOADING - An example method includes receiving at a user device a policy from a communication network node, and loading the user device with content data based on the policy. The policy specifies a rule set and a corresponding action to undertake in the event of a condition satisfying the rule set and may be received at the user device in response to connection of the user device to the network node. The policy received may be an updated policy, and may be based on network conditions. Example apparatuses and methods determine how (for example, what access technology and what times, to best deliver content given the particulars for a user and the device state of the user, using a rules set that can be dynamically updated without user intervention by network operators based on network management policies. Delivery includes upload, download and sideload of a user device. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202647 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Policy and Charging Control Rule or Quality of Service Rule Modification Failures - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate handling failures in policy rule installation and/or related bearer modification procedures. A set of modified policy rules can be provided to a gateway for enforcement thereof and/or correlation with a bearer of a device. The gateway can attempt to install the modified rules and can utilize a credit control request (CCR)/credit control answer (CCA) exchange to notify of a status of the modified rule installation and/or related bearer modification. A policy charging and rules function (PCRF) can, thus, determine the status based on the CCR/CCA exchange. If the status indicates failure, the PCRF can revert to previous policy rules. In addition, an application function can be notified of the status. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202648 | NETWORK NODE FOR AN AD-HOC NETWORK AND PROCESS FOR PROVIDING APPLICATION SERVICES IN AN AD-HOC NETWORK - A network node for an ad-hoc network having a plurality of network nodes of the same type, which provide one another with application services via wireless connections. The network node generates a list of all application services provided to it by other network nodes including associated quality classes and makes this list available to other network nodes as list of the application services provided by it with such quality classes. The quality class is at least dependent on the number of consecutive network nodes, via which the application service is provided, and the quality class specified by the last of these network nodes. The invention also relates to a method for providing application services in an ad-hoc network. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202649 | USER-CENTRIC LAYERED SERVICE DELIVERY PLATFORM FOR ENABLING I-CENTRIC SERVICES AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD USING THE SAME - An apparatus for providing I-centric services using a service delivery platform which is user-centric layered and a service providing method using the same are provided. The apparatus includes a media service platform providing an enabler obtained by abstracting resources and an I-centric enabler, a service creation environment providing a layered service creation and execution environment for each user, and a service execution environment. A personal user, a third party service provider and a service provider can create and provide various personalized services using the media service platform, the service creation environment and the service execution environment. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110208848 | NETWORK SYSTEM OF WEB SERVICES BASED ON SEMANTICS AND RELATIONSHIPS - The invention has disclosed a network system of web services based on semantics and relationship. The Service Network is used in automatic discovery and (semi-)automatic composition. The service to be processed of Service Network derives from registration service and extraction service of network. Submission service extracts information and sends it to Service Network according to service registry query. Extraction service obtains the service description file with crawler and register to Service Network via interface of service registry; and composition service is automatically done according to custom's function description, the complex service is sent to Service Network. The invention is more convenient for announcement of Web services, service discovery and (semi-) automatic composition based on semantics. It can extend and combine various service semantic description languages; and construct services ecosystem with available Web services, and improve operation of automatic service composition, searching and maintenance with the help of relationship among services. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208849 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SECURITY MAINTENANCE IN A NETWORK - A system and method for monitoring a network and detecting network vulnerabilities is provided. A communication associated with one or more programs is issued to one or more devices in a network and the response from the devices is detected and analyzed. Based on the analysis, a device response is identified as a threat response if it represents at least an alert, an unexpected response or a response time-out indicating that the device did not response to the communication. The vulnerability of the network is determined based on the threat responses of the devices. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208850 | SYSTEMS FOR AND METHODS OF WEB PRIVACY PROTECTION - A disclosed method for implementing anti-tracking measures for a web browser includes refreshing anti-tracking data structure responsive to satisfying at least one of a set of anti-tracking refresh criteria. The anti-tracking data structure may include opt-out cookie data indicative of a set of opt-out cookies, uniform resource locator (URL) anti-tracking data indicative of a set of URLs associated with URL tracking, and Referer header field anti-tracking data indicative of a set of URLs susceptible to Referer header field tracking. Responsive to a web browser of a user device generating a request for a third-party web page specified by a browser URL, at least a portion of the browser URL is compared against the anti-tracking data structure. If a match in the URL anti-tracking data or the Referer header field anti-tracking data is detected, the browser URL may be modified. The refreshing of anti-tracking data may include pulling a current anti-tracking data structure from an anti-tracking server. Alternatively, the current anti-tracking data structure may be pushed from the anti-tracking server. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208851 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA STORAGE, SUCH AS DISCOVERY AND MARKING OWNERSHIP OF NETWORK STORAGE DEVICES - A system and method for discovery and marking ownership of network storage devices discovers, marks ownership and auto-attaches persistent network storage devices using the AoE or other network storage/protocols by storing encoded data in a configuration string or other settable persistent memory of these devices. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208852 | Regionally-Tiered Internet Banner Delivery and Platform for Transaction Fulfillment of E-Commerce - Regionally-tiered Internet banner delivery may be provided. A banner presentation portion configured to present banners may be provided for presentation to a user via a screen of a client computing platform. Banners associated with sponsors may be received. Individual ones banners may be configured to present media content. Two or more tiers may be defined, which include a first tier and a second tier. Individual ones of the tiers may correspond to different overlapped and/or non-overlapped geographical areas. The first tier may correspond to a larger geographical area than the second tier. A given banner may be associated with a given tier based on a desired geographical area to which the given banner is directed. Individual ones of the banners may be provided, based on a location of the user, for presentation to the user via the presentation portion of the screen of the client computing device. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208853 | POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL METHOD, SERVERS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMS THEREFOR - A policy and charging control method includes creating by a policy and charging rules function (PCRF), first policy and charging control (PCC) rules at establishment of a user plane session associated with the UE. The first PCC rules are installed at a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) and the service is initiated in accordance with these rules. During the lifetime of the user plane session, a quality-of-service (QoS) change request is transmitted by the UE upon activation of a user interface command. The PCRF creates second PCC rules based on the request, and installs them at the PCEF by replacing the first PCC rules by the second PCC rules. The service is continued in accordance with the second PCC rules. PCRF and PCEF servers as well as computer programs are also defined. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110213866 | NODE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD - A storage resource stores a plugin information package, which is an information package comprising definition information for plugging in a node device as a management target. The definition information is information denoting at the least one of a method for acquiring information from a node device and an item of information to be acquired from a node device. A processor references the plugin information package, which is stored in the storage resource, and accesses a node device via a communication interface device based on the referenced plugin information package. The node device comprising information that has been correctly acquired in accordance with this access is regarded as the management target. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213867 | SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY AND MANAGEMENT ACROSS MULTIPLE BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM NETWORKS - A building automation system (BAS) network manager supporting a plurality of device protocols coupled to at least one communication network, and a plurality of logical connections to individual BAS networks to multiple end devices of a BAS. The BAS network manager can communicate with each of the end devices regardless of the protocol or protocol version of the BAS network by implementing a protocol stack above the link layer for each protocol or protocol version, providing an integrated multi-BAS network interface, and maintaining a device identifier for each BAS network the network manager is coupled to in the protocol stack. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213868 | METHODS FOR OBTAINING TERMINAL MULTICASTS STATUS - The present invention provides a method for sending a message to a network device with a specific MAC address, in an IP network implementing a interne group management protocol IGMP, comprising: sending, by a network terminal, to the network device, a multicast group management status message including a destination address set as the specific MAC address. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213869 | PROCESSING DATA FLOWS WITH A DATA FLOW PROCESSOR - An apparatus and method to distribute applications and services in and throughout a network and to secure the network includes the functionality of a switch with the ability to apply applications and services to received data according to respective subscriber profiles. Front-end processors, or Network Processor Modules (NPMs), receive and recognize data flows from subscribers, extract profile information for the respective subscribers, utilize flow scheduling techniques to forward the data to applications processors, or Flow Processor Modules (FPMs). The FPMs utilize resident applications to process data received from the NPMs. A Control Processor Module (CPM) facilitates applications processing and maintains connections to the NPMs, FPMs, local and remote storage devices, and a Management Server (MS) module that can monitor the health and maintenance of the various modules. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213870 | PROVIDING SERVICES TO MULTIPLE TENANTS OF AN APPLICATION - A method, system and computer program product for providing a service to multiple tenants of an application. Responsive to receiving from a client of a tenant a request, a tenant context of the tenant is bound to the request. With respect to an access to an isolation point of the application in the request, the access to the isolation point is redirected to a partition based on the tenant context bound to the request. The partition may be pre-established for the tenant with respect to the application. Hence, it is possible to provide a multi-tenant solution in a convenient, fast, and cost-effective way, and, in turn, to achieve resource sharing to a greater extent and enhance the resource efficiency. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213871 | MACHINE-TO-MACHINE GATEWAY ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONALITY - A machine-to-machine (M2M) gateway (GW) includes reachability, addressing, and repository (RAR) capability. The GW maintains a local mapping table and local device application repository, performs data aggregation, address/name translation, provides event reporting and establishes GW reachability and wake-up time. The GW supports requests from M2M applications or other capabilities within the GW, and from a network and application (N&A) domain RAR. The GW may include an M2M device and M2M gateway management (MDGM) capability that receives management requests for an M2M device and functions as a network proxy. The MDGM accepts and processes requests from the N&A domain on behalf of the M2M device and performs management functions of the M2M device on behalf of the N&A domain. The MDGM may request the N&A domain for permission to interact with the M2M device, initiate an interaction for device management tasks with the M2M device, and report to the N&A domain. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213872 | QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT FOR MESSAGE FLOWS ACROSS MULTIPLE MIDDLEWARE ENVIRONMENTS - A method of managing information system resources to provide a message flow having a consistent level of quality of service (QoS) within and across a plurality of interconnected middleware domains is described. The method includes receiving a QoS message from a first QoS manager expressing at least one QoS requirement, translating the at least one QoS requirement to at least one parameter specific to a messaging service that communicatively couples multiple middleware domains, creating a client connection between a first middleware domain and the messaging service for receiving the message flow, transmitting the QoS message to a second middleware domain, and creating a client connection between the messaging service and the second middleware domain for transmitting the message flow. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213873 | Method and Arrangement for Improved Session Setup Signaling Policing - In an improved method in a control node managing media sessions between nodes in a telecommunication network, exchanging S | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110219104 | NETWORK SYSTEM CAPABLE OF PROVIDING PROXY WEB SERVICE AND PROXY RESPONSE METHOD THEREFOR, NETWORK DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHODS THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A network system in which a proxy web service process performed by a device on behalf of a network device can be continued while maintaining a reduced power consumption state of the network device, without requiring these devices to be installed on the same subnet. When in a sleep state, the network device redirects a web service request received from a PC to an external device. The external device sends a web service response to the web service request in which addresses of the external device are designated as a reference destination of data contained in the web service response, to the network device. The network device sends the web service response to the network terminal. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219105 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR APPLICATION SESSION CONTINUITY - A first device pairs with a second device via local communication and then transfers a server-implemented application session from the first device to the second device by saving as session data the current state of the first application, and the state of the application-related data being consumed. This session data is then transferred to the second device, which then runs a second application based on the state supplied by the session data. One or both of the devices communicates a session transfer request to the server, causing the server to re-route application-related data to the second device to be consumed by the second application at the state where consumption by the first application was transferred. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219106 | Data Deletion in a Distributed Data Storage System - In one embodiment, a method for removing unused storage units is provided. One or more storage units are referenced by multiple client addresses. The method includes constructing, on a metadata server, a filter on at least a portion of block identifiers that identify storage units currently being referenced by client addresses. The metadata server stores information on which storage unit identifiers are referenced by which client addresses. The filter is transmitted from the metadata server to a block server. The filter is used by the block server to test whether storage unit identifiers that exist on the block server are present in the filter. The block server stores information on where a storage unit is stored on the block server for a storage unit identifier. Storage unit identifiers not present in the filter and associated storage units are deleted from the block server. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219107 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COLLABORATIVE PROCESSING OF DISTRIBUTED APPLICATIONS - A system and method for generating and executing machine-language filter code. A filter generator receives a text-based filter string. The filter string contains filter criteria for filtering messages communicated from one computer program to another computer program or to the same computer program. A machine language generator converts the filter string to a machine-language filter code. A central processing unit of a host loads and executes the machine-language filter code to process or discard messages based on the filter criteria. The machine-language filter code is maintained by the computer program for continual reuse eliminating the interpretation and translation of the filter string from data to code for each message. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219108 | Scalable, high performance and highly available distributed storage system for Internet content - A method for content storage on behalf of participating content providers begins by having a given content provider identify content for storage. The content provider then uploads the content to a given storage site selected from a set of storage sites. Following upload, the content is replicated from the given storage site to at least one other storage site in the set. Upon request from a given entity, a given storage site from which the given entity may retrieve the content is then identified. The content is then downloaded from the identified given storage site to the given entity. In an illustrative embodiment, the given entity is an edge server of a content delivery network (CDN). | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219109 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING TRANSPARENT PROXY BETWEEN ISP AND CDN - A system and a method for sharing a proxy between an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or other Internet point of presence, and a CDN (content delivery network). | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110225275 | EFFECTIVELY MANAGING CONFIGURATION DRIFT - Configuration drift refers to changes made over time that cause a computer or service to deviate from a desired configuration. Configuration drift of a group of machines can be managed by defining configuration intent. Intent is defined by defining a configuration baseline comprised of a collection of related configuration rules. Configuration rules include settings, and targets which can be any managed entity that enables reporting of non-compliance at a more granular level. A configuration baseline can be completed by reading configuration rules from one or more well-configured computers. Configuration drift is assessed by comparing actual values to the configuration baseline values and is reported at a managed entity level instead of at a machine level. Remediation, returning the computer to a state of compliance with the configuration baseline, can be performed on demand. Remediations performed over time are retained and applied to a new instance of the service to eliminate configuration drift on the new instance. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225276 | ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE COMPUTING IN A DISTRIBUTED COMPUTER NETWORK - Implementation of environmentally sustainable computing in a distributed computer network is provided. A method includes receiving a request from a node in the network to perform a computational task and identifying nodes in the network having resources to facilitate performance of the task. Using an environmental impact rating for each of the identified nodes, selecting one or more transmission paths in the network and/or at least one of the identified nodes to facilitate performance of the task based on corresponding environmental impact ratings and applied performance efficiency criteria. Selected identified nodes represent those having the lowest environmental impact rating while meeting the applied performance efficiency criteria. The method further includes executing the task on the node via the transmission paths and/or selected identified nodes. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225277 | PLACEMENT OF VIRTUAL MACHINES BASED ON SERVER COST AND NETWORK COST - A method, information processing system, and computer program product manage server placement of virtual machines in an operating environment. A mapping of each virtual machine in a plurality of virtual machines to at least one server in a set of servers is determined. The mapping substantially satisfies a set of primary constraints associated with the set of servers. A plurality of virtual machine clusters is created. Each virtual machine cluster includes a set of virtual machines from the plurality of virtual machines. A server placement of one virtual machine in a cluster is interchangeable with a server placement of another virtual machine in the same cluster while satisfying the set of primary constraints. A server placement of the set of virtual machines within each virtual machine on at least one mapped server is generated for each cluster. The server placement substantially satisfies a set of secondary constraints. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225278 | PROCESSING PACKETS USING A VIRTUALIZED DESCRIPTOR QUEUE - In a method for processing packets among at least a first computing device and a second computing device, in which the first computing device is configured to transmit and receive packets through a Network Interface Card (NIC), in the second computing device, descriptors of packets to be one of transmitted and received by the first computing device through a device descriptor queue are received and placed in a virtualized descriptor queue accessible by the second computing device. In addition, the packets associated with the descriptors placed in the virtualized descriptor queue are processed prior to one of transmission and receipt of the packets by the first computing device. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225279 | VEHICLE CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND APPLICATIONS - A connectivity device is provided. The connectivity device includes at least one network transceiver that communicates with a vehicle network. At least one wireless communication module communicates with a remote device. A message manager module manages communications between the at least one network transceiver and the at least one wireless communication module. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225280 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR COMMUNICATING POLICY INFORMATION BETWEEN A POLICY CHARGING AND RULES FUNCTION AND A SERVICE NODE - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for communicating policy information. The method includes steps occurring at a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) node. The method also includes receiving, from a service node, a message requesting a policy rule, wherein the message includes an Internet protocol (IP) address associated with a subscriber. The method further includes determining a network access identifier (NAI) for the subscriber based on the IP address. The method further includes selecting a policy rule for the subscriber based on the NAI. The method further includes communicating the policy rule to the service node. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225281 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR POLICY ENFORCEMENT CORRELATION - Systems, methods, and computer readable media for policy enforcement correlation are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for policy enforcement correlation includes, at a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) node: receiving, from a first network node, first policy and charging related information associated with a first user of a telecommunication network; receiving, from a second network node, second policy and charging related information; correlating the first and second policy and charging related information; and, in response to correlating the first and second policy and charging information, issuing a policy and charging control (PCC)-related instruction. In one embodiment, the PCC-related instruction may be sent to the first network node, the second network node, a third network node, or some combination of the above. In one embodiment, the PCRF may receive policy and charging related information from, and may issue PCC related instructions to, policy and charging enforcement functions (PCEFs), deep packet inspection (DPI) nodes, or Diameter signaling routers (DSRs). | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225282 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VIRTUALIZING OF NETWORK DEVICE - An apparatus for virtualizing network equipment provides at least one virtualized network equipment by virtualizing the network equipment, schedules the pieces of virtualized network equipment, and executes a relevant program. Here, the virtualization apparatus performs context switching according to the scheduling in the time unit of context switching and switches to another program. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225283 | APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY REBOOTING VoIP COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - An apparatus is provided for remotely rebooting Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication devices. In general, the apparatus remotely selects VoIP communication devices connected to a network, reboots the selected devices, and evaluates the status of each device. A processor allows a user to select VoIP communication devices connected to the network and receives inputs pertaining to the reboot operation, including a time input and search criteria. The processor communicates with the designated VoIP communication devices over a packet-switching network to instruct the devices to reboot and monitors each device. In this way, multiple VoIP communication devices may be rebooted from a remote location, and problems or issues that arise during the reboot process may be identified and addressed. An associated method and computer program product are also provided for remotely rebooting VoIP communication devices. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225284 | METHODS, APPRATUSES, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR DETERMINING A NETWORK INTERFACE TO ACCESS A NETWORK RESOURCE - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for determining a network interface to network resource. An apparatus may comprise a processor configured to receive a request for resolution of a domain name. The processor may be further configured to access maintained domain name suffix information. The maintained domain name suffix information may comprise a plurality of domain name suffix entries. The processor may additionally be configured to search the maintained domain name suffix information for one or more domain name suffix entries corresponding to the domain name to determine one or more network interfaces through which the domain name is accessible. The processor may also be configured to select a network interface for resolving the domain name into a network address from the one or more determined network interfaces. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110231535 | Wireless Sensor Network - In a wireless sensor network, a local wireless network serves a plurality of sensor nodes. The local wireless network is reconfigurable for accepting a mobile computing device. The mobile computing device comprises a wireless network interface, such as a dongle, and is configured for selecting a set of sensor nodes for communications. The sensor network, a gateway, or a remote computing device may select the set of sensor nodes for communicating with the mobile computing device. A dongle may be provided for coupling the mobile computing device to the local wireless network. The dongle comprises a configuration unit for interfacing the mobile computing device with the local wireless network, an identification unit for storing user data used for user authentication, and a protection module for providing secure network access. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231536 | GROUP MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A group management device determines a priority level that represents priority order of allowing a participating terminal to preferentially participate in a group, to which the group management device belongs, based on information relating the participating terminal and information relating to terminals that are managed by the group management device only in a case where the group management device receives information relating to the participating terminal, which has transmitted a participation request to the group, to which the group management device belongs. Based on the determined priority level, the group management device determines whether to transmit the participation request to another group management device and whether to reply to the participating terminal. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231537 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVER, DEVICE MANAGEMENT CLIENT, AND METHOD FOR LOCATING A TARGET OPERATION OBJECT - In the field of communications, to solve the problem in the prior art that a device management (DM) server needs to communicate with user terminals for multiple times to obtain Uniform Resource Identifiers (URIs) of various user terminal DM nodes, a DM server, a DM client, and a method for locating a target operation object are provided. The location method includes: obtaining a management command sent by a DM server; and operating a target operation object according to the management command, in which the management command comprises Management Object (MO) location information, MO instance feature node information, and target operation object information. The present invention has the following beneficial effects. A target operation object of a DM client may be located by communicating once, and thus increasing the efficiency of communications between the DM server and user terminals. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231538 | Method for executing management operation by communication terminal and a terminal and system thereof - A method for executing a management operation by a terminal in a communications system. The method comprises the followings: The terminal receives the management operation commands that indicate the operation to target operation nodes in the device capability management object and operates them. The said operation initiates the process for executing the corresponding device capability management operation, then the said management operation transfers the device capability status. Also, the corresponding terminal and system are disclosed. The present invention can centrally manage and control the terminal capability. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231539 | Device Connection Routing for Controllers - Device connection routing for controllers is provided. A computing device is configured with multiple controllers that provide connections for peripheral devices. The controllers enable the peripheral devices to interact with the computing device through a bus. Each device connection is routed to one of the multiple controllers based on one or more pre-determined factors. These factors may include load-balancing, power saving, quality of service, data flow requirements, and the like. Device connection routing may be dynamically managed to respond to changing states of the peripheral devices and the controllers. The device connection routing may be performed for controllers associated with any type of wired or wireless buses, such as Universal Serial Bus (USB), IEEE 1394, Secure Digital Input/Output (SDIO), and the like. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231540 | POLICY ENGINE IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A system includes a policy engine in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The policy engine may be configured to store a group of policies associated with the IMS, and forward the group of policies to a group of policy components in the IMS. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110238803 | Administration Of Virtual Machine Affinity In A Data Center - Administration of virtual machine affinity in a data center, where the data center includes a plurality of virtual machines (‘VMs’), each VM being a module of automated computing machinery installed upon a computer in the data center and characterized by a Universally Unique Identifier (‘UUID’), at least two of the VMs having an affinity requirement to be installed on separate computers, the data center further including a data center administration server operably coupled to the VMs, including communicating, by at least one of the VMs having an affinity requirement to the data center administration server, the UUIDs of the VMs having an affinity requirement; and moving by the data center administration server the VMs having an affinity requirement to separate computers in the data center. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238804 | AGER RING OPTIMIZATION - A device provides an ager ring that ages entries associated with managed resource of a device, and determines whether a particular entry associated with a particular managed resource of the device is to be updated. The device also updates, when the particular entry is to be aged out in a particular time frame, the particular entry in the ager ring based on a bucket offset and a current time bucket associated with the particular entry and based on a current time, a refresh timeout, and a maximum timeout associated with the ager ring. The device further updates, when the particular entry is being aged during processing, the particular entry in the ager ring based on a new bucket, the current time bucket, and the bucket offset associated with the particular entry and based on the maximum timeout associated with the ager ring. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238805 | Topology Aware Smart Merge - Systems, methods, and computer readable media for managing the configuration of topologically related network devices are described. In general, devices that are “topologically related” are devices that are functionally coupled in some way (e.g., network switches sharing a common trunk line or network routers providing common router services in accordance with an established priority scheme). Specifically, techniques are disclosed for verifying or changing the configuration of a first network device based on the configuration of a second, topologically related, network device. Configuration policies (or rules) are described that are used to “bridge” the configuration of one device with that of another device. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238806 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING DEVICES NOT DIRECTLY ACCESSIBLE TO DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVER - Methods and devices for managing devices not directly accessible to device management server are provided. A device for communicating a Location Update Alert message to a Device Management (DM) Server via a DM Gateway includes a memory for storing code of a DM client and a plurality of DM MOs, each of the plurality of DM MOs including one or more nodes, a processor for executing the code of the DM client stored in the memory, a communications unit for receiving and sending messages for the DM client, and the DM client for communicating a Location Update Alert message to the DM Server via the DM Gateway upon detecting a change in an address of the device, based on a LocationUpdate node of at least one of the plurality of DM MOs. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238807 | RELAY DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICE - A method for providing a Device Management (DM) service to various devices by a relay device is provided. In the method, the relay device registers in a DM server a relay function for providing a DM service based on the relay device to at least one device. If at least one device is discovered in a Personal Area Network (PAN) managed by the relay device, the relay device determines a relay mode with the at least one device, and provides a DM service from the DM server to the at least one device according to the determined relay mode. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238808 | PROJECTOR SYSTEM AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD - A projector system includes: a plurality of computers connected to a network; and a plurality of projectors connected to the network, wherein each of the computers includes a connection request unit which gives a connection request to an arbitrary projector connected to the network, and each of the projectors includes a group information acquisition unit which acquires group information including apparatus IDs of the respective projectors of a group to which the own apparatus belongs, and a connection request unit which requests the projectors excluding the own apparatus among the projectors of the group to connection with an arbitrary computer, referring to the group information, when receiving the connection request from the arbitrary computer. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238809 | METHOD OF MANAGING SELECTION INFORMATION WITH RESPECT TO MEDIA CONTENT, AND USER DEVICE, SERVICE, AND STORAGE MEDIUM FOR EXECUTING THE METHOD - A method of managing selection information with respect to media content in a user device, a method of managing selection information with respect to media content in a server, the user device, a server, and a storage medium are provided. First information about at least one media content is output from the user device. A selection signal based on the first information is received at the user device. Second information about media content selected by the selection signal is transmitted from the user device to the server. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238810 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR STATE MANAGEMENT BASED ON INSTANT MESSAGING PLATFORM - The present invention discloses a system and a method for state management based on an instant messaging platform. The system comprises a client, a registration application server, a PS application server, and at least one third party server. The method includes the third party server searching its database according to client login information, obtaining the group information of the client and member information of the group, and returning the group information and the member information of the group to the client; then the client sending its current state and group information to the PS application server; and the PS application server, after receiving the current state and group information, sending states of other on-line members in the group to the client, and forwarding the current state of the client to other on-line members in the group. The present invention separates user management from state management in the instant messaging; its PS application server only performs state management; group and user information are stored specifically in other third party server(s), thereby not only decreasing the load of other parts of the system but also reducing the network overhead for realizing smooth operation. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238811 | Switching States Between Two Computing Devices - A method is provided to enable the person to switch use of computing devices when working with records and/or documents. A method such as described may be implemented for an individual operating two (or more) computing devices that share and synchronize sets of records. One or more operations may be performed to update and maintain correspondence between the two sets of records. A switchover event may be detected, where the event corresponds to the individual using a second computing device while already using a first computing device. Once the switchover event is detected, state of use information may be received on the second computing device. This information indicates the state of use of one or more records on the first computing device. This information may be used to affect the state of use of corresponding records on the second computing device. In particular, the corresponding records on the second computing device may be placed in a state of use, or in a selected state for subsequent use. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238812 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE PROFILING OF APPLICATION EVENTS - A system and method for high-performance profiling of web-enabled application events are provided. In one embodiment, the method includes registering a profiler as a provider to an event tracer. Information associated with an event is captured using the profiler, the event is associated with a web-enabled application. A function token is associated with the captured information, which is communicated to the event tracer. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238813 | CONSISTENT CLUSTER OPERATIONAL DATA IN A SERVER CLUSTER USING A QUORUM OF REPLICAS - A method and system for increasing server cluster availability by requiring at a minimum only one node and a quorum replica set of replica members to form and operate a cluster. Replica members maintain cluster operational data. A cluster operates when one node possesses a majority of replica members, which ensures that any new or surviving cluster includes consistent cluster operational data via at least one replica member from the immediately prior cluster. Arbitration provides exclusive ownership by one node of the replica members, including at cluster formation, and when the owning node fails. Arbitration uses a fast mutual exclusion algorithm and a reservation mechanism to challenge for and defend the exclusive reservation of each member. A quorum replica set algorithm brings members online and offline with data consistency, including updating unreconciled replica members, and ensures consistent read and update operations. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238814 | METHOD FOR CREATING GLOBAL DISTRIBUTED NAMESPACE - One example embodiment includes a method for constructing a unified namespace carried out by a domain manager service executing on a domain node in a domain network comprised of domain nodes. The method includes establishing a single, hierarchical domain tree that encompasses digital computers in a distributed data service network, where the domain manager service sends a request to all domain member nodes requesting that each domain node export the root of its sub-domain to the domain manager. The method also includes receiving the exported sub-domain roots. The method further includes grafting onto a domain root of the domain manager service the received exported sub-domain roots. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110246631 | ASSIGNING AND REMOVING CONNECTIONS UTILIZING ONLINE EVENT TRACKING - In one embodiment, a group is provided and a connection is assigned to the group. Online events involving a user and the connection are tracked. The connection is removed from the group upon passage of a period. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246632 | HEALTH MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS WITH SHADOW MODULES - A shadowing platforms and systems in a network with a remote platform are provided. The shadowing platform includes a shadow health management module and platform storage coupled to the shadow health management module. The shadow health management module is configured to receive health information from the remote platform; store the health information in the platform storage; receive status information from the remote platform; and provide the health information to the remote platform when the status information is unacceptable. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246633 | PROXY DETECTION BY SERVICE PROCESSOR - Embodiments provide methods, apparatus, and systems that enable an embedded processor to detect and configure one or more network access settings. The network access settings may enable the embedded processor to communicate over a network, via out-of-band messages, with a management server or service. Other embodiments may be disclosed or claimed. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246634 | Internet Improvement Platform with Learning Module - Redirecting DNS traffic includes receiving, at an Internet improvement platform, a DNS query issued from an Internet application running on a computing device. The Internet navigation platform determines an appropriate response to the DNS query. The response is then executed. Characteristics relative to the query and to the result of a served page may be recorded and later referenced by the Internet improvement platform. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246635 | SIMPLIFYING DETERMINATION OF DEPENDENCIES AMONG SOA SERVICES - According to an aspect of the present disclosure, artifacts representing SOA services are statically inspected to determine a set of dependencies among the SOA services. The determined set of dependencies is provided to users to facilitate analysis of dependencies among the SOA services. According to another aspect of the present disclosure, such set of dependencies are displayed in the form of a graph. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246636 | Efficient Distributed Algorithm for the Location Design and Routing Problem - The Location Design and Routing problem asks to find a subset of “depot” nodes and a spanning forest of a graph such that every connected component in the forest contains at least one depot. This problem arises in a number of both logistical and computer networking problems, for example, in selecting the number and location of distribution centers in vehicle routing networks. This problem is functionally equivalent to that of supernode selection in peer-to-peer networks. A distributed algorithm approximates a solution to this problem that runs in a logarithmic number of communication rounds with respect to the number of nodes (independent of the topology of the network), and, under assumptions on the embedding of the edge weights, whose solutions are within a factor of 2 of optimal. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110246637 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication device of the present invention is a communication device that operates in a plurality of operating modes including a managing unit for controlling operation in a managing mode capable of managing a managed communication device, the managed communication device having a managed unit for controlling operation in a managed mode of performing communication under management of the other communication device, and an operating mode setting unit for changing the operating mode to the managing mode when the communication device receives a response request signal from the managed communication device during operation in another operating mode than the managing mode. | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110252121 | RECOMMENDATION RANKING SYSTEM WITH DISTRUST - A recommendation ranking system that computes trust for entities based on negative expressions of trust. Negative expressions of trust are used to reduce the trust of entities. However, the system may discount entities that in the aggregate are distrusted. The system may be used with a social network to provide accurate, personalized recommendations for members of the social network. The network may be modeled as a voting network, with each member of the social network represented as a node and expressions of trust between members represented as weights on edges between nodes. Values of trust may be computed for nodes in the network and used to generate a recommendation. Opinions expressed on a topic may be weighted by trust in the node expressing the opinion. The system may be applied in other settings that can be modeled as a voting network, including ranking of Internet search results. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110252122 | APPLICATION LEVEL BROADCAST IN PEER OVERLAY NETWORK - A broadcast message may be initiated or received at a peer node. The node obtains an uplink bandwidth available for broadcasting the message over the network and a number of copies that can be broadcast based on the available bandwidth. The node determines a range of key values for finger nodes that should receive copies of the broadcast message from a finger table. The finger table entries include references to finger nodes and key values associated with the finger nodes. The node determines which other nodes should receive copies of the broadcast message from range of key values and the number of copies. The node also determines an End ID for each recipient node. A copy of the broadcast message and corresponding End ID is sent to a finger node if the finger node's key value is within a range of key values specified by the End ID. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110252123 | Policy And Charging Rules Function In An Extended Self Optimizing Network - A policy and charging rules function (PCRF) includes an input port, a processor, and an output port. The input port receives near-real-time network state data. The processor makes optimization decisions based upon the near-real-time network state data. The processor also produces policy enforcement messages based upon the optimization decisions. The PCRF transmits the policy enforcement message via the output port. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110258302 | System And Method For Remotely Determining Identification And Physical Location Of Equipment In A Rack - A system and method for uniquely identifying computer and support infrastructure equipment in a rack and to determine the physical location of the equipment within the rack. In one embodiment, a set of communication ports is installed in the rack, with each communication port representing a physical rack location unit. The equipment is queried via the equipment's communication port, which is coupled to one of the communication ports in the rack. Equipment which does not support identification through some protocol has its identification information stored in an intelligent device which can be queried through the same set of communication ports. A management module collects the equipment information and location and aggregates the information for the entire rack. This information can then be queried by a remotely over the network. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258303 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERSONAL DEVICE SHARING USING SOCIAL NETWORKS - A system and method is disclosed which may comprise receiving, via a computing device, from a first user having a first personal device, a request for sharing access to a resource or a state of a second personal device of a second user, the first user and second user having an on-line social network relationship; and determining whether to grant sharing access to the one of the resource and the state of the second personal device of the second user. Determining whether to grant sharing access may be based, at least in part, upon the nature of the on-line social network relationship. The method and apparatus may comprise registering, via the computing device, an ownership link for a personal device and an owner having a certified identity within the social network; storing the ownership link; and utilizing the ownership link for determining whether to grant sharing access. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258304 | SERVICE USAGE TERMINAL, SERVICE PROVIDING TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD OF SERVICE PROVIDING TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD OF SERVICE PROVIDING TERMINAL AND SERVICE PROVIDING SYSTEM - A communication control section according to the invention receives communication data on a transport layer from a service providing terminal which provides service in a higher layer than the transport layer, and a CPU performs a stopping process of a session layer relating to the service, when the communication data on the transport layer which is received by the communication control section relates to a stop request of the service. The CPU receives a trigger relating to the stop of the service, and the communication control section transmits the communication data on the transport layer including a request to the higher layer relating to the stop request of the service, to the service providing terminal, when the CPU receives the trigger. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258305 | Servlet API and Method for XMPP Protocol - A communication system and method include a server hosting an interactive voice response or self-help application in a Java virtual machine. In order to leverage the advantages and facilities of the Java servlet model, a Java XMPP (Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol) servlet container is provided for the server so that the communication application can be programmed with objects defined by an XMPP servlet API, as well as objects defined by the standards-based Java EE platform such as HTTP and SIP servlets, in order to service an XMPP client. In addition to the generic class objects of the Java servlet model, the API also provides a set of XMPP-specific class objects. The Java XMPP servlet container includes a network point at a transport level for handling network connections, an XMPP service layer for managing XMPP sessions and streams, and an application layer for managing XMPP stanzas. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258306 | Lock acquisition among node of divided cluster - The acquisition of a lock among nodes of a divided cluster is disclosed. A method is performable by each of at least one node of the cluster. A node waits for a delay corresponding to its identifier. The node asserts intent to acquire the lock by writing its identifier to X and Y variables where another node has failed to acquire the lock. The node waits for another node to acquire the lock where the other node has written to X, and proceeds where Y remains equal to its own identifier. The node waits for another node to acquire the lock where the other node has written to a Z variable, and writes its own identifier to Z and proceeds where the other node has failed. The node writes a value to Y indicating that it is acquiring the lock, and maintains acquisition by periodically writing to Z. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258307 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS - The present invention provides an apparatus, system and method for use in remotely diagnosing electronic devices and/or providing content. The method for use in remotely diagnosing includes the initiating a diagnostic analysis of an electronic device, identifying the electronic device, receiving scripts communicated over a distributed network for diagnosing, remotely initiating diagnostic instructions with the scripts and receiving a response based on the instruction. The method can further determine further diagnostic instructions based on responses, and remotely initiate further instructions with the scripts. Additionally, a system for use in remotely diagnosing electronic devices includes a script generator coupled with a distributed network, and a remote diagnostic controller coupled with the distributed network and with an electronic device. The script generator compiles scripts and forwards them over the distributed network. The diagnostic controller implements the scripts to forward instructions to and to receive replies from the electronic device. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110264777 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND METHOD - A communications device includes a message manager that controls communication of subscription messages between applications programs on the device and a network to subscribe to messaging events. The messaging events provide message information in response to conditions occurring as determined by entities within the network. The message manager includes a subscription table for storing an association between messaging events and the applications programs, which have subscribed to the messaging events, and receives an instruction from one of the applications programs to subscribe to a messaging event and to determine from the subscription table whether one or more of the other applications programs has currently subscribed to the messaging event. The message manager, upon receipt of an incoming message generated in accordance with the messaging event, communicates the message information contained in the received incoming message to one or more of applications programs, which have subscribed to the messaging event. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264778 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING LOAD IN A SERVER - A method, apparatus, and system for managing load in a server are provided. The server performs events for a plurality of electronic communication devices, each of the devices enabled to transmit to the server, at a respective given time and at a respective given frequency, a request to perform a respective event. The server receives the requests and determines that its load is above a threshold load value during a given time period when the requests arrive. In response, for a subset of the devices, the server transmits a delay time to each electronic communication device in the subset. The delay time causes each device in the subset to change the respective given time to a respective new time comprising the delay time added to the respective given time such that a next request is transmitted from each device in the subset to the server at the respective new time. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264779 | Using Values Represented as Internet Protocol (IP) Addresses to Access Resources in a Non-Internet Protocol Address Space - Non-Internet Protocol (IP) centric resources are accessed based on a value in the form of an IP address. This value (represented as the IP address) is converted to a non-IP address, which is to used access one or more non-IP address space resources. This value (represented as the IP address) typically includes an encoding of the non-IP address and/or an indirect reference (e.g., table index, pointer to a memory location) to the non-IP address. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264780 | ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, access network discovery information is received from an access network discovery and selection function server, access network discovery assistance information is received from a separate server, and the received access network discovery and access network discovery assistance information is used in network discovery. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264781 | TECHNIQUES FOR DIRECTORY DATA RESOLUTION - Techniques for directory data resolution are disclosed. In one particular exemplary embodiment, the techniques may be realized as a method for directory data resolution comprising receiving data identifying one or more groups of interest of a directory server, traversing, using a processor, one or more directory entries contained in hierarchical directory data, the traversal starting at a directory entry corresponding to a current group of interest, reading a first directory entry to identify a member contained in the first directory entry, adding, in the event a member is contained in the first directory entry, the current group of interest to a mapping for the member. The method may also include use of caching and recursion. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264782 | Systems and methods for improved multisite management of converged communication systems and computer systems - The present invention discloses improved systems and methods for multisite management of computer server systems and in particular converged communication systems based on a decentralized architecture. Certain and various aspects relating to atomic error handling, transaction-based authentication/security, intelligent bandwidth management, decoupled data/configuration messaging, improved scalability, auto-detection functions, business metrics, etc., also are disclosed. A console is disclosed that communicates with each of a plurality of converged communications systems, e.g., preferably through the use of sockets. The actual traffic load is decentralized among the computer server systems, as each one uses direct connections (e.g., via an enhanced file transfer protocol) to access update/configuration data as needed. In addition, an improved communication protocol is disclosed that is optimized for the multisite management architecture of the present invention. An improved set of graphical user interface (GUI) features are described that improve the efficiency of the management of multiple systems. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264783 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING DATA FROM A PLURALITY OF FEED SOURCES - The present specification relates generally to computing devices and more particular relates to a method and apparatus for receiving data from a plurality of feed sources at a plurality of servers via a mobile device comprising a processor interconnected with a display. In one aspect, the mobile device is configured to start a feed service; register feed adapters with the feed service; receive content data via the feed adapters; and generate a list view of the content data on a display of the mobile device. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264784 | Method And System To Distribute Fault Information In A Large Scale Communication Network System - The present invention relates to a method and an arrangement for distributing fault information from a lower level network management node to a higher level network management node in a network management architecture comprising modules logically representing network nodes and network links under management. The higher level network management node subscribes to at least some detailed fault information. And, a notification comprising a summary of fault information sent by the lower level network management node is received by the higher level network management node. Then, the higher level network management node retrieves the subscribed detailed fault information from said received notification. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264785 | System And Method For Prioritizing Components - A system and method for prioritizing components is provided. Components, including at least one requester components and at least two service components are maintained. The components each include a historical context and access information. The requester component requests the historical contexts associated with one or more of the service components. The one or more service components are filtered to determine which of the one or more service components are accessible to the requester component using the access information. The accessible service components for the requester component are prioritized based on the associated historical contexts. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264786 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING HYPERVISOR LEVEL DATA SERVICES FOR SERVER VIRTUALIZATION - A system for cloud-based data services for multiple enterprises, including a plurality of cloud hypervisors that cooperatively provide cloud-based services to multiple enterprises, each hypervisor including a plurality of cloud virtual servers, each cloud virtual server being associated with an enterprise, at least one cloud virtual disk that is read from and written to by the at least one virtual server, each cloud virtual disk being associated with an enterprise, and a virtual data services appliance, which provides cloud-based data services, and multiple data services managers, one data services manager per respective enterprise, each of which coordinates the respective virtual data services appliances for those cloud hypervisors that service its corresponding enterprise. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110270959 | Systems, Methods, and Computer Readable Media for Providing Applications Style Functionality to a User - Systems, methods, and computer readable media of providing applications style functionality to a user of a mobile radio terminal are disclosed. In certain embodiments, the systems, methods, and computer readable media include the steps of receiving a data stream transmission having a plurality of states, wherein each state is associated with output instructions and storage instructions, and wherein the plurality of states is configured such that moving through the states creates the appearance of executing an application on the mobile radio terminal; decoding the data stream transmission and caching each of the plurality of states with the associated output instructions according to the associated storage instructions; rendering a first state; responsive to an event on the mobile radio terminal, moving from the first state to a second state by applying the output instructions associated with the second state; and communicating a change of state to a server. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110270960 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ANNOUNCING TRAFFIC ENGINEERING PARAMETERS OF COMPOSITE TRANSPORT GROUPS - An approach is provided for announcing aggregate characteristics of a composite transport group (CTG) for traffic engineering. Information specifying characteristics of a plurality of component links of the CTG is received. An aggregate characteristic of the CTG is determined based the information. The aggregate characteristic is announced to a label switched network for provisioning label switched paths on the CTG. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110270961 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, SELECTOR, REMOTE OPERATION SYSTEM, SCAN CODE TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREFOR - An information processing apparatus includes a code converting portion that converts a scan code output from a keyboard into a corresponding key code, a data converting portion that converts the key code into packets, and a changing portion that changes an output destination of the scan code from the code converting portion to the data converting portion, when an application software to operate a server apparatus remotely located is activated in the information processing apparatus, which is in connection with the server apparatus over a network. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110270962 | METHOD OF BUILDING SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT SERVER - Devices unnecessary for deployment are invalidated during the deployment. A method of building a system and a management server for establishing a system according to the present invention have the following configuration. The management server obtains server information from a server connected through a network, refers to the obtained server information to select devices unnecessary for deployment among devices connected to the server, and invalidates the selected devices. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110276673 | VIRTUALLY EXTENDING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF A NETWORK DEVICE - Virtually extending the functionality of a network device to a server is provided. A virtual device which is in communication with the network device and which virtually represents functionality of the network device receives a function request from the server. The function request corresponds to a function for the network device to perform. A manner to perform the function for the network device based on the function request is determined. The function corresponding to the function request is performed based on the determined manner. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276674 | RESOLVING INFORMATION IN A MULTITENANT DATABASE ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed herein are techniques for creating a representation of dependency relationships between computing resources within a computing environment. In some implementations, one or more sources for dependency analysis may be identified. Each source may be capable of being accessed to provide computing functionality via the computing environment. Each source may include one or more references to a respective one or more computing resources. Each computing resource may define a unit of the computing functionality available within the computing environment. A plurality of dependency relationships may be identified based on the one or more sources. A dependency relationship representation may be created based on the identified dependency relationships. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276675 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MIGRATING NETWORKED SYSTEMS ACROSS ADMINISTRATIVE DOMAINS - Systems and methods for determining whether networked system migrations are successful are disclosed. In accordance with one method, a first set of properties of the networked system on a source platform in a first administrative domain is determined. Further, the method includes transferring the networked system to a destination platform in a second administrative domain. In addition, a second set of properties of the transferred system on the destination platform is determined, where the first and second sets of properties include functional properties and at least one of: performance properties, security properties or reliability properties. The method also includes outputting an indication that the transfer of the system to the destination platform is successful in response to determining that one or more of the properties of the second set are equivalent to corresponding properties of the first set. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276676 | METHOD OF PROVIDING WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION SERVICE USING IP AND APPARATUS THEREOF - Disclosed is an apparatus for providing a wireless data communication service using Internet protocol. The apparatus includes a connection manager (CM) which periodically receives network information from a base station, and updates and stores the received network information; and an application unit which receives preset network information according to each application among the network information from the connection manager, and performs a function according to each application. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276677 | CONTENT DELIVERY MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTENT DELIVERY MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND CONTENT DELIVERY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - An apparatus, a method, and a program for managing content delivery by which a content is able to be delivered by an optimum delivery variation for the user even when the delivery condition of the content varies with time are provided. The content delivery management apparatus prospects a delivery condition at each of a plurality of future times for a plurality of content delivery variations respectively, and sends a delivery condition data including a correspondence relation between the prospected delivery condition and the plurality of future times to a user terminal. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276678 | MANAGEMENT METHOD AND A MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR VOLUME - It is made possible to update information registered in a database of iSNS, SLP and the like in response to a configurational change in a storage device, and for a host computer to discover a disk volume. In response to changes in contents of operation to alter a storage configuration such as in creating or deleting a volume or LUN, contents of the alteration are reflected in the database of iSNS or SLP. Also, in response to a change in setting of LUN masking, a discovery domain of iSNS or attribute values of SLP are updated so that the host computer can discover the disk volume. Also, objects and services are reregistered periodically according to a registration period of iSNS or lifetime of SLP to prevent registered contents from expiring. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110282980 | DYNAMIC PROTECTION OF A RESOURCE DURING SUDDEN SURGES IN TRAFFIC - Various embodiments of systems and methods for dynamically protecting a server during sudden surges in traffic are described herein. A gatekeeper is triggered by an incoming system request. Based upon queue size associated with the server and expiration of the elements of the queue, the gatekeeper determines whether to forward the incoming system request to the server. The queue size comprises a maximum allowable load within a time window. The expired elements in the queue are removed by comparing the difference of current time and time-stamped time, with time window. If the queue is not full or even if the queue is full but one of the elements in the queue is expired, the incoming system request may be forwarded to the server. If the queue is full and there are no expired elements in the queue, the incoming system request may be dropped. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110282981 | BEHAVIORAL RULE RESULTS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: receiving a message at a PCRN; determining whether a policy decision should be made with regard to the received message; when a policy decision should be made: identifying a rule of a plurality of rules as applicable to processing the received message, wherein the identified rule specifies an action to be taken in response to the received message, performing the action in response to the received message; and when a policy decision should not be made, processing the received message according to normal procedures. Such action may include one or more of the following: rejecting a request, accepting a request, modifying a request, and performing a predefined routine. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110282982 | DYNAMIC APPLICATION PLACEMENT BASED ON COST AND AVAILABILITY OF ENERGY IN DATACENTERS - An optimization framework for hosting sites that dynamically places application instances across multiple hosting sites based on the energy cost and availability of energy at these sites, application SLAs (service level agreements), and cost of network bandwidth between sites, just to name a few. The framework leverages a global network of hosting sites, possibly co-located with renewable and non-renewable energy sources, to dynamically determine the best datacenter (site) suited to place application instances to handle incoming workload at a given point in time. Application instances can be moved between datacenters subject to energy availability and dynamic power pricing, for example, which can vary hourly in day-ahead markets and in a time span of minutes in realtime markets. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110282983 | Multimedia Communication Device Within Cloud Computing Techniques - The present invention provides an improved multimedia communication device within cloud computing techniques including a display mechanism for multimedia playing; an operation mechanism linking with the display mechanism for interpretation and implementation of the display mechanism; and a servo mechanism linking with the display mechanism for certification program of the operation mechanism and transmission of the list of multimedia service to the display mechanism; thus, the multimedia playing frequency channel located in our server cloud computing is detected at any time and the contents of the frequency channel are updated immediately; not only the needed frequency channel is quick found by an user, but also it ensures that all frequency channels located in our server cloud computing are normally linked by the user. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110282984 | Generating Displays of Networking Addresses - Technologies for generating displays of user-defined blocks of networking addresses on a map of an associated address space are provided. Each block of networking addresses is described in a user-defined table with a start address and a map size. The display for each block of network addresses may be rendered on the map at a location based on the relative position of the start address within the associated address space and of a size based on the mask size in relation to the associated address space. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110282985 | NETWORK AND INTERFACE SELECTION ON A COMPUTING DEVICE CAPABLE OF ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS VIA MULTIPLE NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA - A system and method for carrying out network and interface selections across multiple media is disclosed. The disclosed system facilitates automated network interface configuration decision-making that spans a set of networks supporting communications via differing media. A set of media specific modules associated with differing communications media acquire network interface status/capabilities information. A rules engine thereafter applies a designated network selection rule(s) to the acquired network interface status/capabilities information, and any other appropriate parameters attributable to either an interface or network, to select one or more networks and interfaces with which to establish/maintain a connection. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110289200 | Mobile Device Workload Management For Cloud Computing Using SIP And Presence To Control Workload And Method Thereof - A method is implemented in a computer infrastructure having computer executable code tangibly embodied on a computer readable storage medium having programming instructions. The programming instructions are operable to manage workload for cloud computing by transferring workload to at least one mobile device using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289201 | Method and System to Add Video Capability to any Voice over Internet Protocol (Vo/IP) Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Phone - Systems and methods of configuring an add-on device to augment the capability of existing endpoint infrastructure are disclosed. In one embodiment, a video add-on device is configured to receive, augment or downgrade, and forward messages for an existing SIP audio-only phone. The video add-on device in this embodiment can receive messages from the existing SIP audio-only phone and augment the messages with information regarding the additional video capabilities being provided. The messages can then be forwarded to an infrastructure SIP Proxy/Registrar for further routing. From the perspective of the infrastructure SIP Proxy/Registrar and other network attached devices the outbound messages from the video add-on device appear as if they originated from the video add-on device, other devices will not be directly aware of the existing SIP audio phone providing its designed function. Utilizing devices similar to the disclosed video add-on device may allow incremental corporate network endpoint upgrades. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289202 | DISTRIBUTED POLICY SERVICES FOR MOBILE AND NOMADIC NETWORKING - A method of disseminating topology information related to a subscriber in a system having one or more networks, each network having access devices and policy functions, includes identifying a current location of the subscriber by a serving policy function. The method further includes forwarding information relating to the current location from the serving policy function to an anchor policy function associated with the subscriber. The process of identifying the location of the subscriber and forwarding the information to the anchor policy server is repeated each time the subscriber changes its physical location. The system uses the current location information to route policy information from the anchor policy function to the policy function that is serving the subscriber. The system may use a push model, a pull model, or a combination thereof, to disseminate the topology information. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110295987 | TRANSLATION OF TECHNOLOGY-AGNOSTIC MANAGEMENT COMMANDS INTO MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media to translate technology agnostic management commands into multiple management protocols are disclosed. A method includes providing a software library that is includable in a web-based enterprise management (WBEM) application. The software library includes instructions executable by a computer to generate one or more classes. The instructions are also executable to bind a technology-agnostic WBEM command to one or more in a first management protocol. The instructions are further executable to bind the technology-agnostic WBEM command to one or more commands in a second management protocol that is different from the first management protocol. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295988 | MANAGING DATA ON COMPUTER AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Protecting personal information by generating entity-specific aliases for use in communication with third parties is disclosed. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295989 | NETWORK SYSTEM, NETWORK MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND GATEWAY DEVICE - It provides a network management system in which the expandability of a network management device is increased, and the cost for expanding the function is suppressed. A gateway is provided between an SNMP network and the internet, making it possible to operate an MIB using an HTTP and receive a Trap. The network management device is provided as a Web service for a Web browser, making it possible to cooperate with the other various Web services and easily expand the function by adding the Web service to the network management device. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295990 | Method and Apparatus for Embedding Information in a Short URL - A uniform resource locator (URL) encoding system and method are provided for embedding message information in a compressed URL includes associating a link identifier with a first URL, the first URL identifying a target web page. A message identifier representative of at least one message parameter is generated and the link identifier and the message identifier are combined using a reversible pairing function to generate a first combined identifier, the first combined identifier in a first base number system. The first combined identifier is converted to a second combined identifier in a second base number system which is greater than the first base number system. The second URL is generated using the second combined identifier. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295991 | Network system, controller, and network control method - A network system includes appliances provided in a network; a switch provided in the network; and a controller connected to the appliances and the switch. The switch contains a flow table. Entries in the flow table each specify an action to be performed on a packet matching with a matching condition. Upon receiving a packet, the switch refers to the flow table and performs the action specified by matching one of the entries which matches the received packet, on the received packet. A first appliance of the appliances performs a first packet process on a packet belonging to an existing flow, when being selected as an active appliance. When the active appliance is switched from the first appliance to a second appliance of the appliances, the controller performs a switching process after performing a shortcut process. In the shortcut process, the controller instructs the switch to set a first entry into the flow table, the first entry specifying that the first packet process is to be performed on a packet belonging to the existing flow. In the switching process, the controller instructs the switch to set a second entry into the flow table, the second entry specifying that a packet which is addressed to the active appliance and belongs to a new flow other than the existing flow is to be transferred to the second appliance. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295992 | SERVER AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICE AND DEVICE RECEIVING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICE - A method for providing a Device Management (DM) service in an M2M environment that enables intelligent data collection and communication through an M2M communication function is provided. In the method, a Network Operator Server (NOS) or an ES provides a DM service menu to a subscriber device. When the subscriber device selects a desired service from the DM service menu, the NOS delegates the DM service authority for a network subscriber to the ES. The ES provides the DM service through an M2M communication with the subscriber device. The ES integrates the DM results and transmits the integrated DM results to the network operator. Accordingly, the NOS can provide an efficient DM service to more devices at a lower cost, by minimal interaction with the ES, through the cooperation enterprise specialized in the DM service. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110295993 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING APPARATUS PERFORMANCE - The method comprises and executes constitutional information collection processing of collecting constitutional information of the apparatus, constitutional information of a logical unit which is a logical existence obtained by abstracting the apparatus, constitutional information of the application and constitutional information of the dependency relation of the performance established among the apparatus, the logical unit and the application; performance information collection processing of collecting each performance information of the apparatus, the logical unit and the application; and saturation indication detection processing of analyzing a correlation between a change value with time of the performance information of the apparatus and a change value with time of the performance information of the logical unit having the dependency relation of the performance with respect to the apparatus for a predetermined period, and detecting that the apparatus has the saturation indication, when a correlation coefficient obtained by the correlation analysis is a predetermined threshold value or more. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110302286 | MANAGING COOLING DEVICES AND COMPUTING NODES IN AN INFRASTRUCTURE - A system for managing computing nodes and cooling devices cooling the computing nodes in an infrastructure includes one or more managers. The one or more managers receive a service request for a workload to be run on one or more of the computing nodes. Candidate workload placements for placing the workload on the one or more computing nodes are determined. A first cost associated with each candidate workload placements using a computational network model. A second cost associated with the cooling devices for each candidate workload placement is determined using a thermal network model. A cost function is minimized. The cost function determines an economic cost of operating the infrastructure while running the requested workload and is based upon the first cost, the second cost. A candidate workload placement is selected from the candidate workload placements based on the minimized cost function. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110302287 | QUALITY OF SERVICE CONTROL - Method(s) for providing Quality of Service (QoS) control in a plurality of sections of a network environment are described herein. Each of the plurality of sections includes at least one device to provide QoS control in the respective section. Further, in each of the plurality of sections of the network environment, one or more fields of a WIT are identified. An application command, generated at a section of the network environment, is provided quality of service in the plurality of sections, based on the one or more fields identified from the WIT. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110302288 | Enhanced Browser Cookie Management - Systems and methods of managing cookie handling settings provide for retrieving a web page based on a browser request and detecting one or more cookie requests associated with the web page being viewed rather than the web page associated with the cookie. A real-time dialog containing data corresponding to each cookie request associated with the web page being viewed may be generated while the web page is displayed. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110302289 | SELECTION OF A POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION DEVICE - A system includes a first device, in a first network; a second device, in a second network; and a policy rules and charging function (PCRF) database that associates Internet Protocol (IP) addresses assigned to user equipment (UE) devices with PCRF devices; where the first device is to identify a plurality of policy rules and charging function (PCRF) devices in the first network, select a PCRF device from the plurality of PCRF devices based on a selection rule, and provide information about the selected PCRF device to the second device; and where the second device is to receive a request to set up a communication session associated with a UE device; determine an IP address associated with the UE device; identify a PCRF device, based on the determined IP address, by accessing the PCRF database, and send session information associated with the communication session to the identified PCRF device. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110302290 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CHANGES IN A NETWORK DATACENTER - The system and method described herein may include a configuration management database containing various configuration items describing every known resource in a datacenter. Upon receiving a request proposing changes to the datacenter, the proposed changes may be approved for automated execution (i.e., without human intervention) in response to analyzing relationships modeled in the configuration management database and determining that the proposed changes have no potential impacts on essential or critical resources. Otherwise, an impact workflow may be created to coordinate interaction between various human participants to resolve the potential impacts. Further, in contexts where multiple proposed changes have been approved, the multiple proposed changes may be analyzed to detect any potential conflicts. Thus, the multiple proposed changes may be approved for automated execution in response to detecting no potential conflicts, or a conflict workflow may be created to similarly coordinate human interaction to resolve the conflicts. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110307589 | DEVICE COMMISSIONING AND REPLACEMENT - Systems and methods for associating commissioning files with components in a networked environment are provided. In one embodiment, a unique network identifier of a system component, such as a MAC address, and a network address, such as an IPv4 address may stored in an association file to link components on a network layout map to specific commissioning files. The network address may have a lease configured to infinity or to a power cycle of a component on the network. Further aspects relate to detecting if a system component has been replaced with another component. The detection may determine whether the new component has a unique network identifier not located in a association file. A user input may indicate whether the component is new or a replacement. If the new component is a replacement for another component, the unique network identifier of the first system component may be received and recorded. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307590 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A BUSINESS CALENDAR ACROSS A SHARED COMPUTING INFRASTRUCTURE - A method of scheduling availability for a computing infrastructure in a shared computing environment is disclosed. The method comprises assigning a new schedule of service to a software application in the computing environment, propagating the new schedule of service assigned to the software application to a plurality of computing components that support the software application, where the computing infrastructure is comprised of the plurality of computing components having a hierarchical relationship with each other, and determining a schedule of service for a given computing component in the computing infrastructure by aggregating schedules of service propagated to the given computing component. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307591 | MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND COMPUTER SYSTEM MANAGEMENT METHOD - A system management apparatus for managing a computer system receives plug-in distribution data from a plug-in distribution apparatus. The plug-in distribution data comprises plug-in definition information and template definition information. The system management apparatus uses the plug-in definition information to acquire information from the management target apparatus, and determines whether or not to issue an alert based on the template definition information. The distribution of the plug-in and the template at the same time means that the user can avoid confusion regarding the threshold setting. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307592 | Method and system to collect network addresses and transfer them to a network system - An information system network and method for use thereof for remotely gathering network addresses and sending a message to a network address, the system including at least a remote information collecting device and a network including an input device and a network device, the collecting device in remotely gathering network address and transferring the network address to the input device to be sent to a corresponding network device. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307593 | Alarm Notification Between Customer Premises Equipment And A Remote Management Server - In one embodiment, a method for alarm notification between a customer premises device and a remote management server interfacing with each other through a remote management protocol, includes detecting an alarm condition in the customer premises device, and transferring an explicit alarm notification from the customer premises device to the remote management server over the remote management protocol. The remote management server responds to the explicit alarm notification. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307594 | NETWORK SYSTEM - Provided is a network system. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307595 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING OBJECT UPDATES IN A HOME NETWORK - A method and apparatus for determining an object update in a home network. In a method for determining an object change in a home network, a media controller receives an object update identifier (objectUpdateID) and an initial update identifier (initUpdateID) for an object from an accessed media server, compares the objectUpdateID and the initUpdateID with a system update identifier (systemUpdateID) that was previously stored in the media controller, when the media controller previously accessed the media server, and determines whether the object is updated according to the comparison result. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307596 | METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING REPLICATION ENVIRONMENT AND STORAGE SYSTEM - A management computer collects a usage condition of a volume from a host computer and a storage apparatus at each site, consolidates management thereof, and prevents a volume from duplicating among applications as a copy source. This makes it possible to select a used volume in an application as a copy source without excess or deficiency and to create a copy pair configuration definition without duplication or incompatibility. If a replication environment is constructed in a large-scale storage system, the consolidated management of a usage condition of a volume collected from the host computer and the storage apparatus at each site makes it possible to create a copy pair configuration definition by a task constituted by a plurality of applications. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307597 | METHOD FOR CREATING GLOBAL DISTRIBUTED NAMESPACE - One example embodiment includes a method for constructing a unified namespace carried out by a domain manager service executing on a domain node in a domain network comprised of domain nodes. The method includes establishing a single, hierarchical domain tree that encompasses digital computers in a distributed data service network, wherein the domain manager service sends a request to all domain nodes requesting that each domain node export the root of its sub-domain to the domain manager service. The method also includes receiving the exported sub-domain roots. The method further includes grafting onto a domain root of the domain manager service the received exported sub-domain roots. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110314139 | MANAGING A CLIENT APPLICATION SESSION BASED ON A STATUS OF A LOCAL WIRELESS CONNECTION BETWEEN PRIMARY AND SECONDARY COMMUNICATION TERMINALS - In an embodiment, a secondary communication terminal (CT) executes a client application to engage in a client application session (CAS), the secondary CT configured to connect to a primary CT over a local wireless connection (LWC), the primary CT having a higher-quality user interface environment as compared to the secondary CT. The secondary CT establishes the LWC with the primary CT during the CAS and, responsive to the establishment, negotiates with the primary CT to selectively transition the CAS to the primary CT. Alternatively, the primary CT executes the client application before the establishment and negotiates with the secondary CT to selectively transition the CAS to the secondary CT. In another embodiment, the primary CT hosts the CAS while the LWC is established with the secondary CT. Then, upon disconnection of the LWC, the secondary AT selectively transitions the CAS to the secondary CT. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110314140 | Capability Query Handling in a Communication Network - A method and apparatus for handling a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) OPTIONS capability query message in a communication network. A SIP proxy node receives a SIP OPTIONS message from a querying node. It sends the message to a plurality of devices, and receives a response from at least two of the plurality of devices. Each response includes an identity of the responding device and an indication of the capabilities of the responding device. Each received response is stored in a memory, and a reply message is generated. The reply message includes the identities and capabilities of all of the responding devices. This reply message is then sent to the querying node. This allows the querying node to receive capability information relating to all of the callee's devices rather than just the one that responds first. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110320578 | Operations support system with modular architecture - An operations support system comprises a plurality of functionality handler modules each provide a respective operations support functionality. Each one of the functionality handler modules is an independent system architecture module with respect to each other one of the functionality handler modules thereby allowing each one of the functionality handler modules to be selectively enabled and disabled with respect to each other one of the functionality handler modules. One or more communication clients are configured for supporting communication between the operations support system and a network node management system. One or more handler interfaces are configured for supporting communication between each one of the functionality handler modules and the one or more communication client. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320579 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - An information processing apparatus includes a storage unit storing a predetermined application, a management unit managing information on a service provided by the application, a service registration unit registering, when receiving data used to register the service from another apparatus, the service by a process of the application in accordance with the data, a generation unit generating information on the service registered by the service registration unit, and an updating unit updating the information which is generated by the generation unit and which is managed by the management unit. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320580 | Charging Method, System and Reporting Method for Terminal Accessing Through Multiple Access Networks - The present invention provides a charging method and system for a terminal being accessed through multiple access networks, and a reporting method for a terminal being accessed through multiple access networks. When the terminal establishes one IP Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session with a packet data network through at least one access network, an IP-CAN Type parameter of each access network connection passed through by a data flow of a service accessed by said terminal is sent to a charging subsystem, and said charging subsystem charges differently for data flows passing through different access network connections of said terminal according to said IP-CAN Type parameter. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320581 | Reallocation of Serving Proxy Function in IMS - The invention relates to a method of changing allocation of Serving-Call Session Control Functions (S-CSCFs) to a user of an IMS network. The user is being provided with services via a first S-CSCF allocated to the user. The method includes implementing a re-allocation instruction at the first S-CSCF. The reallocation instruction includes criteria for de-allocation of the user from the first S-CSCF. The S-CSCF determines if the criteria are met; and if the criteria are met, de-allocates the user. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20120005322 | Stateless-agentless system and method of managing data in a computing environment - A data management system and method including a point of control configured to manage one or more target systems. The point of control divides a command sequence into a number of individual commands, and provides the individual commands to the stateless-agentless target system for execution. Furthermore, the point of control maintains the state of the command sequence and monitors the target system. As such, the target system is both “stateless” (i.e., the target system maintains no state information related to the command sequence) and “agentless” (i.e., the target system includes no software for the purpose of monitoring the target system. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120005323 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE DISCOVERY AND DEPLOYMENT IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA NETWORK - An IP multimedia residential gateway (IMRG) determines device capabilities and service priority profiles of client devices. The determined device capabilities and service priority profiles, comprising service classes and service class priorities, may be transmitted to the service managers for service deployment. The service managers may provide services to client devices based on corresponding device capabilities and service priority profiles. The IMRG may track device capabilities and service priority profiles for self-configuration. Available services supported by networks may be discovered during network discovery. The discovered services are announced to the client devices. The IMRG may communicate content of the announced services with the client devices based on corresponding device capabilities and service priority profiles. The service managers schedules services for the client devices based on corresponding device capabilities and service priority profiles, and may communicate content of the scheduled services to the client devices via the IMRG. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120005324 | Method and System for Operations Management in a Telecommunications Terminal - A method for managing an operation in a service terminal through a remote server, wherein said service terminal comprises a plurality of modules, and a communications interface configured for communicating with said remote server, wherein said remote server comprises a plurality of applications and a communications interface. The method comprises the following steps: generating an event as a response to a user interaction with one of said modules of the service terminal; associating an information to said event; sending said information to the remote server through said communications interface; processing said received information in the remote server and running an application which obtains a response to the information associated to said event; sending said response to the service terminal through the communications interface; processing said response and identifying the module of the service terminal affected by said response; and interacting with said module by performing an operation in the service terminal. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120005325 | Systems and methods for automated processing of devices - A system and method for automatic provisioning of devices from a host system is disclosed. A computer program operating at the host system detects new devices and performs a series of provisioning operations. These provisioning operations are pre-defined by system administrator and are customizable for each enterprise's unique environment. When the devices are shipped from device manufacturers to enterprise customers, these devices have no enterprise specific information provisioned in them. When the system administrator receives these devices they have to perform several manual and labor intensive operations on the devices. The system and method described automate the provisioning of devices thus eliminating the manual steps that are currently being performed by the users. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120005326 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REMOTE DEVICE MANAGEMENT - The present disclosure provides systems and methods for remote device management. According to various embodiments, a local intelligent electronic device (IED) may be in communication with a remote IED via a limited bandwidth communication link, such as a serial link. The limited bandwidth communication link may not support traditional remote management interfaces. According to one embodiment, a local IED may present an operator with a management interface for a remote IED by rendering locally stored templates. The local IED may render the locally stored templates using sparse data obtained from the remote IED. According to various embodiments, the management interface may be a web client interface and/or an HTML interface. The bandwidth required to present a remote management interface may be significantly reduced by rendering locally stored templates rather than requesting an entire management interface from the remote IED. According to various embodiments, an IED may comprise an encryption transceiver. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120005327 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND PATH MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR MULTI-HOST ENVIRONMENT - A storage system and a path management method, which can facilitate node replacement, are proposed. In the storage system, the host sets plural paths between the host and the volume and holds path information composed of management information on each of the paths. The management apparatus includes an integrated path management unit that collects the path information on each of the paths defined between the host and the volume from the corresponding host to manage all the collected information as integrated path information; retrieves an alternate path going through a node other than a specified node but that has the same function as the specified node, for the path going through the specified node, based on the integrated path information; and displays results of the retrieval. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120011237 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSFERRING REMOTE CONTEXT - Example systems and methods provide remote context transfer and session termination. A computer-implemented method for remote context transfer between user sessions with a clinical information system includes accepting a user log on request for a user session at a first clinical information system; identifying one or more open sessions associated with the user; saving a context associated with one of the one or more open sessions; terminating the one or more open sessions identified as associated with the user; and transferring the saved context to the user session at the first clinical information system for use by the user in the user session. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011238 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING DYNAMICALLY CREATED GROUPS - A system for transmission, reception and accumulation of the knowledge packets to plurality of channel nodes in the network operating distributedly in a peer to peer environment via installable one or more role active Human Operating System (HOS) applications in a digital devise of each of channel node, a network controller registering and providing desired HOS applications and multiple developers developing advance communication and knowledge management applications and each of subscribers exploiting the said network resources by leveraging and augmenting taxonomically and ontologically classified knowledge classes expressed via plurality search macros and UKID structures facilitating said expert human agents for knowledge invocation and support services and service providers providing information services in the preidentified taxonomical classes, wherein each of channel nodes communicating with the unknown via domain specific supernodes each facilitating social networking and relationships development leading to human grid which is searchable via Universal Desktop Search by black box search module. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011239 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATED WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus for automated management of workflow that allows for the automatic creation, organization, and updating of workflows upon the receipt or designation of one or more messages. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011240 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING VIRTUAL PORTS ON STORAGE SYSTEMS - A storage system is configured to create and manage virtual ports on physical ports. The storage system can transfer associations between virtual ports and physical ports when a failure occurs in a physical port or a link connected to the physical port so that a host can access volumes under the virtual ports through another physical port. The storage system can also change associations between virtual ports and physical ports by taking into account the relative loads on the physical ports. When a virtual machine is migrated from one host computer to another, the loads on the physical ports in the storage system can be used to determine whether load balancing should take place. Additionally, the storage system can transfer virtual ports to a remote storage system that will take over the virtual ports, so that a virtual machine can be migrated to remote location. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011241 | LICENSE AUDITING OF SOFTWARE USAGE BY ASSOCIATING SOFTWARE ACTIVATIONS WITH DEVICE IDENTIFIERS - The provided software application includes a module that determines a machine fingerprint of a client device at an appropriate time, such as during initial software load on the client. The fingerprint may comprise various machine-determinable measures of system configuration for the client. Each application copy may be associated with a serial number. A license host may collect serial number, fingerprint and/or IP address information from clients on which the application is installed. The host may generate a map of application installations, including geographic locations of installations and number of unique serial numbers per client in specified regions. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120016975 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK RESOURCE REQUESTS - Systems and methods for managing network resource requests are described herein. Servers may be configured to operate in communication with a network. A server, in accordance with embodiments described in the present disclosure, includes a resource request handling program that is stored in a memory device. The resource request handling program is configured to extract an abbreviated resource request into at least an abbreviated site name and a page symbol. The server also includes a database that is configured to store a first relationship between the abbreviated site name and a web site. The database may also store a second relationship between the page symbol and a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) address of a web page associated with the web site. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120016976 | PERSISTING FILE SYSTEM INFORMATION ON MOBILE DEVICES - A communication device and method are provided for storing and updating file system information for a network resource such as a content server or application server over a wireless connection. Data pertaining to a folder structure or content listing is received at the device and stored in persistent memory. Upon determination that the stored file system information has aged beyond a predetermined threshold and that a last modification time for the network resource is later than a time associated with the first file system information, a request is transmitted over a wireless connection for new file system information for the network resource. The request may be intercepted by a mobile data server that communicates with the network resource to provide the information to the communication device. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120023209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCALABLE AUTOMATED CLUSTER CONTROL BASED ON SERVICE LEVEL OBJECTIVES TO SUPPORT APPLICATIONS REQUIRING CONTINUOUS AVAILABILITY - A computer-implemented method for managing the state of a multi-node cluster includes receiving an event indicative of a possible change in a current cluster state. A goal cluster state is identified if the current cluster state does not meet a service level objective. The goal cluster state includes a replication tree for replication among the member nodes of the goal cluster state. A transition plan for transitioning from the current cluster state to the goal cluster state is generated. The transition plan is executed to transition from the current cluster state to the goal cluster state. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023210 | SERVER SYSTEM AND OPERATION METHOD THEREOF - An operation method for a server system includes: (A) under control of a hardware abstraction layer (HAL), a plurality of node management units sharing a hardware resource; (B) if one of the node management units needs to use the hardware resource, the node management unit sending an instruction or a data to the HAL and accordingly the HAL using the hardware resource in represent of the node management unit; and (C) if an external instruction is received, the HAL identifying which transmission port of the hardware resource receives the external instruction, so to send the external instruction to a corresponding node management unit, and after the external instruction is executed, the corresponding node management unit sending back an information to the HAL so that the HAL sends back the information to an external system administrator. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023211 | System and Method for Providing Mobility with a Split Home Agent Architecture - A method implemented by a network element functioning as a home agent (HA) for a mobile node (MN) communicating with a corresponding node (CN) using Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (MIPv6), the method including selecting by the HA a virtual home agent (VHA) in the network to provide home agent services to the MN with a better quality of service than the HA, sending a flow switch request (FSR) message to the selected VHA, the FSR message including a home keygen token, an address of the CN and a care-of address of the MN, the FSR message to cause the selected VHA to direct the CN to send data traffic for the MN to the selected VHA instead of the HA, and receiving a flow switch acknowledgement (FSA) message from the VHA indicating that the selected VHA has successfully redirected the data traffic from the CN to the MN. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023212 | SELECTIVE INTERACTION BETWEEN NETWORKED SMART DEVICES - Selective interaction between networked smart devices is disclosed. One embodiment of the present disclosure pertains to an apparatus for interacting with associated smart appliances via a network, where the apparatus comprises a memory; and a processor. The processor is configured to identify one or more associated smart appliances upon activation of a smart device in a network, where the smart device and the associated smart appliances are configured to communicate with each other for notification or for executing one or more commands. The processor is also configured to determine a mode of the smart device upon receiving data from the associated smart appliances, where the mode of the smart device is set through configuring a user experience environment of the smart device. The processor is further configured to selectively process the data from the associated smart appliances based on the mode of the smart device. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023213 | METHOD FOR MANAGEMENT OF DATA STREAM EXCHANGES IN AN AUTONOMIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for managing data stream exchanges in an autonomic telecommunications network including a first phase consisting in extracting from each stream routing data and data for measuring the transfer function between at least one data producer Pi and at least one data consumer Cj, sharing the extracted routing data between processing and decision-making functional modules distributed across the said network, selecting at least one decision-making or processing module for which the access time to the measuring data of the transfer function is minimal, dynamically defining by at least one of the selected modules the said rules for optimising the transfer settings of the stream according to the said measuring data and distributed over the said network select processing modules located on the path of the said streams in order to apply the said rules. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023214 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR STATE TRANSITION OF A LOAD CONTROLLER DEVICE - A method of facilitating wireless communications between a load controller device and a network component is described. The method can include the step of transitioning the load controller device from a peer-to-peer state in which the load controller device can receive initialization information to a provisioned state in which the load controller device connects to the network component using the initialization information. If there is a disruption in the connection between the load controller device and the network component in the provisioned state, the load controller device can be forced back to the peer-to-peer state from the provisioned state to enable the load controller device to receive new initialization information for reestablishment of the connection between the load controller device and the network component or for establishment of another connection between the load controller device and a different network component. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023215 | DIGITAL SPACE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A digital space management system is provided for managing a plurality of peripheral devices in a space. The digital space management system includes a communication unit for communicating with the peripheral devices, and a processing unit electrically coupled to the communication unit. The processing unit is operable to generate a space management graphic interface with a floor-planning function and a room-planning function allowing a user of the digital space management system to perform a space planning operation for the space. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023216 | NODE INFORMATION ACQUIREMENT METHOD, CLIENT, AND SERVER - The present invention discloses a method for acquiring node information, and a Client and a server, wherein the method includes: a Client receiving a Get command sent from a server, acquiring values of nodes in all items in the Get command, and determining that acquirement of values of nodes in partial items fails; and the Client sending to the server a response message which carries a new status value, wherein the new status value is adapted to indicate that acquirement of values of nodes in partial items fails when a Get command is executed, and the response message also carries a predetermined tag, wherein the predetermined tag is adapted to packet information of nodes in items in which acquirement of values is successful. By the above technical solution of the present invention, useful nodes can be acquired more effectively, nodes which can not be acquired can be located. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023217 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POLICY ENFORCEMENT USING A TAG - A method and apparatus for policy enforcement at a network device of a network are disclosed. A packet is received at the network device. A tag associated with the packet is determined. The tag includes a field that indicates a path thru the network that is assigned to the packet. The path is between an entry network device of the packet and a destination network device of the packet. The tag is mapped to a policy of a plurality of policies based on information about a client device. The client information is not available within the packet. One or more rules associated with the policy are determined and enforced. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023218 | SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - A scientific information management system is provided. It comprises a server, and at least one content server connected to the registration server to provide networking services to a plurality of users through a network, said at least one content server comprising data comprising scientific information of experimental research projects, wherein said system comprises:-a plurality of user interfaces, at least one of them comprising means for submitting data comprising first scientific information together with a status identifying the degree of accomplishment of said project;-a data processor connected to said plurality of user interfaces, said data processor being capable of processing said data retrieved from said at least one content server to generate at least one representation of the relative position of said first scientific information compared to others scientific information and the status of said first scientific information and display said representation on the user interface. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120030326 | Method of Servicing Requests to Manage Network Congestion and Server Load and Server Thereof - A method of servicing requests for information at a server includes receiving a request for information from a client device, and determining a number of attempts of the request made by the client device. Both the client device and the server may count the number of attempts for each request. When the number of attempts is greater than a threshold, the method includes servicing the request and sending the information to the client device. When the number of attempts is not greater than the threshold, the method includes sending a service unavailable message to the client device. A retry-after delay may be calculated by the server according to a predicted time for the server to exit the overloaded state and included in the service unavailable message. The predicted time may take into account both requests currently being serviced and requests that have been scheduled to be serviced in the future. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030327 | IDENTIFICATION OF MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE OBJECT IDENTIFIERS SUPPORTED BY A MANAGED DEVICE - Example embodiments relate to identification of management information base (MIB) object identifiers (OIDs) supported by a managed device. In example embodiments, a group of MIB OIDs to be tested for support by a managed device is identified. A series of requests including a MIB OID may then be transmitted to the managed device. Finally, MIB OIDs from the group of MIB OIDs to be tested for support that are supported by the managed device may be identified based on responses to the requests received from the managed device. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030328 | DIGITAL MEDIA DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SHARING DATA USING THE DIGITAL MEDIA DEVICE - A digital media device and a method for sharing data include a source device sending a search request to search digital media devices under a power-on status, and sending a control command to a middle device from the found digital media devices, to control the middle device to search at least one target device under a power-off status. The data sharing method further includes sending a power-on command to the middle device to power on the target device. The data sharing method further includes sharing data with the target device when the target device powering on successfully and supporting DLNA network. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030329 | Information processing apparatus, linked scenario preparation method for information processing apparatus, program, and storage medium - An information processing apparatus connectable to other information processing apparatuses useable as link partner apparatuses via a network can prepare a linked scenario. The linked scenario is preparable by linking a plurality of discrete services providable by the information processing apparatus and the link partner apparatuses. The information processing apparatus includes a processor to conduct the steps of: storing link information arranging each of the discrete services providable by the information processing apparatus and the link partner apparatuses from high to low linking closeness trend; preparing a plurality of path patterns for the linked scenario by linking a plurality of discrete services based on the link information, in which the path patterns are prepared to satisfy an inputting format and an outputting format designated for the linked scenario; displaying the plurality of path patterns prepared for the linked scenario; and registering a primary linked scenario by selecting one path. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030330 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING WAKEUP AND SLEEP EVENTS OF COMPUTERS CONNECTED TO A MOTOR VEHICLE CAN NETWORK - A system for managing wakeup and sleep events of computers connected to a motor vehicle secondary CAN network, the secondary CAN network being connected to a main CAN network by a gateway. The system includes a master computer connected to the main CAN network and configured to manage the wakeup and sleep events of the computers through the exchange therewith of wakeup and sleep frames via the gateway. The gateway can: synthesize a single wakeup and sleep frame based on plural wakeup and sleep frames emitted by the computers, and emit the single frame to the master computer that is configured to interpret the frame. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030331 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AND PROCESSING POLICY PROFILE RESTRICTIONS - Techniques for configuring policy restriction are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may generate a user-defined policy profile, which is information provided by a user of the WTRU for configuration of parameters for a policy and/or charging control. The WTRU may send the user-defined policy profile to a network. The user-defined policy profile may be used along with network operator-provided policy rules by a policy decision function to set up policy rules for policy and/or charging control for the WTRU. The user-defined policy profile may configure a quality of service limit, a data usage limit, a time usage limit, or an access control. The user-defined policy profile may contain a policy profile identity (ID), a policy profile type information element, and a restricted subscriber ID. The WTRU may send the user-defined policy profile in an initial attach request message or subsequent messages or include it in an SIP REGISTER message. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030332 | MANAGEMENT SERVER, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A management server | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030333 | Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Streaming Overlay Construction and Optimization - This document describes a directed graph model using a peer-to-peer overlay structure and a gossip-based protocol to maintain the distributed membership. A protocol suite for peers to join the live streaming session, form the P2P streaming overlay, and exchange video packets with others has also been presented. The different capabilities of the heterogeneous peers are well depicted using an adaptive out-degree mechanism. The performance of the whole system is maintained by a contribution-aware mechanism, which ensures that the peers with large contribution will get more chance to be served than those with small or no contribution. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030334 | DNS NAME RESOLUTION SYSTEM, OVERRIDE AGENT, AND DNS NAME RESOLUTION METHOD - A DNS name resolution system according to the present invention has a DNS server; a terminal which generates and transmits a DNS query packet containing DNS name information described in accordance with a specific description method and whose destination is said DNS server; and an override agent which is disposed along a communication path between the terminal and the DNS server. The override agent has a capture unit which captures a DNS query packet transmitted from the terminal; an analysis unit which stores in advance information concerning the specific description method based on which the DNS name information was described by the terminal, analyzes the DNS name information contained in the DNS query packet captured by the capture unit based on the specific description method, and selects the information for reply to the terminal based on the analysis results; and a reply unit which generates and transmits a DNS response packet containing the information for reply selected by the analysis unit and whose destination is the terminal | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030335 | REJUVENATION PROCESSING DEVICE, REJUVENATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, COMPUTER PROGRAM, AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD - At least one host machine ( | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030336 | Method for Privacy Management in an Identity Network, Physical Entities and Computer Program Therefor - A controller ( | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING ACCESS TERMINAL - An apparatus for identifying an access terminal includes an application installation determination unit configured to generate information indicating whether or not each application on an application list is installed in the access terminal by determining whether or not each application on the application list is installed in the access terminal; and an access terminal identification code generating unit configured to generate an access terminal identification code of the access terminal by combining the information indicating whether or not each application is installed in the access terminal; and an access terminal identification unit configured to identify the access terminal by using the access terminal identification code. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030338 | WEB PAGE LOAD TIME PREDICTION AND SIMULATION - Embodiments of automated cloud service performance prediction are disclosed. The automated cloud service performance prediction includes extracting a parental dependency graph (PDG) for a webpage. The PDG encapsulates one or more dependency relationships for each web object in the webpage. The prediction further includes determining an original page load time (PLT) and original timing information of a webpage. The prediction also includes simulating a page loading of the webpage based on adjusted timing information of each web object and the PDG to estimate a new PLT of the webpage. The prediction additionally includes comparing the original PLT of the webpage to the new PLT of the webpage to determine whether the adjusted timing information increased or decreased the new PLT of the webpage. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030339 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING SERVICE REQUESTS - A computer-implemented method routes service requests to services in a service framework provided by a plurality of hosts. The method comprises receiving a service request for a service in the service framework and discovering a plurality of candidate hosts that host the service. The plurality of candidate hosts are a subset of the plurality of hosts. The method further comprises selecting a candidate host from the plurality of candidate hosts based on measured latencies for the plurality of candidate hosts and routing the service request to the selected candidate host. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030340 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO LOCATE A STORAGE DEVICE - A request is received from a client machine via a web interface for content presented on a web page. A globally unique identifier (GUID) that is associated with the user is accessed and a number is generated based on the GUID. The generated number is utilized as an index to locate the storage device from the number of storage devices. Here, the storage device stores a user profile associated with the user. The user profile is read from the located storage device and the web page is personalized based on this user profile. The personalized web page is then communicated to the client machine. Other techniques for locating a storage device are also described. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120036244 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IIP ADDRESS SHARING ACROSS CORES IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - In a multi-core system, multiple packet engines across corresponding cores may be working concurrently processing data packets from data flows of SSL VPN sessions. For example, a first core may establish a SSL VPN session with a client. Any one of the other cores, such as a second core, may received packets related to the session owned by the first core. Embodiments of the systems and method described below provide management of IIP addresses for the multi-core/multi-packet engine approach to providing SSL VPN service. In some embodiments, the approach to managing IIP addresses is to have one packet engine on a core act as a master or controller of the IIPs for the remaining packet engines and cores. The packet engines/cores use a protocol for communications regarding IIP management. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120036245 | MANAGED SERVICES PLATFORM AND METHOD OF OPERATION OF SAME - A managed services platform and method of operation of same are described herein. The platform can include a device management service (DMS) server in which the DMS server can act as a gateway for communications with one or more computing devices, and the computing devices are associated with a first entity. The platform can also include an application service (AS) server in which the AS server is communicatively coupled with the DMS server. When a first computing device contacts the DMS server, the DMS server is operable to provide a bundle to the first computing device. As an example, the bundle contains content that at least includes one or more configuration messages and an application set that contains one or more predefined applications. The content of the bundle can be determined at least in part by the first entity. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120036246 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DISTRIBUTING DIAMETER NETWORK MANAGEMENT INFORMATION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for distributing Diameter network management information are disclosed. According to one method, a first Diameter node obtains Diameter network management subscription information. The first Diameter node obtains Diameter network management information. The first Diameter node determines, using the Diameter network management subscription information, whether at least one second Diameter node is subscribed to receive the obtained Diameter network management information. In response to determining that the at least one second Diameter node is subscribed to receive the obtained network management information, the first Diameter node sends the obtained Diameter network management information to the at least one second Diameter node. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120036247 | TERMINAL FOR DEVICE MANAGEMENT AND METHOD FOR INTIATING MANAGEMENT SESSION BY THE TERMINAL - The present invention discloses a terminal for Device Management (DM) and a method for initiating a management session by the terminal and relates to the field of electronic devices, so as to solve a problem that a terminal is incapable of actively and correctly initiating a management session. A corresponding relation between a Management Object (MO) and a DM server is preset in a terminal, and the terminal selects a DM server corresponding to a designated MO according to the corresponding relation between the MO and the DM server; and then initiates a management session to the selected DM server. The method is mainly applicable to various terminals, such as a mobile phone, and a computer. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120036248 | ASSOCIATED DEVICE DISCOVERY IN IMS NETWORKS - A method of associating multiple user endpoints (UEs) with a single IMS session in an IMS network having a serving node for controlling at least one IMS session for a user and at least a first access network for providing access to UEs. The method involves associating a first UE with the user and with an IMS session; discovering a second UE in a proximity of the first UE; discovering information about the second UE; communicating the information about the second UE to the serving node; the serving node utilizing computer-implemented policy logic to determine whether to associate the second UE with the user and the IMS session; and if the policy logic determines that the second UE is to be associated, the serving node associating the second UE with the IMS session while retaining the association with the first UE. | 02-09-2012 |
| 20120042059 | METHOD FOR INDICATING A SERVICE PRIORITY UPDATE, SERVICE PRIORITY UPDATE METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for indicating the service priority update, a service priority update method, and an apparatus. The method for indicating the service priority update includes: A priority management functional entity receives a service priority update request message sent by a user, where the update request message includes a service type identifier and a priority update indication identifier corresponding to the service type identifier; and the priority management functional entity sends a service priority update instruction message to a network side according to the update request message, where the update instruction message is used to instruct the network side to process a service corresponding to the service type identifier according to a priority level corresponding to the priority update indication identifier. In the embodiments of the present invention, priority control is exercised on all types of services of the user in an emergency. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120047241 | Apparatus, system, and method of managing an image forming device, and medium storing control program - An apparatus, system, and method of managing an image forming device on a network, and a control program for managing the image forming device are disclosed. The management apparatus communicates with a plurality of network devices on the network by specifying a multicast address to generate a network device list, which lists address information of each of the plurality of network devices. The management apparatus communicates with one or more network devices each having the address information listed in the network device list to request each one of the one or more network devices for identification information of an image forming device. The management apparatus determines that at least one network device from which the identification information of the image forming device is successfully received as an image forming device to be managed by the management apparatus. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047242 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS HANDLING LICENSE FILE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - A disclosed information processing apparatus includes an installing part configured to install a function by downloading installing data of the function from outside the information processing apparatus, a license file acquiring part configured to acquire a license file for activating the function from the outside, a license managing part configured to manage existence of a license for the function regardless of existence of the license file, a license moving and updating part configured to move the license to or from another apparatus and update existence of the license of the function, a license returning part configured to cause the moved license to be returned based on an automatic return condition to a predetermined apparatus, and a license holding part configured to hold a predetermined license structure of the information processing apparatus set up by a user to cause the license to be moved in conformity with the predetermined license structure. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047243 | Method for Transforming a Workflow into a Management Object Tree - A method of transforming a workflow into a management object tree for a server and a client of a service system is disclosed. The method comprises transforming a first step of the workflow into a first step subtree of the management object tree, for the client to execute the workflow according to the management object tree. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047244 | Distributed Network Management System, Network Element Management Server, and Data Configuration Management Method - A distributed network management system is provided, The centralized network element management server is configured to synchronize service application data stored in the centralized network element management server to each of the regional network element management servers. Each regional network element management servers is configured to: store network element physical data of all network element equipments in its service region; store the service application data synchronized by the centralized network element management server; and synchronize the network element physical data and the service application data to the corresponding network element equipment. A corresponding network element management server and a corresponding data configuration management method are also provided. The service application data are independent from each region and unified to the centralized network management layer to be managed, realizing maintenance and management of the cross-regional service application data and improving the capability of the network management system supporting service applications. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047245 | METHOD FOR PROVISIONING PARAMETERS OF TERMINAL, SYSTEM THEREOF, AND TERMINAL MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A method and system for provisioning terminal parameters, and a terminal management apparatus are disclosed. The method includes: an open mobile alliance device management (OMA DM) server, receiving terminal information of a terminal and parameter information needing to be provisioned of the terminal sent by a trusted OMA Client Provisioning (CP) server, and sending the parameter information to an OMA DM client on the terminal according to the terminal information; and the OMA DM client sending the parameter information to an OMA CP client on the terminal, and the OMA CP client performing provisioning according to the parameter information. By way of the present invention, the problem in relevant art that the OMA CP is unable to transit to the OMA DM smoothly is solved, which avoids various kinds of failure caused by the operators switching among provisioning methods. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047246 | System and Method for Storage Discovery in a Storage Area Network Using Device Domains Under Control of a Storage Device - A storage area network (SAN) includes a management server, a storage device, and a management station coupled to a fabric. The management server implements device domains on the SAN. The storage device instructs the management server to add new device domains on the SAN. The management station defines the new device domains to include the storage device and an initiator coupled to the fabric, and directs the storage device to instruct the management server to add the new device domains. A method includes coupling a management server to a SAN fabric, implementing device domains in the management server, defining a new device domain that includes a storage device and an initiator coupled to the SAN, and coupling a storage device to the SAN fabric, the storage device being operable to instruct the management server to add the new device domain. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120059917 | SOFTWARE LICENSE MANAGEMENT WITHIN A CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a solution to manage software licenses within a cloud computing environment. Specifically, aspects of the present invention (among other things): determine a requester's/customer's needs; identify a set (at least one) of providers capable of addressing the requester's licensing needs; and match the customer with the most appropriate provider. The embodiments of the present invention will also analyze current licensing configurations/models of the requesters, providers, and software vendors to identify areas of potential improvement. This provides the functionality necessary to adjust software license level in a dynamic fashion so as to best meet the customer's needs. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059918 | LOCATION BASED SERVICE DATA CONNECTION SUPPORT ACROSS MULTIPLE PROFILES - In a wireless data packet network, a single mobile device is provisioned to support a plurality of user profiles including a service or application that can be associated to multiple profiles. Arbitration for requests for a data connection can be made based upon priority, with applications having the same priority allowed to share the data connection. In some instances, the profile used to establish the data connection does not support the application that can be associated to multiple profiles, such as Location Based Services (LBS). To minimize subsequent rejections of requests for a data connection by the LBS, capability scans or updates determine what services are supported by the currently active profiles. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059919 | WEB SERVICES ENVIRONMENT TESTING FRAMEWORK - In one embodiment, a method of testing web services using a web service testing framework can include using a data parser to parse data for the web service to be tested. The data parser may be one of a plurality of data parsers in a test library for support of a plurality of data formats for the web service. If the web service is in a SOAP protocol, the data can be converted into framework objects. These framework objects for the SOAP protocol may then be converted into test objects. If the web service is in a REST protocol, the data itself can be converted into the test objects. A web service test can be accessed from the test library for testing the web service. The web service test can be executed using the test objects. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059920 | Traffic Modeling of Overlaid Networks - Implementations and techniques for traffic modeling of overlaid networks are generally disclosed. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059921 | VIRTUAL AD HOC NETWORK TESTBEDS FOR NETWORK-AWARE APPLICATIONS - A virtual ad hoc network testbed provides the capability to instrument a testbed in order to support the execution of network-aware applications “as is.” Network aware applications are a special class of applications that interact with a network not only by using the network for communication purposes, but also configure or read the status of network devices. Local stack management provides the means to automatically construct standard APIs for accessing the information residing in a simulated or emulated network, and instantiate these APIs. The testbed is designed to bridge a standard management module (such as SNMP) and a simulation or emulation model, starting from a MIB module. The testbed uses CORBA as a communication means. The process is divided into two parts, agent side and model side. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059922 | INTEGRATED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - There is described herein a method and apparatus for providing a telecommunications link between a first user and a second user in a telecommunications network. A request is received from the first user to provide a telecommunications link to the second user. The system then determines from a server hosting a networked community of users in which users interact over a communications network independent of the telecommunications network whether the first user and the second user have a specified relationship in the community of users. At least one setting for the telecommunications link is specified based on whether the first user and the second user have a specified relationship in the community of users. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059923 | Managing Network Elements - A method for use in management of network elements in a communications network performed by a network element of said network. The method comprises receiving by an agent operating in said network element a request to execute a first function, wherein said first function relates to management of at least one network element; sending to said first function a message corresponding to said request and executing said first function. Said request being from a predefined set of requests and said first function being from a predefined set of functions. Said first function is implemented in a network element where it is to be executed. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059924 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DEVICE MANAGEMENT THROUGH A GATEWAY DEVICE, AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVER - The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies and discloses a method and an apparatus for performing device management through a gateway device and a Device Management Server (DMS). The method for performing device management through a gateway device includes: receiving a register message which carries a terminal ID and a gateway device address; associating and storing the terminal ID and the gateway device address; obtaining the gateway device address according to the association record; and sending a Device Management (DM) notification message to the gateway device according to the gateway device address so that the gateway device performs corresponding processing according to the DM notification message. With the technical solution of the present invention, a DMS is able to send a DM notification to a user terminal through a gateway device. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059925 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION IN AN INTEROPERABILITY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are described for facilitating communication among a plurality of entities via an interoperability network. Each entity has policy data corresponding thereto governing interaction with the entity via the interoperability network. A message is transmitted from a first one of the entities to a second one of the entities. The first entity has first policy data corresponding thereto and the second entity has second policy data corresponding thereto. The transmitted message was handled in the network according to combined policy data representing a combination of the first and second policy data. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120059926 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SEMANTIC SERVICE - A method and system for semantic services for registering and managing semantic services by collecting the semantic services distributed among a plurality of service servers, and combining the plurality of semantic services to be matched with a condition set by a user are provided. The system includes a semantic service management server which registers, deletes, and edits the ontology and ontology-based semantic service information, and supports an information searching function performed by a semantic broker server; the semantic broker server which searches and combines semantic services through the semantic service management server, and provides the results with one of the combined semantic services or semantic workflows; and a semantic service license server which requests the results by transmitting the corresponding condition to the semantic broker server when the user inputs the condition as well as an input factor according to the preset items, and receives and outputs the corresponding results. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120066359 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EVALUATING LINK-HOSTING WEBPAGES - A method for valuing a link-hosting webpage is provided. The method includes the act of receiving, on a computer system, at least one keyword. The method also includes the act of receiving, on a computer system, at least one identifier of a webpage, the webpage having been previously identified as a link-hosting webpage. The method also includes the act of accessing information about the webpage over a computer network. The method also includes the act of determining an importance of the webpage based on the at least one keyword and the information about the webpage. The method also includes the act of displaying the importance on a computer-based user interface. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066360 | CNAME-BASED ROUND-TRIP TIME MEASUREMENT IN A CONTENT DELIVERY NETWORK - Round-trip time (RTT) for communication between an edge point of presence (POP) in a content delivery network (CDN) and a local domain name server (LDNS) is determined by resolution of a canonical name (CNAME) record. A first server in a first edge POP in a CDN receives a request to resolve a domain name from a LDNS and transmits a CNAME record including a timestamp indicating when the CNAME record was transmitted to the LDNS. The first server subsequently receives a request from the LDNS to resolve the CNAME record and determines a RTT time indicating the time needed for round-trip transmission between the LDNS and the first server based on the time when the request to resolve the CNAME request was received by the first server and the time indicated by the timestamp. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066361 | SERVER DEVICE CONNECTING WITH USB DEVICE AND DEVICE SHARING METHOD - Disclosed are a server device to which a universal serial bus (USB) device is connected, and a device sharing method thereof, the server device capable of sharing the USB device with a client device through a network, the server device including: a USB controller which sets up connection information containing a device address of a connected USB device; and a USB management unit which connects the client device to the USB device by storing the connection information, allocating a virtual connection address for connecting the client device to the USB device, and mapping the virtual connection address with the device address if the client device requests for sharing the USB device. With this, there are provided a server device and a device sharing method, in which the plurality of client devices can have connection and access to the USB device. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066362 | ASSOCIATED URLVS IN EXCHANGES - Web individuals' exchanges can be easily created by users inputting in, through a personal access, their identified URLvs from differing second-top level domain names. An associated identities database and a URLv syntax database can verify that these differing second-top domain name URLvs belong to the same individual. Once URLvs are verified, the URLvs are stored in individual's personal data repositories, which can extract data from the stored URLvs' webpages, including through using APIs. The result is that URLvs can be used to easily input data into prior-art web exchanges, or can create new web exchanges by multiple people inputting in their URLvs to the new web exchange. These features enable data portability of the individual's own data and weaken current monopoly individuals' exchange websites. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066363 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING A GRIDLINK DATA SOURCE TO CONNECT AN APPLICATION SERVER WITH A CLUSTERED DATABASE - A system and method can support using a data source to connect an application server with a clustered database. The clustered database includes a plurality of database instances and is associated with a notification service. The notification service can be used by the clustered database to broadcast notifications that describe a state change in the plurality of database instances. The data source includes a connection pool, which manages a set of connections to the plurality of database instances in the clustered database. The data source operates to register with the notification service to receive notifications on the change of the clustered database, wherein the application server operates to configure and manage connection to the clustered database, adaptively according to the state change of the clustered database at run time. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066364 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - An information processing apparatus includes: a connection unit connecting an external apparatus to the information processing apparatus; a control request receiving unit receiving, from a controller, a control request for remotely controlling the external apparatus by network communication; and a change request transmitting unit transmitting, to the external apparatus, a change request so that the external apparatus is able to be remotely controlled, when the control request receiving unit receives the control request and the external apparatus is not able to be remotely controlled. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066365 | ROUTING REQUESTS FOR LOCATION-TO-SERVICE TRANSLATION (LOST) SERVICES USING PROXY SERVER - A method implemented by a proxy server is provided for routing requests for a Location-to-Service Translation (LoST) service without traversing a forest node structure. The method includes receiving a request for the LoST service initiated by a client, the request including a location of a user device and a requested service; identifying an authoritative LoST server configured to service the requested service and bounded by a service boundary that includes the location included in the request; and directly forwarding the request to the identified authoritative LoST server, without routing through any other LoST server. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066366 | AGENT-BASED BANDWITH MONITORING FOR PREDICTIVE NETWORK SELECTION - A mobile device, such as a smartphone or a laptop, connects to a network based on the available bandwidth (throughput) of the network rather than on signal strength. The device may send a request containing the device's location to a service provider who has data on networks in the device's location and specifically on bandwidth or pipe performance. This data is used to determine which network in the area would be best to connect to. The network may be a network that does not necessarily have the highest signal strength (often shown as bars on a handset device). The service provider can cause the device to transition to the network having the higher bandwidth. It can also direct the user so that blackout areas are avoided using the network data maintained by the provider. The provider uses testers to obtain current bandwidth data of networks. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066367 | METHOD, TERMINAL, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE MANAGEMENT - A method, a terminal, an apparatus, and a system for device management (DM) are provided. Specifically, a DM terminal, a DM apparatus, method for managing the terminal device are provided. The method for managing the terminal device includes the following steps: adding, by a DM terminal device, amanagement nodes in a DM tree of the DM terminal device; and recording, by the DM terminal device, MOs types supported by the DM terminal device in the management nodes added in the DM tree of the DM terminal device. Therefore, the problem that the server does not know the DM applications supported by the terminal, and in the method, a specific management operation is delivered to make the management of the server more flexible and effective. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ABSTRACTING LOGICAL TOPOLOGY INFORMATION OF PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for abstracting logical topology information of a Peer-to-Peer (P2P) network. The method includes: obtaining a set of Points of Presence (POPs) of peer clients in the P2P network; using a relevant algorithm of a routing protocol to calculate a best path between any two POPs in the set of POPs and a weight value of the best path; and collecting calculation results of the best path and the weight value that are obtained on each POP to obtain a set of abstract logical topology records of the P2P network. The embodiments of the present invention provide a universal and efficient method for abstracting logical topology information, which greatly reduces network topology information that needs to be transmitted, mitigates a risk of exposing lower-layer network topology information, and transmits the network topology information to a P2P application server securely and concisely. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066369 | METHOD FOR ASSIGNING A NETWORK ADDRESS FOR COMMUNICATING IN A SEGMENTED NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for assigning a network address to a first node in a network comprising a plurality of second nodes, the method comprising the steps of: (a) assigning a stochastic address to the first node, (b) the first node transmitting an announcement message to a first control device, (c) the first control device checking whether the assigned network address is available, and (d) upon detecting that the assigned address is not available, the first control device transmitting a message requesting the change of the assigned address | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120072561 | VIDEO GAME SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method is provided wherein interactivity between several cellular devices and a server is provided for controlling games and other applications in a physical locale. The applications make use of the cellular device's display and input capabilities to send and receive private data. The server wirelessly communicates with the cellular devices at the locale. The server at the locale gathers input from cellular device users and outputs public information to the locale via display(s), speakers, and other output devices. The server may also interact with other servers existing at other locales by communicating over the Internet. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072562 | PERFORMING PARTIAL SUBNET INITIALIZATION IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can perform subnet initialization in a middleware machine environment. In accordance with one embodiment, a plurality of management nodes in the middleware machine environment can be interconnected so that a plurality of subnet managers that are associated with the plurality of management nodes can communicate with each other using an in-band communication protocol. The plurality of subnet managers can negotiate and elect a master subnet manager, which operates to configure and manage the middleware machine environment. The master subnet manager can replicate one or more subnet initialization policies to other subnet managers in the middleware machine environment using the in-band communication protocol. The master subnet manager can then set up a plurality of client nodes in the middleware machine environment based on the one or more subnet initialization policies. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072563 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING WELL DEFINED SUBNET TOPOLOGY IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support a middleware machine environment. The middleware machine environment can include a subnet manager and a plurality of fabric components, wherein each said fabric component is associated with a subnet management agent (SMA). The subnet manager maintains a topology graph that indicates how ports are connected in the subnet. The subnet manager operates to periodically reevaluate one or more states associated with each fabric component in the subnet by determining whether each SMA is responding correctly to a request. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072564 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ETHERNET OVER INFINIBAND VIRTUAL HUB SCALABILITY IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can support a middleware machine environment that include one or more gateway nodes. One or more gateways that resides on the one or more gateway nodes are provided in a subnet with a plurality of host servers, wherein each host server is associated with one or more virtual network interface cards (vNICs). The middleware machine environment also include a plurality of virtual hubs (vHUB) on the one or more gateways, with each vHUB associated with one or more said vNICs. The gateways are adapted to connect with an external network, and operate to forward a multicast packet to both the external network and the plurality of host servers via the plurality of vHUBs, and prevent multicast packet traffic loops between the subnet and the external network. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072565 | Configuration Verification, Recommendation, and Animation Method for a Disk Array in a Storage Area Network (SAN) - A system and method for establishing a storage area network (SAN) is described. The method includes providing a predefined template for inputting data associated with a SAN. A first tool may utilize the template to validate an entered SAN configuration based on accessing data in a database. A second tool may utilize the template to generate a valid SAN configuration, based on accessing SAN data in a database, if component data is entered. An animated configuration of a valid SAN is generated based on at least one of the input SAN configuration or the input component data. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072566 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DATA - A method and apparatus for managing data is provided, including determining one or more network services associated with user-uploaded data stored in a database, and linking the user-uploaded data with the one or more network services to provide the user-uploaded data via the one or more network services. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072567 | METHOD, NETWORK MANAGEMENT CENTER, AND A RELATED DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING A NETWORK POLICY FOR A VIRTUAL PORT - A method, a network management center, and a related device. The method includes: obtaining a virtual network policy group, a physical network policy group, and a media access control (MAC) address of a virtual port; associating the virtual network policy group, the physical network policy group, and the MAC address of the virtual port to form a virtual port policy association table; and selecting a physical network policy group corresponding to the MAC address from the virtual port policy association table, and delivering the physical network policy group to a physical switch. When a virtual machine (VM) on the server is migrated, the method may be used to migrate the network policy for the virtual port on a real-time basis. Therefore, the real-time effect of services provided by the VM is improved in the virtualization process of the server. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072568 | SWITCH MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - Methods and systems for managing a service provider switch are provided. According to one embodiment, a network operating system (NOS) is provided on each processor element (PE) of the switch. The NOS includes an object manager (OM) responsible for managing global software object groups, managing software object configurations, managing local software objects and groups and routing control information between address spaces based on locations of software objects. The OM performs management plane communications among software objects by way of system calls. The OM performs data plane communications among software objects by way of object-to-object channels. The switch is provisioned with a network-based managed IP service for a particular customer of the service provider by pushing the service onto an object-to-object channel that has been established between a first software object and a second software object of the software objects. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072569 | FAILURE SYSTEM FOR DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM CLIENT - A method performed by a domain name service client includes storing DNS entries in a local cache; sending a DNS query to another device to obtain an update to one of the DNS entries; determining whether a DNS response is received; and resetting a time-to-live (TTL) timer associated with the one of the DNS entries when the DNS response is not received. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120079087 | ONLINE HELP SYSTEM USING SESSION DETAILS - An on-line help method is provided for a user involved in an on-line session. A plurality of session details related to the on-line session, a help request from the user, and session identification information are received during the on-line session. The plurality of session details are retrieved using the session identification information, and agent help information that includes the plurality of session details is created. The agent help information is associated with the help request and sent to a help agent device. In an embodiment, the agent help information includes a plurality of web pages navigated by the user during the on-line session, and the plurality of web pages are organized according to an order in which the user navigated them. A help agent using the help agent device may use the agent help information to quickly and accurate diagnose any issues with the on-line session. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079088 | PROVING DOMAIN NAME OWNERSHIP - Verification that a customer has ownership over a particular domain name. A computing system receives a request to provide a network service to a customer for action upon a particular domain name. In response, the computing system provides information to the customer over a network, and instructs the customer to edit a domain name record for the particular domain name using the provided information. For instance, the customer might be provided with a Globally-Unique IDentifier (GUID), and instruct the customer to insert the GUID into a particular record associated with the domain name in the DNS system. Upon verifying that the domain name record has indeed been edited using the provided information, the customer is confirmed as being an owner of the domain name. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079089 | Accurate method to evaluate a system reliability of a cloud computing network - An accurate method, which is utilized to evaluate a system reliability of a cloud computer network, is disclosed. The cloud computer network includes a plurality of arcs. Each arc has a current capacity, and the current capacities are arranged to form a plurality of capacity vectors corresponding to several states of the cloud computer network. The steps of the method includes: providing a total demand, a time constraint and a budget constraint; defining a first vector group, including the capacity vectors satisfying the total demand and the time constraint; executing an adjustment procedure to change the capacity vectors unsatisfying into satisfying the budget constraint; defining a second vector group according to the result of the adjustment procedure, including the capacity vectors satisfying the total demand, the time constraint and the budget constraint; and calculating a probability according to the second vector group and defining the probability as the system reliability. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079090 | STATEFUL SUBNET MANAGER FAILOVER IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can provide stateful subnet manager failover in a middleware machine environment. The system includes a policy daemon associated with each master subnet manager candidate in a subnet in the middleware machine environment. The policy daemon manages one or more policies for the subnet. The system also includes a transactional interface associated with the policy daemon co-located with a current master subnet manager. The transactional interface allows for updating the one or more policies using a policy update transaction. The policy daemon co-located with the master subnet manager operates to replicate the policy update transaction to one or more policy daemons co-located with the subnet managers that are master candidates associated with the master subnet manager, before committing the policy update transaction. Additionally, when the master subnet manager fails, the subnet managers operate to negotiate with each other and elect a new master subnet manager. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079091 | MANAGEMENT OF DATA FLOWS BETWEEN NETWORKED RESOURCE NODES IN A SOCIAL WEB - A resource management node is disclosed that manages a plurality of resource nodes connected to at least one network. The resource management node includes a system entity database, an interaction flow database, and an interaction execution engine. The system entity database contains information identifying communication addresses for the resource nodes and associated metadata identifying capabilities of the resource nodes. The interaction flow database contains information defining data flows that are permitted between identified ones of the resource nodes and associated triggering criteria defining when identified ones of the data flows are to be performed. The interaction execution engine is configured to determine that one of the triggering criteria defined by the interaction flow database is satisfied and to respond by establishing the associated data flow between the identified ones of the resource nodes. Related methods for managing a plurality of resource nodes connected to at least one network are disclosed. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079092 | MANAGEMENT OF DATA FLOWS BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT NODES AND CLUSTERS OF NETWORKED RESOURCE NODES - Methods performed by a resource management node for managing resource nodes connected to a network are disclosed. An example method includes establishing clusters of the resource nodes and associated data flows that are permitted between the resource nodes within each cluster and a user equipment node through the network, and associated rules that control the data flows. A first one of the rules is determined to have been satisfied for controlling a data flow for a first resource node in a first cluster. Information is communicated to the user equipment node that causes the user equipment node to prioritize handling of the data flow for the first resource node and other resource nodes in the first cluster in response to the first rule being satisfied. Related resource management nodes and user equipment nodes are disclosed. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120079093 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT METHOD, DEVICE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A Device Management (DM) method, a DM apparatus and a DM system are provided. The DM method includes: receiving a DM instruction; parsing the DM instruction to be used for managing at least two terminal devices, in which management data, used for managing the at least two terminal devices, indicated in the DM instruction is the same; obtaining the management data indicated in the DM instruction only once; and delivering the obtained management data to the at least two terminal devices so that the at least two terminal devices perform DM according to the management data. The utilization of an external interface of a gateway device may be improved by adopting the DM method, the DM apparatus and the DM system. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120084419 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO BALANCE SERVERS BASED ON SERVER LOAD STATUS - A method, system, and computer program product for balancing servers based on server load status, include: receiving from a server a service response to a service request, the service response including a result from a processing of the service request and a server status indicating a computing load status of the server; obtaining the server status from the service response; receiving a next service request from a host, the next service request comprising a Uniform Resource Locator (URL); determining that the server is configured to process the URL; determining whether the server status indicates that the server is available to process the next service request; and in response to determining that the server status indicates that the server is available to process the next service request, sending the next service request to the server. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084420 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COMPUTER NETWORK INTERFACES - According to one aspect, a computer-implemented method for managing at least one network interface of a computer system is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes the steps of executing of a boot loader to initialize a dedicated network interface and a side-band network interface, determining if a boot loader priority setting designates a preference to use one of a detected dedicated network interface or side-band network interface, determining if preferred network interface is available for use, then passing the priority setting to an operating system to use for network communications during run time. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084421 | MODEL SLICING AND VERSIONING - Embodiments are directed to implementing a dynamically changeable system model that is customizable per version, programmatically generating system models at runtime and to extending a programmatically generated system model. In an embodiment, a computer system determines that a dynamically changeable system model corresponds to a managed system. The dynamically changeable system model includes various managed system objects. The computer system indicates for the dynamically changeable system model which managed system objects are available in each version of the managed system. The available managed system objects are stored in a data store of the dynamically changeable system model. The computer system requests the managed system to provide current managed system information including at least a version identifier and, based on the managed system information indicated by the managed system, provides to the dynamically changeable system model those managed system objects that are provided by the indicated version of the managed system. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084422 | Graph Based Flexible Service Discovery and Management System and Method - An article including at least one computer readable medium storing a network management application comprising computer executable code that upon execution by one or more processors causes the one or more processors to receive and execute the computer executable code of the network management application to store an identifier indicative of a candidate service in a database, receive the information indicative of managed entities from the one or more input devices, transform the data indicative of the managed entities into neutral data structure represented by graphs, vertices and edges, store these neutral data structures in the database and determine whether the telecommunication network is configured to execute the candidate service by applying predetermined rules on these neutral data structures. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084423 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DOMAIN BASED DYNAMIC TRAFFIC STEERING - A method and system for domain based dynamic traffic steering is described. In one embodiment, a method for domain based dynamic traffic steering involves comparing a domain name with a domain whitelist and a domain blacklist of a packet modifying entity, and if the domain name matches the domain whitelist or the domain blacklist of the packet modifying entity, updating a corresponding Internet Protocol (IP) whitelist or IP blacklist of the packet modifying entity to include an IP address of the domain name. Other embodiments are also described. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084424 | METHOD FOR MANAGING SERVER APPARATUSES AND MANAGEMENT APPARATUS THEREOF - A method for managing server apparatuses and a management apparatus thereof are provided. A server apparatus is searched in the management apparatus for receiving an Internet Protocol (IP) address from a Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) of the server apparatus. And identification information of an Operating System (OS) of the server apparatus is obtained according to the IP address. The IP address and the identification information are bound. Then, an out-of-band message received from the BMC is updated into a server object according to the identification information. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084425 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING NESTED POLICY CONFIGURATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing nested policy configuration in a communications network are disclosed. The method is performed at a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) node. According to one method, first policy profile information associated with a first identifier is obtained from a policy profile database, where the first identifier is associated with a first subscriber and where the first policy profile information includes a second identifier. Second policy profile information associated with the second subscriber is obtained, using the second identifier obtained with the first policy profile information, from the policy profile database. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084426 | PACKET PROCESSING IN A MULTIPLE PROCESSOR SYSTEM - Packet processing is provided in a multiple processor system including a first processor to processing a packet and to create a tag associated with the packet. The tag includes information about the processing of the packet. A second processor receives the packet subsequent to the first processor and processes the packet using the tag information. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084427 | Probing-Based Auto Moding - A method for selecting a mode of operation for at least two modems is described. First, a handshake procedure is performed in order to determine a set of possible modes of operation supported by said modems. From said set of possible modes of operation, a set of favorable modes of operation is derived. In case there exist two or more favorable modes of operation, a probing-based selection is performed that comprises evaluating respective performances of said favorable modes of operation. The favorable mode of operation with the best performance is selected as a resultant mode of operation. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120084428 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING A NETWORK COMPUTING CLUSTER PROVIDING IT-SERVICES - The network computing cluster includes one or more network computing stations and one or more power autarkic network computing stations supplied by one or more associated local power generators. The power autarkic network computing stations and the local power generators are connected with a local power network. A control signal is sent to a resource managing unit of the network computing cluster via a communication network. The control signal indicates the ability of the power autarkic network computing stations to process IT-services. The resource managing unit receives the control signal via the communication network. Triggered by the control signal, the resource managing unit sends a signal for transferring an IT-service processed by a network computing station of the network computing stations to the network computing station via the communication network. The processed IT-service is transferred to one of the power autarkic network computing stations via the communication network. | 04-05-2012 |
| 20120089714 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK ADDRESS RESOLUTION - Methods and mechanisms to improve ARP cache management and to better facilitate receive load balancing on systems with multiple communications interfaces connected to a broadcast domain. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089715 | Systems and methods for communicating across various communication applications using single address strings - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing addressing strings formats and associated system implementations to minimize the number of different addressing strings used for communicating across different communication applications. The systems and methods receive a valid address string that can be inputted into a communication applications selected from a collection of communication applications wherein the same address string can be inputted for any selected communication application from that collection. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089716 | METHOD FOR ACCELERATING START UP OF A COMPUTERIZED SYSTEM - Technique for reducing start-up time of a computerized system comprising a computer application with a data base DB and one or more functional blocks with respective memories; the system comprises a communication network being managed by the computer application. The technique comprises providing each of said functional blocks with basic information about the communication network; updating the functional blocks about changes whenever take place in the network; updating objects in the base DB by the updated functional blocks; creating an image of at least one functional block of the blocks in a persistent memory, building a changes log and to in case of failure of the mentioned functional block, promptly restoring thereof by using the image in the persistent memory and the changes log. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089717 | Method and system for performing remote network management on a voice home gateway terminal - This disclosure provides a method for performing remote network management on a voice home gateway terminal, and the method includes that: a remote network management server transmits voice signaling to the voice home gateway terminal; the voice home gateway terminal determines whether the voice signaling contains a non-voice triggering identifier, processes a voice service according to the voice signaling when no non-voice triggering identifier is contained, requests non-voice configuration information from the remote network management server when a non-voice triggering identifier is contained, and processes a non-voice service according to the received non-voice configuration information. This disclosure further provides a system for performing remote network management on a voice home gateway terminal. Application of the method and system enables the remote network management server to manage simultaneously a voice service and other non-voice services. The remote management performed on the voice home gateway terminal having a voice function is reliable, and this disclosure realizes the convergence for managing the integrated services of the voice home gateway terminal. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089718 | SCALABLE SYNCHRONIZATION OF EVENTS AMONG SERVER AND CLIENTS WITH VARYING LAG-TIMES - The invention relates generally to synchronizing functions on handheld devices and more particularly to precisely synchronizing a function among a large number of devices having multiple different platforms. The invention provides the ability to cause a large number of handheld devices to perform certain functions simultaneously, within seconds or fractions of a second of each other. In certain aspects, the invention provides an apparatus for synchronizing a function among devices, including one or more processors in communication with a memory and configured to, for each of the devices, send an event to the device, receive a timepacket, and send a return timepacket, thereby causing the device to receive the event and invoke the function after a delay. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089719 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING A SERVICE - Methods and apparatus are provided for obtaining a service is provided. Information about an external device is received at a terminal from the external device. It is determined whether the external device has been registered based on the information about the external device. Service information associated with the external device is provided when at least the external device has been registered. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089720 | AGGREGATING CONNECTION MAINTENANCE TO OPTIMIZE RESOURCE CONSUMPTION - Combining network connection maintenance operations that use a resource to extend battery life. Each of the network connections has a timer and a defined tolerance for early connection maintenance. After receiving notification of an event, the network connections are accessed to identify the connections for which a maintenance operation may be performed early based on the timer and the tolerance. In an embodiment, the maintenance operation includes sending a transmission control protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet on the connection. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089721 | PARAMETERIZED RECURSIVE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE WITH TOPOLOGICAL ADDRESSING - A digital data communications network that supports efficient, scalable routing of data and use of network resources by combining a recursive division of the network into hierarchical sub-networks with repeating parameterized general purpose link communication protocols and an addressing methodology that reflects the physical structure of the underlying network hardware. The sub-division of the network enhances security by reducing the amount of the network visible to an attack and by insulating the network hardware itself from attack. The fixed bandwidth range at each sub-network level allows quality of service to be assured and controlled. The routing of data is aided by a topological addressing scheme that allows data packets to be forwarded towards their destination based on only local knowledge of the network structure, with automatic support for mobility and multicasting. The repeating structures in the network greatly simplify network management and reduce the effort to engineer new network capabilities | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120089722 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISPLAYING SCHEDULING INFORMATION - The present invention relates to an information display system for displaying scheduling information regarding utilization of a resource, the information display system comprising at least one display device to be located in proximity to the said resource and including means for displaying scheduling information regarding the said resource, wherein the scheduling of the said resource is controlled by a scheduling server and wherein resource scheduling information is transmitted from the scheduling server over a computer network to the display device for being displayed on a display of the display device. The information display system includes communication means for communication with the said scheduling server by means of a communication protocol by means of which communication protocol the information display system can be automatically authenticated by the said scheduling server, so as to allow communication of scheduling information between the information display system and the scheduling server independent of installation of additional software on the scheduling server. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120096135 | MANAGING SETTINGS OF COMPUTING DEVICES - The present disclosure includes methods, systems, and machine readable and executable instructions and/or logic for managing settings of computing devices. An example method includes receiving a platform-independent template for managing settings of a plurality of applications or operating systems of a computing device, creating, based on the received template, a profile for managing settings of one of the plurality of applications or operating systems of the computing device, deploying the created profile to the computing device to manage the settings of the one application or operating system of the computing device, and receiving a report on whether the settings of the one application or operating system of the computing device were successfully managed by the created profile. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096136 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING CONTENTS USING INFORMATION OF GROUP CHANGE IN CONTENT ORIENTED NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Provided are a method and apparatus for sharing content, using information regarding a group change in a content oriented network environment. In a case where a group to which a target user equipment belongs is changed from a first group to a second group, the target user equipment may transmit, to a first group member management device, the information regarding the group change. The first group member management device may update information about a group to which the target user equipment currently belongs, based on the information regarding the group change. In response to a receiving of a content request from a requesting user equipment, the first group member management device may transfer the content request to the target user equipment. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096137 | Method for Interacting Messages Based on Simple Network Management Protocol - A method for interacting messages based on a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is disclosed by the present invention. The method includes: when receiving an SNMP message sent from an SNMP management station, an SNMP proxy estimating a suggested timeout value of the SNMP message and feeding the suggested timeout value back to the SNMP management station; and the SNMP management station waiting for a response of the above SNMP message according to the suggested timeout value. A corresponding SNMP proxy is further disclosed by the present invention. Since the method of the present invention adopts the technical measure of dynamically determining the timeout period of the management station in an interaction manner between the SNMP management station and the SNMP proxy, the drawbacks of manually setting timeout period are overcome, occurrences of timeout event are effectively reduced, and the efficiency of implementing network management using SNMP is improved. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096138 | Assignment of Network Addresses - Systems and techniques relating to hierarchical address assignment in ad hoc networks are described. A described technique includes receiving, by a device of an ad hoc network, a request to register in the ad hoc network from an enrollee device. The devices can be wireless mobile devices, and the ad hoc network can be an independent basic service set (IBSS) network. The method also includes responding to the enrollee with information representing (i) an address for the enrollee device, and (ii) a finite quantity of addresses to be assigned to future enrollee devices. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096139 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROVIDING USER RECEPTIVITY DRIVEN POLICY IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for providing user receptivity driven policy in a communications network are disclosed. The method includes storing subscriber preference information indicating a willingness of a subscriber to receive a first type of content as well as policy and charging enhancement information associated with the subscriber preference information. Content is received from a content provider. Based on the subscriber preference information, it is determined whether the subscriber is willing to receive the content. In response to determining that the subscriber is willing to receive the content, the content is communicated to the subscriber and a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) is communicated with for temporarily enhancing a network or charging policy of the subscriber based on the policy charging enhancement information. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096140 | Network Aware Forward Caching - A network includes a cache server and a network aware server that operates to determine an optimization between a cost of retrieving content from a communication network and a cost of caching content at the cache server. The optimization is determined as a minimum of a sum of a transit cost, a backbone cost, and a caching cost. The transit cost includes a money cost per data unit. The backbone cost includes a money cost per data unit and time unit. The caching cost includes a money cost per server unit. In response to determining the optimization, the network aware server sends a content identifier to the cache server, and the cache server receives the content identifier, determines a source of a content item, and if the source is the same as the content identifier, then cache the content item. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096141 | SECURE DEVICE INTRODUCTION WITH CAPABILITIES ASSESSMENT - Introducing, managing and restricting devices in an environment is discussed, including how to securely introduce the devices, how to establish trust between the devices, how to manage bandwidth requirements and other resource requirements of the devices, how to aggregate resource usage when multiple devices within an environment are engaging in a common task, and how to restrict device access to environment resources. Various techniques including manual and automatic solutions are disclosed. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120102168 | Communication And Coordination Between Web Services In A Cloud-Based Computing Environment - Technologies are described herein for providing communication and coordination between web services in a cloud-based computing environment. A call to an available events operation is executed in a web service to request subscription event identifiers corresponding to available events at the web service. The subscription event identifiers are received. A subscribe operation is populated with a relevant subscription event identifier related to a subscribed event from the subscription event identifiers. A call to the subscribe operation is executed in the web service to establish a subscription to the web service. A subscription identifier corresponding to the subscription is received. Notifications related to the subscribed event at the web service are received while the subscription is active. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102169 | AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION OF TRAVEL AND NON-TRAVEL NETWORK ADDRESSES - A system to automatically classify types of IP addresses associated with a user. Information, such as user names, machine information, IP address, etc., may be obtained from logs. For each user or host in the logs, home IP addresses are identified from IP addresses where the user or host shows a predetermined level of activity. Travel IP addresses are identified, which are IP addresses at locations greater than a predetermined distance from the home IP addresses, as determined from geolocation data. A pattern analysis may be performed to determine which of the home IP addresses are work IP addresses associated with the user or host. The system may thus provide a classification of a user's or host's associated IP addresses as being one of travel, home, and work IP addresses. From this classification, mobility patterns may be derived, as well as applications to enhance security, advertising, search and network management. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102170 | Collaborative QoS for Service Oriented Architectures - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media for providing collaborative quality of service (“QoS”) for service-oriented architectures are described. The application services in the service-oriented architecture implement a QoS application-programming interface (“API”) in addition to the traditional service API. The QoS API may include a QoS reporting interface for reporting values of QoS metrics of the application service, a QoS mechanism interface that exposes details of dependability mechanisms utilized by the application service, and/or a QoS negotiation interface that allows dynamic negotiation of what QoS properties the application service provides and how the QoS properties are provided. Service consumers may utilize the QoS API of the various application services in the service-oriented architecture to collect dependability information regarding the application services and make service provider selection decisions during discovery and dynamic binding. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102171 | Integration Middleware Virtualization - A computer-implemented method includes displaying virtualization level options for a business network to a user, the virtualization level options including at least: a first virtualization level option that includes externalizing interaction logic in the business network, a second virtualization level option that includes virtualizing content in the business network, and a third virtualization level option that includes virtualizing components in the business network. The method includes receiving a selection by the user of at least one of the virtualization level options. The method includes initiating a virtualization process in the business network according to the selected virtualization level option. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102172 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PEER TO PEER SEARCHING, SHARING, SOCIAL NETWORKING AND COMMUNICATION IN ONE OR MORE NETWORKS - A system for transmission, reception and accumulation of the knowledge packets to plurality of channel nodes in the network operating distributedly in a peer to peer environment via installable one or more role active Human Operating System (HOS) applications in a digital devise of each of channel node, a network controller registering and providing desired HOS applications and multiple developers developing advance communication and knowledge management applications and each of subscribers exploiting the said network resources by leveraging and augmenting taxonomically and ontologically classified knowledge classes expressed via plurality search macros and UKID structures facilitating said expert human agents for knowledge invocation and support services and service providers providing information services in the preidentified taxonomical classes, wherein each of channel nodes communicating with the unknown via domain specific supernodes each facilitating social networking and relationships development leading to human grid which is searchable via Universal Desktop Search by black box search module. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102173 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING AN ENTITY IN A MOBILE DEVICE ECOSYSTEM - A system and method of assigning an identifier to an entity operating within a mobile device ecosystem including a domain are provided. The method comprises: obtaining an identifier of the entity which uniquely identifies the entity within the domain, the identifier of the entity including length information identifying the length of identifier of the entity; obtaining an identifier of the domain within which the identifier of the entity is unique; and combining the identifier of the entity with the identifier of the domain to create a globally unique identifier of the entity which is globally unique in the mobile device ecosystem. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102174 | Policy And Charging Control Method And System For Multi-PDN Connections Of Single APN - The present invention provides a method and a system for performing policy and charging control for establishing multiple PDN connections to a single APN, the method associates the gateway control session with the subsession in the S9 session associated with the Gx session modified by the indication of IP-CAN session modification message through the PDN Connection ID, thereby, after the relocation occurs on the BBERF making the modified PCC rule be sent down to the PCEF through the associated Gx session and the modified QoS be sent down to the destination BBERF through the gateway control session, thereby implementing the policy and charging control when establishing multiple PDN connections to the single APN in the roaming scenario. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102175 | Computer System, Simulation Method and Program - In a computer environment in which different types of simulations run, a speculative communication method can be performed on a combination of any model and any simulator. The simulations are divided into one or more groups and mounted on an execution node in which a virtual OS runs. A communication protocol simulation device which is a control program of inter-simulation communication and a virtual OS execution management server device which is an execution control program of a virtual OS group run on a management node separately from the virtual OS group that executes the simulations. When the communication protocol simulation device of the management node detects a WAR hazard, the virtual OS execution management server device instructs a virtual OS execution management client device so that a virtual OS in which the WAR hazard occurs returns to a stored intermediate state and re-executes the simulation to a predetermined time. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102176 | EXTRACTING AND MANAGING FONT STYLE ELEMENTS - A system includes a computing device that includes a memory configured to store instructions. The computing device also includes a processor to execute the instructions to perform a method that includes extracting style information of an element of a network asset by using an identifier of the network asset. The method also includes presenting the extracted style information of the element for managing the network asset. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102177 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING DEVICE MANAGEMENT SCHEDULED BASED ON THRESHOLD - Commands for device management to be executed within a terminal and threshold-based conditions for executing such commands included within a scheduling context are provided to the terminal ahead of time. Therefore, the terminal can perform the commands for device management, before errors occurs within the terminal since a value of a particular management object reaches the threshold. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102178 | Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Administrator Task Notification Control - The illustrative embodiments provide for automatically and proactively retrieving administrative maintenance tasks or potential issues from a set of directory servers without direct intervention from an administrator. Responsive to an operation request being sent from a requesting application to the set of directory servers and an administrative maintenance control mechanism being active, an administrative maintenance control is automatically sent to the set of directory servers. Responsive to receiving the response to the administrative maintenance control, an end user application within the data processing system is notified that the at least one of the administrative maintenance tasks or the potential issues have been received. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102179 | METHOD AND SERVER FOR AGENT SERVICE APPLIED TO WIDGET - A method for an agent service applied to a Widget is provided, where the method includes: receiving a service request for the Widget using an Application Programming Interface (API) initiated by a user terminal; forwarding the service request to an API service provider, and forwarding a response for the service request from the API service provider to the user terminal; collecting charging information generated by the Widget using an API service, and recording the collected charging information, where the charging information, together with a charging policy registered by the Widget, is used to perform uniform charging for the API service used by the Widget. An embodiment of the present invention further provides a server, which may reduce complicated user operation and bringing better user experience. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102180 | CONFIGURING A SERVICE BASED ON MANIPULATIONS OF GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATIONS OF ABSTRACTIONS OF RESOURCES - A method to enable defining of a profile of a service through manipulation of graphical representations of abstractions of resources in a data center is disclosed. The profile of the service is accessed. A graphical representation of an abstraction of the first resource type is presented. A graphical representation of an abstraction of a second resource type is presented. A manipulation of the graphical representation of the abstraction of the second resource type is detected with respect to the graphical representation of the abstraction of the first resource type. Based on the manipulation, a correspondence between the abstraction of the second resource type and the profile of the service is identified and a relationship between the abstraction of the second resource type and the abstraction of the first resource type is identified. The profile of the service is updated to include information identifying the correspondence and the relationship. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102181 | MEDIA RESOURCE STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT - Provided are computer-implemented methods and systems for performing media resource storage and management. The computer-implemented method and system implemented as a request manager is capable of monitoring requests for media resources in a content delivery network. For each monitored request, the request manager determines whether to generate a multifile for the requested media resource. For example, the request manager can first determine whether the media resource is eligible for multifile generation. If eligible, the request manager then determines whether the media resource has reached a popularity threshold. If the media resource has reached the popularity threshold, the request manager initiates generation of the multifile for the requested media resource. Generally, the generated multifile is stored in a storage system associated with the content delivery network. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102182 | POLICY PROCESSOR FOR CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT - A policy processor is described that may be used to implement a system for managing the configuration of assets in a distributed computing network, such as an enterprise network. The policy processor resides on a managed node in the distributed computing network and operates to receive, evaluate and enact policies issued by one or more policy authorities in the distributed computing network. The policy processor utilizes a conflict resolution model to determine which policy rules included within the policies should be put into effect and which should not. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120110151 | Web application usage of accessory device directly connected to electronic device in non-networked manner - An accessory device is directly connected in a non-networked manner to an electronic device. The accessory device is to be used by a web application running on a computing device connected to the electronic device over a network. The accessory device has a shared context or an owned context. The shared context specifies that usage of the accessory device is shared among the web application and one or more other web applications. The owned context specifies that the usage of the accessory device is exclusive to the web application and not to any other web application. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110152 | REAL TIME PROTOCOL PACKET TUNNELING - In one embodiment a method and apparatus are provided that automatically establish an real time protocol (RTP) tunnel between an originator node or router and a terminator node or router, wherein the terminator node is close to a remote RTP peer. A method includes detecting a new flow of RTP packets wherein the RTP packets are encoded with a destination Internet Protocol (IP) address. Responsive to detecting the new flow, a probe is sent towards a same IP address as the destination IP address of the RTP packets. A response to the probe is received, the response including an identifier of a node that generated the response. Then, using the identifier, a tunnel is established with the node that generated the response, and thereafter compressed packets (compressed headers, compressed payloads, or both) are passed via the tunnel. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110153 | Administering Incident Pools For Event And Alert Analysis - Administering incident pools including creating a pool of incidents, the pool having a predetermined initial period of time; assigning each received incident to the pool; assigning, by the incident analyzer, to each incident a predetermined minimum time for inclusion in a pool; extending for one or more of the incidents the predetermined initial period of time of the pool by a particular period of time assigned to the incident; determining whether conditions have been met to close the pool; and if conditions have been met to close the pool determining for each incident in the pool whether the incident has been in the pool for its predetermined minimum time for inclusion in a pool; and if the incident has not been in the pool for its predetermined minimum time, evicting the incident from the closed pool and including the incident in a next pool. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110154 | INTEGRATION OF HETEROGENEOUS COMPUTING SYSTEMS INTO A HYBRID COMPUTING SYSTEM - An integrated hybrid system is provided. The hybrid system includes compute components of different types and architectures that are integrated and managed by a single point of control to provide federation and the presentation of the compute components as a single logical computing platform. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110155 | MANAGEMENT OF A DATA NETWORK OF A COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - An integrated hybrid system is provided. The hybrid system includes compute components of different types and architectures that are integrated and managed by a single point of control to provide federation and the presentation of the compute components as a single logical computing platform. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110156 | Configured Management-as-a-Service Connect Process Based on Tenant Requirements - An approach is provided that configures a management-as-a-service (MaaS) connect process at a MaaS provider. The MaaS connect process is configured based on a request received from a MaaS tenant. The configured MaaS connect process is transmitted to the MaaS tenant. MaaS services are provided from the MaaS provider to the MaaS tenant. These MaaS services interact with the configured MaaS connect process installed at the MaaS tenant. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110157 | WEB BROWSER-BASED BUSINESS PROCESS MANAGEMENT ENGINE - A computer-implemented process for a Web browser-based business process management engine. In an embodiment, the process embeds a lightweight business process management engine in a Web browser to form a Web browser-based business process management engine, and choreographs service invocations using the Web browser-based business process management engine. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110158 | FIELD PANEL WITH EMBEDDED WEBSERVER AND METHOD OF ACCESSING THE SAME - The systems, methods and devices disclosed herein provide for a field panel that includes a webserver. The field panel and webserver are arranged in communication with one or more automation components and/or field panels deployed for operation in connection with the building automation system. An information request may be directed to a master field panel for authorization. The master field panel may in turn query a node table containing address and/or communication information with the other field panels and/or automation components operable on the wired or wireless communication network. The information within the node table allows for direct communication to the other field panels and/or automation components operable on the network. In this way, authorized access to each of the field panels and/or automation components is achieved while any communications bottleneck at the master field panel may be significantly reduced or eliminated. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110159 | MANAGING CDN REGISTRATION BY A STORAGE PROVIDER - A system, method, and computer readable medium for managing registration, by a network storage provider, of one or more resources with a CDN service provider are provided. A network storage provider storing one or more resources on behalf of a content provider obtains registration information for registering the one or more resources with a CDN service provider. The registration information may include a request to publish one or more resources to a CDN service provider, an identification of the one or more resources, CDN selection criteria provided by the content provider or otherwise selected, and the like. The network storage provider transmits a CDN generation request corresponding to the registration information to the CDN service provider. Then, the network storage provider manages and processes data pursuant to registration of the one or more resources with the CDN service provider. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120117211 | Fencing Data Transfers In A Parallel Active Messaging Interface Of A Parallel Computer - Fencing data transfers in a parallel active messaging interface (‘PAMI’) of a parallel computer, the PAMI including data communications endpoints, each endpoint comprising a specification of data communications parameters for a thread of execution on a compute node, including specifications of a client, a context, and a task, the compute nodes coupled for data communications through the PAMI and through data communications resources including a deterministic data communications network, including initiating execution through the PAMI of an ordered sequence of active SEND instructions for SEND data transfers between two endpoints, effecting deterministic SEND data transfers; and executing through the PAMI, with no FENCE accounting for SEND data transfers, an active FENCE instruction, the FENCE instruction completing execution only after completion of all SEND instructions initiated prior to execution of the FENCE instruction for SEND data transfers between the two endpoints. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117212 | Insertion Of Management Agents During Machine Deployment - An invention is disclosed for configuring a VM of a deployment to be managed by a management system. In an embodiment, a deployment manager of a deployment instructs a host to create a VM. The VM is created with a base management agent that exposes interfaces to the management system that enable the management system to install management agents on the VM. The deployment manager installs a management agent that corresponds to a management system on the VM, and registers the VM with the management system. The management system may then manage the VM by communicating with the installed management agent on the VM. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117213 | Negotiated Parent Joining in Directed Acyclic Graphs (DAGS) - In one embodiment, a node may request to join a parent node in a directed acyclic graph (DAG) in a computer network, and may notify the parent node of a load associated with the request, and whether the node has any other parent node options. The response received from the parent node may be either an acceptance or a denial (based on the load and other parent node options), where in the case of an acceptance, the node may join the parent node in the DAG. Alternatively, in response to a denial, in one embodiment, the node may perform load shedding to become acceptable to the parent node. In another embodiment, a node receiving a join request from a child node may determine an impact associated with allowing the child node (and its load) to join the receiving node in the DAG prior to returning an acceptance or denial, accordingly. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117214 | SERVICE DIRECTORY - Service endpoints that provide services to client devices send registration data to a service directory service. The registration data includes addresses that client devices can use to access the service endpoints along with descriptive data that describes the services that each endpoint provides, along with other information such as version numbers of applications that are supported by the service endpoints, and whether the service endpoints are running an experiment. Client devices request a manifest from the service directory service. Each request includes client metadata that describes the requesting client device. The service directory service uses the registration data and the client metadata to generate a manifest for the client device that identifies the services that the client may access and an address that the client may use to access each service. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117215 | METHOD FOR FILTERING THE STREAMING OF VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT CONTENT ASSETS, A RELATED SYSTEM, NETWORK ELEMENT AND A RELATED VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT CONTENT ASSET - The present invention relates to a Method for filtering the streaming of Virtual Environment content assets, a related system, network element and a related Virtual Environment content asset The method relates to policy enforcement on Virtual Environment assets, forwarded from a Virtual Environment of a plurality of Virtual Environments to a Virtual Environment client. The at least one Virtual Environment is coupled to a communications network comprising at least one network element where the communications network further couples the at least one Virtual Environment to the Virtual Environment client. The method first comprises the step of forwarding at least one Virtual Environment asset from the at least one Virtual Environment towards the Virtual Environment client. The method additionally comprises the step of determining a policy enforcement action for the at least one Virtual Environment asset based on at least one characteristic of the at least one Virtual Environment asset and at least one policy rule. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117216 | TRACKING MESSAGE SENDERS WITH A TOKEN ISSUANCE LOG - A communication system uses tokens in order to control communication received by the system. Tokens are generated as sets arbitrary symbols, and system operators can issue tokens to third parties by various means, including but not limited to publishing the token in a directory, printing the token on a business card, or entering the token on a website form. In each instance the token may be issued by including the token within and a system address, such as an email address or phone number. Generated tokens are stored in a token log, associated with an indication of one or more entities to whom a system operator chooses to issue the tokens, such as a directory, a business card, or a website form. When the system receives a message that contains a specific token, the token log can be consulted so that an operator provided with the associated indication. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117217 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION IN AN INTEROPERABILITY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are described for facilitating communication among a plurality of entities via an interoperability network. Each entity has policy data corresponding thereto governing interaction with the entity via the interoperability network. A message is transmitted from a first one of the entities to a second one of the entities. The first entity has first policy data corresponding thereto and the second entity has second policy data corresponding thereto. The transmitted message was handled in the network according to combined policy data representing a combination of the first and second policy data. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117218 | NETWORK CONNECTION MANAGEMENT USING CONNECTION PROFILES - Connections for sources to connect to a network are managed by storing connection profiles identifying network attributes for the connections. Each connection profile includes a status of available or subscribed. Requests for connections are received. If a stored connection profile is available that matches the request, the connection for the matching connection profile is assigned to the source. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117219 | METHOD OF MANAGING AN APPLICATION EMBEDDED IN A SECURED ELECTRONIC TOKEN - The invention is a method of managing an application embedded in a secured electronic token. The token is intended to receive a message from a server machine. The message has a header and a body. The token comprises an agent able to manage the message. The method comprises the steps of:
| 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117220 | Packet Classification Method And Apparatus - A method of handling packets within a packet-based communication system implementing a policy and charging control architecture. The method comprises, at one or more policy and charging enforcement functions within a packet switched access network or networks, monitoring packet flows to determine user usage on a per service class basis, and periodically reporting the determined usage from the policy and charging enforcement functions to a policy and charging rules function. At the policy and charging rules function, the received usage information is used in order to generate one or more one or more rule sets, each rule comprising one or more packet properties and one or more actions for handling a packet. The or at least one rule set is sent to the or each policy and charging enforcement function where they are applied in order to determine an action or actions for handling a packet. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120124186 | SYSTEMS, DEVICES, AND METHODS FOR MULTIPLE HOST MANAGEMENT - Methods, devices, and systems for multiple host management are provided. An example of a method for multiple host management includes a multiple host management device managing a plurality of host instances. The multiple host management device can provide each of the plurality of host instances with a plurality of input/output (I/O) functionalities. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124187 | SERVICE PROCESSING APPARATUS, SERVICE PROCESSING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A service processing apparatus includes: a receiving unit that receives a service processing request; a first acquiring unit that acquires service configuration information; a second acquiring unit that acquires processing ability management information; a processing unit that processes the service using the installed module; and a selecting unit that selects service processing apparatuses. The service processing apparatus includes a determining unit that determines a service processing apparatus having the minimal processing load resulting from the calculation of the processing load as a request destination for a processing using the module which is installed on neither the service processing apparatus nor the different service processing apparatuses; and an installation unit that installs the module on the service processing apparatus determined by the determining unit if the module which is installed on neither the service processing apparatus nor the different service processing apparatuses is not installed on the determined service processing apparatus. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124188 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA PROCESSING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a device for data processing in a communication network. The method includes the following steps: (i) at least one filter applicable for a first type of connection is provided in front of at least one filter that is applicable for a second type of connection; and (ii) the order of the at least on filter applicable for the first type of connection and the at least one filter applicable for the second type of connection is inverted in case that the number of filters required for the second type of connection increases. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124189 | AUTOMATIC INCREASING OF CAPACITY OF A VIRTUAL SPACE IN A VIRTUAL WORLD - A system for automatically increasing a capacity of a virtual space in a virtual world may include a processor and a module operating on the processor for detecting an attempt by an avatar to enter a virtual space in a virtual world. The system may also include another module for determining if an allowable number of avatars is currently in the virtual space. The allowable number of avatars may be determined by at least a capacity of a server that is hosting the virtual space. Another module may be provided for increasing a capacity of the virtual space when the allowable number of avatars is currently in the virtual space. Increasing the capacity of the virtual space may include spawning a replicate new virtual space on a different server in response to the capacity of the server that is hosting the virtual space reaching the allowable number of avatars. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124190 | SHARING A PORT WITH MULTIPLE PROCESSES - A port listening service operating in at system level is assigned to listen on a static port. The static port can index a plurality of unique IDs associated with a plurality of applications operating in a session level. The server application can then provide to a client the unique connection ID, the IP address of the server, and the static port number for a connection. If the client connects by referencing the unique connection ID, the port listening service can forward a corresponding socket for the connection to the appropriate application instance, such that the application still operates in a session level. As such, the port listening service can dispatch connection services for a single static port to multiple different application instances running in a session level. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124191 | MANAGING TCP ANYCAST REQUESTS - Managing TCP anycast requests at content delivery network nodes is disclosed. In some embodiments, serving a request includes receiving a request at a node of a plurality of nodes comprising a content delivery network, wherein each of the plurality of nodes share a same anycast IP address to which the request is directed and servicing the request at the node. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120131159 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUCING MESSAGE PASSING FOR CONTENTION DETECTION IN DISTRIBUTED SIP SERVER ENVIRONMENTS - A method, a system, and a computer program product are provided for reducing message passing for contention detection in distributed SIP server environments. The method is implemented in a computer infrastructure having computer executable code tangibly embodied on a computer readable storage medium having programming instructions operable to determine that a first site is waiting for a first object locked by a second site. The programming instructions are further operable to determine that a third site is waiting for a second object locked by the first site, and to send a first probe to the second site to determine whether the second site is waiting. A second probe is received and indicates that a site is waiting for an object locked by the first site. The second probe further indicates a deadlock in a distributed server environment to be resolved. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131160 | DISASSOCIATING AND FREEING MANAGED CONNECTIONS BASED ON USAGE PATTERNS - A method, system and computer program product for disassociating and freeing managed connection objects. Managed connections are dissociated from their connection handles based on their usage patterns, determined by various connection parameters, which more effectively reduces the idle time of the managed connections. The managed connections whose cost of disassociating and reassociating is less than the cost of keeping the managed connections idle are targeted and released to the free pool of managed connections via the dissociation from its connection handles. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131161 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MATCHING A USAGE HISTORY TO A NEW CLOUD - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for identifying usage histories and end users that may benefit from being redeployed to a new cloud-based network. In particular, a new cloud can receive usage histories corresponding to end user usage in a respective set of other pre-existing clouds. In embodiments, the new cloud can determine whether the new cloud provides sufficient resources to properly host each end user recorded in the usage histories. Further, the new cloud can determine whether there is a cost benefit or other advantage for a user to move to the new cloud. In embodiments, a deployment recommendation may be sent to an administrator of the cloud associated with the desirable usage history. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131162 | USING A WEB SERVICE TO DELETE DNS RECORDS IN A SERVER HOSTING SYSTEM - A server hosting system provides managed servers for tenants. Managed servers for different tenants can have the same IP addresses and fully-qualified domain names. A server manager for the server hosting system detects a deletion event for one of the managed servers. In response to detecting the deletion event, the server manager sends a web services request to a Domain Name Service (DNS) web service having a web API. The web services request requests invocation of a deregister method in the web API. The deregister method removes DNS records that associate a management-side fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the managed server with a management-side IP address for the managed server. No other managed server in the server hosting system has the management-side IP address. No other managed server in the server hosting system has the management-side FQDN. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131163 | BALANCING THE LOADS OF SERVERS IN A SERVER FARM BASED ON AN ANGLE BETWEEN TWO VECTORS - A system and computer program product for balancing the loads of servers in a server farm. A vector, referred to herein as the “DesiredVector,” is computed to hold the load factors for each of the servers. Upon receipt of a client request, a vector, referred to herein as the “ActiveConnections,” is modified for each scenario where the new client request is considered to be serviced by a different server. The ActiveConnections vector holds the current number of client requests being serviced by each of the servers. Angles made by each of the different ActiveConnections vectors with the DesiredVector are computed. Upon identifying the ActiveConnections vector that produces the smallest angle with the DesiredVector, the client request is directed to the server which corresponds to the identified ActiveConnections vector. In this manner, the best possible distribution of requests among the servers is made for every client connection. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131164 | ATTACHING WEB SERVICE POLICIES TO A GROUP OF POLICY SUBJECTS - In one set of embodiments, methods, systems, and apparatus are provided to attach one or more quality of service policies to resources in an enterprise system by receiving a first global policy attachment that references an attachment attribute value and a first service policy, receiving a request to access a policy subject associated with a subject attribute value, identifying an effective policy set referenced by the first global policy attachment, the effective policy set including the first service policy if the attachment attribute value equals the subject attribute value, and granting the request to access based upon the at least one effective policy. The at least one effective policy may further include a first service policy referenced by the first global policy attachment if a first policy attachment scope referenced by the first global policy attachment matches or contains a subject scope associated with the policy subject. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131165 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN NETWORK - A method implemented by a gateway device which handles sessions over a network to which the gateway device is connected and which also enforces conditions of service provided to those network sessions, the method involving: receiving from a policy server a policy rules package, wherein the policy rules package specifies a set of rules that are to be applied to certain sessions handled by the gateway device and a set of criteria for identifying among a plurality of subscribers a group of all subscribers to which the rules are to be applied by the gateway device; based on set of criteria in the policy rules package identifying all subscribers with currently active sessions to whom the policy rules are to be applied; and applying the set of rules to the sessions of the identified subscribers. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131166 | SERVER MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS - A system for managing one or more services during the provision of an application to a user is provided. The system comprises an application component operably connected to a network and configuration data for the user. The configuration data specifies: one or more partner servers configured to supply one or more respective services within one or more respective service categories, each partner server in a service category being chosen from a plurality of available partner servers for the service category and communication parameters for each partner server that allow communication with the partner server over the network. During the provision of the application to the user, the application component uses the configuration data for the user to access a service provided by an appropriate partner server. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131167 | Method and Apparatus for User Registration in IMS - A method for user registration in Internet protocol multimedia subsystem is provided including receiving a registration request including a first identification of a control function, comparing said first identification of the control function with a second identification of the control function, and proceeding with the registration request based on the result of said comparing. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131168 | XDMS FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN M2M - The use of existing XDMS frameworks in M2M communications allows network functionality to be used and allows the obviation of redesign of resource management functionality. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131169 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN UN-ADDRESSABLE NETWORK APPLIANCE - A network appliance is provided. The network appliance includes an un-addressable communication sub-system positioned in a communication path electronically connecting a control computing device to a target computing device that are both addressable via one or more standard networking protocols that can employed to achieve addressed communications in a structured communications network, the un-addressable communication sub-system being configured to access a data stream traveling through the communication path. The network appliance further includes memory comprising code executable by a processor to determine that a control command is present in the data stream, and permit the control command to control the network appliance only in response to an affirmative determination that the control computing device and the network appliance possess mating key portions, the mating key portions being constructed from a master key. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131170 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FULFILLING REQUESTS USING A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and system of providing an on-demand service to a requester selectable from a group of requesters is provided, each of the requesters having a mobile device at an associated location. The requesters use the mobile device to request a service from a server. The server makes available the requests to eligible service providers for display and selection. On selection of a request by a service provider, the request is removed from display. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120136976 | IDENTIFICATION OF A PRIVATE DEVICE IN A PUBLIC NETWORK - Methods, network address translation (NAT) devices, network nodes and system for allowing identification of a private device in a public network or treating traffic of a private device in a public network. The NAT may allocate a private IPv4 address to the private device, reserve a block of ports on the public IPv4 address for the private device and send an identification of the block of ports to a network node in the public network. The network node of the public network may receive an identification of a block of ports on the public IPv4 address indicating that the block of ports is reserved for the private device and activate a rule for treating traffic of the private device. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136977 | STORAGE APPLIANCE, APPLICATION SERVER AND METHOD THEREOF - A storage appliance system is disclosed which may include at least one application server for locally executing an application, and one or more storage servers in communication with the application server for I/O transmission therebetween. Also disclosed are an application server, a method, and a computer program product. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136978 | RACK SERVER SYSTEM AND MANAGEMENT METHOD OF THE SAME - A rack server system management method adapted in a rack server system is provided. The rack server system management method comprises the steps as follows. The first information of a plurality of servers in the rack server system and the second information of a plurality of fan modules in the rack server system are updated every predetermined time period by a document management unit. A rack management module retrieves the first and the second information through polling the document management unit. The rack management module retrieves temperature values of the servers from the first information and adjusts the speed of the fan module according to the second information. A rack server system is disclosed herein as well. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136979 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DISTINCT IP ADDRESSES IN A SYSTEM AND RELATED SYSTEM - Logic performing unit acquires the IP addresses of operating systems and embedded management devices in network, and directly acquires a predetermined parameter from each embedded management device. Next, a reference value associated with the predetermined parameter is acquired by logic performing unit through the embedded management device's driver on the operating system under management, or the respective predetermined parameters are mounted onto respective embedded management device's virtual device by logic performing unit. If the predetermined parameter directly acquired from a specific embedded management device matches the reference value acquired through an embedded management device's driver on a specific operating system or if the predetermined parameter directly acquired from a specific embedded management device can be found in a specific operating system, logic performing unit can know a certain embedded management device and a certain operating system are on the same platform. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136980 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONFIGURATION SETTINGS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND SERVICES - A wireless mobile communication device includes a processing system, a memory device and software. The software is stored on the memory device and executable by the processing system to receive a policy setting, authenticate a sender of the received policy, and automatically apply the policy setting on the communication device based on a successful authentication of the sender. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136981 | ADMINISTERING DEVICES WITH DOMAIN STATE OBJECTS - Example embodiments of the present invention include a method for administering devices. Such example embodiments include receiving a domain state object, identifying an action in dependence upon the domain state object, and executing the action. In many example embodiments, receiving a domain state object includes receiving a signal to download the domain state object from a mobile sensor, and downloading the domain state object from the mobile sensor. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136982 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - An information management unit | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136983 | Method and System for use in Network Management of Communications Network - A method for management of integration of a system in a communications network comprising sending a first message by a first system. In said first message the first system requests to be managed and provides information describing its requirements. In response to said first message said first system receives a reply from a second system which confirms that said first system is managed by said second system. Said reply comprises information about capabilities of said second system. If a network resource model of the first system changed said first system sends a second message comprising information describing its changed requirements. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120136984 | SERVICE REALIZING METHOD AND SERVICE SYSTEM - A method for implementing a service and a service system, wherein the method includes: storing a service node address of a service in a peer-to-peer (P2P) node corresponding to a service identifier of the service in a P2P overlay network; a user equipment sending a service request including the service identifier to the P2P overlay network after acquiring the service identifier; a P2P node in the P2P overlay network receiving the service request sent by the user equipment, then acquiring the service node address from the P2P overlay network according to the service identifier and sending the service request to a corresponding service node according to the service node address. The service system includes a user equipment, a service node and a P2P overlay network. The present invention provides service routing based on the P2P overlay network. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120144007 | METHOD FOR SESSION TRANSFER MECHANISM BETWEEN COMMUNICATION DEVICES | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144008 | System and Method for Analyzing Computing System Resources - It has been recognized that to accurately measure the required resource capacity of computing systems such as servers, various relevant factors should be considered, since the capacity may be excess or insufficient. This measurement can be reflected by the ratio of the theoretical minimum server capacity required relative to the actual server capacity provisioned, hereinafter also referred to as the “fully loaded utilization”, which can be expressed in various ways, including as a percentage or an efficiency index or other number or value. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144009 | SAMPLE-TEST-DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVER, SAMPLE TEST DEVICE, SAMPLE TEST SYSTEM, AND SAMPLE TEST METHOD - There is provided a sample test system which can execute a prior process for a specific sample in consideration of priorities and process progresses of a plurality of samples processed in the sample test system. The sample test system includes a sample-test-device management server | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144010 | UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY BASED NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - A universal plug and play (UPnP)-based network system and a method of controlling the same. A UPnP device can operate according to a description of each control point (CP) when performing a command, by including the description, which is inherent information of each CP, in a command message transmitted from each CP to the UPnP device and allowing the UPnP device to analyze the command message to obtain the description of the CP. The UPnP-based network system includes a plurality of CPs, each of which stores a CP description, which is inherent characteristic information of each CP, and generates and transmits a command message including the CP description, and a UPnP device which is connected to the plurality of CPs over a network, analyzes the command message received from each CP to perform an operation according to the command message, and analyzes the CP description included in the command message to recognize each CP which transmits the command message. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144011 | SESSION CONTROL SYSTEM, SESSION CONTROL METHOD AND SESSION CONTROL PROGRAM - A session control device connected to a web site and a client terminal through a network, which includes a calculation unit for calculating, with a state of a session in each access to a reference page which is a page whose effect is large on arrival at processing whose importance in the web site is high as a stage, a tendency of a session toward the processing whose importance is high on a stage basis, a storage unit for storing a calculated tendency toward the processing whose importance is high, a setting unit for setting a reference for limiting the session, and a collation unit for comparing a tendency toward the processing whose importance is high with respect to a stage of the session received from the client terminal and comparing with the reference to determine whether to limit the session from the client terminal. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144012 | AGER RING OPTIMIZATION - A device provides an ager ring that ages entries associated with managed resource of a device, and determines whether a particular entry associated with a particular managed resource of the device is to be updated. The device also updates, when the particular entry is to be aged out in a particular time frame, the particular entry in the ager ring based on a bucket offset and a current time bucket associated with the particular entry and based on a current time, a refresh timeout, and a maximum timeout associated with the ager ring. The device further updates, when the particular entry is being aged during processing, the particular entry in the ager ring based on a new bucket, the current time bucket, and the bucket offset associated with the particular entry and based on the maximum timeout associated with the ager ring. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120151025 | FRAMEWORK PROVIDING UNIFIED INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT FOR POLYMORPHIC INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) FUNCTIONS ACROSS DISPARATE GROUPS IN A CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Performance of polymorphic IT functions in a cloud computing environment can begin by providing an individualized selection mechanism for initiating polymorphic IT functions upon a node of a cloud computing environment. A polymorphic IT function can represent an IT function where the actions required to perform the IT function vary depending upon a combination of configuration parameters for the node. User-specification of the combination of configuration parameters can be rendered unnecessary by the individualized selection mechanism. A polymorphic IT function framework can receive a request identifying the node and a driver program via the individualized selection mechanism to perform a user-selected polymorphic IT function. The driver program can define actions for performing the polymorphic IT function upon the node for the combination of configuration parameters. The driver program can then be invoked. Upon completion of the driver program, notification can be sent to a designated entity. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151026 | GENERIC AND AUTOMATIC ADDRESS CONFIGURATION FOR DATA CENTER NETWORKS - This application describes a system and method for auto configuring data center networks. The networks include a plurality of electronic devices that may include switches, servers, routers, or any other device that may be used in a data center network. Graph theory is applied to the arrangement of the network devices to determine if the intended design of the data network matches the actual implementation of the network. This may be achieved by resolving the blueprint graph with the physical graph to determine if they are isomorphic. Also, the isomorphic techniques may be used to detect miswirings in the network that do not cause a node degree change for any of the network components. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151027 | POLICY DRIVEN DYNAMIC COMPOSITION OF SERVICE DATAFLOWS - An information processing system receives a request from a client. A first set of dataflows that enforces at least one set of policies is retrieved in response to receiving the request. Each dataflow in the first set of dataflows is a software component that processes a set of messages sent from the client to a service. A dataflow execution plan is generated that include the first set of dataflows. At least one dataflow in the first set of dataflows is determined to be associated with a dataflow policy. At least a second set of dataflows associated with the dataflow policy is retrieved in response to the determining. At the at least second set of dataflows is inserted into the dataflow execution plan preceding the at least one dataflow. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151028 | Application Layer Protocol Support For Sleeping Nodes In Constrained Networks - Methods and systems providing application layer support for one or more sleeping nodes in constrained networks are contemplated. Embodiments contemplate inserting sleep information in a header option or payload of an application layer message. The application layer message may be conveyed in a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) or a constrained application protocol (CoAP). Embodiments contemplate communicating the application layer message to a server, which may serve as a caching and/or buffering proxy. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151029 | Method for Interaction between Resource and Admission Control Systems and Resource and Admission Control System - The present invention discloses a method for an interaction between resource and admission control systems and a resource and admission control system, the method includes: a resource and admission control function in a fixed network receiving a request message transmitted by a Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF) in a mobile network, and converting the request message or parameters carried in the request message into a form that can be processed or identified by a transport functional entity in the fixed network. The technical scheme of the present invention complies with the development trend of the future network, and is simple and practical. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151030 | NETWORK ELEMENTS, INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND METHODS FOR ROUTING CONTROL - A method for identifying whether a selective internet protocol transport opportunity (SIPTO) route is allowed to be used by at least one wireless communication unit comprises, at a core network element: storing subscription profile data associated with the at least one wireless communication unit in a home subscriber server (HSS) database, where the subscription profile data comprises an indication of whether the wireless communication unit has access rights to use a SIPTO route, and generating a SIPTO indicator for informing at least one network element that the at least one wireless communication unit is allowed to use the SIPTO route. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120158930 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NEXT HOP IDENTIFIERS IN A DISTRIBUTED SWITCH FABRIC SYSTEM - In some embodiments, an apparatus implemented in a memory and/or a processing device includes a first network control entity to manage a first data plane module associated with a port from a set of ports at a first access switch. The first network control entity associates an identifier of a peripheral processing device operatively coupled to the port from the set of ports with a next hop reference. The first network control entity provides the next hop reference to a second network control entity that manages a second data plane module at a second access switch such that the second data plane module can append the next hop reference to a data packet when the peripheral processing device is within a data path between and including the second access switch and a destination peripheral processing device. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158931 | Method and Apparatus for the Execution of Adaptable Composed Computer-Implemented Services with Integrated Policies - In one aspect, a method of executing a composed computer-implemented service having at least one policy integrated therein is provided. The method comprises executing a service portion of said composed computer-implemented service, and executing a policy portion of the composed computer-implemented service at substantially the same time as said step of executing said service portion of said composed computer-implemented service. The policy portion of the composed computer-implemented service affects a behavior of the composed computer-implemented service. The policy portion of the composed computer-implemented service and the service portion of the composed computer-implemented service are integrated into a same service code. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158932 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, A HVAC SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME AND A METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A COMPONENT FOR THE HVAC SYSTEM - A communications network, a HVAC system employing a communications system and a method of manufacturing a component for the HVAC system are disclosed. In one embodiment, the communications network includes: (1) a dominant node having a predetermined coupling impedance and (2) a plurality of end nodes coupled to the dominant node, each of the plurality having an end node coupling impedance, wherein a total of each the end node coupling impedance and the predetermined coupling impedance is substantially a defined maximum loading impedance for the communication network. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158933 | Data Reporting Using Reporting Groups in a Computer Network - In one embodiment, a node may determine a topology of a plurality of reporting nodes within a directed acyclic graph (DAG) in a computer network. The reporting nodes may then be assigned to one of a plurality of reporting groups, where reporting nodes are allowed to report only during designated time windows corresponding to their assigned reporting group. The reporting nodes may then be informed of at least their own assignment to a particular reporting group. In another embodiment, a particular reporting node may join the DAG, and may also receive an assignment to one of a plurality of reporting groups. Accordingly, the particular reporting node may also determine designated time windows corresponding to the assigned reporting group, where the particular reporting node is allowed to report only during the designated time windows. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158934 | QUEUE PROCESSING SYSTEM - A method, performed by a server device, may include receiving a request from a user device to place a user, associated with the user device, in a particular queue; determining whether the user meets one or more qualifications associated with the queue; placing the user in the particular queue, when the user meets the one or more qualifications; monitoring whether the user continues to meet the one or more qualifications, while the user is in the queue; and removing the user from the particular queue, when the user fails to meet the one or more qualifications. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158935 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR MANAGING SOCIAL NETWORKS - Systems and methods consistent with the disclosure relate to managing social networks. According to one exemplary embodiment, a computer-implemented method for managing social networks of a user is disclosed. The method accesses an online social network site of the user, and receives, from the online social network site, networking content related to the user and a plurality of contacts of the user. The method identifies the plurality of contacts based on the networking content, and determines relationships between the user and the respective contacts based on the networking content. The method also creates a social networking map according to the relationships. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158936 | Resource and Admission Control Method - The present invention provides a resource and admission control method applied to nomadicity and wholesale scenarios, which clarifies an interaction process between a PD-FE of a NGN home operator/NGN retail service provider and a PE-FE of a NGN home operator/NGN retail service provider, puts forward a resource request process, resource modification process and resource release process of the resource and admission control method applied to the nomadicity and wholesale scenarios, and solves problems existing in the related art. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158937 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANIPULATING MULTIMEDIA STREAMS OF IP TELECOMMUNICATIONS FOR MULTIPLE IP-ENABLED USER DEVICES - A technique for manipulating multimedia streams of IP telecommunications for multiple IP-enabled user devices is disclosed. The disclosed technique allows at least a portion of an IP telecommunication is manipulated to selected IP-enabled user devices. Various methods using the multimedia stream manipulation technique are presented. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158938 | CONTROL SERVER, SERVICE PROVIDING SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF PROVIDING A VIRTUAL INFRASTRUCTURE - A service providing system includes a control server and a physical resource(s) controlled by the control server. The control server has a virtual device providing unit(s) that provides at least one virtual object for controlling a physical resource(s), and a virtual infrastructure providing unit(s) that can provide, as a virtual object(s), a virtual infrastructure(s) configured using at least one virtual object provided by the virtual device providing unit(s), wherein the virtual infrastructure providing unit(s) can configure a virtual infrastructure(s) using the virtual object(s) provided by the virtual infrastructure providing unit(s), and can provide the virtual infrastructure(s) as a virtual object(s). | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158939 | DATA SUPPLY APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Provided is a data supply apparatus including a transmission device that sends data to another data supply apparatus; a reception device that receives data from another data supply apparatus; a data storing device that stores data in a storage device; and a data storage determination device that determines whether or not the received data should be stored in the storage device, based on a predetermined supply probability. In a typical example, the reception device receives the data to which supply probability information which indicates the supply probability has been appended; and the data storage determination device determines whether or not the received data should be stored in the storage device, based on the supply probability indicated by the supply probability information. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158940 | METHOD FOR A SECURE DEVICE TO RESOLVE AN IP ADDRESS OF A TARGET SERVER - The present invention relates to a method for a secure device to resolve an IP address of a target server to which the secure device is willing to access, said secure device being suitable to be inserted in a wireless device, wherein the secure device sends a request to a DNS client that resides on said wireless device to resolve the IP address of the target server, said target server being identified by its FQDN. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158941 | BALANCING THE LOADS OF SERVERS IN A SERVER FARM BASED ON AN ANGLE BETWEEN TWO VECTORS - A method for balancing the loads of servers in a server farm. A vector, referred to herein as the “DesiredVector,” is computed to hold the load factors for each of the servers. Upon receipt of a client request, a vector, referred to herein as the “ActiveConnections,” is modified for each scenario where the new client request is considered to be serviced by a different server. The ActiveConnections vector holds the current number of client requests being serviced by each of the servers. Angles made by each of the different ActiveConnections vectors with the DesiredVector are computed. Upon identifying the ActiveConnections vector that produces the smallest angle with the DesiredVector, the client request is directed to the server which corresponds to the identified ActiveConnections vector. In this manner, the best possible distribution of requests among the servers is made for every client connection. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120166604 | FLEXIBLE POLICY BASED NETWORK DECISIONMAKING - A network policy system is described herein that allows computing devices to manage and control various networking decisions based on a specific policy defined by a policy administrator that may include the device manufacturer, information technology (IT) personnel maintaining the devices, or the network provider. The policies can include many factors defined by the policy administrator under various conditions, including cost, power consumption, central processing unit (CPU) time, battery life, use of pooled minutes, and so forth. Packet routing in the device happens today primarily based on hardcoded factors such as bandwidth availability or cost, but there may be other considerations that appeal to policy administrators. The network policy system allows the policy administrator to define one or more flexible policies suited to the administrator's purpose. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166605 | Remote Management Systems and Methods for Servers - Remote management systems and methods for servers are provided. The system includes at least one server and a remote management console. The server has an operating system, and includes at least one hardware component and a management controller, wherein the management controller obtains the identification data corresponding to the hardware component. The remote management console searches information of the operating system and the management controller via a network. The remote management console obtains the identification data of the hardware component from the operating system, and obtains the identification data of the hardware component from the management controller. The remote management console maps the operating system and the management controller based on the identification data respectively obtained from the operating system and the management controller. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166606 | DISTRIBUTED FILE OPERATION APPARATUS, DISTRIBUTED FILE OPERATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING DISTRIBUTED FILE OPERATION PROGRAM - A distributed file operation method is executed by a computer that is connected to an arrangement information management apparatus and a plurality of file management apparatuses through a network. The arrangement information management apparatus is configured to manage arrangement information of files. The plurality of file management apparatuses is configured to store the files. The distributed file operation method includes generating an operating request on a first file on the basis of a first protocol, making, by the computer, an inquiry to the arrangement information management apparatus on arrangement information of the first file by specifying an identifier of the first file, and transmitting the operating request to one of the plurality of file management apparatuses indicated by the arrangement information that is provided in response to the inquiry by the arrangement information management apparatus. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166607 | PORTABLE RADIOGRAPHIC IMAGE CAPTURE DEVICE, IMAGE CAPTURE CONTROLLER AND RADIOGRAPHIC IMAGE CAPTURE SYSTEM - A portable radiographic image capture device includes: an radiographic image data generating unit; a wired communication unit that includes a connecting terminal and that performs wired communication with an image capture controller; a wireless communication unit; a storing unit that stores, as an IP address used to identify the device itself, a first IP address used to perform wired communication and a second IP address used to perform wireless communication; and a setting unit that sets the first IP address as the IP address to perform communication with the image capture controller in a case in which the connecting terminal and the image capture controller are wire-connected, and sets the second IP address as the IP address to perform communication with the image capture controller in a case in which the image capture controller is disconnected from the connecting terminal. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166608 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD, NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PROGRAM THEREFOR - A method for network communication under SNMP includes: producing an access request when a first device accesses management information stored in a second device, the request containing additional information including identification information of the first device or identification information of a user of the first device in a value field included in a data field that contains an identifier field and the value field; transmitting the access request to the second device; and permitting the transmitted access request so that the number of devices or users accessing the second device may not exceed a predetermined number on the basis of the identification information of the first device or the user contained in the transmitted access request and identification information of a device or a user accessing the management information. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166609 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING DEVICE-SPECIFIC INFORMATION OF A FIELD DEVICE OF AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY AND/OR METHOD FOR SERVICING A FIELD DEVICE - A method for providing device-specific information of a field device of automation technology and/or to a method for servicing a field device, wherein a device description comprehensively describing the field device is integrated in a web server in the field device, wherein at least one part of the device description describing the field device is compiled/interpreted in a field device specific, software code in a web browser, which is connectable with the field device, and wherein, based on the field device specific, software code, there are presented on the web browser dynamically produced, device-specific web pages, via which operating personnel are provided device-specific information, and/or via which the field device is serviced by the operating personnel. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166610 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION IN APPLICATION FIELD - The present invention relates to a method and system for communication in an application field that may communicate with a sensor or a computer incorporated in an object or an environment to collect information about an object or an environment associated with the object, or process the information to semantic information to be shared and provided to a user or the object, and may recognize and determine a surrounding circumstance independently and without a command from an external source, thereby providing an intended application service. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166611 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE SYSTEM INCLUDING A PLURALITY OF PROXY SERVERS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING OBJECTS - A distributed storage system including a plurality of proxy server and a method for managing objects. The distributed storage system may include a plurality of data nodes, a plurality of proxy server, and a global load balancer. Each one of the plurality of data nodes may be configured to perform at least one management operation and output an operation result. Each one of the plurality of proxy servers may be configured to perform operations for controlling the plurality of data nodes to perform the at least one management operation in response to an operation request from a respective client. The global load balancer may be configured to select one proxy server from the plurality of proxy servers and allocate the selected proxy server to the respective client as the responsible proxy server. The respective client may perform the management operation through the allocated responsible proxy server. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166612 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MESSAGE TRANSMISSION CONTROL, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REGISTER/UPDATE - A message transmission control method, including: a location node storing a message transmission control list of a terminal node; after the terminal node registers to an access node, the access node requesting the location node to send the message transmission control list of the terminal node; the location node searching for the message transmission control list of the terminal node, and sending to the access node; and after receiving the message transmission control list of the terminal node, the access node filtering data messages sent to the terminal node according to the message transmission control list. The present invention also provides a message transmission control system, and a register/update method and system. The control of the message transmission control list in the present invention is implemented in the access server of the wireless network, thus to avoid the wireless resource waste and the subscriber charge loss. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166613 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SERVER, INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - An information management server includes an information provision request receiving unit which receives an information provision request together with request information, a probe information provision requesting unit which performs the probe information provision request to the probe information providing apparatus, a probe information obtaining unit which obtains the probe information from the probe information providing apparatus, a message information provision requesting unit which performs the message information provision request to the message information providing apparatus, a message information obtaining unit which obtains the message information from the message information providing apparatus, a response-to-request information generating unit which generates response-to-request information corresponding to the request information by using the probe information and the message information, and a response-to-request information providing unit which provides the response-to-request information to the information provision requesting apparatus and optionally aerating the composition are also disclosed. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166614 | Information Handling System Employing Unified Management Bus - An information handling system includes a host including a central processing unit, a first management controller (MC) enabled to communicate with the host, and a network interface resource (NIR) in communication with the host and operable to enable the information handling system to communicate via an external network. The NIR includes a unified management module (UMM) operable to receive and route a local management packet, sent from the host, to the first management controller via a first unified management bus (UMB) and further operable to receive and route a remote management packet, sent from a remote resource via the external network, to the first management controller via the first UMB. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166615 | Inband Data Gathering with Dynamic Intermediary Route Selections - Included are a method to manage subscriptions over a network, where the network may comprise intermediaries, clients, and service providers, and the method may include, receiving a subscription at a network intermediary, the subscription having management application data and having application level header information. The method may further include reviewing the application level header information of the received subscription and redirecting the subscription over the network using the reviewed application level header information. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120173685 | Systems and Methods for Domain Name Exchange - A system, method, and computer-readable medium, is described that enables a domain name registrant the ability to exchange their existing domain in favor of a new domain without incurring additional domain registration fees and without affecting the other data fields of the existing domain. Once the domain exchange service is added to the domain registration, the registrant can exchange the domain name as often as it likes in accordance with the business rules of the registry until the domain exchange service expires. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173686 | MOBILITY AWARE CLOUD PROVISIONING - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, data processing system and computer program product for mobility aware cloud provisioning. In an embodiment of the invention, a method for mobility aware provisioning of access to a service instance executing in a host in a cloud computing can include receiving a request from a mobile computing device for access to a service in a cloud computing environment. Thereafter, an expected path of travel for the mobile computing device can be computed and a particular instance of the service executing in memory of a host in the cloud computing environment can be selected for its proximity to the expected path of travel. Finally, the particular instance of the service can be provisioned for access by the mobile computing device. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173687 | DISSEMINATING COMMANDS FROM A DMS SERVER TO FIELDED DEVICES USING AN EXTENDABLE COMMAND ARCHITECTURE - A method of remotely managing a fielded device with a device management system (DMS). Via a processor, a DMS directive can be received on the fielded device. The DMS directive can include at least one system command for a DMS agent instantiated on the fielded device and intelligence information not previously stored on the fielded device that is necessary for the DMS agent to interpret the system command. Via the processor the DMS agent can be executed to process the system command using the intelligence information provided in the DMS directive to implement the system command without requiring an update to computer-readable program code that defines the DMS agent. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173688 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVED NETWORK MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING - A network maintenance scheduling conflict interceptor that prevents duplicate and conflicting work from occurring on any network elements, which make up a network system, so that costly and disruptive outages do not occur in the network system by allowing for an intelligent way to schedule and complete maintenance activities in a complicated network is provided. This new device enables the necessary communication between network elements that allows for communication of maintenance activities taking place on specific network elements that may impact other network elements in the network. Lastly, by nature of providing for a mechanized way to schedule network maintenance activities, the new device, in essence, captures and provides for a history of maintenance activities for a network. Such historical data can provide valuable information for future network planning and maintenance. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173689 | Method And System For Migration of Managed Devices - A system and method for migrating a managed subscriber device from an incumbent managing server to a new managing server. Registration data for the subscriber device and authentication certificates are transferred to he new managing server or an associated memory device, and a DNS name and IP address mapping request is transmitted to a DNS server. When the name change is implemented, a DNS lookup for the managing server performed by the subscriber device returns an IP address associated with the new managing server. The new managing server may then assume the management functions with respect to the subscriber device. The migration may be performed for a number of subscriber devices simultaneously. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173690 | MANAGING SECURITY FEATURES OF A BROWSER - A method, system, and computer usable program product for managing a security database in a computer memory by presenting a content delivery unit in a browser window on a computer display, identifying a plurality of domains associated with the content delivery unit wherein a first set of the plurality of domains is associated with hyperlinks in the content delivery unit, receiving user input selecting a security category for a second set of domains, and associating the second set of domains with the selected security category in the security database. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173691 | ABSTRACT REPRESENTATION AND PROVISIONING OF NETWORK SERVICES - A network management device connects to a device on the network, receives a trigger for an operation command, supplies to the device a command line interface command for the operation command, wherein a randomly generated string is included at the end of the command line interface command. The network management device receives the output of the operation command from the device, detects the end of the operation command output and parses the output using an XML-based parser. XML based configuration files are used for configuration of different network devices. XML based report files are used to generate different network reports. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173692 | Redirection Service - A computing system can include an interface that receives a URL responsive to a user activating an Internet link via an application where the URL includes metadata for an item specified by a country-based Internet store; circuitry that identifies a base country of the user by resolving an Internet Protocol address associated with the user; circuitry that decides if the base country of the user differs from the country of the country-based Internet store; and circuitry that formulates, if the base country differs, a URL for redirecting the user to a country-based Internet store for a country that corresponds to the base country of the user. Various other apparatuses, systems, methods, etc., are also disclosed. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173693 | Method and Device for Association Management of Network Resources - A method for association management of network resources is provided, comprising the following steps of: a service side classifying network resources, setting resource type identifiers for the network resources and sending dependency relationships between the resource type identifiers and resource types to a system side; the system side building a data model for storing resource type dependency relationships according to the received dependency relationships between the resource type identifiers and the resource types; and the system side providing interfaces used for operating the resource type dependency relationships and one or more interfaces used for operating resource instance dependency relationships for the service side. A device for association management of network resources is also provided. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173694 | VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK IMPLEMENTATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a virtual private network (VPN) implementation method and system. The implementation of the VPN is based on the Location/ID separation network, and the corresponding VPN attribute is added to the mapping relation between the ID identifier and the location identifier. When performing the mapping processing, if the VPN attribute of the source host is judged to be the same as that of the destination host, the location identifier of the destination host is inquired, thereby the forwarding of the data packets is implemented according to the location identifier of the destination host; if the VPN attributes are not same, an unavailable message is replied. Thus, the virtual private network is implemented efficiently, the convenience and safety of the host communication of the VPN side are ensured, and the user requirement to the virtual private network is satisfied. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173695 | AUTOMATIC EXPANSION METHOD, MANAGEMENT DEVICE, MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - An automatic expansion method, a management device, and a management system are disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention. In the embodiments of the present invention, information about added management nodes is received from a node management server when a new node is added, where the information about the added management nodes comprises at least address information of the added management nodes; the address information of the added management nodes is used to obtain an index corresponding to a continuous identifier (ID) segment; and an adding message of the new node is sent to all added management nodes, where the adding message includes at least a continuous ID segment managed by the new node and address information of the new node. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173696 | System and Method to Discover Clients Associated with Local Domain Name Server using Sampling - A content delivery system includes an analyzer module, a content request data collection module, and a domain name server. The collection module receives request sent to a tracking address, collects information about the request, and provides the information to the analyzer. The server receives an address request from a local domain name server associated with an autonomous system for the cache server address, provides the tracking address to the local server because the local server is associated with the second autonomous system, collects address request information about the address, and provides the address request information to the analyzer module. The analyzer module receives the address request and content request information, and determines information about clients served by the autonomous system based on the address request and content request information. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173697 | METHOD FOR ANALYZING PERFORMANCE INFORMATION - A management computer includes a communication device for communicating with a storage system and a plurality of computers. The management computer also includes a a processor executing to: store relation information between the storage system and the plurality of computers; collect a plurality of computer performance information about computer-side I/O loads generated by programs on the plurality of computers, from the plurality of computers; identify a storage resource from a plurality of storage resources in the storage system; and identify at least one computer performance information from the plurality of computer performance information based on the relation information; and output the at least one computer performance information to a display. The at least one computer performance information corresponds to a certain computer-side I/O load that generates a load to the identified storage resource. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173698 | Concurrent Web Based Multi-task Support For Control Management System - A central controlled distributed scalable virtual machine (“CCDSVM”) of the present invention can be expanded across network domain such as LAN, WAN, Intranet and Internet. A larger number of computing systems (computing devices) in the CCDSVM can be organized into multiple groups (service pools) within a multi-layered hierarchy. The CCDSVM includes at least a top level control computing device to control and organize a management pool that includes a plurality of middle level control computing devices, where each middle control computing device can control a corresponding service pool of a plurality of computing devices. Therefore, the CCDSVM can provide a plurality of users, each with different credential and privilege, web based accessing the CCDSVM at different levels. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120179796 | ROUTING AND SERVICE PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT IN AN APPLICATION ACCELERATION ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed are a system, a method and an apparatus of reduction of routing and service performance management in an application acceleration environment. In one embodiment, a system includes a branch site that includes a branch client. In addition, the system includes a headquarters site that includes a headquarters server. The headquarters site including a headquarters server includes the branch site. The headquarters site is communicatively coupled over a link via transmission media. The link is identified through a link identifier. The headquarters site including a headquarters server also includes the branch client and the headquarters server being communicatively coupled over a network connection via the transmission media. The network connection is identified through a connection identifier. The system also includes a first point of presence (POP) communicatively coupled with the branch site over a first segment of the link. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179797 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PROVIDING HIERARCHICAL MULTI-PATH FAULT-TOLERANT PROPAGATIVE PROVISIONING - A method for provisioning networked servers includes virtually linking networked servers in hierarchical layers to form a virtual tree structure. The virtual tree structure including a plurality of nodes corresponding to the networked servers. The plurality of nodes including a root node in a top layer and at least two nodes in a second layer. The root node linked directly or indirectly to at least two terminal nodes in one or more lower layers of the virtual tree structure in a node-to-node manner based at least on layer-to-layer linking between nodes from the top layer to the one or more lower layers. The method also including receiving a provisioning change at the root node of the virtual tree structure and propagating the provisioning change from the root node to the other nodes in a node-to-node manner based at least in part on the virtual tree structure. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179798 | AUTONOMOUS PRIMARY NODE ELECTION WITHIN A VIRTUAL INPUT/OUTPUT SERVER CLUSTER - In a data processing system having a plurality of virtual input/output servers (VIOSes) configured within a VIOS cluster, a method, data processing system and computer program product provide for autonomous election of a primary node within a virtual input/output server (VIOS) cluster. A first VIOS performs the functions of: detecting that a primary node is required for the VIOS cluster; and autonomously initiating an election process to elect a next primary node from among the VIOSes within the VIOS cluster. When the first VIOS meets the pre-established requirements for becoming a primary node, the first VIOS obtains a lock on a primary node ID field within a VIOS database (DB) and then initiates a primary node commit process to assign the first VIOS as the primary node. The first VIOS issues a notification to the VIOS cluster to notify the other VIOSes that a primary node has been elected. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179799 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SELECTION INTERFACE BY QUEUE AND WORKLOAD FOR STORAGE OPERATION - A method selects an interface in a storage subsystem for processing storage operations, each interface associated with a corresponding processor. A management server has plural providers, each for executing storage operations on one of the processors via the corresponding interface. The method comprises: collecting information on status of each of the providers; based on the status of each provider, determining an operational characteristic of operation time as a function of a number of operational units for each provider; comparing the operational characteristics of the providers; for a given number of operational units in the storage operations to be processed, selecting from among the providers one provider which has the lowest operation time for the given number of operational units; and identifying the interface based on the selected provider to be used for executing the storage operations via the identified interface on the corresponding processor. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179800 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VARIABLE-SIZE TABLE CONSTRUCTION APPLIED TO A TABLE-LOOKUP APPROACH FOR LOAD-SPREADING IN FORWARDING DATA IN A NETWORK - A network element disposed in a network, where the network element implements a process to manage load distribution across a plurality of network interfaces of the network. The network element redirects traffic flow directed toward the plurality of network interfaces in response to changes in configuration of the plurality of network interfaces, where each traffic flow is a set of protocol data units (PDUs), having an ordered delivery requirement, and where the PDUs are transmitted across the network between a source node and a destination node. The redirection process minimizes data traffic flow disruption when the load distribution is determined using a set of load distribution tables instead of a hashing algorithm. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179801 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCTION OF MOBILE NETWORK TRAFFIC USED FOR DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM (DNS) QUERIES - Systems and methods for reduction of mobile network traffic used for domain name system (DNS) queries are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method, which may be implemented on a system, includes, querying, cached DNS entries in a local cache on a mobile device for a host name associated with an outgoing DNS query from the mobile device or providing a matching cached DNS entry as a response to the outgoing DNS query without accessing the wireless network. The matching cached DNS entry can be invalidated in the local cache when a proxy remote from the mobile device detects a changed DNS response for the outgoing DNS query. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179802 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING CLOUD SERVICES INTO THE CUSTOMER PREMISE - A cloud extension agent can be provided on a customer premise for interfacing, via an outbound secure connection, cloud based services. The cloud extension agent can reach the cloud based services through existing firewall infrastructure, thereby providing simple, secure deployment. Furthermore, the secure connection can enable substantially real-time communication with a cloud service to provide web-based, substantially real time control or management of resources on the customer premises via the cloud extension agent. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179803 | ENHANCING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL TO PROVIDE MULTIHOMING SUPPORT - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for enhancing a network-based IP mobility management protocol to provide multihoming support, said method including providing multihoming support based on multihoming group information, said information identifying a group of interfaces of a Mobile Node MN to be managed by a Local Mobility Anchor LMA on a Mobile Access Gateway MAG demand under a same mobility session. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179804 | MANAGEMENT METHOD OF COMPUTER SYSTEM, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - The system includes a PCI switch connecting a plurality of computers via a PCI interface; and a management server which controls assignment of PCI devices and computers connected to the PCI switch. The PCI switch reports an addition or change of a PCI device to the management server. The management server obtains basic information for the PCI device upon receipt of the report, determines an assignment state of the PCI device to either occupation or sharing, and instructs the PCI switch to assign the PCI device to the management server in the determined assignment state. The management server reads a driver of the PCI device connected through the PCI switch, and obtains detailed information of the PCI device through the driver. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179805 | DATA PROCESSING ENVIRONMENT CHANGE MANAGEMENT METHODS AND APPARATUSES - An apparatus is provided with a change management module adapted to manage making changes to a data processing device of a data processing environment. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179806 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD - A network management system which is capable of easily identifying devices, and enhancing the operability of a device management application used by a manager. The network management system includes devices, and a server connected to the devices via a network. The server is configured to be capable of communicating with the devices by SNMPv | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179807 | Clearing SCSI Reservations for Non-Detectable Initiators for Extended Duration - A method, system and computer-usable medium are disclosed for managing storage system resources in a storage area network (SAN). A target data storage server registers itself within a storage area network (SAN) fabric to receive a Registered State Change Notification (RSCN) should a SCSI initiator become inactive. A SCSI initiator then requests reservation of a target LUN. In response, the target data server reserves the LUN for use by the SCSI initiator. If a RSCN is received by the target data storage server, then a GID_PN server request, which comprises the unique identifier of SCSI initiator, is generated after a predetermined time interval and a SAN fabric name server. If the name server's response to the GID_PN server request is positive, then the SCSI initiator was detected as being active and the target data storage server keeps the reservation for the LUN active for the SCSI initiator. Otherwise, the reservation for the LUN is released for use by other SCSI initiators. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179808 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR APPLICATION SCOPE MANAGEMENT - An Application Scope Platform and a method for enabling communication between a Web Application, which is adapted to run on a first Processor of a User Device, and which is being accessible via a Web Client of the User Device, and an Application Scope, which is executable on the Application Scope Platform. The Application Scope Platform comprises a Process Manager, adapted to create and manage an event triggered Application Scope, a Web Server and a Communication Interface adapted to enable the Web Application to communicate with the Application Scope Platform via said Web Client. The Application Scope Platform being adapted to run on a second Processor, and to communicate with the Web Application, which is an Application Scope enabled Web Application, irrespective of the state of the Processor, the Web Client and/or said Web Application. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120185576 | Method and Apparatus for Acquiring Machine Type Communication Device Group Identification - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for acquiring machine type communication device group identification. This method comprises: acquiring the MTC device group identification from a user database by a mobility management network element after the user database subscribes to the MTC device group identification. With the present invention, the problem for transmitting the MTC device group identification in the network in related art is solved. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120185577 | MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK ACCESS REQUESTS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for intercepting requests from applications installed on a mobile device. The requests are system calls that establish communication channels for the mobile device. The requests are captured and held from reaching TCP/IP stack of an operating system executing on the mobile device. An intercepted request is aggregated with other intercepted requests. The aggregated requests are bundled together and released to the operating system upon the detection of a triggering event. The capture, holding, and aggregation of requests from applications occur when the mobile device is in a background mode. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120185578 | Managing Roaming Agreements between IMS Networks - A technique for managing an automatically established roaming agreement between two IMS networks ( | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120185579 | RACK-MOUNTED POSITION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICES - A rack-mounted position management system is automatically implemented by an administrative station adapted to a rack, which is equipped with a plurality of transmitters for transmitting positional information in connection with a plurality of mounted positions for mounting a plurality of electronic devices (e.g. servers). The positional information includes coordinate information representing the setup position of the rack and secondary coordinate information representing the mounted position of the electronic device. The administrative station is connected to the electronic devices over a network. The administrative station sends a request signal to the electronic device, which in turn sends back the positional information to the administrative station. Thus, the administrative station is able to determine the mounted positions of the electronic devices independently. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120185580 | PROXY DEVICE OPERATION IN COMMAND AND CONTROL NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention are generally directed to proxy device operation in a command and control network. An embodiment of a method includes discovering one or more devices in a first network at a proxy device, generating by the proxy device virtual devices representing the one or more devices, and advertising by the proxy device the one or more virtual devices on a second network. The method includes receiving by the proxy device a command for a first virtual device of the one or more virtual devices from a command device, the command device being outside the first network, the command being received via the second network, and the first virtual device representing a target device located in the first network. The method further includes forwarding the command to the target device via the first network. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120191828 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING REMOTE COMMAND DISPATCHING - Disclosed are an apparatus and methods of remotely managing a managed machine over a communication network. One example method of operation may include identifying the managed machine operating in a communication network and transmitting a connection establishment message to the managed machine over the communication network. In response, an acceptance message may be received from the manage machine. Once a secure channel has been established, the administrator may begin transmitting a command prompt command over the communication network to be executed on the managed machine. The management operations may be performed from a browser-based application. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191829 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING REMOTE REGISTRY CONFIGURATION - Disclosed are an apparatus and methods of remotely managing a managed machine over a communication network. One example method of operation may include identifying the managed machine operating in a communication network and transmitting a connection establishment message to the managed machine over the communication network. In response, an acceptance message may be received from the manage machine. Once a secure channel has been established, the administrator may begin making changes to the registry configuration on the managed machine. The management operations may be performed from a browser-based application. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191830 | AVIONIC DATA COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT ARRANGEMENT - The example avionic data communication management arrangement includes a common infrastructure having a first account and a second account. The first account is configured to receive and store avionic data collected from a first aircraft. The second account is configured to receive and store avionic data collected from a second aircraft that is from a different airline than the first aircraft. The avionic data within the first account and the avionic data within the second account can both be accessed or managed by an administrating entity. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191831 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CATALOGING ASSETS IN A NETWORK - According to one example of the present invention, there is provided a system for cataloging assets in a network. The network comprises a plurality of computing devices and at least some of the computing devices include asset description data. The system comprises a network explorer to send a request on a network address of the network to obtain asset description data, to receive asset description data from a computing device connected to the network address, and to store the retrieved asset description data in a data store. The system further comprises an asset description data processor to process the data in the data store to identify known relationships between assets in the network, to infer relationships between assets in the network, and to update stored asset description data in the data store with relationship data describing any determined or inferred relationships with other assets. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191832 | DATA SHARING BETWEEN SMART DEVICES - Data sharing between networked smart devices is disclosed. One embodiment of the present disclosure pertains to a method for data sharing with one or more associated smart devices via a network. The method comprises displaying, on a display unit of the smart device, an image for each one of the associated smart devices within coverage of the network and an image of shared data. The method also comprises effecting a change in a first image for a first smart device of the associated smart devices when the first smart device is targeted as a target device for the data sharing. The method further comprises communicating the shared data with the first smart device via the network when, on the display unit, the image of the shared data is moved to or from a domain of the first image of the first smart device. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191833 | SYSTEMATIC FRAMEWORK FOR APPLICATION PROTOCOL FIELD EXTRACTION - A computer-implemented system is provided for implementing application protocol field extraction. The system includes: an automata generator configured to receive the extraction specification that specifies data elements to be extracted from data packets and generate a counting automaton; and a field extractor configured to receive a data flow and operates to extract data elements from the data packets in accordance with the counting automaton. The extraction specification is expressed in terms of a context-free grammar, where the grammar defines grammatical structures of data packets transmitted in accordance with an application protocol and includes counters used to chronicle parsing history of production rules comprising the grammar. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191834 | CACHE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING CACHING SERVICE - Provided are a cache system and a caching service providing method using a cache cloud structure. The cache system may include a plurality of cache servers, each, configured to be independently driven, and configured to be registered to a corresponding virtual layer among a plurality of virtual layers that are managed by a management server, and the management server operating on a storage device and configured to transmit information about at least one registered cache server to at least one client that is connected to the corresponding virtual layer. The at least one client is configured to generate or update a server list in response to the transmitted information, and the registered cache server and the at least one client are configured to be connected to each other based on the server list. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191835 | Locating and Retrieving Packages Over a Network - A computer-implemented method of locating and retrieving a package over a network, including a management server, is provided. The method includes sending a package request, determining a subset of primary nodes, receiving a response including address data associated with the determined subset of primary nodes, determining one or more metrics associated with each of the subset of primary nodes to determine a useful primary node, sending a request for the package, upon receipt of the request determining one or more neighbour nodes on the second subnet holding part or all of the requested package, receiving a response including address data associated with the determined one or more neighbour nodes, selecting one or more target nodes from the one or more neighbour nodes, and retrieving part or all of the package from the selected one or more target nodes. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191836 | IP ADDRESS MANAGING METHOD, PROGRAM THEREOF, NETWORK COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of managing IP addresses in a device performing communication using the IP address includes acquiring IP addresses by a plurality of m |
